Home

OpenOffice.org User Guide - Department of Electrical Engineering

1. 46 Automatic 018 Cat 10 NET TTE OO COL LOST ee eee mere reer 46 Word Cary IN Oa ue veniendo en erai tegi rab xa D CURAR LINE RD Ur RU Ce PU NEA PUN SEE 46 Lite Si e o RR CH HP 46 Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode eter rn moverent rates 47 Usine the nies us EU M 47 Using the DOSE coop eh vein ra RE Prc ER MAU AD AQUA SR anie p RR RA Agde 47 Entering Test Anywhere on a PASE eurer pres interg rir Pda FERNER NIMM R dre E HUI REESE 47 Selcen and Delenn Txin Qd temi osedc n ln Bel S ratio E ii a X BURN 48 Llc ont characters oU DU INN DAMEN aM REM ne eee EM MEE 48 BIS Co aT css C E eaa E eA E eea S an EERE EEEE SE 48 Selecting text to delete with the qiie ooi a ce nce eee oe ence arena 48 Selecting text to delete withthe EeVbOSED soen eas eoi sendagn iio c y ta an ed 48 Deleting nonadjacent pieces DE TENE o ove epa n MR eee ae 48 Status bar USER uei peo enaa iee aa dte OU AR Pda nor rng Pbi UR iq 49 Setting the Viewing Zooi Facti osse eemper RO FORE RR OPER QUE FEET REPRE 49 Editing or Activatie TVS DES oneri noone ewan CEA HERE YER RU Upan RR UE 49 Applying V a MS usui vob tO S usi EUR MUR HAB OIN MEINEM aU M E A RUE 49 Keyboard Navigating and Selection in Wrote us eee reet cr eri V Ee pe oa PR ee 50 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 iv Inserting Special Wyre fe a cane en 50 Inserting Protected Spaces Hyphens and Conditional Separators
2. d 3d Discussio 3 3d Discussion z v b j peed objects V Objects TE Objects j ME Y Light ing Que 2 east Outline 3 a Orientation 4 Y Shadows Oudine 4 y Outline 5 Outline 6 Y Orientation es ElLive in 3d Y Outline lu 1j f 1 The preview window should have opened if not it can be shown by choosing View gt Preview The Preview window enables the user to view the slide layout including text background and background objects The Preview window can be at the window border by pressing the Ct x1 key and dragging the window to the position of choice 2 Now open the Styles and Formatting window either by choosing Format gt Styles and Formatting or with the F11 key or opening it if it is docked 3 The cursor should now be blinking next to the small icon for s1ide 1 4 Enter the desired text for example First Page This will be the title for s1ide 1 5 Press the Enter key This displays a small icon for slide 2 in the next line of the Outline view 6 Enter a title for the second slide for example Second Page 7 Press the Enter key again to get the small icon for s1ide 3 8 Now press the Tab key before entering any text This action ensures that the text entered here will be a subtitle on s1ide 2 9 Continue to enter more subtitles of the first level on page two 10 Pressing Shift Tab moves one level up Thus enabling the user to make a new slide out of a
3. sss 123 Deleting LABES oio veis abiti trente lu aa mat d s to ri NR SEEE A 125 Inserting Paragraphs Before Tables at Start of Pase sert Rr Porte R E ERAS EIU PERSE 124 Resize columns rows and cells sre die e AR EU MER PL VERRANNO A E Fi gt 124 REISEN Dont PEN NT 124 Tablepioperties im gnetar E oa Ea ph on eap dc RR ER 124 E dicun in Text DOCUMEN P MER Neri dc neem MUR ENS UP ERR R ot UR HUE 126 Fonn lae in Text DOocumenbs aio sco ebbe ca adiens ax bla e Rr RD Iu a FRENAR EORR E 126 AP ieee DMD Aa ns adc E FOP pit inu v me RR OU UII Denn a M qM qM M E ME 126 Dac Cal lation FGA eoi tiae R ad cro EE SERIA UNE iae Ea Eaa EEES 126 Hasc Potiebtodn im the SUBMENU sesiis eee en eee eo ey ere ee EE serene 126 uci MP 126 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 viii Statsfcal FUnCHONS ee eee eee ee ae nec te ene nee ocean eee eee eee 127 Pi Functions sssri a aaae e eeii 127 More De ined Values seriosa raen r EE O EET 128 Calculating I TEX ous paci d et si OU MER COGN GRAN tvi A E E REET 128 Calculating With formulae Located in Text eec meret Febr Forge mide ttd 129 opio M Los Rr RN Cm 130 Defining and using conditional text by exantplle iii ice etor mb tree PE EPI EH PED 130 Defining a conditional Vartible uiuis endo pp PR t Rr RR RN RARE RU boda PN cians 130 Type Reminder in the document and then add space ssssss 1
4. sssssse 28 Printing the current Writer document with black and white text 28 Primite PS TETTE TS CC COOLE LETT 28 Ba TOUTE TARGUS RENNES 29 Automatic eS coo op HM PARERE I eee 29 Checking Multilingual Texts iui era re RR IP pR HI eaa EEEE EE AEREE EAE Eei 30 ir sh deitas Le ECTS RTT LT TET OO OO LL 31 Excl ding Text From the Se PSU Liuius tenisaren dex aS dava iH arson aeons 32 tini SutonisDo DCCUQHE echa pub eee epee deep REM qM DDR RSEN Rend 33 Using AutoLorrect and AutePormidl es eer Reinas exer ree nO RU MPH QR AH a rid 33 Turning ofr URL Recognition by Auto DEEBOL eso rores ee entero terea erri hie rre enn 35 Undo URL recognition us esisiini ga ipa RV Ea AN UN ERE aS 35 Tubo ERE Acoperirea ee ee EUR RO VR OH EU bI RI UE ME 35 Other Auto Correct TunCDORS sioe ape via Ova HORE EOD Epl en REN RV Gb D Ra Ed EUR aA 35 Creating a Letter Template With the W120 csc veeesancuacexesnnensawaaeeasnsnadeoneteeessuansdieiesatsanngeeuananss 37 Find amp Relatori E EEEN E ESES EE EIEEE EEEE cea 38 Finding a Word ia TO oss e ra E ER ae 38 Searching for Whole Words Only siens tiec EUR aar ia aea ace PK XT Eia a ARA ERR 39 WEE E E AE A A E AE E E AE E E EEE E 39 Searching for Text yA sessista ansie 39 Searching Piana cogn UNT M RD E E EE a EE NO E 40 Current Selection QN a esee tbe rate a Mui vba EEE A ERa FO d 40 Searching NB e avec re er vp eeu UM RM fcn mo DUI UE 40 Searching for Text S
5. 51 Moor Horner arira oa sd peu RP MODE uni REN utm mS o cnenA tdt ER 51 Non breaking ETN onerous POR UO SER ERAN E EE a Ea E aa ENA 51 Hyphen em dash and en dashi issii eeosees cesi pep ive re an pede digsunsascapeanadeesdteani uae ates 51 Manual Hyphenation essc TET T D ELT 51 Emphasizing Et iet HMM E 51 Changing the colour Of Texten ve esi alas eau ENERGY SRL UA TM AE EM UR 54 I M Doo P VA 52 Dengue BOATS eeiedaiodumed hes s e aiae Bold ve uev istud a s NA NU pU CR A 53 Choose Format from the menu bar Borders tab ae oo ic ctsciecisaatesdieateipaveeenemioeesepiess 53 Use the Borders floating toolbar with Tables eee terere vermietet een 54 Superscrpts and SUDSCER L eei ieri citverd ron etxrtr ma agde buen emp eonun kitaa diane i EU DIN e E E 57 Applying subscripts supersctipts retrospectively iiuuies eese teessen eo roit rarius 58 Jg dun Uppercase OE TONER hss oim a RR HAN EFE E RUN NDA MEHR 58 Moving Text Sections in DOCOPenis ausa rer o hr ro Rn RH Ue a REN orit EAR Ea 58 Resetting Font Attributes While Tin seien pear rerit von id nint eee to VER tH UH IN FOnE PED REUS 39 Example procedure for resetting Font Attributes incertae trhtent erbe eos 59 Quick Formatting Using the Adjacent Paragraph Formal enira eorr rtr retro ret 59 Usine Sections OE 59 Sechons and Colmi os ssc areca neste scent arenasi TOTO OT SIR 6l etin SEDED
6. Toolbars in the OpenOffice org Window The Title Bar The title bar shows the name of the program OpenOffice org and usually the file name of the current document If a document title is entered in File gt Properties gt Description this title is displayed rather than the file name OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 11 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org The Menu Bar At the top of the OpenOffice org window immediately under the title bar is the menu bar Point with the mouse to a command on the menu bar and press the left mouse button The menu opens allowing one to choose a command from the submenu by clicking it The menu bar can also be accessed from the keyboard by pressing the Alt key The menus are organized into basic functions The Edit menu for example provides the functions needed to edit the current document cut copy paste undo changes and so on while the View menu has functions that allow control of the view of the elements displayed on the screen In other words the commands used for editing viewing sequencing formatting and printing a document can only be used when the document is open and active Active in this sense means that the document is front of any others on the screen If the commands should correspond to an object in the document then that object has to be selected In addition the menus are context sensitive This means that only those menu commands that are relevant to th
7. Untitled OpenOffice org L12 Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help ro Ba amp 3 7 Rr RRC ae era Dore f Ee Continuous 7 0 00 jm Bl Black J E m Blue 7 Oo R 1 Insert Slide Modify Slide Layout Slide Design Duplicate Slide Expand Slide 4 Slide 2 2 Save the presentation by either pressing the Ctr1 S shortcut keys and specifying the name and location for the file or use File gt Save as and again specify the location for storage Switching Presentation Views To the right above the vertical scroll bar there are some icons for switching views and for starting the presentation ma Drawing View E Outline View fE Slide View Notes View iii Handout View Pages Slide Show OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 261 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress To the left of the horizontal scroll bar in the drawing view notes view and handout view see the following icons m u mi gt Slide View Master View Layer View Navigation Arranging Slides Switch to the Slide View by clicking the respective icon above the vertical scroll bar located at the right of the screen Now the position of individual slides can be rearranged and effects defined for the transition between slides amy sphere sxi OpenOffice org L12 oiii File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help
8. Geometry kounded edges z Scaled depth Rotation anale Depth El Segments Horizontal Normals EEES al s sjaje This feature permits specifying the setting of the shader 1at phong or Gouraud to be used to display the 3D object Gouraud provides the best shading but requires the most computing time Also use this feature to specify a shadow for the 3D object and to select the camera distance and focal length OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw By using this feature the user can control the manner and quality of how the object surface is geometrically calculated and displayed For example interesting effects can be produced by deliberately reducing the number of segments of a sphere Properties of the 3D font such as the slant of the edge bevel depth et cetera are determined here 3D Effects Shading 3D Effects Shading Mode ord O Shadow 4l Surface angle odegeeco Camera Distance 050cm H Focal length 10 00cm H 321 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 3D Effects Illumination 3D Effects Control of illumination of a selected 3D object is easily done in a variety of ways In addition to the general ambient light eight additional light sources are available all of which can be aligned adjusted for colour or turned on and off individually Zv Illumination light source
9. OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 22 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Additional files can be contained in the packed file format For example Graphics can be found in the Pictures subdirectory Basic code in the Basic subdirectory and linked Basic libraries are found in further subdirectories of Basic Definition of the XML formats The DTD Document Type Description files can be found in SHOME OpenOffice org release share dtd Setting Tabstops OpenOffice org offers multiple ways by which one can set and edit the tabstops used in a document The procedures for setting and editing tabstops are described in Help gt OpenOffice org Help gt Index gt Search term gt tab stops and are quite complete OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 23 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Sending Documents as E Mail Single Messages Working in OpenOffice org one can send the current document as an e mail attachment providing that the default e mail program up is set up correctly Note To set up this feature select Tools gt Options gt Internet gt E Mail and configure the program to use 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail 2 When the e mail composer window appears enter a recipient subject and any text and send the e mail MailMerge As of OpenOffice org 2 0 1 users have the opportunity to use email to send messages to multiple recipients This feature also allows printing of these for del
10. backgrounds 56 97 132 154 158 177 182 214 215 225 227 229 269 278 288 289 291 303 313 318 322 335 345 350 352 367 392 412 bullets ee 71 116 117 118 119 126 127 buttons in toolbars eeeeeere 405 406 noeuc EN 120 121 148 149 command buttons sees 390 395 455 conditions for XForm items eeesese 4 455 hyperlinks eieter tette teet 53 115 line nurbers e eorr tret Rc EE Rer ripe rh 128 objects from Gallery 48 151 229 285 315 335 356 376 411 412 413 textures on chart bars cceeeeeeeeem 230 address books eeseseeeeeee nennen nnne LDAP NE a eese 381 384 agp M 381 address labels from databases eee 173 ADO databases eeseeeeee nennen nennen 379 aligning etate D EO PED RR REF RO FEE RENE OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Gellss sce E etu Lu Le d RUPES 202 ODJOCIS c 322 titles in charts sees 229 alphabetical indexes sseeeee 110 Pd SI DARE m Mulcd cm M 147 anclioES o eueete ERREUR ERR E eee changing 125 142 154 160 161 180 182 414 animating text 97 98 99 appearance options eseeeeeeeeennerennnee nennen 408 pplyIg iei t reete ep E tere ter taiwan languages to selected text sess 33
11. OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 404 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 5 Select one of the text boxes and right click to bring up the context menu Select Control ii Untitled2 Open KC org Writer Aa Contractor Arount T ER Ba ez E Se 8S s NAE mm om EH EH e se E E LINE KL NO EI ANE IO eaa OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 405 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 6 Adf fix Properties Text Box E EAL Eel EN E Light gray o o 1 E y Properties Text Box FE EE EEE OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 406 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms Properties Text Box Properties Text Box lU MELELEELELEL x 7 Use the Data Navigator that was mentioned earlier Under the Bindings tab the defined bindings should be visible and the default model should be listed in the combo box on the left side of the Models button In the Data Navigator pick a binding do a right click and select edit OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 407 B Untitled2 OpenOffice org Writer IA SHZIPIBSR veE i hy Heading 1 ha Arial el EXETENEDEUENREEIEZEY Y Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms Binding 1 Name Contractor E E Se
12. eeeeeeeeeee 402 Gallery 48 151 229 285 315 335 356 376 411 412 413 eSI RR 405 Sheet areas iei eerete rire erre tete ee Eve perse ire E be Ceo n 268 dij e EE 67 73 85 text sections eeeseeeseeeeeee een n ennemi 63 corner roundings esee eene nennen 333 counting WOIrds esses enne nennen nnne 4 uc DM address labels from databases 171 new styles from selections 67 71 85 table of contents eese 109 182 CUFTell CIS oreet Ee eet te e DRE E E format codes eee 196 205 206 216 232 number formats eee 143 205 232 C rrency TOHTIats oo rint ter tpe te EH RR ens 143 426 CUESOE tet so rere ctt p tese tisk EA allowing in protected areas esee 426 direct CUESOF siete tese te ree ct eee ve cte Eiei a e 51 in read only text 18 262 quickly moving to an object esses 105 CUIVES iwi a aH M drawing irte o Eiee EE 328 editing aite E anime RUE 329 custom dictionaries eese eene CLEANING od rep te eet eire uie ments 31 editing es 31 33 88 164 166 403 404 Removing Words From eee 1 custom hyphenss ceeeeceseeeeeeeeceeeceeneees 33 55 56 165 Custom Quotes essere 36 87 custom templates seen 40 436
13. 9 Choose Modify gt Convert gt To Polygon to convert the original rectangle into a Polygon with 4 points as will then be stated on the status bar Now for example a polygon down can be broken down into its basic parts by choosing Break from the Modify menu The status bar will then read 4 Lines selected Each ofthe lines can be shifted separately With a polygon selected click the Edit Points icon to modify points insert new ones and anything else needed in this mode OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 298 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Select Modify gt Convert gt To 3D a2 to generate a three dimensional object from the two dimensional object in g above This conversion uses an extrusion method such that the polygon is pulled perpendicular to its plane by a certain amount into the third dimension 3D object can be rotated and edited via the 3D Effects window that is called up from the context menu ul To create a 3D object by means of a rotation extrusion choose Modify gt Convert gt To 3D Rotation Object A polygon will be rotated 360 degrees around an axis into the third dimension By rotating a rectangle a little bit before converting it into a 3D rotation object a more striking object will be created While these examples showed conversion of only basic objects such as simple rectangles imagine how much can be done when converting complex objects For example drag
14. a home sun so docs user guide my sphere sxi 7 E c E es Times New Rom 7 aan Bi U A 142 323 4 4 E Live in 3d vY Outline 69 Slide1 5 In the slide view change the sequence of the slides by dragging them to any other position in the presentation Long click a slide in the slide view to copy the slide using drag and drop while pressing the Ctrl key The mouse pointer will have a small plus sign next to it when dragging to indicate a copy Drag and drop is also possible between the slide views of OpenOffice org Impress documents OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 262 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress If the context menu of a selected slide is called up the Show Hide Slide command will be seen One can use this command to temporarily remove the current slide from the presentation without deleting it from the actual document A slide that is not shown in the presentation receives a name highlighted in gray Incorporating Slide Show Effects In the Slide View mode define transition effects to precede the display of each slide 1 Click on the second slide once to select it 2 On the object bar under Transition select Automatic and enter the desired display time for the first slide for example 00 01 00 That means that the second slide will be displayed for one minute 3 Select a desired effect from the Effects list on the object bar 4 Click the small button to the l
15. i tt gilB4 m Rooms mc 4 C EH EH eee 72 2 d a ca TF E 8 In this dialogue select the settings needed For this example these are Decimal as the Data Type and that data entry is mandatory Edit Binding Iv mi a mi Li OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 408 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 9 Now deselect Design mode so that the form may be tested in Run mode File Edit view Insert Format Table Tools Window Help x EB SAF ESO VE see o S88 v MOHBTQIO Ta oe B U Z SSE ee A B O Pme O Modes gt Instance 1 Submissions Bindings BHA Binding 1 Name 5 S 2 Amount Contractor Name BHL 7 2 a a a o B E z z Desi mE off z ae eenen Se I Be E Fe amp ENAS re e 2 gigi se eng EMT Default 72 INSRT STD HYP 1 26 0 16 15 2 17 x 0 49 10 Enter data in the fields Note in the graphic below the red frame and the error message indicate that the fAMount fields is mandatory and must filled in fS Untitled2 OpenOffice org Writer JE xl File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help AEE kd EEE G io e aE vi a TI E fal Wr e amp m Binding 1 Name x5 Binding 2 Amount Contractor I 4 value is required Instances P De S B So LE E LB LR Hol etg Iz s m Go DM ER oes n RS RO Page 1 1 Def
16. TODS etos wes evans ete e DURO Eee E 188 number formats 212 options 8 9 13 17 19 20 21 22 23 25 27 28 29 31 33 40 91 120 145 146 150 164 165 166 185 186 196 199 205 209 212 213 215 225 263 264 265 268 276 293 310 313 325 358 369 407 408 410 422 426 431 437 Diu pcm EES 21 templates eso mee edet m e eS 83 MIAINETII E E ET 13 358 408 a SUni AT arrowheads and other line ends 327 COLOUES Saxe atiieic ceci Ure RI R ORE EC QN 3477 348 349 conditions esses 55 138 139 140 212 269 line styles iens 58 100 104 302 367 PASS styl s ecc teet mte ber eee t Ee PR EEXEES 177 table borders esee 58 59 deleting is an eed CAPUONS e Ee 148 datapilot tables 2 5 ied tete 245 decimal place ierit trt emeret dedos 212 POOTNOLES i ii Ed eter a orte Ma GRE Beso E 160 hyperlink cH 37 TCOMNS csccccccceeesesssccecesensececcecesseeeceeceessaaeeeeeeenes 406 408 indexes tables of Contents cccccccceessssceeeeeeseeees 114 rows columns by keyboard 144 SLIGES ccccccceceesssceececsesscececececsssscecccecesseaeeeeceenenaeeeecs 311 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 SMAP Ines inte ete shavencsns deavacesabesds 375 tables aede irte eec oc tei tQ 130 PADS EES EN TE E nA E TTD 431 oq EET 52 53 demoting hea
17. essere 105 tOOlDafSu secedere te ete t eoo o dee aee dee beet edt seio eod 406 WindoOwWs eeeeeeeeeeeeeneenen nennen nennen nennen nennen 15 48 Document Templates eeeeess 18 19 73 doc mehts eene etn neuen nene n nun Ene n n Ern e pne EHE n ee eene nud changing titles essere nnne 12 character counts cesses 424 t ioris PTT 421 exporting 124 296 298 316 345 346 385 SANOO Ani o eA 126 263 languages 31 32 33 34 35 70 101 164 165 166 167 205 206 325 403 439 cdlxxxix 428 master document and subdocuments 115 122 123 124 exporting to HTML seen 101 125 RAMOS esie n isabtadaud bent 148 merging M 421 Gradients and Patterns c ccccccccceccececeseccscesecesceses 352 Open in Design MO siscieesctintko tpm inai teste 389 2900 SUD iss aure Roni DERI HORE ARR ORE ADR AERE UA 339 ODE 31st eise n e aietes 17 22 Insertinpg a uates en Seen URS 150 344 organizing 83 120 435 436 Inserting a Draw object 414 page COUME e a 155 156 476 inserting in a number Fal eei E 149 printing 26 28 29 30 124 188 189 211 260 296 labeling tnter 148 312 410 Layer view 286 318 376 read only isses 15 209 Junii oi seestesn qutuadd onde ddnde 327 SaVIDB iac diciensoa tet ut Rn Us 17 20 21 linking precise points e
18. I IL ILL OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 104 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer c Give the index a title by editing the Title box d Check the Styles box e Click the icon to open the Assign Styles dialogue This dialogue sets paragraph styles for each level of the index starting at the top level i Select one of the existing document paragraph styles from which to generate each entry at this level of the index ii Click the gt gt button to record that style and move to the next index level iii For each index level repeat this process from step 2 f i or continue with step 2 g f Click OK g Mark the other check boxes under Create from to create the index from all the objects of a certain type h Assign names to the objects in the Options tab of the corresponding property dialogue i Click OK to generate the index from marked entries Creating Bibliographies Bibliography entries are often in the form of Smith Smith 1995 has also carried out research on this matter or similar so that the reader knows that more detailed information can be found in the bibliography under smith 1995 with the full name of the author title of the book publisher date of publication and a myriad of other possible terms Decide what details should appear in the bibliography and then use Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables with a Type of Bibliography to define how the entrie
19. Objects eeeeeeeeeevee In the slide view all slides which have a slide transition effect have a small button Click this button to preview the selected effect The Slide Transition window is described in detail in OpenOffice org Help Effects for Objects The objects in a slide can have various effects for example they can roll into the presentation from the left side the text can be slowly drawn on screen et cetera l eform Al these effects can be assigned using the Drawing View View gt Master gt Drawing 2 2p Access the Effects window 1 e with the Effects icon in the Main toolbar 3 Select the object to which to apply the effect 4 Open the Effects window OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 267 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 5 Select the desired effect 6 v Click the Assign icon in the Effects window or double click the effect to assign it 7 An object can also be faded in Effects button and additionally faded out in the Effects window on the Extras tab click the Object Invisible icon per mouse click The Effects window is described in detail in OpenOffice org Help can Hidden Objects To select an object that is completely covered by another object click on its position while holding down the A1t key If several objects are lying on top of one another every Alt click selects a different object lying in this position Hold down Shift as well to click through the
20. urere triente xit ne eu Ries 3 New Multi pane M18 sesso peret Vni Ree ipd Upta ate d n ER vA EON EP HAE 3 New CustomShapes compatible with Microsoft AutoShapes eene 3 More Slide Transitions dnd Animation Effects ies rmi Ee E MRES I EPA UR ES DR UE eR EAT RN X 3 Enhanced Beg sipine sp R T a 3 New enhanced Database Frontend ui eee seine qisnianceruneimanaiieanpoawainaeunannne 4 Mail Merge UNIS a eee ene eo eee eee ene eee eee eee ees 4 Pa Word Count Fe sisis ison ieissa tesan EEEE OEE E EEEE EEEE E aE 4 Support ior Nested Agee oe e rin aR nen T EE IN E EEEE o E AT 4 Digital Sionat res SUIT ue eee e nma aa A Ran EE dp RR 4 ee ANC SY NT OQ ELTE DE ee 4 WordPerfect LC RITE TCI ETT LOT 4 LR now has 65S RUE ROWS CE OI E EO TS 3 Enhanced DataPilot SUDDORL aen nna pre ore Rt CORR ROM HERI UE HG ENS NIRE dU A FE Qut P RO Eiaa 5 MIELE ULIS dict cents nance voce ce Sas pve a coca td edn ee 5 Native Desktop Merragata batalla MON EAM QN 5 Floating T6605 a8 e eo cies Pda SANETI Er ee ence opera Serer M NE 3 Chapter 1 Using OpenOffice org EIGTA suu eio pleri o rien aaia io ai esa cu Rd bn 7 OpenOffice org Step by Step AG eodem trei P Sen EVARURE brutale a ePaper Fees bepeo vnd paure eudUUE a Tip ies M 8 Turune S OPERE OTE siiin PERI QE Mmi Dau RUMP eb MUNERE NER 8 Extended TIPS iaceo tice e eri ie eden RR n E n RR UN Dvd aln e DR nas 8 T rning extended tps on and 8 eee e
21. Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources System Address Book as Data Source 1 Select File gt Templates gt Address Book Source 2 Click the Administrate button to call the Data Source Administration dialogue see also instructions above Another way to call the same dialogue is to choose Tools gt Data Sources 3 Click the New data source button Data Source Administration ne at saree 2s Bibliograpny General dBase Tables Queries Links Name Eibiograpry Connection Database type fa Base bai Data source URL dbc dbase file D 5tar Office6 0 user database biblio r Data Source Administration ix General abies Queries Links Bibliography Mind Tr g 1 Evol contacts ibliography Connection Database type 7 Data source URL dbc address mozilla D Apply Cancel Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 341 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources 4 Under Database type choose the Address book entry 5 Click the EJ button to call the Data Source dialogue _Data Source Choose a data source Evolution address book LDAP address book Cancel Mozilla address book All data sources that are listed here 6 Select the data source 7 Click OK If LDAP address book is selected the Data Source Administration dialogue will display a LDAP tab page where one can enter the LDAP server and its parameters 8 Go to the Tables t
22. Iv ejeje css zm oreleto Ambient light jo Gray 60 m 3D Effects Textures and Material With these two sections control the appearance of the surface of 3D objects See Help for an explanation of the numerous possibilities OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 322 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Designing 3D Objects From Font Characters The step by step methodology described below is particularly useful in preparing objects that could be used for logos and other identifiers What follows is presented in tutorial form First Step umy_draw sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 Xx File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help a home sun_so_docs user_quide my_draw sxd ug e f v y Times New Rom 397 BiusA paju SKIN I amp T ER LUAM A 3 Z Z b Z Z g Z Z Z Z a Z gt Z Z i gt gt Z Z e Z Z p Z Z gE Z Z x Z Z im EEE tdi EEE k a m olr Slide 1 Ei HE t i i P 4 Heje e Penes c a be E vw 2 XNENEHEHEHNHES ROED HEN Ons BER EEE SERRE HPS TextEdit Paragraph 1 Row 1 Co uc 1 14 1 02 3 5 90 x 6 15 3696 1 Open an empty drawing document either using File gt New Drawing or the New icon on the Function toolbar 2 Create a text box containing a single capital letter In this procedure the letter P is used 3 Choose a character set for formatting OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 323 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 4
23. can now be seen Open the table container and click a table Right click the table name to open the context menu Choose New Table Design to create a new table In the Design view create the fields for the table Enter new fields from top to bottom row by row Click the cell at the far left and enter a field name for each data field Inthe adjacent cell to the right define the field type When one clicks in the cell a field type can be selected from the drop down list box Note Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type It is not possible to enter text for example in a number field Memo fields in dBase III format are references to internally managed text files which can hold up to 64KB text If the user wishes an optional Description for each field can also be entered The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view Table Design biblio File Edit Tools Window Help Field Type Description Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR Text VARCHAR 1 7 i This area is where you define the Hek Propermes table structure 50 Default
24. iii When printing is complete take the pages from the output tray and put them into the input tray in such a way as to print on the blank side and choose the opposite Page setting as in step 1 Repeat step ii 6 Click OK 7 Click OK Spellcheck OpenOffice org has an automatic spellcheck which can be active while typing or activated manually Automatic Spellcheck the mm Tile olichtoninebe darted off to the left and almost alleys h can lying in the middle of th way alc icy ness and suddenly stiffened it v the wal Spellcheck steps got louder and louder he s around Add he end of the line he thought pr trying i Ignore All sible in the dark was all that pla iro MEN alleys t he could smell the f next to him with a bafely _ alley ES a door swung Could this be the haven he d prayed for Slowly he slid tow more into the wall into the dark away from his enemy Wc The automatic spellcheck can be turned on and off by clicking the AutoSpellingCheck on off icon on the Standard toolbar With automatic checking enabled words recognized as incorrect are highlighted with a wavy red underline Incorrect words are recognized as incorrect if all the following conditions are met a spellcheck module is installed for the language of the word e this module is enabled the word is not found in the installed dictionaries the word is not in any active user dictionary Users can create any number of custom user dictionarie
25. 4 Choose Edit gt Paste or press Ctr1 V The formula will be positioned in the new cell and all non absolute references will be updated Copying a formula into multiple cells can be quick and easy One way to copy into adjacent cell areas is as follows 1 Select the cell containing the formula 2 Position the mouse on the bottom right of the highlighted border of the cell and continue holding down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a cross hair symbol 3 With the mouse button pressed drag it down or to the right over all the cells into which the formula will be copied 4 Upon releasing the mouse button the formula will be copied into the cells and automatically adjusted Where values and texts must not be automatically adjusted then hold down the Ct x1 key when dragging formulae however are always adjusted accordingly when dragging Now look at what happened when rows and columns are added Assume a calculation in cell E1 that sums the cells in range A1 B2 The formula to enter into E1 would be SUM A1 B2 If later a new column must be in front of column A the elements to be added would then be in B1 C2 and the formula would be in F1 not in E1 After inserting the new column all formulae would therefore have to be checked and corrected in the current sheet and possibly in other sheets Fortunately Calc does this work automatically After inserting a new column A the formula SUM A1 B2
26. 4 Click OK upon making a choice OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 124 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 5 Tables can be designed with even greater impact using thematically appropriate backgrounds While background colours and graphics are always inserted behind text and values in a table graphics and other objects can also be inserted into the table a b C Set the cursor in the cell where the object is to appear To insert graphics choose Insert gt Picture gt From File In the Insert Picture dialogue select the desired graphics file Click Open Click on the inserted graphic object and select the Picture command from the context menu or double click on the graphic object In the Picture dialogue various settings can be defined for the graphic and its function in the document For example define how text is to wrap around which will determine if the text should flow around through or beside the graphic object Users can also set a hyperlink which can be loaded whenever the graphic object in the text document is clicked Furthermore a graphic object can be linked to a macro and in so doing assign various events to it One could for example use this capability to program certain functions such as having a sound played when the mouse pointer touches the graphic object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 125 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Calculating in Text Documents Fo
27. CUSTOMIZING ETT events enne enne EA 133 396 Loy i 403 IDEnUsS eeeeeeeee nennen nnne nenne nennen ener eene 403 404 OpenOffice org 403 404 409 410 rel LoF D CERT 405 EDUEN aTe PAE EE E E 13 D CASES sesane earne ee aee rE EEE EESE E NER EREE AutoCorrect function seen 55 n consolidatinp eee os eerte 246 editing in chart 4 iem 153 227 evaluating cenen ee aau eet e EU ERREUR 240 Extrapolating iiiei i iecit ebria eec 191 Or DS diner E e e Aes Reader edades 389 AN COMIN EE ES 227 TeferencIn gii ei ans baa iiec rt rer rei GERE EXE ATE 194 sorting and filtering data sssesss 5 170 USER dat ai Ebert iesi 40 185 186 442 data binditlp iu HEU ee ec aad changing in Xforms sese 455 461 Data Navigator 458 461 465 data SELIG S3is cist ceccactuscthecetscntaeseecssce EE changing order of sse 227 229 data source browser 231 237 239 240 387 data source explorer esee 415 data SOULCE VIeW eee rte ee PRO REP RR RE ERE EE EET ER tat drag and drop ees 415 Opening ete rete tI RR Cere atn 173 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 data SOULCES sone eee terere terio exe Ehe ker P E ETETEN copying records to spreadsheets 237 LDAP SeNet x testen ene eet aie a 381 384 Registering aieo unosi eios
28. Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 3D Globe This section describes how to create a three dimensional globe with Draw in just a few steps When finished rotate the finished Globe using the mouse 3D Effects mejejo le Fas rl Illumination light source s vlelel CEEE n s e e s Ambient light cu Gray 60 J w To create a custom 3D globe first open an empty draw document insert a globe and then apply a world map as a texture to the globe worldmap2 wmf from the StarOffice collection is a good choice but there are others available via the Internet Then adjust the illumination 1 Open an empty drawing document by choosing File gt New gt Drawing 2 Open the 3D Objects floating toolbar Ef on the left of the Main toolbar 3 Select Sphere from the toolbar 4 Drag open a area to create the globe All 3D objects can be opened in this way If creating an oblong shape is preferable press the Shift key while dragging This behaviour for 3D objects is opposite to the way other objects such as ellipses and rectangles behave 5 Open the Gallery E The Gallery themes appear as subdirectories OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 318 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 6 Locate the map to be used If there is a Maps theme click the it and the Gallery shows the maps 7 Click any rectangular world map say worldmap2 wmf 8 Hold down the Shift and Ctr1 keys and drag the map of the world onto the spher
29. Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org Use this section as a guide on customizing the user interface of OpenOffice org This should be mainly of interest to advanced users of OpenOffice org Modifying and Customizing the User Interface of OpenOffice org There is much freedom in configuring menus toolbars and keys to suit personal preferences One is free to change Items on the menu bar These can be deleted new ones added copied from one menu to another renamed and so on Toolbar configuration These may be freely configured to suit Under Windows icons may even be dragged and dropped while holding down the Alt key to change toolbar appearance Shortcut keys as desired To make configuration changes select Tools gt Configure to open the Configuration dialogue Help also provides much useful guidance for configuring OpenOffice org Configuring the Keyboard In most instances one configures new keyboard shortcuts to enable a macro to perform a certain action on a document Other actions can also be given a shortcut for example adding all unknown words in a text document to the active user dictionary with a single command to shortcut keys or to a separate icon The following procedure is a simple example which illustrates how to enable a keyboard shortcut that gives this capability to OpenOffice org 1 First ensure that the following conditions exist A user defined dictionary is active The language of the dictionary has t
30. Choose Tools gt Outline Numbering to number the chapter headings that are formatted For example where there is the Paragraph Style Heading 1 select the Heading 1 Style from the Paragraph Style list box and the option 1 2 3 from the Number list box below it 2 Select the first illustration for numbering 3 Choose Insert gt Caption 4 In the dialogue that appears select Illustration as the category and Arabic 1 2 3 as the numbering Caption text can also be entered in this dialogue 5 Click Options 6 Specify the chapter numbering in the Number Range Options dialogue For example select option 1 under Level and specify the separator wanted for chapter numbering 7 Click OK 8 In the Caption dialogue click OK The illustrations are now numbered by chapters 9 Repeat 1 7 for all other illustrations in the document Numbering now occurs automatically All illustrations within one chapter level are numbered appropriately and the chapter level numbering wanted can be changed in the Number Range Options dialogue NOTE Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General and under Caption mark the Automatic check box When the button next to Object selection is clicked the Caption dialogue appears Here one can for example determine that all illustrations in text documents from now on receive captions automatically Defining Number Ranges Define separate number ranges or seq
31. Handouts Cancel Select an AutoLayout O WW EE EE Four Slides Display A Backaround A iler Es on Backaround Click OK to create the handouts To print them choose File gt Print and click Options to open a dialogue in which the user chooses how the handout should be printed Organizing and Printing Notes Enter notes for individual slides in the Notes view Access the Notes view using the Notes icon located at the right of the document window scroll bar Once notes are entered print them by selecting File gt Print then click Options The Printer Options dialogue appears Inthe Printer Options dialogue in the Contents area select Notes Click OK In the Print dialogue select the slides for printing all or specific ones and click OK Be sure to go back and deselect Notes in the Printer Options dialogue otherwise the document will always be printed with notes OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 282 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Note The settings in Printer Tools apply only to the current document For specific settings for all presentations choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress and select the Print tab Using the Navigator Move quickly from slide to slide by opening the Navigator function key F5 All the slides of the presentation are listed here Simply double click the relevant
32. Several objects at one time can be selected grouped combined merged subtracted and intersected Selecting several objects at the same time has a temporary effect i e whenever the mouse is clicked elsewhere on the page or slide the grouped area is deselected Grouping and combining are valid until the group or the combination is deselected using the command from the context menu or the Modify menu These commands can also be used to group together several groups add a combination and combine the results as a group or combination Grouping Objects Several objects can be combined into a group To do this select them together right click to bring up the context menu and choose Group Any and all changes made to a group have an effect on all objects in the group In particular groups can be moved rotated etc as a single object For example in drawing a bicycle first construct a wheel composed of a tire rim spokes and hub and then group these objects together This makes it easy to rotate the wheel duplicate it and move the second wheel to the appropriate position Finally draw the frame and the rest of the bicycle and form a new group To edit an object that is part of a group there is no need to redefine the group Use the Enter group command which allows editing any object in the group When edits are completed Entering Groups Enter a group by first selecting it either by clicking it or by using the keyboard
33. are used The parenthesis are used when it is desired to display grouping in the equation the brace is used to group the commands but to not display If braces are needed in an equation then the Ibrace and rbrace commands are used Command Input Field 1 2 over 243 1 2 2 3 1 2 over 2 3 1 2 2 3 Ibrace 1 2 rbrace over lbrace 2 3 rbrace 1 2 2 3 Here is a more complicated example Command Input Field 1 over 5 4 over 5 4 over 3 3 1 1 d E MN 4 1 ET OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 393 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Special Formating Of course there are many other types of groupings that can be created with Open Office Exponentiation Command Input Field 2 2 3 54 14 3 342 gu Subscripting Command Input Field 23 2 1 over 2 alpha 4 3 1 5 t4 Leading and trailing superscript and subscript Command Input Field 2 Isub 123 123 2 2 rsub 123 2 123 2 Isup 123 Us 2 rsup 123 9 23 Bi lsup 209 fe Isup 58 toward Mt mpi fe sr Mt in Isup 266 1sub 109 n Isup 1 In the last example the Mt has both leading superscript and subscript applied This requires only typing both commands after Mt Centre subscript superscript Command Input Field Formula 2 4 3 csub 123 2 4 3 ies 18 lus 1 2 3 4 csub mi pua csup plus lix ic 18 1 2 3 4 minus OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 394 Chap
34. as needed basis 1 For one or more selected paragraphs open the context menu and select paragraph 2 For all paragraphs formatted with a certain Paragraph Style open the context menu in one of the paragraphs and select Edit Paragraph Style a In the next dialogue click on the Text Flow tab b Under Hyphenation checkoff Automatically 3 To enable hyphenation in all paragraphs edit the parent paragraph style of all derived paragraph styles a In the next dialogue click on the Text Flow tab b Under Hyphenation checkoff Automatically To enable automatic hyphenation without queries select Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids gt Options and select Hyphenate without inquiry Manual Hyphenation For manual hyphenation place the cursor at the point where the word should be separated and press Ct r1 and The word will be separated if it 1s possible even if automatic hyphenation is turned off for the paragraph If a hyphen is entered directly Writer will not apply the automatic hyphenation for that word Let s assume the word Antarctica would be hyphenated An tarcti ca but this should be Ant arc ti ca Enter all three hyphens manually directly including the one between i and ca as is used in automatic hyphenation There is a quick way to prevent a particular word from being affected by the hyphenation or Spellcheck unctionality Select the word and choose Forma
35. in order to select British or North American spelling 4 Then click on Search If English language attributes are applied to the English words in the text Format gt Character Font tab Language list box then Spellcheck thesaurus and hyphenation will automatically be in this language One can assign a language to paragraph styles in the same way OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 156 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Form Letters Business Cards and Labels Write form letters design business cards and produce labels all from data obtained from a data source or that is sequentially numbered Creating Form Letters To aid in creating form letters the following section first gives some brief instructions and then detailed instructions Brief Instructions For Quick Results 1 Register an address data source in OpenOffice org if not done previously Instructions may be found with the search term address book in Help 2 File gt Wizards gt Letter to open the dialogue 3 Setup the template 4 Select the addresses for the form letter or enter them manually Click Create Writer can now create the form letter Fixed and Variable Fields Fixed fields are fields which are filled out only once i e when the field is inserted into the document For example if writing an invoice based on an invoice template use a fixed date By doing so when setting up the invoice document the field position
36. 2 create three Cell Styles 3 For the Cell Styles choose names that correspond to the information to be represented In the case of the employee list choose Sick Vacation and Present 4 Click in the Styles and Formatting window and open the context menu and click the New command to activate the Cell Style dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 248 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 5 On the Organize tab enter the word Sick and assign a background colour to the Cell Style by way of the Background tab page 6 Click OK 7 Repeat this process for the two remaining Cell Styles 8 Now using the mouse select the range to which to apply the conditional formatting Choose Format gt Conditional Formatting to open the Conditional Formatting dialogue 9 For Condition 1 define Cell value gt equals s s sick In the Cell Style list box select the Style Sick 10 For Condition 2 define Cell value gt equals v v vacation In the Cell Style list box select the Style Vacation 11 For Condition 3 define Cell value gt equal p p present In the Cell Style list box select the Style Present Conditional Formatting X do 1m cei value is fequal to Cancel Cell Style sick Help MV Condition 2 cei value is fequal to zxl Cell Style vacation J v Condition 3 cer value is fequal to fir j Cell Style Present Note The use of quotation
37. 6 Click on New Document 7 Anew document is now created divided up as wanted only the top left label needs to be edited and when satisfied press Synchronize labels to make all labels appear the same This button is only visible if Synchronize contents is checked on the Options tab Selection andar In vitati 1234 12 Cancel 1 234 Or L1 234 12 Help Additional formats 4 Invitatic 41 Or invisible M alue Mane Number Number 1 oe x 8 Enter the desired text in the top left label and format the contents 9 Serial numbering can be applied by inserting a field 10 Place the cursor at the point where the number should appear 11 Press Ctr1 F2 or choose Insert gt Fields gt Other a In the Fields dialogue go to the Variables tab b Select the type Set variable if it is not already marked c In the Name box enter a name for the counting variable for example Number d To increment the variable from one label to the next by 1 enter the following formula in the Value text box Number 1 e Click Insert then close the Fields dialogue 12 Click Synchronize Labels 13 Now save and print the finished document Printing Address Labels When printing address stickers for form letters that do not fit in window envelopes do the following 1 Select File gt New gt Labels to open the Labels dialogue 2 Select the format of the label sheets that will be printed from the dropdown m
38. Addresse ES IT NIELSEN 202 Addresses and References Absolute and Belange eos eoe b EPA DEM NU 202 Relative Addressing s trboo e nbn ue hende REV PAIR E ERREUR ERR Ud M RE RA 202 Absolute se Mirae SI METTE CET 202 When to Use Relative aud Absolute Relerant s ues eere rti toe etos 202 EA ea Dy Name o e UR DU AM Dep E rep M NS PM UR IRI ME 204 Recoguizine Names s Address is eoe der e te xir xa epu Un e RE E e dd ie 204 Only Copy Visible Cells av rse veiperean cee vv ace tei bt pP S tU wep vaeeonane PI t emi un dnd ed ERR REED E 205 Referencing a Cell in Another DOCHIGEDE us ooo paire RR resa se t nea 206 Using References Th DORRULEES eoo oHG ONERE NUR NN CM PEU EU DNE eer NUI DI eee 207 References to Other SUBEN uscire Ue sus P A FEL ERU RT UI pA A aep eU EMO Rb D ERE 208 Usine E cr PME TEN 210 Eos Chart TIGE oon dul vera vig bibe e Ei E tone eni bna e aider Agi 213 Editino Chart oreet FRU MM E EE EEEE QUEM MU PN EE 213 Adding Texture to Chart Bars ise iua iit mis enda a d v DR dU ad ad REA 214 Edine Chant Ais VENIM DEEP 214 D tabase Functions Di Cal sirrien REUS RR ir uni boca ip a tq ERR RU RN RR 215 chine Database 6112 eee URP PER tuba m eer ny EDDIE PDA re 215 Creating Records 1 3 Spreadsheet oe er e RERO RU E HET AV EXER E XU RE ERE NAE en EIER 215 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xiii Defining Database Ranges serere rcp rsir ood YaE Pu Rex ive Rad Pid aeaansa re NSSE T EETA Easa Eai 217 Sa Data age R NOES serores pde e
39. By paragraph a Select from the end of the paragraph before the table to the start of the paragraph after the table b Press Del or Backspace 2 By table a Place the cursor in the table b select all cells for example by pressing Ct rl a C open the context menu d select Row gt Delete Note Method 2 by table also works at the beginning or end of a document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 123 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Inserting Paragraphs Before Tables at Start of Page Occasionally a table will get inserted at the very beginning of a text document or immediately after a fixed page break and now text must be inserted before this table This is not difficult but how to do it can be puzzling Here s how 1 Place the cursor in the first cell of the table right at the start of any content in that cell 2 Press Enter which adds a paragraph before the table and moves the cursor to it 1 Formatting Tables in Text Documents A new table inserted into a text document can have the default format which means that the first row has the Paragraph Style Table Heading and all other rows will have the Table Contents Style Text entered in the first row will automatically be bolded and centered This section describes various formatting options that can be used to determine the overall appearance of a table Resize columns rows and cells Table columns and rows can easily be resized j
40. Calculating With formulae Located in Text If the text already has a formula the result can be entered into the text without using the Formula bar as follows 1 Select the calculation formula in the text This text must not contain anything other than figures arithmetic operators and any currency symbols Example 12 24 2 2 Hold the Ct r1 key down and press the numberpad plus key or choose Tools gt Calculate The calculation result will be stored on the clipboard 3 Set the cursor at the point where the result of the calculation is to be inserted 4 Press Ctrl V or choose Edit gt Paste In this example the result 60 is inserted If the formula is still selected at the time of insertion the result replaces the formula OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 129 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Conditional Text Fields can be used in a document to display text when a condition is met For example one can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters Setting up conditional text is a two part process 1 Create a variable then 2 Create the condition Fields F3 Document References Functions Doclnformation Variables Database Selection Format Set page variable Additional formats Show page variable User Field Invisible Name Value pee tA Close Help Defining and using conditional text by example Defining a conditional va
41. Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw The OpenOffice org Draw Window bg Untitled OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help Ewu B e cv mrE a 6x o 00 Il Black amp color Blue 7 m im Logsssd ESuedessc pest iecck B eanc seo Lonope ont ecco REIS ee AE 4 des Beeren 6 gd ERE 9 dose 1e 12 13 Yi Connectors __ W Graphics Styles x My fy ty a he Me al a fa Py Ma Ne Me Esai Nain g Teg fea Mey fop ea Teo Me Default Dimension Line First line indent e amp leMeE Fizik l Heading Headingi Heading2 v Recangies X nanga vii Rectangies Object with arrow i LEE 8 Object with shadow Es o Hea Object without fill T i QV Ellipses X w Alignment x af i eeeee ico H ale SHO AGS Oren V Arrange X Bh us J 1 4 3D Objects X n Eu All Styles w Car aos E NS T 2 A Navigator Xx amp EA V Insert x A P Frois zwi 4 T P B Aen a b i Untitledi 2 T euin def Do NStide 1 us rf wv KENENENEES Bees NAAN BEEBE EERE ERE RRR Re EH NSHENNEHEHHEHENHENH S H B ENBN ti 4 33 6 31 5196 Slide 1 1 Default Toolbars and Windows in OpenOffice org Draw The above graphic shows the various floating windows that enable OpenOffice org Draw Each window has a corresponding icon on one of the toolbars Most are icons are located on the Main toolbar th
42. Creating Presentation With the Wizard ioo ee err Pee DURO EODEM 254 Creating a Simple Presentation Without the Wizard rote mer tria eios 260 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 XV Switching Presentation SV WEIS es cessere rinn stets npe HE PREND pe E vU ex Da E RETES e UR EE ane 261 ZEE DUIS cucurrit atn haa lev v ep Oder Rv MR TRE 262 Jncorpotatine Slide Show EEC soe rap ito up ON rund PU FU ron eran Sere ere 263 Showing a Presentation ovde eripe ears Dac E HUP ERE GN an DDR REA HA 263 Editing Presentations ae oett abu e aan pta Eus Eene S Ms rSn uU Min dit pa mM HUE 264 Detme Buckerenuid COLDUER Lic woes eren ri ASI Sq er uh os Da san i i INR UR cH DON 264 Switebine Dae TOR boi pn DRE ND I eM M MEME 265 Presentation BESTES oe Sue vci S RR E SERE DU HA Rc UR AR b AN A eb Rada b RS Ree 265 Usine EL DIU ACIE E ee eee eerie ee ae aera eae 266 Slide Transitions Effects and Ami use eivee eite aperi extende eeen iiss 267 Automate SEE NM gree aos gst S RUE eae aus ve whe queri pane 267 Effects far Sts iassseienoce i a ade eda M ach dla eb etel at ad lli RE maaan 267 Selecting TT Cedi RESI ERIT TITO TITO COT 268 Tjdividual Present ODE aoo po RARE Mod uae ADR HD NAA ECHO US ERU I RE ORERN MER IARE 268 Exporting Prutms and Presenting HORIS nM ENRICHED FRE een estes oe 270 Panting a Presentation SIde user ra e RR FERREUS UEM E GS a NA EP AG ORO UO E 270 Exporting Presentations as I ue s eur tier EE IE at Dra Ribas tbt mA SK Reds unt MnE 271 Ex
43. Here decide whether to have two four or any number of pages beside and on top of each other To print two pages beside one another on one sheet of paper 1 Choose File gt Page Preview 2 Locate the Page Preview icon AI If there are more or fewer pages than desired long click the icon to the right of the grayed out Page Preview Two Pages on the object bar and select the number of pages needed for previewing 3 Click on the Print page view icon Clicking the Print options page view icon E opens a dialogue where one can enter settings for reduced printing 4 Click OK to confirm Printing in Black and White If there is a colour printer installed but printing should be restricted to black and white only use one of the following options Printing text and graphics in black and white 1 Select File gt Print This opens the Print dialogue 2 Click on Properties This opens the properties dialogue for the printer 3 Choose the option to print in black and white For further information refer to the help for the printer or read the printer manual 4 Confirm the Properties dialogue and click OK in the Print dialogue 5 The current document will be printed in black and white Printing all Draw and Impress documents in black and white 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress or Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw as appropriate 2 Then choose Print 3 Under Quality select either Grayscal
44. Set the font size to about 400 pt This font size is to provide a usably sized object that when converted to 3D the text takes up exactly the space that is drawn for the text independent of the font size selected 5 Draw the text box using the Text icon on the floating toolbar 6 Select the letter and then manually enter 400 in the Size field on the text object bar At this point other attributes such as another typeface or emphasis attribute like bold may be selected Second Step Select the text field with the letter and choose Convert gt To 3D on the Modify menu Modify the colour of the object by selecting Area on the Format menu Of course it is also possible to assign a gradient or a bitmap graphic to the object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 324 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Be SEEK View raat Format Tools Modify Window Hep Tools Modify Window Help E S Be a Ww Ww E amp E HIIS E 90 I Il Black E EL Jere Fereg T a GA T E c amp re m m B g g m olmi stide 1 RP Ea Ee ES Cr un x T ITE E RTT TPE EHH HH SEES See X BSEEEEES 3Dsceneselected 2 2114 102 5 90 x 6 15 36 Third Step Select the letter P again so that it can then be modified in a different way Click the Format 3D Effects menu item The options available include options for setting the depth of the object and the foc
45. The Style Concept in OpenOffice org Styles for characters paragraphs frames numbered lists and pages or cells in tables are always saved with the document If wanted one can copy the Styles of one document to another document and choose whether ore not to overwrite replace Styles of the same name One nice feature of OpenOffice org is that one can turn any document including the Character Paragraph Frame Numbering and Page Styles it contains into a template When a new document based on this template is opened all those Styles are available to the user OpenOffice org come with predefined Styles for all document types Thus when a new text document is opened using File gt New gt Text Document a new blank document is opened with these fixed settings One may add or modify the styles used with a document as work progresses and if desired this document can be turned into a default template by saving it via File gt Templates gt Save Any Styles that are custom defined and are contained in the default template will then apply to all new documents created with this template The Styles in the Styles and Formatting Window Open the Styles and Formatting window by selecting Format gt Styles and Formatting or by pressing F11 or by clicking the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar All the Styles and Formatting window functions are explained in OpenOffice org Help At the top of the Styles and Formatting
46. The database ranges in Calc spreadsheets have nothing to do with the databases and spreadsheets that are addressed in Tools gt Data Sources and edited in the data source browser F4 In Calc a spreadsheet can contain several sheets which are manipulated Combining several adjacent rows of a spreadsheet into a database area is a way for example to sort them together Furthermore external files can be imported into a Calc spreadsheet for example files in dBase format The records from the dBase file would then become rows and the data fields would become columns in a Calc spreadsheet In the data source browser on the other hand the dBase file or other data source is edited directly and SOL queries for example may be performed Defining Database Ranges For example if a user would like to manage the household budget with Calc enter the records in an empty Calc spreadsheet and select the area as a database range Creating Records in a Spreadsheet 1 Open a new spreadsheet 2 Enter the column titles in the first row e g Date in cell Al Item in cell B1 Amount in C1 Then enter some information Item Amount 01 0200 Flowers 12 80 01 0300 Breakfast 2 48 01 04 00 Software 49 50 01 0500 Newspaper 0 60 01 06 00 Fishing T rip 22 50 01 07 00 Hat 6 25 MOA Sh t To format the sheet in the same manner as in the illustration above proceed as follows 1 Select row 1 by clicking on the row h
47. Using the Format tab define custom label formats not covered by the predefined formats To be able to do this the label type on the Labels tab must be set to User defined On the Options tab specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created 4 Enable Synchronize contents check box on the Options tab If this is checked only one the top left label has to be entered and edited while the remainder will be repeated identically 5 Upon clicking New Document a small window opens with the Synchronize Labels button Enter the first label When the Synchronize Labels button is clicked the current individual label is copied to all the other labels on the sheet 6 Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings that have been entered 7 Print the new document Printing Labels With Serial Numbers Printing lottery tickets or entry tickets with serial numbers on them is quite easy This is how to do it 1 Select File gt New gt Labels This opens the Labels dialogue 2 On the Labels tab under Format select the format in which to print 3 Tickets label tags or rolls are available from specialist suppliers and are often made from stiff paper with tear off perforations or as self adhesive labels on a backing material 4 To define a custom format select the Format tab 5 Check Synchronize contents OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 160 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer
48. as a brochure Two pages of a text document will be reduced in size and printed next to each other on a page in landscape horizontal orientation Both sides of the page will be printed most printers require that users take out the paper after the first half of the printing process and feed it in again n such a way as to print on the blank side OpenOffice org will automatically print the pages so that they can be read as a brochure OpenOffice org automatically arranges the pages in such a way that the text can be read continuously by laying the pages together fold them in the centre and stapling them in the fold To make a brochure using the current document select File gt Print In the dialogue that opens do the following 1 In Printer gt Properties make sure Orientation is set to landscape 2 While still in this dialogue set the Paper size of the document to A4 or US letter as needed 3 Click OK to close the dialogue 4 Click the Options button in the lower left of the Print dialogue 5 Next select whether to print right and left pages all at once right pages or left pages The following should provide sufficient information to make a decision a If the printer is capable of duplex printing choose Left and Right pages and brochure b With a single sided printer OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 28 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org i choose Left or Right and brochure ii Click OK then go to step 6
49. background of a header OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 148 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Border Background X Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Left oom i Bet ooxm i Top onm Ef 500 pt Bottom oom 1 10 pt 2 60 pt IV Synchronize 3 00 pt E E S gm Black Y Shadow style Position ojo io a n Distance 0 05 pt 1 00 pt 250 pt 400 pt Color Oo Gray E Cancel Help Reset Draw a line under the header by going to the Borders tab Under Line arrangement click between the two lower angle marks at the bottom of the rectangle This tab page can also be used to define the style of the line and the distance between the header text and the line Footnotes and Endnotes Footnotes in a text document can be displayed at the bottom of a page or column where there is more than one column or at the end of a document The settings are defined by choosing Tools gt Footnotes The following information is also valid for endnotes Endnotes are footnotes that appear collectively at the end of a document instead of at the foot of each page OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 149 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Footnote Settings X Footnotes Endnotes AutoNumbering Numbering i ii iii Start at 1 Counting Per document Before After Position End of pag
50. da 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Cross Fading Between Two Objects The cross fading function is only available for drawings in Draw and not in Impress documents To insert into a presentation an object that was created by cross fading two objects copy it from the drawing into the presentation document by way of the clipboard In the process of cross fading a transition between two objects is calculated and the increments will be positioned on the page In the increments the form orientation and colour of the objects as well as other attributes are adjusted uniformly 1 For example in an empty drawing document draw an object at the bottom left and another one at the upper right use two different colours 2 Select both objects 3 Select the command Edit gt Cross fading A dialogue appears where further settings can be defined 4 Click OK Draw calculates the increments and displays the results OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 302 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw This new object is a group which consists of the specified number of individual objects Enter the group by pressing F3 and then edit the individual objects The Modify menu in Draw contains all the necessary commands for working with groups and these functions can be also found in Impress under the Format gt OU Group menu command or in the context menu Further information can be found in Help 1 Working With a Group of Objects
51. floating toolbar p Ec Clicking the Open in Design Mode icon af controls whether the form document can be saved such that it always opens in editing mode or not If an error is received when assigning the properties for the objects contained in the form for example when assigning a non existent database table to an object a corresponding error message will be seen This error message can have an More button If one clicks More then a dialogue displaying clear information warnings and errors about the current problem is displayed Forms in OpenOffice org Tutorial In some situations a user may want to create a document that contains some fixed text but allows others to enter some items and perhaps take some actions on those items Such a document is called a form analogous to the preprinted forms everyone has filled out dozens of times One can create custom forms in most of the OpenOffice org applications forms that one creates without using the Form Wizard do not have to connect to a data source though they can see below If the form isn t connected to a data source any information the user enters is simply saved with the form This method is handy when sending a form to a group of people for them to fill out and return Writer text and html Calc Impress and Draw all support forms To create a form start with a document in the appropriate application Open the Form Controls toolbar from View gt Toolbars In some
52. follow this procedure 1 Type the line to be formatted as a heading and press the Enter key 2 Set the cursor in that line 3 Open the Styles and Formatting window For example by pressing the F11 key 4 Double click the Paragraph Style Heading 1 This one paragraph now has the paragraph format Heading 1 Ifone wants to know which attributes are included in this paragraph format click Heading 1 in the Styles and Formatting window then right click to open the context menu Then choose Modify to open the Paragraph Style Heading 1 dialogue which tells everything about the properties of this Paragraph Style When one decides not to modify this Paragraph Style simply close the dialogue by clicking the Cancel button But this Paragraph Style should define the corresponding modifications then close the dialogue with the OK button These modified settings will now apply to all paragraphs old and new having the Heading 1 Paragraph Style Changes can also be applied the to all Paragraph Styles that are derived from the Paragraph Style Heading 1 The Paragraph Styles Heading 1 to Heading 10 are all hierarchically derived from the Paragraph Style Heading By selecting Hierarchical from the list box at the bottom one can immediately see where a selected Style fits in the hierarchy of styles Simply put the style immediately higher up is the one from which the style is derived and the following one whic
53. fr Tables 2 Borges Mal Marchen Staas Diet Dusseldart Esser Heirs Borges Mal Borges Mal M nchen Staas Diet M rchen Canpel Dar In the Data Sources Explorer on the left open a data source by clicking the plus sign in front of its name This opens the subordinate containers for links queries and tables when a query or table is clicked its contents appear in the table view on the right One can create new tables queries and links by clicking the relevant entry in the Data Sources Explorer and right clicking with the mouse to open the context menu OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 338 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources AddressBooks Registering an AddressBook One of the many data sources in OpenOffice org is an external addressbook The contents of the data fields are then available in fields and controls for example An address book which may be already in use in the system environment is such a data source For example an LDAP server Evolution or a Mozilla Netscape address book In the templates and Wizards from OpenOffice org fields are used for the contents of the addressbook When these fields are activated the general fields used in the templates are automatically replaced with the actual fields used in the local system In order to call the dialogue by following the steps listed below Using the Wizard to import an AddressBook Select File gt Wizards gt Address Data Source This Wizard
54. frames be navigates using graphic buttons or with text links and whether a link should be offered on the home page allowing the user to download the original Impress presentation 3d Discussion Ta 29 v Objects a Lighting 9 v Shadows OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 271 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress In addition to the export of default HTML documents and HTML documents with frames Impress documents can be exported as WebCast or in the automatic mode WebCast export automatically produces scripts for web servers with Perl or ASP support This format allows a presenter e g during a telephone press conference with accompanying slide show over the Internet to change the slides on the viewers browsers Automatic export takes over the settings for the viewing time of each page in the presentation A default HTML presentation is the result in which the pages are turned automatically Sound reminders for turning the pages can also be exported 1f desired The sound files would then be copied in the target directory and played back when a HTML page is loaded Exchanging Data via the Clipboard Objects in a drawing or presentation document can also be copied to the clipboard and then inserted elsewhere The objects are stored as vector graphics on the clipboard using the following procedure 1 Select an object in the current document 2 Copy it to the clipboard with Ctrl C 3 Switc
55. officename interface or the underscore _ in SQL queries is used to represent exactly one character NOT LIKE NOT LIKE Is not an element _ the field name does not contain the of specified expression BETWEEN x AND y BETWEEN x falls within the the field name contains a value that AND y interval x y lies between the two values x and y NOT BETWEEN x NOT BETWEEN Does not fall the field name contains a value that AND y x AND y within the does not lie between the two values x interval x y and y IN a b c Note that IN a b c contains a b c the field name contains one of the the semicolons are used as separators in all value lists specified expressions a b c Any number of expressions can be specified and the result of the query is determined by an Or link The expressions a b c can be either numbers or characters NOT IN 2 b c NOT IN a b c does not contain a b c the field name does not contain one of the specified expressions a b c TRUE TRUE has the value the field name has the value True OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 356 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources OpenOffice org SQL Meaning Condition is satisfied if command command True FALSE FALSE has the value the field name has the value false false Examples of Usage Command Operator Result Ms returns field names with the field conte
56. set the distance from the left and right borders The border of a frame goes half inside and half outside 21 Click OK 22 The text animation will start to run immediately 23 To alter the size of the animated text select the rectangle again and double click in the centre Now select the text and apply a larger font size OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 91 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 24 A suitable text colour can also be chosen by opening the context menu and choosing Character OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 92 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Drawing Lines in Text There are a number of ways to add lines to a page of text and any lines that are incorporated in a document can have attributes defined such as the angle width colour et cetera however the user chooses Here are some ways to add lines Use the shortcuts described under Three identical characters will become a whole line on page 81 Apply the preset paragraph style Horizontal Line by placing the cursor on a blank line and double clicking the Horizontal Line style in the Styles and Formatting window If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles switch the view in the Styles and Formatting window from Automatic to All Styles Draw a line above beside or below a paragraph by choosing Format Paragraph gt Borders This function is explained in detail in the Open
57. to define any names required as shown in the previous section Note To have names automatically recognized names must consist of alphanumeric characters and the first character must be a letter To use non alphanumeric characters including spaces enclose the names in single quotation marks Where a single quotation mark appears in a name e g Jan 97 enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark Jan V97 This type of referencing is not compatible with earlier versions of OpenOffice org Calc automatically recognizes an area called a range of cells that belong together To determine which cells make up a particular range place the cell cursor in the desired range and press Ctrl butremember to use only the from the numerical key pad as Ctr1 Shift 8 the asterisk over the 8 does not work The range will be highlighted Only Copy Visible Cells Assume the user has hidden are a few rows or columns in a cell range and now only the visible cells are to be copied Calc behaves differently depending on the method used to hide the invisible cells and what is the intended action to be performed upon them Method Result Cells were filtered out by way of AutoFilters default Only the visible cells are copied filters or special filters OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 205 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Method Result Copy the visible cells for example with copy and paste via the clipboard with the middle mo
58. 00 Washington Smith 80 000 00 New York 175 000 00 830 000 00 689 000 00 1 694 000 00 Kissimmee 100 000 00 10 000 00 210 000 00 150 000 00 370 000 00 250 000 00 250 000 00 600 000 00 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 1999 197 000 00 235 000 00 60 000 00 180 000 00 200 000 00 50 000 00 320 000 00 240 000 00 80 000 00 160 000 00 250 000 00 20 000 00 300 000 00 290 000 00 120 000 00 220 000 00 260 000 00 60 000 00 Washington 80 000 00 240 000 00 200 000 00 520 000 00 2000 220 000 00 420 000 00 70 000 00 310 000 00 270 000 00 40 000 00 234 000 00 290 000 00 90 000 00 180 000 00 300 000 00 15 000 00 340 000 00 350 000 00 130 000 00 250 000 00 300 000 00 90 000 00 Total Result 365 000 00 1 530 000 00 1 289 000 00 3 184 000 00 224 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc What use is the DataPilot A table that has been created with the DataPilot is an interactive table i e data can be arranged rearranged or summarized according to different points of view This functionality is especially useful for Sales Control On the one hand it may be important to view the turnover figures at regular intervals while on the other it may be relevant to analyze sales figures on a regional basis Creating DataPilot Tables 1 Select the data range of a table together with the row and column headings 2 Choos
59. 378 381 VIS WIS o tiit cs E RE D HR ER ELO QUEUE aedi ges 237 data structure of Xforms eeeeeeeen 455 461 data values in charts eeeeeeen 153 227 database contents siccccccisiecissoctsvocssdesvestevderescnvestecdecseneneeny inserting as tables esee terrere 415 LI CTS RUITHCT SETS RR 415 database tables see reet eerte ei eR Ir Ee PEE EERUS ndi Y 411 CRC AUIS 1551 avsecsansnsnacesvecsagavestecmecs ERE RE IRURE Id 4 creating in design view sssseeeeee 387 388 data source browser 231 237 239 240 387 Men 398 dotabasesac eene eet eee IEEE 378 administration through SQL 4 231 395 398 399 402 por 379 changing list of esee 378 CODDeCLUDB asooo seien ee eere escis eese eian 378 DULUTH 4 Creating Bibliographies esses 113 dBase xxix 231 237 238 239 378 379 385 387 default filters eee 234 235 240 Designing Labels neseserai 171 exchanging seesaesseovscsdassbaiseenessesesiadvants 300 385 form Tilters c oet eer Petre EET Ee 398 np 237 JIDBG tum he Ui EE 379 MySQL noni ERR DOE 4 ODBC ditavit bees 379 385 Printing Labels e er at 171 172 produce labels s 0 50s idees 168 Teglsterinp iscse tee eU e Re iste inten 378 searching records eee cece ceeeeeceeeeeseceseesneeseeenes 398 Ud 170 234 stan
60. 73 NDA Wn A W N 9 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Select Main Text in the Styles and Formatting window right click to open the context menu and select Modify The paragraph Style dialogue window opens to display the definitions for Main Text Click the Footer tab Check the Footer on box Click OK which places an empty footer on the document page Click the mouse cursor in the footer area of the page to enter data Choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number If View gt Field Shadings is enabled the page number appears in a gray field otherwise with no shading To have Page precede the page number place the cursor in front of the field and enter Page Click the Centred icon on the object bar to centre the current paragraph 10 The appearance of the footer and its contents are now defined Page Breaks as Paragraph Formats In the first paragraph of the main text direct paragraph formatting was automatically applied determining that the text automatically begins on the new Page 1 This will also apply if no text exists after the manual break on the new page To check this for the first paragraph after the manual break choose Paragraph from the context menu not Edit Paragraph Style since this is a direct formatting attribute for a paragraph OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 74 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Paragraph gt Drop Caps B
61. A2 ROUND A1 1 EFFECTIVE 5 12 B8 5SUM B10 B14 SUM B8 SUM B10 B14 Displays the contents of cell A1 plus 10 Displays 16 of the contents of A1 Displays the result of the multiplication of A1 and A2 Rounds the contents in cell A1 to one decimal place Calculates the effective interest at 5 annually with 12 payments Calculates the sum of the cells B10 to B14 minus the value of B8 Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8 It is also possible to nest functions in formulae as shown in the example Functions may also be nested within functions For example instead of simply ROUND A1 1 calculate and round a sine function using ROUND SIN A1 2 Use the Function Wizard to help form nested functions OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 193 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calculating With Dates and Times In spreadsheets users can do more than just display dates and times both taken from the internal clock of the computer Calculations can also be made with dates and times For instance to find out exactly one s age in seconds or hours follow these steps ZNOW O A1 330061 77 Hours AS 24 19803705 97 Minutes AAO 1188222358 Seconds A560 Open a new spreadsheet Enter a date in cell A1 e g a birthday such as 1 3 48 Enter the following formula in cell A3 NOW A1 BR U N e Press Enter or click the
62. Al under UNIX where home is amounted filesystem and username specifies the directory where the file is stored Under Windows the specification is similar and could be file c name sxc Ssheet1 Al1 where the drive is C Printing Spreadsheets EB Clicking the Print File Directly icon in the Function bar sends all the sheets in the document to the printer However if there s a print range selected then only selection is printed To set the print range select the cells to be printed then use the Format gt Print Ranges gt Define command There is further information on this topic in the OpenOffice org Help To print the only current sheet go to menu File gt Print In the Print dialogue select the Selection option and click OK If however there is selected a certain range of cells only those cells are printed and in the column width as shown in the sheet If various sheets are to print simultaneously for example Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 select them before hand hold down the Ct r1 key and click the sheet tabs The white tabs are the selected ones Next go to the Print dialogue enable the Selection option and only the selected sheets will be printed After having printed the desired sheets remember to click the sheet that is being worked on while holding down the Shift key so that only that sheet is selected Failure to do this will result in all modifications being applied on all sheets OpenOffice org Us
63. Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Headers Footers and Footnotes Some Notes Concerning Headers and Footers Headers and footers are always linked to the Page Style All pages with the same Page Style automatically have the same headers and footers By using Fields in the headers and footers one can insert variable content in a text document such as page numbers and chapter headings Headers and footers are also available for HTML Writer documents However because headers and footers are not provided in the HTML definition they are exported as special tags and are correctly interpreted again upon loading an Writer HTML page Thus web browsers show the content of the header or footer as the text which was there at the time of the HTML export while Writer inserts the fields again and updates these as and when necessary Author and sender on the other hand are only inserted as fields if the user is the author or was the last one to modify the document Headers and footers are exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode If the content of headers and footers needs to change at different points within a document it 1s best to create different Page Styles and apply these to the pages Choose Insert gt Header or Insert gt Footer to toggle headers or footers on off for a particular Page Style These operations don t affect the current page unless the current page has that Page Style Format gt Page m
64. Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc When making a dBase import a dialogue open from which to choose the character set of the file For example in some languages databases created under DOS use different characters than those used in databases created under Windows The dBase IV format uses Codepage 437 US Import DBase files X Character set Cyrillic 005 052 866 Russian Western Europe Apple Macintosh Western Europe 005 052 437 U5 Western Europe DOS 850 International Western Europe 005 052 860 Portuguese Miestern Furane DOS 20182 8561 Icelandic zl Cancel di Help 4 After confirming this dialogue with OK the database file is loaded in the Calc spreadsheet document SR E d Be o Fe mmn E ml sem e ae ee NN 1 PRENFIRSTNPLASTM TITLE C 254 COMPANY C 254 DEPARTM ADDRESS C 254 CITY C 254 STA POSTAL CO 2 Ms Patricia Fisher PTH TV 2345 1st St NW Washington DC 20001 3456 3 wr Alan Brown Houseware Inc Controlling 123 Main Street Kissimmee FL 34742 2354 L 4 Ms Julie Clark ICM 5 r Peter Smith Motor Works Ltd Sales 1234 Amsterdam Ave New York NY 10025 1234 The first row provides information on the type and length of the individual data fields This information is contained as dBase header in the file When saving a Calc sheet with the file type dBase the first row of data is used to create the header information Before working on the data in the spre
65. Drag the text into the main Styles and Formatting window area and release the mouse button when the insertion line is seen above an entry With this procedure the paragraph style directly above the insertion line is given the new format Entering and Formatting Text Automatically This section deals with certain automatic functions that involve entering and formatting text Disabling the AutoCorrect Function Writer has functions that are turned on by default to correct many common typing errors as one works However this behaviour may not always be desirable Any automatic correction can be reversed immediately after it is made by pressing Ctrl Z Below is a description of the places in OpenOffice org where one can disable automatic corrections and re enable them ASCII Quotation marks are replaced with Custom Quotes 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect 3 Click on the Custom Quotes tab Uncheck Replace Sentences always begin with a capital letter 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect 3 Click on the Options tab Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence A word is replaced with another word 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect 3 Click on the Replace tab Look for the word pair and delete it Three identical characters will become a whole line When three of the following characters are entered at the start of a new paragraph and E
66. E20 as the cells in which the same sums in Euro dollars must appear 2 Click in cell E2 3 Enter CONVERT 4 Click in cell D2 D2 is now defined as the first part of the function The cursor remains at D2 in the formula 5 Enter sp EUR i e enter the text with both semicolons and the quotation marks 6 Press the Enter key 7 This completes the entire formula which now reads CONVERT D2 USD EUR 8 Cell E2 will contain the result of the calculation OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 187 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 9 Click cell E2 then the small filled square in the bottom right hand corner of cell E2 and pressing the left mouse button drag down to cell E20 10 Release the mouse button there 11 The formula is now copied from E2 to E20 And all references have been automatically adapted so that they always refer to the neighbouring cell on the left A Short Description of What Cells Can Contain The previous examples show that cells can accommodate different elements These are described below Text Text in a cell can be formatted and edited with most of the functions available in a text document For example to select a word double click the word either in the input line or in a cell If a different font or other attribute from the text object bar is needed the modifications apply only to the selected word A dexw 32O Pressing the Ctrl Enter keys inserts a manual line br
67. EAM pet 385 Using Custom Templates NETT EO TOIT OO CUN 385 Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros eerte ehe bane keses 387 Accessimie the Sample MOOROS eoi pi p ee ee INN DD INIM GM ee 387 Calling the Sample NACI uai GR HURRERNRENC UM SON Rex UC NR UR E nba MuR a 387 Editing the Sample MAGOS RTT TOT T OTT 389 The As srren eea ed putei atl nta RR DL RU e Gu 390 MN o cht aeatnes 390 Change ANCDarS T aiaa aaan 390 Caa E E E E E A re oes vate eye E 390 Read Dif TC 390 LCS e t M PEE 390 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice ore MSIE adeb p CORE ERR eR ERAN RAN FUA Ea aE 39 Formala EY ese oo respects ase eae Canes 39 Tool D i EENE 391 Command IOn EIU ETC TODOS SU 392 Command dialogis BOX onere oa Mode RH ennai naan area 392 Creating an Equation with dialogue Commands rrr terrere een eria sat bnk repa 393 Special diatur a E c eaaa EE aE E aeS 394 Expone ntiair e a Ea 394 DOS TNA os senda E E T 394 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xxiii Cente UN OTN vase escenaxine duns sevevsaticanie saransinadh EE EEES EEEE TETEE NESESER 394 Under brace Over Drace o EOS SE 395 Vanousiypes OF Brack ts osapaine a EE aa da i d 395 winter A E A E A O COO 396 Special Operatsion ro ad rx RR CUR oU iae o b ECL al A NB Ri HS E SS 397 LI 32s Li 1 2 oo oec nd eH ANA MU MEUM UB
68. Find other menu commands under Insert gt Fields Choose from Date Time Page Number Page Count Subject Title and Author Additional field commands can be selected or defined under Other OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 146 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Formatting Headers and Footers Headers and footers can be formatted with multiple objects where an object could be text a field or whatever The footer used in this document uses a table to contain the Title field and the page number field Tabstops can also be used effectively for this purpose The procedure for setting and editing tabstops can be found via Help gt Contents gt Index gt Search term gt tab stops Defining Different Headers A defined header and footer will appear in all pages that have the same Page Style However different headers for the first page or for even and odd numbered pages are often needed For example one may want the name of the chapter to appear on the left even pages and the name of the first subchapter to appear on the right odd pages Since headers are a property of the Page Styles users need to define two different Page Styles and apply them to the respective pages There are preset Styles for First page Left page and Right page which can be adapted to one s specific needs Take the Page Style for left pages this style might have different inner and outer margins while the style for right pages has a mirror image o
69. Guide for 2 0 200 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc September October New York 1 234 00 2 398 00 London 1 024 00 512 00 Auckland 999 00 888 00 Berlin 1 233 00 2 397 00 Total 4 490 00 6 195 00 9 682 00 In this example the sheet has been formatted with certain cell attributes in the Format gt Cells dialogue In addition the view of the grid lines and sheet headers has been deactivated in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View and a graphics file loaded as background in Format gt Page gt Background Note An image loaded via Format gt Page gt Background is only visible in print or via File gt Page View For a background image to appear on screen as well insert the graphic image by choosing Insert gt Picture gt From File and put the image behind the cells by way of the context menu command Arrangement gt To the Background To later select the background image use the Navigator Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet 1 Select the text for formatting 2 Choose the desired text attributes from the spreadsheet object bar Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet 1 Select the cells containing the numbers to be formatted 2 To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages use the icons on the spreadsheet object bar For other formats choose Format gt Cells Choose from the preset formats or define a personal format on the Numbers tab page Formatting Borders a
70. HTML documents may be opened with write protection enabled To edit a read only HTML document click the Edit File icon on the function bar OpenOffice org offers various filters for opening HTML files which may be selected via the File gt Open dialogue in the File type field pay particular attention to the area as the name Web pages is always the same Open in Writer Web filter Web pages or as default which does not require selecting a filter All the options of OpenOffice org Writer Web are now available such as Show HTML source Inthe OpenOffice org Writer filter open Web pages All the options of Writer are now available However please note that not all editing options that Writer offers can be saved in HTML format Inthe Calc filter open Web pages All the options of Calc are now available to the user Again note that not all options that Calc offers for editing can be saved in HTML format OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 242 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc formulae and Values as CSV Files CSV is an acronym for Comma Separated Values CSV files are pure text files which contain the contents of the cells of a table area of a spreadsheet Commas tabs spaces colons or semicolons can be used as the field delimiters between the cells Text is automatically put between either quotation marks or single quotes as selected while numbers are written directly Exporting formulae and Values as CSV Files 1
71. MEIDHEOR oco ua servers pecie bae ctl bod a i euo PR 40 ScarcDing for Special PORE o ose dq eee eee Pee ene we ere DELE 40 Smularity Seadh acies rca bre DRURURRRUUARUU I UXE ERR DPA GRIS Ru Pecan boe FM Mrd tg o PRU Rina 41 List of Regular e910 ane RR IN MR PU M DIN EDI NOM E QUEUE 41 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Wheto sa vescesescscesnsenceantssdoemcawvssaedamnstiereicecwwennenaeee 43 The OpenOffice orge Writer T BODIE nite n tenes Mea eR 43 Wy FUG P 43 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 iii D signing and TAMMIE csicsowsarsgernvavsn ert reges rti Mese sien r EEs aaae qudd pistes prb onte UE dE 43 Desktop Publishing with OpenOffice org Witter ssa rra peut lo eni ve er enters 44 CAO ge a E OO LO T DO 44 Creatine DEXG TIBE ice teer S MARO EH Ea Beton o Ci A keine 44 uri at TALI Ro sno ces senne nie iksi iE neare Ni EEEE e Ona EE Eta epee 44 Customizable Program TAG aea Ga er ER qi EAS SHE a E ER PO DAR Iu EEEE 44 lisi uso n M 44 Extensive Help Fulsbiong as vedo ada d ed ve Uta EEE Eaa Pup iR e Pla M RUP 44 The OpenOffice org Writer TV TROU toris uar ORE RE UPIE NA NEUEN UA SEHR UE IrKEN UP PIE 45 Wind ws of OTT ODE VY TEE sssrinin inne enrii Rn ds 45 Enc and Fornnatuna TOR ooi URP AA SM butt bul xu edu dor dim renee 46 Enteng New DSxba uei gan ee Rd Bol DA Gs tib VN Yaoi Er Rc n br PRR a iat 46 TE PRISE gon ato wk ec nc iustius Prades ete pene eee 46 Educ T
72. Make straight lines free lines bezier curves and other types of rectangles and geometrical figures in the usual ways The 3D functions can be used to create 3D objects such as cubes spheres cylinders tori and more Rotate two dimensional contours in the third dimension Choose colouring colouring with bitmap textures perspectives and or illumination to create impressive 3D objects for invitation cards brochures business cards and other stationery To insert additional elements into a drawing use clipart available in the gallery It doesn t matter if they are vector or pixel graphics OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 284 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Export Use Draw to quickly and easily create buttons and icons for Web pages et cetera and export them as GIF JPG PNG or other formats Construct There are many tools that Help create exact drawings For example define a grid to which an object can be snapped during construction and moving or temporarily snap new objects to the edges and points of existing objects The size of the object can be altered at any time by entering the required measurements in the Properties dialogue It is also simple to insert dimension lines which can be used in a variety of ways Integrate And in case it is not obvious Draw allows the user to add texts tables charts and formulae from the other program modules of OpenOffice org into any drawing OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 285
73. Navigation window has functions to allow movement in a document from one object graphic table et cetera to the next or previous one of the same type OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 97 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer For example click the Navigation icon in the Navigator window and in the Navigation window click the Graphics icon The graphic object type will be selected and the Navigation window will disappear immediately so that the user can access the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator window toolbar Press either the Previous or Next icons to search for the next nearest graphic in that direction In the Navigation window the double arrows at the right hand end of the toolbar may also be used to search 2 Another way to access the Navigation window can be found in the vertical scroll 2 bar at the bottom right hand side of the document window bud When the Navigation double arrows in the vertical scroll bar appear black a user can move through the document page by page Likewise if the arrows appear blue one can search to each object of the same category that has been last selected in the Navigation window Jumping From One Reminder to Another Use the Navigator to set temporary reminders that stay in effect until the document is closed This is handy when looking up or adding something later as it makes it easy to move between particular locations in the document For example Position the curso
74. Office Formula is active This activates the dialogue for special characters The Greek letters and other symbols can be entered directly into the command dialogue box by entering the name of the special character followed by for example SIGMA produces and Smu gives Symbol set reek P OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 396 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Special Operators The following examples show the use of some special operators Integral Sign Command Input Field int from 0 to infinity a 2 over 3 2 j E ae Summation Character Command Input Field sgn Yosigma cdot sum from SIGMA in PHI 1 over 1 aleph_ sigma 2 sgn o p 1 X seo o Product Character Command Input Field prod from i 1 to 121003 1 x 1 1 cdot x 1 3 i 100 x Hex over x 2 15 id x l 54 14 34342 5 14343 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 397 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Vectors and Matrices Vectors and Matrices are created by the stack and matrix commands respectively These commands are used with the octothorp to indicate elements and double octothorp to indicate new line An empty element is indicated by structural braces Vector Vectors are composed using the stack command as follows Command Input Field left stack A B at b c right A B atb c left stack alignr 1 2 right left stack 2 1 2 3 3 right
75. OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 375 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells when a cell is pointed to more detailed information on this change is seen in Help Tips when Extended Tips is also enabled on the Help menu Comments on each marked change may be entered by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit gt Changes gt Comment In addition to Extended Tips the comment is also displayed in the list in the Accept or Reject Changes dialogue To stop recording changes choose Edit gt Changes gt Record again to disable the function The check mark is removed Now the document can be saved and returned to the person who asked for the changes In a text document highlight all lines that have changed with an additional marking This can be in the form of a red line in the margin for example Select the type of additional selection under Tools gt Options gt Text Document on the Changes tab or under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Cale on the Changes tab In these dialogues determine how and in what colour the changes should be flagged where on the page the dash should be and so forth Version Management The File menu contains a Versions command The Versions function allows the user to save multiple versions of the same document in the same file One can choose to view individual versions of a document or display the d
76. OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 82 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Using AutoText Writer contains an AutoText function which helps users to use shortcuts and abbreviations to add expanded words to letters faxes or any other OpenOffice org documents To insert AutoText do the following Enter the shortcut for an AutoText item and press the F3 key There is a set of predefined AutoText blocks already in existence For example enter DT and press the F3 key to insert a dummy text which can be used to check the look of a page filled with text and other objects Likewise entering FN and pressing F3 will insert an OpenOffice org Math formula that is sequentially numbered at the right page margin Choose Edit gt AutoText M AutoText COS W Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing Insert Frederick Fexample Fexample Acme Close Name Elegant with Name Shortcut ELE2 Mint ind s El Business Cards Work 3 1 2 x 2 1 4 PEPPER Help ro Ca with Name ora A AutoTex Y Elegant with Name without Slogan mem Modern only Company i Modern with Name i ian E Business Cards Work 3 2 x 2 Path Elegant only Company Seen Elegant with Name Elegant with Name without Slogan x Save links relative to File system Internet M Show preview The AutoText dialogue contains a number of AutoTexts As can be seen AutoTexts can even contain graphics and tables Long click on the
77. Save links relative to File system Internet Iv Show preview So while typing enter a word in the text that exists as an AutoText name this sequence is recognized after the third matching letter is typed and a Help tip appears containing the whole name of the AutoText entry If the offering is acceptable press Enter to insert the AutoText Note Help tip sometime contain several AutoText names that begin the same way use Ctr1 Tab to scroll orwards and Shift Ctrl Tab to scroll backwards through the list to select the text wanted Exceptions in AutoCorrect Should AutoCorrect correct a word that is entered but this correction is not wanted restore the original word by using the Undo function This action will also add the word to the list of exceptions in AutoCorrect proving that AutoInclude is checked in the AutoCorrect dialogue By default it is checked Example By default AutoCorrect automatically corrects two capitals at the start of a word However in the case of product names and other similar texts two initial capitals may exactly what is needed Suppose there s a new product called ESt Under normal settings AutoCorrect automatically changes this to Est however by pressing the Ctrl Z key sequence the automatic replacement is reversed Undo and the word ESt is automatically added to the list of exceptions in the AutoCorrect dialogue Note See also the functions for automatic numbering of headings
78. Style Header 1 For example by assigning a page break to the Paragraph Style Header 1 every Header 1 will always be at the top of a right page If the Next Style is assigned to the Page Style Right page select Left page instead and vice versa If the cursor is positioned in a text in the master document the entry Text is shaded gray because consecutive texts are always combined to one single text New text can be inserted between individual inserted documents The new documents or texts are always inserted above the current entry However one can easily change their order with Drag amp Drop or with the icons Move down and Move up OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 116 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Documents are inserted in the master document as protected areas That means these documents cannot normally be edited within the master document bu it is possible to navigate through the document with the cursor and read them All indexes are created directly in the master document and automatically include all subdocuments we When one or more subdocuments are changed after creating an index the indexes in the master document should also be updated To do this click the icon Update as shown to the left on the Navigator for master documents and select the entries to be updated from the submenu Likewise references work in a Master Document and its subdocuments in the same manner a in subdocuments thems
79. Styles and Formatting window that helps manage formatted documents Activate the Navigator by clicking the corresponding item in the Edit menu In particular the Navigator helps one to navigate or move accurately to the parts of a document required and provides detailed information about the content of the document in an understandable manner In text documents the Navigator provides complete lists of all heading graphics tables et cetera in a document Simple navigation such as going straight to a specific place in a document only requires double clicking the desired entry in the Header list Besides simple navigation the Navigator can do much more in assisting users to manage documents For example a document is structured using headings through the Navigator a user can change the sequence and hierarchical levels of whole chapters and sub chapters quite easily by clicking the appropriate icons in the Navigator Navigator Oran fi a 9 PSB iil 9s Working With OpenOffice org The Title Bar The Menu Bar The Toolbars Using Floating Toolbars The document window Docking windows Y x El Ic hapter2 sxw active z The Navigator can be docked to the edge of a window using the procedure described under Docking windows on page 15 Jumping From One Object to Another in Text Clicking the Navigation icon in the Navigator window toolbar opens the Navigation window rart fi 34 me 0 Gee This
80. USERS If Documentation is being acquired by or on behalf of the U S Government or by a U S Government prime contractor or subcontractor at any tier then the Government s rights in Documentation will be only as set forth in this Agreement this is in accordance with 48 CFR 227 7201 through 227 7202 4 for Department of Defense DOD acquisitions and with 48 CFR 2 101 and 12 212 for non DOD acquisitions 10 0 MISCELLANEOUS This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable This License shall be governed by California law excluding its conflict of law provisions With respect to disputes or any litigation relating to this License the losing party is responsible for costs including without limitation court costs and reasonable attorneys fees and expenses The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Public Documentation License Version 1 0 Appendix Public Documentation License Notice The contents of this Documentation are subject to the Public Documentation License Version 1 0 the License yo
81. W3C XForms standard With XForms it is very easy to implement simple logic without any programming This simple example describes creation of a forms document which can be used to create and collect data sets of a predefined structure in order to exchange this data with other parties 1 2 3 User creates a new document as shown above User adds form controls and lays out of the document When layout is completed the user can start to work on the properties of the individual form controls The first step is binding the controls to their respective counterparts in the instance data A submission control is added by the user Normally the instance data is saved together with the document or to a linked instance By using a submit button the instance data can be sent to a server to an email recipient or be saved to a file Step by Step Procedure 1 Start with File gt New gt XML Form Document as shown below EUER OpenOffice org Writer j File Edit ETE Insert Format Table Tools Window Help nm g v li Print Layout Jv be web Layout Toolbars Status Bar Input Method Status Ruler 3D Settings Align Bullets and Numbering Drawing Drawing Object Properties Text Boundaries v amp Field Shadings Ctrl F8 Eeue Gi Field Names Ctrl F9 Form Design Nonprinting Characters Ctr F10 ce i Form Navigation Hidden Paragraphs dd Data Sources F4 Hans
82. a Bitmap format e g BMP GIF JPG TIG or in a metafile format like WME To do this choose Insert gt Picture in Draw and Impress 2 Open the Eyedropper window by choosing Tools gt Eyedropper 3 In the Eyedropper window click the Eyedropper icon in the upper left hand corner The mouse pointer will turn into a special pointer with which one can indicate the colour to be replaced in the current document The colour box next to the eyedropper icon in the Eyedropper window displays the colour the mouse pointer is resting on OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 313 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 4 Click the left mouse button when the colour is found which is to be replaced This colour will automatically be registered in the first of the four rows in the Eyedropper window 5 Now in the list box to the right in the same row select the new colour which should replace the selected colour in the whole bitmap image 6 If in the same editing step one wants to replace another colour click the check box in front of the next row Now select the eyedropper icon in the upper left hand corner again and choose a new colour Up to four colours can be replaced in one editing step 7 Select the bitmap image or the metafile image in which the colours are to be changed by clicking in it 8 In the Eyedropper window click Replace If too many similar colours were replaced undo the step using Ctr1 Z and decrease the colour tolerance in
83. aai Riad ea den e p EUER aE S DAS Dua eng 61 Editing SOHO eio uod rU MEI den a RU neous een 61 Formatting Text With and Without Styles erre ita ebria FRI RRR COR EM Reid va FERRE 62 Direct Formatting or Formatting With Styles seus notre entere eet teret raa oe Pn Se Rx ob es 62 The Style Concept in Opent FECE DER sisien ear ro RR DAD SR RU NND RR 63 The Styles m the Styles and Formatting Indos emere poa vr tede m du pire rede 63 Paragraph S69168 ois e tbe pri Ra n e Pea aka erm a Riad ce i ln P ev i Pd Ural abled 63 Paragraph Sibi NETT S D D AMEND M ARUUEP M 64 Character SP ee icici caer retten Vtde tede RH GN Er qc HR E EEEE ista ania 66 Imi rael Neibit MERI TOO T OO DOO LOTO 66 Numbering Styles sio bn aire PUER QR EHE EAS RENE FCU RAN OUS ix EN EE NER RU aE 67 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 V Creating New Character Styles or Paragraph Styles sese 67 Creating Document Doni eS suscepi eod Eere BROADER 68 The Advantages of the Styles and Formatting Window tte tree ais berets 69 Pormattms Multiple Poragrapb iooessecosa eee meta arise xa cod i en kei Na Rea RU 69 Changing Sie the Easy ruso eene Rp Feria RN ved remo RE 69 lass Styles aud Page UNDIS aieia unten qa Me uae adu RR d ERA NI RARO 70 Create Page SIN lOS i oc NEMUS tuU R E HM NNI EE 70 Editing Pise SENTO iso esed ees eA REGE I UR UE RU FE UID ER Von PU RDUM TU ERN dU 73 Page Breaks as Paragraph Fett 5 coc0y cuncivsseiauncahcuoxs
84. allows defining other attributes in addition to number formats which apply to the selected cells or cell contents For example font size and colour can be defined on the Font tab page vl Modifying the number of the decimal places displayed in a cell is sometimes required The easiest method is to use the Number Format Add Decimal Place or Number Format Delete Decimal Place icons on the object bar Dates 1 Likewise from the list of options the date and time can be formatted as desired The year in the date details is often stated as two digits Internally the year is managed by OpenOffice org as four digits so that in the calculation of difference from 1 1 99 to 1 1 01 the result will correctly be two years Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General defines up to which year a two digit year xx should be displayed as 20xx This means that if a date of 1 1 30 or higher is entered it will be treated internally as 1 1 1930 or higher All lower years apply to the next century So for example 1 1 20 is converted into 1 1 2020 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 198 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Formatting Cells and Sheets The distinction between direct and Style formatting holds true for cells as well as for text documents e g A choice between applying a particular font size directly as direct formatting to a cell or defining a Style to apply the desired font size Styles make particular sense for docum
85. area rather than the actual results With linked data any values modified in the source area are automatically updated in the target area The corresponding cell references in the target area are inserted in consecutive rows which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view Only the final result based on the selected calculation rule is displayed 2 Under Consolidate by do the following a Select either Row Labels or Column Headers if the cells of the source area are to be consolidated according to a matching row label or column header rather than to the identical position of the cell in the area To consolidate by row or column headers the text must be contained in the selected source areas or included in the selection with the mouse The data from the consolidation and target areas is saved when the document is saved Opening a document later in which consolidation has been defined this data will again be available OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 229 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Applying Goal Seek With the help of Goal Seek one can calculate a value that as part of a formula leads to the result specified for the formula Thus the formula is defined with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula Goal Seek is best illustrated by means of an example To calculate annual interest create a table with the values for the capital C number of years n andinterest rate i
86. automatically replaced provided that Use replacement table on the Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options tab page is checked One can add all of their most frequent typos to this list and have AutoCorrect replace them with the right text Also use this feature to enter special characters or phrases that are keyboard intensive to do normally For example C is immediately turned into the copyright symbol Note The fonts supplied with OpenOffice org include the Euro symbol If working with other fonts one can easily insert the Euro symbol from another font using AutoCorrect When working in a text document choose Insert gt Special Character Look for the Euro symbol and click OK Enter in the Abbreviation text box eu for example The Text only box should not be marked Click New Now close the dialogue As soon as the eu is entered followed by a space or at the end of a sentence a Euro symbol will be inserted On the Exceptions tab enter any exceptions for the two types of automatic correction OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 35 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Assuming the Replace option is enabled to automatically start each sentence with a capital uppercase letter and e g is entered and is followed by a lowercase q then the d would be capitalized So to compensate for this behaviour enter e g into the Exception list to prevent this type of correction Again assuming the Replace option is e
87. black If Value Highlighting is not marked users are free to choose the colours and other formatting of the content of their spreadsheets Text can be entered in a cell even if it appears to be too long for the cell Now try entering a very long whole number If the number is too long to fit in the cell the overflow indicator By double clicking the right hand edge of the heading of this column the column is automatically set to the optimal width The box at the bottom right in the status bar always displays helpful information In a spreadsheet this box can be used to permanently display the sum of all selected cells Other values may also be displayed such as the maximum value of all selected cells Use the context menu to change the value displayed in this field In case of an error in the spreadsheet this field will also display an error message Calculating in Spreadsheets The following demonstrates a simple percentage calculation that can be done in a spreadsheet 1 Position the cursor in cell A3 Enter the number 150 and press the Enter key The cursor then moves down to cell A4 2 3 4 Enter the number 16 in cell A4 5 Press the Tab key this time rather than the Enter key and the cursor moves to the right to cell B4 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 185 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 6 Enter the following in cell B4 A3 A4 100 When input is started with an equals sign this indicates that a
88. cases one may have to add the button to the toolbar first The Form Functions toolbar Figure 1 appears The toolbar includes an assortment of controls that can be put on forms as well as buttons for managing the form as a whole OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 347 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources El E me REC tri a s RE ee Figure 1 Use the Form Controls toolbar to add controls to a document to create an input form As with the other toolbars docking it is an option When designing a form involving a number of controls this can be a very handy feature The items in the first row of the Form Functions toolbar are controls The second row contains a variety of options for working with forms and controls Most of them are discussed later in this article To add a control to a form click it on the Form Functions toolbar The cursor changes to crosshairs Click and drag the new control to the location desired Once a control is chosen from the Form Functions toolbar continue dropping that type of control To turn off that control type either click another control to select it click the form itself without dragging click the same control on the Form Functions toolbar or click the Select button on the Form Functions toolbar Available controls OpenOffice org offers a wide variety of controls from the general to the specific Table 1 lists them 070741140 Use Push Button Jsed to execute commands Opt
89. condition Fields X Document References Functions Doclnformation Variables Database Type Format Condition Reminder EQ 3 Input field Execute macro Then Placeholder Last Reminder Combine characters Hidden text Else Hidden Paragraph Notice me e OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 131 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 6 Type the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box There is no limit to the length of the text that can be entered One can even copy and paste a paragraph into this box 7 Click Insert and then click Close Displaying the conditional text In this example the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3 Place the cursor in front of the field that was defined in the first part of this example Choose Edit gt Fields Replace the number in the Value box with 3 Click Close A Uu N me If the field does not automatically update press F 9 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 132 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Calculating in Text Document Tables OpenOffice org Writer tables can also include calculations and these can extend between tables For example there are two tables labelled Tab1e1 and Table2 in which the first cell of Tablel must be multiplied by the first cell of Tab1e2 and the product returned in cell A2 of the current table In thi
90. creating perfectly styled documents Text can be formatted multi columnar and have text frames graphics tables etc integrated into it The text frames can be linked all over the place even beyond page limits to create a newspaper format Functions such as making lines register true flow of contours through and around graphics and defining of characters paragraphs and tables in any colour complement the tools to lend documents a professional look Calculations Text documents in OpenOffice org have an integrated calculation function that helps one to execute sophisticated calculations or logical links Tables in a text document can easily be created in order to perform calculations Creating Drawings Draw vector drawing tool lets users create drawings graphics legends et cetera directly in text documents Inserting Graphics Pictures with different formats can be inserted into a text document including graphics with a JPG or GIF format The most common formats can be edited directly in a text document with the image editor In addition the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graphics organized by theme Customizable Program Interface The design of OpenOffice org s program interface is such that each user can configure it according to individual preferences The various windows Styles and Formatting window Navigator et cetera can be positioned as floating windows anywhere on the screen and some can be docked to an ed
91. creation of a customized template for personal letters write and print a letter 1 Select File gt New gt Templates and Documents 2 In the dialogue select the template 3 Click OK OpenOffice org creates a document based on the template without changing the template itself no matter of the modifications to the document Enter the text of the letter in the document Check if the addressee information on the envelope is correct 4 5 6 If this document is to be printed or edited later on save it and enter a name 7 Place an envelope in the printer 8 Select the command File gt Print and print page 1 which is the envelope 9 Place normal letter paper in the printer select the command File gt Print again 10 Print the second page If the letter has more than one page of text specify which pages to print under Pages Creating an Single Envelope 1 Open OpenOffice org Writer Insert Envelope On the Envelope tab enter the address info On the Format tab set Size gt Format to DL Adjust layout to suit On the Printer tab Select the layout that reflects how to feed On the same tab click on Setup This opens a new dialogue On the Setup dialogue select the printer and click Properties 9o GJ Ow Ur sb YY On the Properties dialogue select the envelope size in the Paper size dropdown list In this case Envelope DL OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 176 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writ
92. database tables without any knowledge of databases and SQL The new embedded Java technology based HSQLDB database engine allows to create database documents These simple database files don t require a backend database server like MySQL or Adabas D All information table definitions data queries forms reports is stored in one XML file Mail Merge Wizard The new Mail Merge Wizard will make it very easy to do mailings to hundreds of recipients The wizard guides users step by step through the process Different data sources can be used for the address information There are differences though from 1 1 x Enhanced Word Count Feature With 1 1 x it was only possible to find document statistics under File Properties or by installing a word count macro to count the number of words in a selection OpenOffice org 2 0 eliminates this restriction Now a new word count dialogue can be found in the Tools menu Support for Nested Tables With OpenOffice org 2 0 it is now possible to create tables within tables nested tables This increases the overall usability but also improves the Microsoft Word compatibility Digital Signatures Support Another new feature is the support of digital signatures OpenOffice org uses certificates stored in the regular repositories XForms Support OpenOffice org 2 0 now allows to create forms based on the open W3C XForms standard With XForms it is very easy to implement simple logic without any
93. dialogue for defining gradients To do this click with the selection tool on a position where there are no objects OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 315 35 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw In the Area dialogue click the Gradients tab This tab enables definition of all of the options for new colour gradients From the list of existing colour gradients click the gradient to use as a basis for creating the new colour gradient Click the Add button a In the dialogue assign a name for the new gradient For example enter the name UFO b click OK The name will appear as a new entry at the end of the list and is selected for editing Click Modify to save the changes in the new gradient The preview shows how the gradient looks Close the Area dialogue with OK The new colour gradient may be used immediately Interactively Defining a colour Gradient Colour gradients can be modified by clicking and dragging them with the mouse However in order to be defined interactively the object must already have a colour gradient il 2 3 Select an object which has a colour gradient In Draw open the Effects floating toolbar WF from the Main toolbar On the Effects floating toolbar click the Gradient icon Two objects in colour which are linked by a vector should now be visible OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 316 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw umy_draw sxd Open
94. directly above the Outline View icon to return to the normal view Changing the Slide Layout Changing the slide layout can only be done while in the Drawing View the first icon in the vertical scroll bar Double click the tab of the slide to modify and select the desired layout from the predefined layouts Designing Slides Designing a slide can only be done in the Drawing View and the Select tool N must be activated To change the font size and style of the title for example select it and assign new attributes from the Font and Font Size fields in the Object bar Borders may be defined by clicking the paragraph to which to apply the border and defining the attributes in the list boxes Line Width and Line Style To apply a uniform background and recurring elements company name subject to all slides click the Master View icon to the left of the horizontal scroll bar The default texts in the master view may be safely ignored as these are not visible on the slides The only text visible on the slides is that which is entered by the user Using the Text floating toolbar on the main toolbar a frame can be opened for background text Using the Styles and Formatting window is an excellent method for managing the appearance the slides Here is a step by step procedure 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window by clicking the Styles and Formatting icon in the Formatting toolbar 2 Click the Presentation Styles icon OpenOffice
95. do this by clicking on the Promote Chapter and Demote chapter icons The content of the chapters and of the relevant subsections is of course also moved To move the chapter headings without moving their contents drag and drop while holding down the Ctr1 key The Drag Mode icon only affects drag and drop behaviour between Navigator and document When using this function switch on Heading Levels Shown by clicking on the relevant icon in the Navigator to see what is happening in the document Other Navigator Features When one wants to know about the objects in a document the Navigator can be very helpful particularly in longer documents For example there is an HTML page open the Navigator tells at a glance which hyperlinks the page contains including any hidden hyperlinks However hidden hyperlinks will be without reference text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 99 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Indexes and Tables of Contents in Writer Writer documents can contain any number of predefined or user defined indexes For example users can have a table of contents alphabetical index illustration index and or bibliography Defining Index Table of Contents Entries The first step in preparing indexes such as a table of contents or other index is to determine which entries in the document should be included Insert Index Table Heading 1 Type and title Entry Haing 12 Type Table of Contents T Protec
96. down list 3 Click OK 4 Open the context menu on the function bar and click Visible Buttons to see a list of immediately configurable buttons for this toolbar All buttons that are currently visible have a check mark 5 In the context menu click to mark the Send Standard Fax button The button is now visible on the function bar By clicking on it the fax driver entered in step 2 is activated to send the current document Further Information OpenOffice org can be configured in other ways However these require programming skills that are beyond the scope of this document For information on this type of configuration See http documentation openoffice org OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 365 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques This contains topics of interest to advanced users of OpenOffice org including information on revision marking function redlining in Writer and Calc Copying and Moving Data Using Drag and Drop The easiest and often most intuitive way to copy and move data in OpenOffice org is by dragging and dropping with the mouse Dragging and Dropping Within a OpenOffice org Document There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag and drop Selected text text areas draw objects graphics buttons and other form functions hyperlinks table areas and many more can be moved with the mouse Pay attention when dragging using the mouse pointer The mouse pointe
97. e Ou b ei a a E aak EE dO M RR aiea iaa 20 Badtun a File Automatically see an ee run eripe FO P be ae neeagned eto ee aa 20 Saving Recovery Information Automatically Every n Minutes sssesssss 20 OpenOffice ore File Formats coc oeste HR ea poms NR cu ua M CA m eee 2 XML file format DOES eiiiai iaar EQ KO vU E BY UR Riu NR RU FR NL MUERE 21 Dp Pr hier XME file RANMA 65 vce eorcghs cee vesnceaneaseesenare ranestaadeesesneserderaederansectenemeaene 22 De Tiree i ot Ps TAG a iei dice eaim pene Dead is xn moan A ct 23 Seti TABUD S i ovn EN INDEM MENU E Ree eer Pern ee eran ME 23 Sende Documents as E Mail iier repre RRAR E CHR ARIA RR RUFI RR OU GAS M RA RU REA 24 EDICION EERNEE 24 li MUS ES a NNI 24 Pun ECOSION S ou oo p RR QUERN QURE DR d tte PNE eR 23 Displaying Print PROVI SVE aio diet de t e US RE REX EE REEL DIRE EA E EE P La bi RE 26 Reduced Printing of DUOCIHGnib soc uera Pen EST FO P EH TR A ru Tce 27 To print two pages beside one another on one sheet of paper ssssssss 27 Pont m Black esac pecans seee ee ENTE Eae 27 Printing text and graphics in black and wBite iae cocer e rh LH SEE bud EV etes ini vdd 27 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 ii Printing all Draw and Impress documents in black and white ssssse 27 Pintig only text m black add White sso secte reos race Ortus lea cg ve condat 28 Printing all Writer documents with black and white text
98. entry from the records contained in the bibliography database or from the entries that are contained in the current document and which can differ from entries of the same name in the bibliography database An entry in the document content can be identical to an entry in the Bibliography Database The entry in the document has precedence 3 If the required entry already exists as a data record select it in the list box Short name and click Insert If the desired entry does not yet exist create a new entry If the New button is used to do this one can define a new record but this will only be recognized in the current document If the record should be included in the bibliography database choose Tools gt Bibliography Database enter the new record and then insert the bibliography database entry in the document Updating Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents Indices and Table of Contents are snapshots of what is present at the time they are created Obviously there are occasions when these need updating editing or deleting The following instructions give the steps needed to accomplish any of the above tasks 1 Place the cursor in the index table and right click to open the context menu 2 Select the desired command a Update Index Table b Delete Index Table c Edit Index Table d Edit Paragraph Style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 106 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Note d Edit Index
99. etit ti neal min EET 53 pasting 53 126 130 137 218 300 414 418 PASTING OPTIONS eee ee eee eene 418 COIOFUS iiss cs scccsgctnatduscdetnscnectesd oonpascetcoonessceves cevadesoucnertany backgrounds 56 132 154 177 182 269 392 colour bar eseeeeee 13 318 347 354 CO OUES iens reete treten ore Cho ea AEA REL tens AES ROTAS Eas aSSIDPIDE 10 ALC As eiie iii eerte dots irnos Reo Eees 100 Cross fading sse 337 338 CUSCOML ccseeececcecececceeeeseecesccceceeceeueeeeneeseeeeees 348 349 ci peepee E E T 319 VNLT a AA 228 TOMIS EE 57 292 433 gradient eese 229 285 352 353 354 in cells esses 132 212 EODEM 452 425 IM c A 377 modifying 314 348 363 DW issGulis MIENNE 348 349 351 353 OP text iiie eis 56 57 99 433 Jua EC 227 printing in black amp white sse 28 29 printing in grayscale seen 28 29 Teplaetng ueste en erede ais 350 MEC 349 user defmed unie ende Ris 347 column he dets speret eroe E tree aeter Eee REP SE column header 170 173 196 231 232 247 261 268 415 ellc altering ordet of eerta 244 changing width and height 145 199 designations in Calc sse 196 display attributes in table
100. even be assigned a Style in the Character Styles list box under Contents Note Newsletters or newspapers require a variety of main headings subheadings and text wraps to make it easier to read In the Paragraph Styles dialogue of the Styles and Formatting window context menu it would thus be a good idea to create several appropriate paragraph styles go to the Styles and Formatting window gt context menu 7 click New OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 166 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Working with Frames A frame positioned over one or more columns can give the newspaper a less crowded more interesting appearance Such a frame can contain text graphics or even a chart BOREO Click the Insert icon on the Tools toolbar and from the floating toolbar select the Insert frame manually icon The mouse pointer changes to a small cross that is dragged to open a frame and position it over one or more columns in the document Formatting a Frame Put the cursor in the frame deselect the frame first then click inside it and enter any text or graphics The appearance and properties of the frame can of course be modified at any time Select the frame by clicking it call up the context menu and click Frame A dialogue with several tabs will appear which allows for example one to apply a coloured shadow to the frame via the Borders tab Anchoring Frames In the Frame dialogue click the Type tab a
101. first level sub topic The levels created by following these steps automatically contain the Presentation Styles title outline 1 outline 2 et cetera These Styles can be modified by having a new slide design assigned to them for example a new font font size and font colour These designs can of course be edited for example via the Styles and Formatting window s context menu OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 266 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Slide Transitions Effects and Animation With Impress grabbing an audience s attention using animated objects and interesting slide transitions is easy Automatic Slide Transition When showing a series of slides use the slide transition effects to present them in an interesting way For example the current slide can roll out of the window while the new slides rolls in This effect is called roll from left The best thing to do is to assign this effect in the Slide View Simply click on the third icon from the top in the scroll bar on the right of the presentation window or choose View gt Master View gt Slide View Lar suaus incar armar ane File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help a home sun_so_docs user_guide my_sphere sxi f g H amp X gt Effect No Effect y Medium Transition Semiautc 4 a mg 4s des 4 Slide Transition a T iz Effects Favorites hd fs 3d Discussion
102. for slides nerin nae 288 across multiple text tables 141 142 a A E AET 182 412 complex calculation eee 137 cni e 289 303 intext sssssssssseee 134 136 137 141 DACKUPS lt sccvecscsecnccstdechecscedhsaczach cess rar EE e eRe ae Eei veces in text with fOrmulas ssesrsssesseeesessserreasseseereenssen 137 autoratic sin ie dee A REEE gp SUMS in text tables euee rere nnnnnennnntnennnn 143 BAS N E A E E egets CALTOUES sesserssererssesesrensennerseorerennnnrncrsorsevenaneeceseosernennseet Data Sources 4 23 47 231 239 378 379 381 382 draw objects ertet ntt eben 327 383 471 pIOperties iie eer rere HER a cea 327 Lr PER capital letters seen programming trente 441 AutoCorrect function seen 35 87 recording macros 439 changing to small letters 87 EE LC RENE 108 113 114 398 font effects estt e nete 62 linthilcce EI HE TE Bons bp MON MM EE MD I e adding chapter numbers sess 120 149 applying text to 345 eI iiie tdt ebrei ero tege ee 344 automano cap to Re Anca i editing or deleting eee 148 In Set tlle os oec ter tee Des reris eter exe E 344 aodato nuben 149 replacing colours in eee 350 P MM E M ME Dana M 345 Case sensitive search 42 MrsnisVA T V SENEC black and white printing ttti 28 29 addre
103. for the most part automatically as long as the row and column coordinates are entered Refer to the following graphic OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 204 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc E6 v sum B6 D6 HERREN a gi July August September g 3 New York 1 234 00 2 398 00 4 325 00 7 957 00 p 4 London 1 024 00 512 00 256 00 1 792 00 w 5 Auckland 999 00 888 00 777 00 _ 2 664 00 gt 6 Berlin 1 233 00 2 397 00 4 32400 7 954 00 8 Total 4 490 00 6 195 00 9 682 00 m 9 cell B8 This formula can then be copied to the right Cell C8 automatically shows the formula SUM August cell D8 SUM September and so on This feature also works for horizontal calculations Try it out by entering the formula SUM London in cell E4 The New York entry must be treated as a special case because this name contains a space Thus it must be enclosed in single quotation marks SUM New York Automatic recognition does not work with formulae One cannot enter the formula SUM sum in cell E8 Instead enter SUM B8 D8 or SUM E3 E6 The latter formula will also be inserted automatically if the cursor is placed in cell E8 and the Sum icon in the Formula bar is clicked This function is active by default To turn it off select Tools Options gt Spreadsheet Document gt Calculate and uncheck the box in front of Automatically find column and row labels Use Insert gt Names gt Labels
104. formula is being entered and the formula will be seen in the input line of the formula bar 7 Press Enter to finish the formula 8 The result of the calculation is 16 percent of 150 in cell B4 9 Click on cell A3 enter 200 10 Press the Enter key at which time the calculation result is automatically adjusted 11 Click on cell B4 12 Click at the end of the formula in the input line of the Formula bar 13 The blinking text cursor indicates a new entry can be made 14 Add A3 without the quotation marks to the formula 15 Press the Enter key 16 The newly calculated value of the formula appears in cell B4 the previous 16 percent of A3 plus the contents of A3 These steps introduce the most important steps in working with spreadsheets creating and entering formulae entering data text and numbers obtaining results modifying source data or formulae and how to view results of new data or formulae Besides the four basic arithmetic operations there are other operators nested brackets and many other functions The Wizard Functions button is a useful aid when inputting functions Ens OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 186 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Using Built in Functions Calc has many built in functions one of which convert Euro dollars to another currency such as the US dollar The following provides an example of using functions to achieve a goal 1 Enter a formula e g 2445 or A3 A4 100
105. given character is the character itself followed by an asterisk Note that this is different to the way is used in file names Example Enter Hawai in the Search for field This means that any number of i s 39 66 including none at all may follow Hawa Thus the words Hawa Hawai and Hawaii will be found The wildcard for a single character is the period or dot This is equivalent to the wildcard in file names Combining the above two rules the wildcard for several unspecified characters in succession is period and asterisk This is equivalent to the wildcard in file names A paragraph end can be found with the dollar sign and the first character at the beginning of a paragraph with the string caret and period e Regular expressions may only be searched within paragraphs OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 39 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org There are many other wildcards that can be used that are listed in Help gt OpenOffice org Help with a search term of Regular expression This complete List of Regular Expressions is included in this document Searching Backward When locating a frequently appearing word in a long text the user might click find once too often by mistake Check the Backward box and click again on Find to return to the location of the previously found item Current Selection Only Check the Current selection only
106. i x mm H Record i of M4 gt E Mex a EEEN aa0 F m A WFF e S lir f O 2 me Ed E 60 BH BE BS Be Be Rx F IE m 2 E ob 6 E 4 4 Xs 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 100 104 108 112 116 120 124 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 1 i i 2 d d TE P i is gH TO we m AE 36 Ja e E E v indexesandtables SD R ie Bip l y gt NM n Page4 10 34 OOcPDL acu ridicu 155 INSRT STD HYP WY ee T OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 13 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Using Floating Toolbars When editing a text document the Insert icon is in the Tools toolbar Do a long click on this icon This opens a floating toolbar containing further icons Bie BB pU To W ES E The user now has a few choices to make either to click the icon to activate the feature or to grab the window by its title bar and drag it away from the main toolbar while holding down the left mouse button remember to first release the mouse button that was clicked to open the popup otherwise the title bar cannot be grabbed with the mouse Notice that the icon that was used previously is still there If one now clicks the From File icon notice that this icon has replaced the original icon a the top of the
107. if a password is set then protection can only be removed later by entering the correct password If no password is set there is still effective protection against a document being accidentally modified Sheet protection prevents modification of the contents of this specific sheet Document protection prevents the sheets from being inserted deleted resorted or renamed Ifa user has a document with confidential data that should be protected from being opened by unauthorized persons protect it with a password The password makes this protection of the entire document dependent on the protection mechanism of cells sheets and documents described above To save a document with a password select File gt Save As and check the Save with Password check box Creating a Reference If a user wants to insert a value say the result of a profit calculation into another sheet or into another spreadsheet document a reference must be created 1 Select the cell where to insert the result 2 Enter 3 Next select the cell that contains the original result 4 Press Enter This cell can also be included in another spreadsheet or in another file The result is automatically inserted into the reference cell and is also updated when changes are made later The content of a cell can be dragged to a cell in another document With this action either choose to transfer a copy of the cell as it now stands into the other document or create a link
108. in Calc Sample macro Function Example Validity Cell Value as String TableCell as String Dim msg as string msg Invalid value amp amp CellValue amp msg msg amp in table amp amp TableCell amp MsgBox msg 16 Error message End Function Note After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialogue with OK another cell must be selected before the change takes effect OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 238 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Printing or Exporting Spreadsheets There are many print options for putting spreadsheets on paper Another way of distributing data is to publish it on the Internet in HTML format or as PDF files Printing Sheet Details When printing a sheet one can select which details are to be printed Row and column headers Sheet grid Notes Objects and graphics Charts Drawing objects formulae To choose the details proceed as follows 1 Select the sheet for printing 2 Choose Format gt Page This command is not visible or available if the sheet was opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit File icon on the function bar 3 Select the Table tab In the Print area mark the details to be printed 4 Click OK 5 Print the document Defining Number of Pages for Printing If a sheet is too large for a single printed page Calc prints the current sheet evenly divided over several pages Since t
109. installations Where OpenOffice org is installed for a single user this file is likely to be in C Program Files OpenOffice org lt release gt lt user gt registry data org openoffice Office Common xcu Where user is an actual user name and release is the release of OpenOffice org However if the OS is NT W2k XP this file could still be in a special system user directory Therefore having administrator rights and enabling the option to view system directories in Explorer is essential before using the Find function For Windows 95 98 ME the location should be as mentioned above Again once the file is located simply rename the file for example to something like Common xcu old Now restart OpenOffice org a new Common xcu is created and the problem should have disappeared OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 418 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems Note that there may be files called Common xcu under paths such as C lt some path gt OpenOffice org lt release gt share registry et cetera where lt release gt is the release of OpenOffice org Do NOT delete these files UNIX systems The default location of this file under a UNIX installation single or multi user is HOME openoffice org lt release gt user registry data org openoffice Office Common xc u Where SHOME is the user s home directory As above simply rename the file for example to something like Common xcu old and restart OpenOffice
110. is described in Help Manually Registering an Existing Address Book 1 Choose File gt Templates gt Address Book Source The Templates Address Book Assignment dialogue appears Templates Address Book Assignment x Address Book Source Data source Administrate Table Field assignment First name lt none gt Last name lt none gt 7 Company lt none gt v Department lt none gt gt Street lt none gt 7 ZIP Code lt none gt gt City zones State mones gt Country lt none gt v Tel Home lt none gt 7 x oes te 2 In the Data source box select the system address book or the data source to use as the address book If the system address book is not yet registered in OpenOffice org as a data source click the Administrate button This opens the Administrate Data Sources dialogue in which the address book can be registered as a new OpenOffice org data source Read further how to do this in the next section System address book as data source OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 339 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources 3 In the Table box select the database table to use as the address book 4 Under Field assignment set the fields for company department first name et cetera to the actual field names used in the address book 5 After this point the addressbook is recognized as an OpenOffice org address book data source OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 340
111. is released the cells selected in this manner are filled with numbers The starting number is increased by 1 in each case If two or more adjacent cells have been selected that contain different numbers and these are dragged together any recognizable arithmetic pattern of the numbers is continued For example if A1 contains the number 1 and A2 the number 3 then joint copying of the two cells by dragging downwards causes the progression to continue with 5 7 9 11 and so on 1 First select the range in the table to completely fill 2 Select Edit gt Fill gt Row to open the dialogue 3 Select the type of progression e g 1 Select 2 as the starting value 2 as the increment and geometric progression as the progression type In this way a list of the powers of 2 is produced OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 245 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc B c D E F 4 8 16 32 8 16 32 64 16 32 64 128 32 P FETA A s4 ULEGLA xj 128 Direction Series type nme unit 256 Down Linear C Gay Rant Growth Weekds Cancel C up pate Month Help Lert AutoFill Yer Start value E End value Increment b The dialogue also allows series of dates and times to be automatically filled in For example to insert the first date of each month of the year as row headers proceed as follows 1 Enter a date e g 1 1 99 into a cell without quo
112. is the the content of the file simple xsl that was used above xs styl esheet version 1 0 lt xs xml Ins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt l strip space elements gt lt xs l template match gt lt xsl copy of select gt lt xsl template gt xsl output method xml indent yes gt lt xsl stylesheet gt OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 416 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements Creating a new Docbook Filter Go to Tools gt XML Filter Settings Set Filter Name and Name of File Type to DocBook Chapter Go to the Transformation tab Set DocType to lt chapter gt For XSLT for Export browse to the chapter export stylesheet sofftodocbookheadings chapter xsl For XSLT for Import browse to the chapter import stylesheet docbooktosoffheadings xsl For Template for Import browse to the style template DocBookTemplate stw Click OK and close the XSLT Filter Setting dialog In the above list the export and import stylesheets are swapped as follows For XSLT for Export browse to the chapter stylesheet sofftodocbookheadings chapter xsl For XSLT for Import browse to the chapter stylesheet docbooktosoffheadings xsl OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 417 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems Error Message contains Get Storage No Content The full error message reads OpenOffice can not be st
113. main toolbar Use a short click to open the directly visible function and a longer click to reopen the floating toolbar The document window At the top left hand edge of the document window are the toolbars that are needed for work and that these vary depending on the document type and context At the bottom edge is the status bar The status bar contains different fields displaying information appropriate to the type of document Some of these fields give access to special functions either by double clicking or by opening the relevant context menu For more detailed explanations refer to Help Docking toolbars All toolbars may be positioned as either floating windows or dockable panes These floating windows may be docked on any of the edges of the OpenOffice org window On each edge several toolbars may be docked alongside each other To undock and re dock drag the handle at the left or top if vertical of the toolbar In the floating state the window floats above the workplace so that the windows below it are partially covered Switch to the locked state to display the docked window next to the workplace If the window is docked to the left of the workplace the following buttons appear depending on the state Unhide A hidden window can be un hidden shown by clicking the arrow button Hide OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 14 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Unhide F Click the arrow button to hide a
114. marks is absolutely necessary to define conditions Upon entering a v without quotation marks in a cell in the previously selected area and pressing the Enter or Arrow key the cell will be displayed in the defined colour Note A maximum of three conditions is possible OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 249 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Defining Validity To avoid invalid entries in a spreadsheet define a validity condition Select the cells to which the validity condition is to apply and open the Validity dialogue in the Data menu On the Criteria tab define the acceptable entry criteria in this example Text length equal and 1 in the appropriate lists and fields Validity X Criteria Input Help Error Alert Allow Text length z MV Allow blanks Data equal i Value 1 Cancel Help Reset Next click on the Error Alert tab Select the option Show error message when invalid values are entered and click Stop in the Action list box Under Error message enter an appropriate text e g Only v vacation p present or s sick are valid entries If a user were to now enter more than one letter in the corresponding cell in the sheet the message defined above appears Creating Input Help Using the Validity dialogue custom help functions can be created for a previously selected area Select the Input Help tab and check the box Show input help when cell is selected Enter a title in
115. method to turn a bulleted list on and off 1 Place the cursor in a paragraph to be marked with a bullet symbol or select a number of paragraphs 2 Click on the Bullets on off icon on the Text Object Bar The paragraph or paragraphs will be formatted as a bulleted list 3 In an existing bulleted list if one clicks the Bullets on off icon the paragraphs will turn back into normal text 4 Ina bulleted list clicking on the icon at the far right of the object bar changes the Text Object Bar to the Numbering Object Bar which contains icons for moving and rearranging numbered paragraphs By opening the context menu on the object bar users can also select which bar to display OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 108 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer One can select further settings for the bulleted list in which the cursor is positioned with the Format gt Bullets and Numbering dialogue y Numbering Bullets Bullets Numbering type Outline Graphics Position Options Selection Link graphics tL L X X t 0 6 6 is OK Cancel Help Reset i Choose different bullet symbols under Format gt Bullets and Numbering gt Options by clicking on the button with three dots This opens the Special Characters dialogue but only if Bullet was selected in the Numbering pull down list Turning Numbering On and Off Turn
116. new paragraph Automatic correction OpenOffice org Writer includes a configurable auto correction tool that can make various corrections while typing For example automatically capitalizing the start of every sentence Word completion The automatic word completion function helps when entering text For example let s say there s an often used long word In this case Writer suggests a word it recognizes as matching what has been typed so far If the suggestion is what is wanted Press Enter or define another key to accept it Inserting Text 1 Open an existing document 2 place the cursor at the point where text is to be added using either the mouse or the arrow keys and enter the new text Insert mode is enabled by default thus any text following the insertion point is shifted as new text is entered To overwrite the existing text at this point select Overwrite mode by clicking the INSRT field in the status bar as shown below OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 46 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Page 5 104 OOoPageStyle 100 INSRT STD HYP 16 02 05 17 2004 Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode Using the keyboard If the keyboard has an Ins key press it to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode The current mode is displayed on the status bar Using the mouse On the status bar click in the fourth field from the left which indicates the current mode to switch to the oth
117. objects in the foreground or background must be changed use either the context menu commands or use the icons on the e Arrange floating toolbar ia 1 m c c Click on the object which is to move either in front of or behind other objects Then click on one of the icons in the upper row of the Arrange floating toolbar for example to move the object completely to the back To position it directly behind another object click the Behind Object icon Then click on the object behind which the current object is to be positioned This effect will only be seen if the objects are presently overlapping or are moved to do so later Select two objects at the same time by holding down the Shift key and clicking the objects one after the other and then clicking Reverse This switches the order of the two objects Aligning Objects Position objects anywhere using the mouse However to m position an object at exactly the upper margin of a slide Er IB B 3 HDD ae of for instance or centre two objects vertically above each s f ES other use the icons on the Alignment floating toolbar Alignment e Ifan individual object is selected and then one of the icons on the Alignment floating toolbar is clicked the object is aligned at the page margins Two or more objects selected together will be aligned to each other Aspecial type of alignment is the Distribution of objects When at least three objects are
118. of support are available through the users openoffice org mailing list the OpenOffice org support newsgroups provided by gmane org and the latest news about OpenOffice org at www openoffice org Using the Guide This User s Guide is designed for users who are already familiar with the basic functions of their computer Where there are differences in certain functions between supported operating systems these differences are explained If functions described here are not available on a particular platform this is a system related limitation caused by the platform in use OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 1 Overview OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 2 New Features with 2 x New Features with 2 x Open Standards XML File Format OASIS OpenDocument Beginning with version 2 0 OpenOffice org uses the open standard OASIS OpenDocument XML format as the default file format The OASIS OpenDocument format is a vendor and implementation independent file format and thus guarantees freedom and independence In addition to OpenOffice org itself the open source office suite KOffice as well as OpenOffice org derivatives like the StarOffice software support the OASIS OpenDocument file format The OASIS OpenDocument file format is also one of the file formats recommended by the European Commission New Multi pane View The new Multi pane view increases the productivity and usability of OpenOffice org The Multi pane view provides all important
119. of the eight handles and dragging it with a pressed mouse button the object rotates on only one axis The pivot point which first appears as a small circle in the middle can be moved Thus while rotating the object it rotates around the new pivot point Open the 3D Effects window by clicking the 3D Controller icon from which another different illumination can be applied to the 3D object The 3D Effects window is described in more detail in Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 293 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Drawing Editing and Converting Curves and Objects With vector graphics in drawing and presentation documents design not only ellipses and rectangles but also irregularly shaped curves forming open or closed figures Both Impress and Draw make it very easy to draw and edit even quite unusual figures Drawing Curves 1 The tools for drawing special shapes are found in the Curves floating toolbar indicated by this icon 5 on the Mail toolbar Drag the floating toolbar away from the Main toolbar into an empty drawing or presentation document 2 Select the Curve icon The cursor appears as a cross hair symbol with an accompanying symbol that indicates the new function 3 Create a curve using the mouse a The point where the mouse button is first clicked determines the starting point b Move the mouse in the direction the curve should take from the starting point The point where the mouse button is re
120. of the sheet These numbers and letters appear along the edge of the window The row header contains the row numbers and the column header names the columns Clicking on one of these areas selects the entire row or column To select the entire sheet click on the unlabelled button at the intersection of the row and column headers at the top left Enter some text in cell A1 As text is typed notice that the text appears both in the cell and in the input line of the formula bar Continue typing to see that more text can be added than appears to fit in the cell In fact any cell can accommodate text longer than a cell The whole length of the text is displayed and printed provided the adjacent cells to the right are empty If the cell to the right is not empty a small triangle on the right hand edge of the first cell appears indicating that the cell contains more text than can be displayed Note Turn off these triangles by choosing Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View and unchecking the Text overflow box When a number cannot be displayed in a cell because it is too long or due to the formatting e g currency format is displayed In this case increase the column width Set the width to optimal by simply double clicking the right divider in the column header double click on the separator between D and E sets the optimum column width B eH Use all the usual functions to edit text Notice howev
121. on Linux it uses the same UI widgets as GIMP or Evolution Floating Toolbars Toolbars are much more flexible in OpenOffice org 2 0 It is now very easy toattach and detach toolbars move them around and customize them OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 5 New Features with 2 x OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 6 Chapter 1 Using OpenOffice org Help Chapter 1 Using OpenOffice org Help Different kinds of help are available in OpenOffice org Step by step instructions with full references via the Contents and Index selections of OpenOffice org Help Help Tips that pop up next to the mouse pointer Extended tips with more detailed explanations than provided with Tips VW OpenOffice org Help Help about OpenOffice org Writer Help about OpenOffice org Writer tea 8 g Contents Index Find Bookmarks Welcome to the OpenOffice org Writer Help Search term 1 2 AutoCorrect 2D iss How to Work With OpenOffice org Writer ti Perieg Instructions for Using OpenOffice org Writer inserting OpenOffice org Writer Features selecting A views Charts in OpenOffice o 3D effects Data Source Overview favorites geometry illumination material OpenOffice org Writer Menus Toolbars and Keys objects Menus shading Toolbars Shortcut Keys for OpenOffice org Writer automatically replacing about OpenOffice org absolute hyperlinks Help about the Help absolute saving The OpenOffice org He
122. or all selected tables OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 378 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Automatic Protection of Indexes and Tables Tables of contents alphabetical indexes and so on that are created automatically in Writer are automatically protected against accidental changes Turning on protection 1 Place the cursor in the index table of contents 2 From the context menu choose Edit Index Table 3 On the Index Table tab page check Protected against manual changes Turning off protection 1 Ensure that Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids gt Cursor in protected areas has Enable checked 2 Place the cursor in the index 3 From the context menu choose Edit Index Table 4 On the Index Table tab page uncheck Protected against manual changes or in the Navigator select the index open the context menu and select Index gt Read only Protecting frames graphics and OLE objects Many objects can be inserted in OpenOffice org documents Users can protect the content position and or size of inserted graphics The same applies to frames in Writer and OLE objects Turning on protection For graphics inserted in in a document Choose Format gt Graphics gt Options tab Under Protect mark Contents Position and or Size Turning off protection For graphics inserted in a document Choose Format gt Graphics gt Options tab Under Protect uncheck as appropriate Protecting Drawing
123. out an appropriate graphic image Creating a Table of Contents Tables of contents can be created manually however if the contents are altered the table of contents must be manually updated as well It is much more convenient and time saving to have the program create a table of contents automatically 1 With the text entered creating a table of contents on the front page of the newspaper or newsletter may be in order To do so follow these steps a Draw a frame manually on the front page OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 169 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer b Select To Page as anchor c Press the Escape key to set the cursor in the frame 2 Open the Insert Index Table dialogue choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 3 On the Index Table tab page 4 Select Table of Contents as Type 5 Enter an appropriate heading e g In this issue in the Title field Ensure that one of heading Paragraph Styles is assigned so that chapter numbering may be determined for the headings These are determined by the Styles under Tools gt Outline Numbering The predefined Paragraph Styles are Heading1 through Heading10 If the table of contents should use the headings in the document specify the desired outline structure using the Evaluate up to level spin box If other customized Paragraph Styles for the headings have been defined these can also be incorpor
124. page such as graphics and text frames The following describes the various options based on the example of a frame Anchoring Effect as a Character Frames are placed in the document like any other character hence they have an impact on the line size of the line and the line break to Character Frame is with its X and Y coordinates associated to a character for example in the X direction always to the margin and in the Y direction always to the height of the character marginal frame The frame should be set at Flow to Paragraph Frame is associated to a paragraph changes its position with the paragraph on the Page Frame has always the same position in relation to the page margins on Frame Frame is inside the superior frame in a fixed position Selection The anchor determines what specific text feature the object is bound to as the document s content and formatting is altered For example it is possible to set the frame on a fixed position in relation to a page margin to a paragraph margin to a text area etc The frame position on even pages can be automatically mirrored so that a fixed position in relation to the right side of the page produces a corresponding position on the left side of the page For example a graphic can always be positioned inside the outer edge of pages Where the graphic is say an arrow pointing to the text it is a good idea to mirror this automatically on even pages too
125. page number of a page The offset is only used for example at the end of a page to display the number of the next page i e to offset the display it does not change the page number itself The manually entered page number in contrast to the automatically numbered page numbers is an attribute of that particular page This property is set as direct formatting in the first paragraph of that page Create Page Styles 1 Open the document in which to enter or change the page numbers or begin with a new text document although users will need to first enter some text and page breaks to be able to follow the steps described here 2 Open the Styles a and Formatting window 3 Select the Page Styles view in the Styles and Formatting window OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 70 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Page Styles magnon New Modify Deaete Footnote 4 Call up the context menu of one of the Page Styles and select the New command One will now see the Page Style dialogue with the Organizer tab page The cursor will be blinking in the Name text box in which to enter the name of the first new Page Style Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Name Tite Pae Next Style niteat o Linked with P Category Custom Stes mg Contains Width 21 0cm Fixed height 29 7cm From top 2 54cm From bottom 2 54cm Page Description Arabic PortraitLeft N
126. paragraph immediately before or after a section place the cursor at the very beginning or end of the section and press Alt Enter OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 60 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Sections and Columns e Multicolumn section A section can contain other sections This feature allows the user for example to create a two column section on a page of text and then create a three column section within that section Multicolumn page The page format Format gt Page gt Columns which always applies to all pages with the current Page Style is independent of the sections Multicolumn frame Frames containing columns of text may be inserted These can be moved freely around the page from Tools toolbar long click to open Insert floating toolbar click Insert frame icon For these frames for example one can select that the text in the frame be positioned a certain distance from the edge of the frame Choose Format gt Frame gt Wrap Inserting Sections 1 Place the cursor at the point to insert the new section or select the text that is to form a new section 2 Choose Insert gt Section In the dialogue define other settings for the section 3 Click Insert Other documents or sections from other documents can be inserted In this case Links must be checked Enter a file name in the text box or click to search for a file Select a named section of the document in the Section pull
127. possible Turning on revision protection 1 Choose Edit gt Changes gt Protect Records 2 Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters Turning off revision protection 1 Choose Edit gt Changes gt Protect Records 2 Enter the correct password Protecting Cell Ranges in Calc In Calc protection can be applied to spreadsheets and the whole document As part of the process choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes whether the formulae can be viewed whether the cells are visible and or whether the cells can be printed Protection may be password protected but this is not always necessary Once a password is assigned a password protection can only be removed by entering the correct password OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 377 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Note Cell protection for cells setting the Protected attribute is only effective when the whole table is protected The default condition is that every cell receives the Protected attribute Thus in cells where the user may make changes the attribute must be removed selectively for those cells Once this is done then protect the whole table and save the document Turning on protection For cells Select cell range Choose Format gt Cells gt Cell Protection tab For spreadsheets Choose Tools gt Protect Document gt Sheet For documents Choose Tools gt Protect Document gt Document Enter and confirm a password of a
128. professional use with financial and statistical functions as well as database functions and much more Overview of the Functions in Calc This section contains a short overview of some important functions and capabilities of Calc Calculating Calc works primarily as a spreadsheet program i e it provides a spreadsheet containing cells into which text digits and formulae can be entered and from these calculate simple and complex results Calc like the other components of OpenOffice org has numerous automatic functions to ease usage While Calc provides all the basic calculation types it also has numerous calculation methods that can be entered interactively via the Wizard Functions In addition it allows entering text and flexibly arranging cells so forms can be comfortably styled filled in calculated and printed Database Functions Data that can be summarized into records such as addresses inventory levels customer orders or similar can also be managed by Calc Even if there are no calculations Calc can quickly sort a database range and search the data for specific characteristics such as maximum or minimum values In addition a sheet in Calc can serve as a data source for creating form letters and reports with OpenOffice org Writer Arranging Data Data can be organized in easy to read lists With just a few mouse clicks the view can be reorganized to show or hide certain data ranges format ranges according to speci
129. re terror mee 62 179 ON a 325 42 iGee fas TTT m 188 formats eee PEE 50 62 66 87 215 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 TALI CS ois 9 72 188 languages selection ssseeeeenen 33 shadowed esee sel dhicsdceesetaceccevince haeiease 103 SPACING sii LEE 74 sp cial eiecit eene 37 45 50 55 449 subscript and superscript eee eens 61 62 447 uppercase or lowercase esee 62 chart legends eere rete ti gea editing ecnedetr ee ete e erede EE Hee Desk ton 229 DD ERE D woneels BID VIC s MS 227 228 bars with textures 230 dataz zs sid DRUSI UE 153 227 dragging and dropping eeeeseess 152 eding 6 T 230 editing legends tede ret tetas tia 229 Editino THES D M 229 inserting essere 152 153 192 226 227 linked data eere 153 Organizat O Nisee 315 check box creation sessessessesessesresesserserssressrsseseees 391 checking spelling inte eet dugegersevsceswerventoss automatically esses 30 31 32 88 164 excluding Svords eicere dee rer erer 88 164 in all languages eee rto teet te 33 inanually e tre p ro OPEP HP REE aS 33 turning on and off 31 88 164 WwlIiletypIDg i eerte tette 30 31 32 88 164 choosing printers esee nene e 26 ug T H drawing isi oe eee am 324 clipboard ea
130. search in the active document text document spreadsheet or drawing and compiles a list of the contents This sample will help the user learn how to reference objects in the documents ReadDir Use this macro to see how a OpenOffice org Draw document can be filled with content and how the contents of directories are read A dialogue asks for a directory and then the macro creates a graphic list of all the files and subdirectories Userfields This macro helps users manage several sets of user data and allows switching back and forth between them This can be quite helpful when more than one person uses the same copy of OpenOffice org and each person wants to see his or her own user data in the fields OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 390 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Formula Entry Main View of OpenOffice Formula SH untitiedi openotficeong 1 14 anx File Edit View Format Tools Window Help J Ea u r B amp e xme 4 59 d E 1 ar Beg Fy SD ELEELE ROGER C UD EU a aA Shes SA SS el SE SU ae ea tie Ge zoe acA f Xa i x0 Q ta Fa a a b a b axb a b aab a b uU a b a b avb X KALA Lad ie Tool bar The tool bar is divided into two parts OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 391 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math MEJ 09959 The upper part is for adjusting the on screen size of the image The lower part con
131. select any deviations from the currency symbol of the format defined by the language If for example the language is set to Default and the locale is set as German the currency format will be 1 the thousand digits and a L 234 00 and per the locale definition a point is used before comma before the decimal places Now select the subordinate currency format Engl lish US from in the Format list box to get the following format 1 234 00 Note that the separators remain the same and that only the currency symbol is changed and converted The underlying Format of the notation remains the same as it is set in the locale setting OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 192 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calculating With formulae All formulae begin with an equals sign formulae may contain numbers or text and other data is also possible such as format details that specify how the numbers are to be formatted Naturally the formulae will also contain arithmetic operators logic operators or function starts When using the basic arithmetic signs in formulae remember that using the Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction rule Instead of writing SUM A1 B1 it s better to write A1 B1 Parentheses are also useful for grouping For example the result of the formula 1 2 3 means something different than 142 3 Here are some typical Calc formulae A1 10 A1 16 Al
132. selecting colours from a colour spectrum is preferable to specifying the values with the spin buttons click Edit This opens the colour dialogue In this dialogue it is also possible to specify the colour in the HSV or HSB Hue Saturation Value Brightness model Select the colour and click OK 4 Once a new colour is chosen specify whether it should replace the original colour or be defined independently Note It is recommended that only custom defined colours be replaced 1 To replace the colour displayed in the upper preview box click Modify 2 To set the new user defined colour assign a name to the colour in the Name field and click Add and OK The new colour will immediately be added to the palette of existing colours however if the dialogue is exited by using the Cancel button the colour of the current object does not change Nonetheless the modifications in the colour palette do remain in effect Further instructions on saving and loading the colour palette and other palette files are found in Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 312 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Replacing colours using the Eyedropper In Draw and Impress images inserted in a bitmap format such as GIF JPEG and metafile images like WMF can have their colours edited using the Eyedropper To open the Eyedropper window choose Tools gt Eyedropper Eyedropper m Colors Source color Tolerance Replace with
133. start by inserting a single cell table then select the whole of this cell the only way to do this is with the shortcut keys Ctrl a and then click on the Insert gt Frame icon The border automatically surrounds the table incidentally this also works with any section of text Now set the anchor to character cut the whole table to the clipboard and paste it where it should go remove the borders from the frame and table and apply further settings Calculating Across Multiple Tables Calculations in any text document where there are more than one table which contains data required for calculation can be done in OpenOffice org Writer For example e Insert two tables each with several rows and columns 1 Enter a few figures in the tables but leave at least one cell empty The tables should be automatically named Tab1e1 and Table2 If one chooses each table can be given a different name Table gt Properties Table tab text box Name using only letters and numbers for naming 1 Position the cursor in an empty cell 2 Press F2 to display the Formula bar 3 As an example enter SUM 4 Individually click the cells containing figures in both tables that are part of the calculation After each click enter a plus sign from the keyboard and continue to the next cell containing a figure 5 Finally click the Apply icon on the Formula Bar For example if adding up the first two rows of each table and showing the
134. surprising the method for specifying a list box isn t much different from that for a combo box Like a combo box the easiest way to set up a list box is with the wizard A list box must be tied to data from a data source It draws data from a table and stores its results in a table Usually the data comes from one table a look up table and the results are stored in another table Unlike a combo box a list box can store data from a different field than is displayed As with a combo box if no data source is associated with the form the first page of the wizard lets the user choose one Once you finish and click Next choose the table that contains the data to appear in the list After clicking Next the process continues as with a combo box On the next page specify the field that is to appear in the list box At this point list boxes part company from combo boxes Upon clicking Next one reaches the Field Link page of the wizard On this page link a field from the form s data source table to a field from the list box s table The link indicates that when the form user makes a choice from the list box the value of the specified field of the list box s table is copied to the specified field of the form s table Clicking Create prepares and inserts the list box By default it s a drop down list that looks like a combo box but doesn t allow the user to type in a new value To change it to a regular list box with a number of items displayed
135. the Navigator using the mouse The result is that numbering of all affected chapters is adjusted automatically Automatic Bullets and Numbering Writer also automatically recognizes bullets and numbering during entry if Format gt AutoFormat gt While Typing was previously chosen Numbering that uses Roman numerals is also recognized and continued Note A list can start with any value e g it does not have to begin with I A step by step example with Roman numerals 1 Enter I with a period after it also followed by a space and text A right parenthesis may also be used as a substitute for a period 2 Press the Enter key to create a new paragraph 3 The new paragraph will begin with II i e the Roman numeral for two 4 Enter some text press the Enter key and the next paragraph will begin with III 5 Repeat as needed Roman numbering can begin with any numeral desired For example with ci corresponds to 101 which will be followed by eii 102 et cetera Numbering Illustrations by Chapters Numbering illustrations by chapter so that illustrations are labelled Illustration 1 1 Illustration 1 2 and so on in the first chapter and Illustration 2 1 ustration 2 2 et cetera in the second is easily done Use the following procedure to do this 6T 1 1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 111 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 1 Organize a document in chapters
136. the cursor in the cell to be split 2 Select Table gt Split Cells A dialogue allows splitting the cell into two or more cells horizontally or vertically Merging Cells in OpenOffice org Calc OLE Objects 1 Highlight all the cells to be included in the merged cell 2 Select Format gt Merge Cells The state of this menu item is toggled on Note that this menu item reflects the state of the current selected cell Cancelling the merging of cells in OpenOffice org Calc OLE Objects 1 Set the cursor in the cell to be split 2 Select Format gt Merge Cells The state of this menu item is toggled off OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 135 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Inserting or Deleting Rows Columns Using the Keyboard The following methods describe how to insert and delete rows and columns using the keyboard e To insert a new column or row 1 Put the table in insert mode by pressing Alt Ins OpenOffice org will wait up to three seconds for teh user to press one of the following key commands i Press the relevant arrow key to insert a new row or column to the right or left above or below the current row or column ii Hold down the Ct x1 key as well as the relevant arrow key to add a cell in that direction by splitting either the current or an adjacent cell 1 To delete a column or row 2 Put the table in delete mode by pressing Alt Del OpenOffice org will wait up to three seconds for the user
137. the filter but in spite of this cannot be accepted or rejected OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 374 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Comparing Versions of a Document Perhaps one of the authors who received a copy of the document made changes but did not record them by choosing Edit gt Changes gt Record Nonetheless the delivered copy of the document can be compared with the original document 1 Open the original document and then choose Edit gt Compare Document 2 From the file selection dialogue select the copy of the document 3 Confirm the dialogue Now OpenOffice org combines both documents in the original document All text passages that occur in the document but not in the copy are identified as having been inserted and all text passages that are missing in the original document are identified as deletions Now start the revision process by accepting the insertions in which case the relevant texts stay in their original form or accepting the deletions in which case the marked text contained in the copy are not inserted in the document Merging Versions It is not always one and the same document that is edited by different authors and passed from one to the next author It often makes more sense to give a separate copy of the document to each author For example three copies are returned in addition to the original document with different changes in each copy It is easy to merge these documents into t
138. the same typing errors For example if one tends to capitalize not only the first letter of some words but also the second simply select the AutoCorrect function that corrects mistakes of this sort while typing AutoFormat formats texts One AutoFormat feature automatically will detect paragraphs beginning with a hyphen followed by a tab or space and reformat the paragraph as a bullet point The automatic bulleting is then applied to any paragraphs that follow as well Automatic bulleting ends when the user enters a blank paragraph containing only a Return In text documents toggle AutoFormat on or off by selecting Format gt AutoFormat A submenu with three selections appears To automatically format while typing check the While Typing selection To have Writer automatically format the entire document or the current selection at a later time check the menu selection Apply Selecting Apply and Edit Changes lets the user see all document changes made via AutoFormat The user then may accept or reject all changes or may review each change separately One may also select and set the options in Tools gt AutoCorrect AutoCorrect offers many options that can be selectively turned on and off Some of these offer different methods for formatting while typing and post processing The Replace and Exceptions lists are language dependent OpenOffice org first searches in the list of the language of the text then the list for the higher ranking language f
139. the top line and then on OK 8 Now select the second row of the table and again open the Table Format dialogue by choosing Table in the context menu 9 Under Line arrangement click the areas between the two bottom angles see illustration to remove the bottom line between the rows and then on OK 9 Now select the third row of the table and again open the Table Format dialogue by choosing Table in the context menu 10 Under Line arrangement click the areas between the two top angles see illustration to remove the top line between the rows and then on OK 10 In the Style field select the required line thickness and click OK 11 Now the table is finished OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 56 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Superscripts and Subscripts Users have the following options for superscripting or subscripting text 1 Use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl1 Shift P and Ctrl ShifttB 2 Choose Format gt Character gt Position 3 Use the Text Object toolbar Superscript Subscript buttons If these buttons are not visible in the toolbar expose them using the method described under Changing the Visibility of Buttons on Toolbars 1 Making text superscript subscript while typing Suppose one wants to type 1 m superscript 2 1 Type the character m 2 Press Ctrl1 Shift P Ctrl Shiftt P is the keyboard shortcut for superscript text 3 Type the 2 4 Press the keyboard shortcut Ctr1 Shift P
140. to press one of the following key commands i Press the relevant arrow key to delete a row or column to the right or left above or below the current row or column ii Hold down the Ct r1 key as well as the arrow key to merge the current cell with the adjacent cell Repeating Multiple Heading Rows in a Table 1 If automatically repeating more than one row within a table following a page break this is how to do it 1 Select the first table row 2 Open the context menu and choose Cell gt Split a In the Split Cells dialogue select the horizontal direction b Enter the number of rows that are to be repeated c confirm with OK All rows at the beginning of a table that is created in this manner will now be repeated after a page break Enlarging and Reducing Cells in Text Tables The width and height of rows and columns are changeable using the keyboard by dragging and dropping with the mouse or by commands in the context menu Column widths can also be changed numerically via a dialogue Rows and columns can also be evenly distributed with the icons on the Optimize floating toolbar on the Table Object Bar um OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 136 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Rows and columns can also be modified either in the table directly or with the aid of the rulers If the mouse pointer is rested on a vertical dividing line in the table the pointer appears as a Separator symbol an
141. tools and windows through one coherent integrated and simple user interface Former Microsoft PowerPoint users should find OpenOffice org 2 0 easy to use New CustomShapes compatible with Microsoft AutoShapes OpenOffice org now supports CustomShapes which are very similar to Microsoft s AutoShapes As a consequence AutoShapes are imported and displayed correctly CustomShapes are shapes that cannot only change their size but also their appearance More Slide Transitions and Animation Effects OpenOffice org now supports many more animation effects and slide transitions Now users have more options to give their presentations a professional appearance In addition the extended support for effects improves the Microsoft PowerPoint compatibility Enhanced PDF Export OpenOffice org 1 1 introduced the PDF export feature Version 2 0 now extends the basic export feature With the new version it is possible to define the compression levels of embedded images In addition the PDF support now correctly handles thumbnail images and hyperlinks OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 3 New Features with 2 x New enhanced Database Frontend OpenOffice org always had database frontend tools but in past versions they were very hidden OpenOffice org 2 0 starts to handle databases like any other application i e a new database can be created via the File New menu For novice users OpenOffice org provides a new Table Wizard that allows to create
142. total in Tab1e2 the formula is sum Tablel Al Al OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 134 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Calculating Cell Totals in Tables 1 Insert a table with multiple rows Insert gt Table into a new text document 2 Enter a series of numbers into a column one number per row leaving the last cell of the column empty 3 Place the cursor in the last empty cell of the column 4 Click the Sum icon in the Table object bar 5 The Formula bar appears and a formula indicates the cells of the column to be added The cells are separated by a vertical bar 6 Press the Enter key to confirm or click Apply in the Formula bar The sum will appear in the last cell When numbers are changed in the table the sum is automatically be updated If for example formatting the numbers as currency select the cells and choose Number Format from the context menu The Number Format dialogue appears where the user can choose a new format Merging and Splitting Cells One can select adjacent cells together then merge them into a single cell Conversely a large cell that has been created by merging single cells can be divided back into individual cells The commands are different in OpenOffice org Writer and Calc Merging Cells in OpenOffice org Writer 1 Highlight all the cells to be included in the merged cell 2 Select Table gt Merge Cells Splitting Cells in OpenOffice org Writer 1 Set
143. urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns datas tyle 1 0 xmlns svg 2 urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns svg compatible 1 0 xmlns chart urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns chart 1 0 xmlns dr3d urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns dr3d 1 0 xmlns math http www w3 0rg 1998 Math MathML xmlns form urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns form l1 Qt xmlns script urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns scrip oral en Oa xmlns config urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns confi g 1 0 xmlns ooo http openoffice org 2004 office xmlns ooow http openoffice org 2004 writer xmlns oooc http openoffice org 2004 calc xmilns dom http www w3 org 2001 xml events xmlns xforms http www w3 org 2002 xforms xmlns xsd http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance office version 1 0 office mimetype application x vnd oasis openoffice text lt office meta gt meta generator OpenOffice org 2 0 Linux OpenOffice org project 680m3 Build 8968 lt meta generator gt dc title Using Data Sources lt dc title gt meta initial creator Ian Laurenson lt meta initial creator gt 6 Use Save As and select the Flat filter from the list OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 415 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements Of course one needs to supply an XSLT file to provide the instructions needed to do the conversion Here is a simple example that can be used and it
144. value Format example l OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 345 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Field Properties Enter properties for each selected data field Depending on the database type it is possible that not all input facilities will be available In the Default box enter the contents that should be entered for every new record This can of course be subsequently modified In the Entry required box specify whether or not the field may remain empty No matter which field type a list box provides the available types OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 346 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Form Design Any OpenOffice org document can be expanded into a form One simply adds one or more form functions Form Functions lh EP 7 A 7 ae EI Hea 3 GO 122 3 be Em wey Fs I p The Form icon on the main toolbar opens a floating toolbar by long clicking the icon This floating toolbar contains the basic functions to edit a form One will find again many of these functions in the object bar if a form element is elected in the document If one clicks a form element in the editing mode Object bar Format menu commands and context menus offer context sensitive editing functions In the form design the designer can include controls Apply properties to them define Form properties and Define subforms The Form Navigator E is useful in designing a form Click the icon on the object bar or the
145. wanted on the floating toolbar Note Only in Writer If one confirms the symbol with a short click while no text is selected then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a paint can pouring Use this paint can pouring symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area This text area takes the selected colour The function remains active for as long as the symbol is pressed or until clicked without dragging or until the Esc key is pressed Inserting Landscape pages into a Portrait oriented Document 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window Format gt Styles and Formatting or F11 2 In the Styles and Formatting window click on the Page Styles icon fourth icon from left 3 The type Standard should already be highlighted hold the right menu button down to see the context menu and choose New 4 In the dialogue that appears give the new page style a descriptive name for example Landscape 5 Click on the Page tab and change the page orientation to Landscape by clicking on the corresponding radio button At the same time make other changes to the page style as needed such as adjusting the margin sizes Click on OK The new style will appear as one of the style choices Place the text cursor in the document at the location at which to insert the Landscape page Select Insert Manual Break O N A In the dialogue that appears select Page Break and in the Style list select
146. window are icons for selecting the Style type to display These are from left to right Paragraph Character Frame Page Numbering Styles Fill Format Mode New Style from Selection and Update Style mMaoOon 2 t iB The scrolling frame of the Styles and Formatting window lists those available styles in the active Style category that is specified in the list box at the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window For example in the graphic below the word Automatic is selected in the list box Writer offers the Styles that make sense in that context To see all the Styles of a Style type select All Styles from the list box Paragraph Styles Select Paragraph Styles if it is not already selected by clicking the Paragraph Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window The list of Paragraph Styles appears OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 63 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Paragraph Styles magna Complimentary close First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Heading 6 Automatic v Double click an entry in the list of Paragraph Styles The paragraph in which the cursor is positioned will now be formatted with that Paragraph Style Double click in the Styles and Formatting window on another Paragraph Style and the formatting of the current paragraph changes accordingly To format a paragraph as a heading
147. with documentation or other writings not governed by the terms of this License 1 7 License means this document 1 8 Modifications means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Documentation or any previous Modifications such as a translation abridgment condensation or any other form in which the Original Documentation or previous Modifications may be recast transformed or adapted A work consisting of editorial revisions annotations elaborations and other modifications which as a whole represent an original work of authorship is a Modification For example when Documentation is released as a series of documents a Modification is A Any addition to or deletion from the contents of the Original Documentation or previous Modifications B Any new documentation that contains any part of the Original Documentation or previous Modifications 1 9 Original Documentation means documentation described as Original Documentation in the notice required by the Appendix and which at the time of its release under this License is not already Documentation governed by this License 1 10 Editable Form means the preferred form of the Documentation for making Modifications to it The Documentation can be in an electronic compressed or archival form provided the appropriate decompression or de archiving software is widely available for no charge OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0
148. x 0 00 34 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 334 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Using Snap Lines It is advisable to use snap lines to position lines and objects more precisely To display a snap line click on a ruler and hold down the mouse button to drag it into the document To move the snap line rest the mouse pointer on it until a double arrow appears Shift the line by holding down the mouse button and dragging the line to the desired position To delete a snap line simply drag it back onto the ruler In Draw snap lines can also be positioned in a numerically exact way using the Edit Snap Line command from the context menu of the snap line Using Dimension Lines With Draw dimension lines can be directly inserted into a drawing Drag the snap lines from the ruler into a document and positioned so that there is a snap line over every major line in the drawing To do this click the Dimension Line icon on WH the Lines floating toolbar The mouse pointer will turn into a cross and a dimension line may be dragged directly from one side to the other or even better from one snap line to another To edit the look of dimension lines select them open the context menu and click Dimensions The dialogue that appears permits determination of the appearance and position of the dimension lines line Legend Line distance 0 80cm E Text position Cancel Guide overhang o20cm ul Guide distance fo Ocm Hel
149. 00 Denm Index Table of Contents EHIIGR sos estreno rines o eA I RS Pu e 100 Editing or Deleting Index and Table Warn one cca p D C e d Re Mrd bre e on n URBES 101 Creating a Table gt Contents ou ocoss a Qa aiai aa ERU FERA Ud liU via pa e elt 102 Creating Alphabetical FREIER octies race e sni rhniar ta nesta VERRE pe Mn OPI REA Ue M 103 Using a Goncordance FIE sisisi REA RR Sep Red hod rd eH qon pt 103 Creatine Usc Boi ater Ml a or eee ER BAR DRIN EN RN DM IM M HE MEM 104 Creatine BibHOpraphiES siisii pirrer ponere be AGER DE RR PK Gag odd RN Nia PAS pul PR Y a Sa 105 Updating Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents 106 Editing the Format of an Index Table of Cobtents sues isisisi 107 indexes Covering Multiple DIODORIOHU es itv FR MEER CHER GM NAI ONU MM M eer 107 Headings and Nm Des eoa iori opi D n RE ecd ke Fla os ua po RN ORE 108 Numbering and Numbering SOR ne en ene Se Arr 108 Tuc B lles EL Off oeuse ES E RNRA RUBER LU i eL ta Rudi Rn 108 Tunng Numbering Onand ORBE uisi rer HERI RON SR DR MM DIM PRM NON 109 Example numbered list with sublevels cscri Gascnsies titt ro RE teh PUER RE FXR taseesarsaseneie 110 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 vii Outline ASN ANA IIT TTE m 110 Au t matie B llets aud PU AI scenam ete esq Ubi strera RA REA ER aE 111 Numbering Mustrations Hy C Ts 2 ct eae cereis div ap o d tcv E nee eer eer eee eee 111 Defining Number Rages ioca errans e
150. 00 records long With this number of records it is no longer possible to get an overview Now only those records that occurred after 1 2 2000 and which apart from this involve an amount in excess of 100 currency units must be shown Here is one way 1 Set the cursor in the database range 2 Choose Data gt Filter gt Standard Filter to open the dialogue 3 Enter the following a Date gt 1 2 2000 AND Amount gt 100 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 218 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc In the dialogue the existing contents of the data fields in the pull down lists can be selected or an amount say100 can be entered directly Standard Filter X Filter criteria Operator Field name Condition Value Date B o1 03 2000 Cancel AND Amount gt 100 none Y Y Help EL EN me More gt gt If OK is clicked at this time only those records that meet all criteria are shown Select Data gt Filter gt Remove Filter to reset the view Displaying only records with a specific content is easily done with the aid of the AutoFilter 1 Place the cursor in the database range 2 Click on the AutoFilter icon on the main toolbar The column headers of the database range have now been given small buttons Click on the button next to the Date field and select for example 1 2 00 Only records that contain this date will be shown On the main toolbar reset the view with the AutoF
151. 005 09 09 2005 09 22 2005 09 25 2005 09 30 2005 10 25 2005 11 11 2005 11 11 2006 01 31 2006 02 20 2006 02 21 2006 03 02 2006 04 10 Modifications and updates Description of Change grs First edition issued for comment grs 2 draft issued for comment added how to setup fax grs 3 draft issued for comment added form tutorial grs 4 draft issued for comment added dbase and signing grs 5 draft issued for comment updated grs 6 draft issued for comment added Xforms chapter grs 7 draft issued for comment OpenDoc section grs 8 draft issued for comment Added indexing grs 9 draft issued for comment switched to master doc stewart s amendments and added a chapter on XML usage flat file grs 10 draft issued for comment fix page numbering grs 11 draft issued for comment updated index rj 12 draft issued for comment corrections for 2 0 to replace 1 1 x references grs 13 draft issued for comment integrated Ross Johnson s changes and edited for consistent grammar grs 14 draft issued for comment document layout to be more bookish grs 15 draft issued for comment Added POSTNET section Contents EG Liu diee b HR Rat n Rabe vx han ceed Rove ena RRR eI ma 1 NETO Te CVS ee E A ke eee ea E ern re eee ee eee eae eee 1 New Features 0K NETTO m 3 Open Standards XML File Format OASIS OpenDocuitnent
152. 01 06 00 Sum 22 50 01 07 00 Hat 6 25 13 01 07 00 Sum 625 04 01 08 00 Shoes 99 40 15 01 08 00 Sum 99 40 16 Grand Tota Notice the controls to the left of the row headers These enable the user to view which records rows have been summarized Clicking on a minus sign shows only the row with the results The easiest way to control the display is with the small digits above the group area When 1is clicked only the grand total is displayed Clicking 2 reveals the subtotals while selecting 3 shows all elements Transferring Data From a Data Source to a Spreadsheet Individual tables of data from the data source browser are transferable into a Calc spreadsheet document There is a choice of two different methods for transferring the data One the desired database file in dBase or text format t can be loaded directly via the File gt Open dialogue in which case the whole database table is imported into a Calc spreadsheet document Or two by dragging and dropping what is selected Opening a Database File in Calc Open a dBase or text format document as one opens any OpenOffice org file Choose File gt Open In the dialogue go to the folder where the database file is located Enter the name of the file or go to the File type list box select dBase for example Select the name Click Open Uu A LU N To open a text document select the file type Text CSV OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 221
153. 1 11 You or Your means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under and complying with all of the terms of this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 5 0 Versions of the License For legal entities You includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of more than fifty percent 50 of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 0 LICENSE GRANTS 2 1 Initial Writer Grant The Initial Writer hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license to use reproduce prepare Modifications of compile publicly perform publicly display demonstrate market disclose and distribute the Documentation in any form on any media or via any Electronic Distribution Mechanism or other method now known or later discovered and to sublicense the foregoing rights to third parties through multiple tiers of sublicensees in accordance with the terms of this License The license rights granted in this Section 2 1 Initial Writer Grant are effective on the date Initial Writer first distributes Original Documentation under the terms of this License 2 2 Contributor Grant Each Contributor hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclu
154. 1 20 Insertion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Insertion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Insertion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Insertion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 m Accept Reject Accept All Reject All When the list of changes is too long or confusing switch to the Filter tab in the dialogue and specify only the changes of certain authors or only the changes of the last day or that the list should be restricted in some other way Changes can also be filtered by the descriptions Wildcards as with regular expressions in the Find amp Replace dialogue are permitted when entering the filter Text document changes that have not yet been accepted are displayed in the list Changes that have been accepted are removed from the list and appear in the text without any further marking Spreadsheet changes that have been accepted are combined in the list in a single entry so that one can continue to see which changes have already been accepted colour coded entries inform the user about the result of the filter that is set Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria but have subentries that are included by the filter Grayed entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion Green entries do match
155. 101 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Creating a Table of Contents 1 Place the cursor at the location at which to create the table of contents 2 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables The Insert Index Table dialogue appears Click the Index Table tab and select Table of Contents as Type the first time this dialogue is started this tab page and type are already selected Insert Index Table Type and title Type Table of Contents gt Protected against manual changes Heading 1 Create index table This is the content fom the frst chapter This is a wer drectory entry for Entire document 2 Evaluate up to level Create from Outline E Additional Styles Heading 1 1 This is the content from chapter 1 1 This is the entry for the table of contents Heading 1 2 This is the content from chapter 1 2 This keyword is a rrzin entry Index marks __ e T 3 Click on OK to create the table of contents from the headings and entries already defined 4 To insert additional paragraphs of another paragraph style into the table of contents check Additional Styles 5 Click the icon next to the box to open the dialogue 6 Define the paragraph styles that are also to appear in the table of contents and the level they are to be shown Click the icon near Outline to open the Assign Styles dialogue This dialogue sets paragraph styles for each level of the index starting at
156. 2 234 Showing grid mes nte eee gre 215 Split tmp eon EO EUER 131 143 145 dil M 260 Text OVertloW uu i e einai 196 validity of CONt niS sossssessscrersrr esros 255 Value Highlighting eee 199 certificates for documents 428 429 CMAN BOS C accepting or rejecting 420 comparing eese eene nnne nnne nennen nene 421 PETNE i ooo eae inen e rect 420 jo ctun DEC S 424 427 zur 419 422 changes made automatically 35 377 38 47 55 87 88 92 93 116 164 204 Chane p p E default templates ee edes 435 formats of hyperlinks eere 53 headers footers 74 78 154 155 157 158 170 174 177 196 213 215 216 221 233 235 237 239 247 248 259 261 266 288 398 ICOM SIZES ccccccccccesecsessceccceccecsesssneceeecceseesesseaeeeeeees 407 INCENUS ccccccccceceesesseeececececcessessceeceeececceesssssaeeeeeecs 13 OBJECT SIZES m 313 page backgrounds esses 177 182 size of text frames nene 95 toolbars sssesseeseeseseeeeeeennennn eene eene 405 work directory eese eene 17 character COUNES cccccccsesssccececeessceseeccecesseseececeesssaneeees 4 Clh tact ers uere eser ERE REDE Bold m LEE 41 66 231 coloring iioc teres 57 433 COUT oe nee e POPE I Uer UR ERE ESE 4 font effects rere
157. 30 Defining a condition and tbe conditional ext uoce tror iioo eoi s 131 Displaying the conditional text Me RETE POP GERM ET E as eta 132 Calculating in Text Document Tate 05 sad cd oie iri re aei e exstet leri Un FR A i 133 Calculating Across Multiple T3bleg s nsooeiess o ivan anres rco pe dete at ne vRH Fu pu E E Ovis REF Ed pUE 134 Calculating Coll Totals m EHI arininn e apro ose akute trs NOD HH RUM RM 135 Merging and Splitting E els aseo e ERE DEDERE ERU DNE MINOR PNE 135 Merging Cells m OpenOftee org Writer ui seres recon eb reap Ln DP REO AO RN TRY 135 Splitting Cells in OpenOffice org WEHBE sourire reor ro Fra SEN ERSRU OU ARCU PE pESE EHE PR EIE 135 Merging Cells m eit tics ore Cale OLE DDIGUUS iaosiccssvnstiiesid eben cr d rete 135 Cancelling the merging of cells in OpenOffice org Calc OLE Objects 135 Inserting or Deleting Rows Columns Using the Keyboard sssssss 136 Repeating Multiple Heading Rows in a T ble ue rere eor eros tutore reinen rine 136 Enlarging and Reducing Cells in Text Tables ssec ee onboard urtesi 136 Adapting Table REB cng seen duds HERR EHE n ue AMNEM MEM EN EID se 137 Images Drawings Clipart and Font WOfk ser o d Ua RUE P RR NC EN FR 138 usi Da EA eseese nersini ne angie mae easan enoii saa 138 Captions and Number Ranges rrisin issen ete Ahn DOG E E a E EE Nr 138 Delne Captions eredi pedis een eter De ESEE EE 139 Editing or deleting CuDI
158. 4 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Turning off URL Recognition by AutoCorrect When text is entered OpenOffice org automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink OpenOffice org formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes colour and underline the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles If OpenOffice org should not automatically recognize URLs while typing turn off this feature using one of the following methods Undo URL recognition 1 Press Ctr1 Z to undo text that has been automatically converted into a hyperlink 2 Select the hyperlink and choose Format gt Default if this conversion is not noticed until later Turn off URL recognition 1 Load a document of the type in which URL recognition is to be modified For example if modifying URL recognition for text documents open a text document 2 In OpenOffice org Writer select Tools gt AutoCorrect 3 In the AutoCorrect dialogue choose the Options tab 4 Deselect URL Recognition so that words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks In Writer there are two checkboxes in front of URL Recognition The field in the first column is for modifying in a post edit session while the field in the second column enables AutoCorrect to make the corrections while typing Other AutoCorrect functions The Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace tab has a default list of items that will be
159. 4 3 342 5 1 3 3 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 400 Examples Now for the complicated examples Command Input Field nroot 4 nroot 3 1 over 34x 2 Idline R_ alpha rdline left Idline matrix sin alpha cos oalpha cos alpha sin alpha right rdline partial over partial t x t a x olambda cdot F x t matrix a ll a 12 dotsaxis Za Im a 21 a 22s dotsaxis a 2m dotsvert dotsvert dotsdown dotsvert a nl a n2 Z dotsaxis Za nm sqrt 1 x 1 x over 2 1 over 2 x 2 over 4 dotslow t size 6 int from r 0 to r_t size 8 dr over sqrt 2 over F cm V r 1 2 over r4 my 2 r 2 left stack n kj right fact n over fact k cdot fact n k f x left Ibrace matrix 1 x in setZ 1 over x x in setQ 0 x in setR right none a a_0 a_l a_2 dotslow a 1 over a_0 1 over a_1 1 over a 2 1 over dotslow OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Formula 4 3 1 ae 43 R M sin COS Q COS amp sin amp Lx t talx AF x t Qj An 7t Am Ay An cU Am ani an2 el Gam 9 my my n n kl ER ni 1 xeZ fi 2 o xea x 0 xeR 1 a ao a a at i dot i a i ies 401 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms OpenOffice org 2 0 now allows to create forms based on the open
160. 54 56 57 60 68 72 74 75 76 78 79 81 82 83 88 95 97 98 99 110 114 116 128 131 132 143 145 157 161 164 165 177 178 179 180 184 188 197 199 203 204 208 209 210 215 221 227 229 230 232 260 266 268 269 287 289 292 302 303 309 311 312 313 314 317 322 327 330 331 332 333 334 339 341 342 352 357 368 375 376 379 387 402 406 410 412 413 414 417 426 430 431 433 435 436 459 continuously numbered captions sse 148 Contour EdMOr 3 ase er etedtecerhed ree E EPI Een 180 veiigeari me 180 control ponts sess ertet tret eo pero hoe S for editing aet ee at ees iieri 329 CORBLEFOLS eere EEEE Pee e E VE Ue Re ves EEREEER activating in fOrMS sessirnir riesene 395 avallable ee ee tee D iari 391 GUSLOTIVZIDB occ cione ettet oet ee Rp ehe cbe E EEEa 39 ICI QUID M 415 linked fields eere rete tre trat nonni 395 properties of form controls esses 392 LOOMD AR sis 390 CONV OM ECTS 245 eec ceec reed oe eeetces coe ete cceusanshecucedeas asdeccccsedssesdecee Euro converter eeeeeceeeeee nennen 201 PostScript UNIX eene 296 409 Me C M PAND Bs M EREE 26 296 nns EEES datasource records in spreadsheets 237 238 draw objects rne eer eres 336 filter conditions
161. A amp Datenquelle 1 Houseware Inc Controlling 123 Main Stre Kissimme FL 34742 2354 USA fly verkn pfungen 3 Abfragen 5 hy Tabellen BBEA ICM Motor Works L Sales 1234 Amsterc New Yor NY 10025 1234 USA Select the records and insert them into the spreadsheet 1 To manually select a record s for transfer into the spreadsheet click the row header of the record the gray field without text at top left Click the first and last record row headers of a continuous range of records while pressing the Shift key to select the range or hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired records individually 2 Drag the selected records to the row headers in the sheet where the records are to be inserted Then release the mouse button To automatically transfer only specific records from a large database into the spreadsheet use the filters in the data source browser 1 Set the cursor in the data field which contains the data should be the same in all filtered records For example to filter only records that have Main Street in their address place the cursor in a field containing Main Street 2 Click the AutoFilter icon 3 Now only the records containing the precise text Main Street are visible 4 Select the Main Street records For example using the Shift key as described above drag the selected records into the spreadsheet document and release the mouse button at the point where the f
162. Accept icon on the formula v bar The result appears in date format 5 Right click this cell i e bring up its context menu since the exercise is to see the difference between two dates as a number of days the format of cell A3 should be set as a number 6 Select Format Cells 7 The Cell Attributes dialogue appears 1 On the Numbers tab the Number category will appear highlighted The format is set to General which causes among other things the result of calculations containing date entries to also be displayed as a date 2 Set the number format to 1 234 for example 3 Press OK to close the dialogue 8 Cell A3 will now contain the number of days between today s date and the specified date 9 Experiment with some additional formulae 1 in A4 enter A3 24 to calculate the hours 2 in A5 enter A4 60 for the minutes 3 in A6 enter A5 60 for seconds OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 194 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 4 Press the Enter key after each formula The time since the birthday will be calculated and displayed in the various units The values are calculated as of the exact moment when the last formula was entered and confirmed by pressing the Enter key This value is not automatically updated although NOW continuously changes of course In the Tools menu the menu item Cell Contents gt AutoCalculate is normally active however automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW Conside
163. Content z wj Analyze SOL command es m P T LUdrlrtttCt i CSOSCSC C S S MN seo Allow additions e Allow modifications fs w Delete data Fs j Add data only aM e Navigation bar eus Figure 2 The Data tab of the Form Properties dialogue lets one specify the data source for a form Once the form has a data source one can link fields to controls To do so add the control to the form and then open its Properties dialogue On the Data tab choose a field from the Data Field drop down list Be aware that when linking a field to a control in this way every time that control is used changes that are made are stored in the actual data source OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 352 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Activating form controls in a document While editing a data source is one use for forms users may want to use a form for other things For example to add a button to a spreadsheet that performs a calculation or to a presentation that runs a video clip Each control has a number of events associated with it An event is something that occurs due to user action For example when the mouse is moved an event fires each time it enters the area of a control and each time it leaves that control s area Typing a character also fires an event So does clicking the mouse The Events tab of the Properties dialogue for each control lists the events available for that control Fi
164. E DE DENM SANE 397 Summation Charactet s quei rr HRK RNRIR EEE EER E Men AER REVELA UR IUBE TA Me vu EE 397 Product A I UCET TOTO EO TT 397 Vectors and Matices siirsi eiee a TODOS 398 bi cee hadi ee a EA M 398 MaK MH ra Ea 398 UACUILECTE UID N PN NE d ES 399 ly MAN S 399 eios PT MUN 399 Ec T A 399 AY I E RN T TTE E 400 BEAN ia esee retten cain ons gus yen vade bg ond pn itta SUD NDA TERQUE 401 Chapter 12 Building Forms with XIOS isisisi esn ep Pee ep nee or Pee eR ean Tan M 402 Step by Step Proced re ui ione pr Rr on oc ERE RR UR KU DU AEE Up PERRO MEER PLU ad n RE 402 Chapter 13 Xml Eeb lcen ilie eee reso rod S vests tease ERRRRI ERR Ext te RENNES TEENIS FA UIT Eea 412 Flat S Mr co o D HP 412 Creatine a new Docbook FUMER euo PEE URINE NN PARUM MENSAS RO MEUM 417 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problemi reete rh sette rant ui bert n ak 418 Error Message contains Get Storage No Content uus eese rerit teet rte n traba ne eus 418 Under VID WSE as cso susan iie vati d ARUM Qv UL D UNE rd Gg RR QUE 418 BM eee Aang AN osos t ernen IRR rU MM RM a pQU TM MA HU DOE UE EE 418 Sunelc duser metillati 0S iius ea elec RHONE LSU E HIA REN GA Pe ba UU ua 418 UNIX systems oc eeu Dam ass ade nce qM MM C E Dose tu E UE 419 Outline numbering is not retained After 8 SIVE occ eom iUe eot cdi de Eva ck a o i
165. Edit AutoText icon on the Insert toolbar and select an AutoText category as shown below OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 83 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer M Standard Use the left mouse button to select the AutoText for insertion Upon releasing the mouse button the text is inserted in the text at the cursor position Note Use the AutoComplete function in a similar manner Directions for doing this function are found in Help Defining AutoText Write the desired text It may contain formatting and embedded graphics Select the text Now select Edit gt AutoText In the large list box select the category e g default assign a name for the new text component in the text box and correct the abbreviation if necessary Now save the text component via AutoText gt New and close the dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 84 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Using AutoText in Networks Multiple AutoText lists can be used An example would be in a typical OpenOffice org network installation A read only company wide AutoText list might be located on the server and a user defined AutoText list located in a user s individual work area Both can be read and used while typing Choose Tools gt Options OpenOffice org gt Paths Double click AutoText Two paths are entered here The first path will take the selected AutoText list from the server installation while the second
166. Expressions This list is also in Help but is included here as a convenience Character Result Use Represents any single character The search term sh rt finds both shirt and short Using Peter will find this search term only if it appears at the beginning of a paragraph Special characters for example blank spaces and character anchored frames at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored This symbol represents the paragraph mark for use in a regular expression For example using will only find the search term if it appears at the end of a paragraph So if one searches for say Peter at the end of a paragraph enter Peter in the Search for box Special characters for example blank spaces and character anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored Enter in the Search box to find empty paragraphs Finds zero or more of the character immediately in front of the For example Ab c finds Ac Abc Abbc Abbbc and so on The character before this symbol must appear at least once AX 4 finds AX4 AXX4 but not A4 Only finds the character no digits that is specified Used to turn off any special interpretation of the character by OpenOffice For example if one searches for V 2 e ang will be found That is the regular expression interpretation of is turned off only for that one instance Finds a hard row break that was inserted with Shift Enter To change row breaks
167. F4 open the bibliography database table biblio in the data source view While pressing Shift 4Ctrl drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created there 3 Turn off the design mode To do this open the Form Functions floating toolbar and click the Design Mode on off icon so that it does not appear to be pressed 4 On the form toolbar click the Form based filters icon The current document is displayed with its inserted form functions as an empty edit mask At the bottom edge will be the filter bar 5 Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields When formulating filter conditions various operators and commands are available Apart from the relational operators there are SQL specific commands that query the content of database fields If these commands are used in the OpenOffice org syntax OpenOffice org automatically converts these into the corresponding SQL syntax SQL commands can also be entered directly The following tables give an overview of the operators and commands Operators Operator Meaning Condition is satisfied if equal to the content of the field is identical to the indicated expression The operator will not be displayed in the query fields If a value without any operator is entered the operator will be automatically adopted lt gt not equal to the content of the field does not correspond to the specified expression gt greater than the content
168. Function toolbar or click briefly on the Insert Table icon on the Insert floating toolbar Either opens the Insert Table dialogue Inserting a single row table by typing 0r l Type a sequence of two or more or characters at the start of a new paragraph and end it by pressing the Enter key The paragraph is automatically converted to a table with a single row and the number of columns equal to one less than the number of or characters Separate the or characters by one or more of any of tab space in order to determine the initial column widths This feature can be turned off on via the Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options dialogue by toggling the Create Table check box Inserting from OpenOffice org Calc with the clipboard 1 Open the text document and the Calc document from which to insert a range of cells 2 Select a range of cells from the spreadsheet Copy it to the clipboard for example with CErl e 3 Switch to the text document There are now various options for inserting the range of cells Use the normal command Edit gt Paste or Ct r1 V to insert the range of cells as an OLE object Double click on the OLE object in order to edit it with Calc tools and commands Click outside the object to quit edit mode Choose Edit gt Paste Special to open the Paste Special dialogue which has several options from which to choose The same options can also be found on the submenu of th
169. Help a home sun so docs user guide my draw sxd Y A E H amp A Hs E E r Simm ek 7 E T eed EPOR HR Do Ugo S EAZ suse 1 JT z TES ERE IE CHI m sw aaa J NENENEEE HS HH HEH S SEER EEE ESSENNEENS NESS t3 i 9 21 2 47 2 0 00 x 0 00 39 Slide 1 E OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 327 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Fora border around the company name convert it into polygons Then select a line width greater than 0 00 and a line style not equal to transparent on the object bar to make the borders of each letter visible Fifth Step Create a simple drawing object as a background for the logo for example an ellipse Choose Modify gt Position to place the object all the way to the back E my draw sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help 3 TG Ge Ww W o s loo AJM sack 7 eedem ere eene en E MIETEN T ae ee ae Sey eee eee Govt Ques a fm ole gt stide 1 _ of 0 EE eile ae S v 39 ee S w d TA xXENNHENHEHEHES HE HE SEES See BERS EERE REEEESD SENNENS HS CO 53 0 00 x 0 00 3996 Slide 1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 328 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Now there is a perfect 3D logo created with OpenOffice org in only five steps Note that the user can also access the functions through the context me
170. In the New Template text field enter the name for the template 4 click OK to complete the process of creating a template With the template saved the next time when File gt New gt Templates and Documents is used to select a template for creating a document this template will selectable from those available All the user defined Text and Paragraph Styles will then be available for the new document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 68 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer The Advantages of the Styles and Formatting Window From the preceding instructions users now know how to apply the styles in the Styles and Formatting window to text how to apply custom Styles and how to create a template that uses these custom styles This gives an advantage in that Styles do not have to be redefined every time Plus one can apply Styles from one text document to another text document by selecting Format gt Styles gt Load In this way the desired formatting can be applied to the document quickly and easily But the Styles and Formatting window offers still more possibilities Formatting Multiple Paragraphs In the work described above the same Paragraph Style Heading 1 was applied to each of several paragraphs The Styles and Formatting window can save a lot of time on this task 1 In the Styles and Formatting window select the Style that should be applied on multiple paragraphs by clicking the Style once 2 At the top o
171. Iv jus jio E Ozo F E fios transparent m Transparency 1o E The Eyedropper can replace selected colours and to a point similar colours with other colours up to four colours at one time If the replacement is not what is desired or needed reverse it with one click on Undo on the function bar Use the Eyedropper to match the colours of different bitmaps or to redo a bitmap with say the colours of a company logo The Transparency attribute also serves as a colour Transparency in an image with a colour can be replaced for example with white This is Helpful when for example the printer driver has problems with printing transparent graphics If the user wants to produce an image on HTML pages to publish in the Internet like the illustration of a product for example it usually looks better when one does not see a rectangular picture but rather sees only the illustration of the product against the uniform background of the web page If there is a white background in the picture behind the product use the Eyedropper to replace the colour white with Transparent i e no colour and save and or export the image in a format that supports the transparency attribute such as GIF When using this method be sure that the illustration of the product itself does not contain any white parts since these would also become transparent just like the background To replace colours with the Eyedropper 1 Insert an image in
172. License applies to Documentation to which the Initial Writer has attached this License and the notice in the Appendix 5 0 VERSIONS OF THE LICENSE 5 1 New Versions Initial Writer may publish revised and or new versions of the License from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number 5 2 Effect of New Versions Once Documentation has been published under a particular version of the License You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such Documentation under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Insert name of the foundation company Initial Writer or whoever may modify this License No one other than Insert name of the foundation company Initial Writer or whoever may modify this License has the right to modify the terms of this License Filling in the name of the Initial Writer Original Documentation or Contributor in the notice described in the Appendix shall not be deemed to be Modifications of this License 6 0 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENTATION IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY ACCURACY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENTATION IS WITH YOU SHOULD AN
173. Logically this operation corresponds to the following formula A gt B1 Bn The selected polygons are merged so that they make one object the surface of which is the sum of all the parts Boolean OR Shapes Intersect The selected polygons are joined into one single polygon that corresponds to the intersection area Boolean AND Only the area where all polygons overlap remains Choosing Shapes gt Subtract and Shapes gt Intersect also permits cutting parts out of a bitmap The illustration below shows examples OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 306 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Graphic Objects in Drawings and Presentations Both Draw and Impress use a vector graphic format However pixel graphics or bitmap graphics may also be inserted into presentations or drawings and documents or certain sections of a document can be exported in a pixel graphic format Inserting Bitmaps Bitmap images can be inserted in any Writer Calc Draw or Impress document 1 Choose Insert gt Picture 2 Select the file With the File type field users can limit the selection to certain file types 3 Check the Link box to hyperlink to the original file where embedding is not needed If the Link box is checked whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded and any editing steps that have been applied to the local copy of the image in the document are re applied and the image is display
174. N 225 44 00 15 05 05 15 25 95c3869e Basic script lc xml 59152 Defl N 5041 92 00 15 05 05 15 25 e86699c4 styles xml 1381 Stored 1381 0 00 15 05 05 15225 70e3c0fc meta xml 6674 Defl N 0 0 00 15 05 05 15 25 aflecee5 Thumbnails thumbnail png 6841 Defl N 1230 82 00 15 05 05 15 25 0d922df6 settings xml 1602 Defl N 349 78 00 15 05 05 15 25 8e61970e META INF manifest xml 87402 16675 81 00 12 files Note Under Windows output should be similar to the above The text content of the document is located in content xml This file can be viewed with for example a pure text editor By default content xml is stored without indents or any other type of formatting so that the time needed for saving and opening is minimized By unchecking Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General gt Size optimization for XML format this procedure can be changed so that the lines saved are structured in a more human readable format e meta xml contains the meta information on the document which is entered via File gt Properties In documents saved with security meta xml remains unsecured settings xml contains further information on settings for this document for example on the printer on the recording of changes the associated data sources and so on e Styles xml retains the styles defined for the document For example these can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window meta inf manifest xml file describes the structure of the XML file
175. OB ooo iret RERO PEU RS aa CR ARINR Cn Fon Un M RAN LUE 139 Inserting an object in a number ABEE ueeeeeoe op Ve erii ERREUR tea ENERO RETI p EOS 139 urbes Mustations by CBaptetS suce am iR eda eique dva Pu eia o e id UR RR 140 Ue Uy 2 92 611 ets asso ee ERU E m ee Ta IA UM roe UU S PDA ERN 140 Inserting Graphics via dialogdig iiueieeie re tci P een Reb Fen d EY NU KEY EASY ERR 140 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 ix Inserting Graphics From OpenOffice org Draw or Impress sessesesees 140 Inserting Graphics via Drag and Drop From the Gallery sssssss 141 Adding Graphics To the Gallery via Drag and Dm gocessasepsiveesesvovesipvaniechoxivassensseieverans 142 Inserting Graphics With a Scaner o iiec eie or rn RH DEREN E E a a 142 Inserting a Chart From OpenOffice org IG cons ccceccataskeepssharnenteroneantaenienanansynesscacasseanarvicvors 142 Dragging and Dropping the Chart with Move or COpy i c s ccccsssssssssencessccssasecessssonsasconees 142 Charts with Linked Data oos regina IND NERONE NEM TM DNI 143 Inserting Decorative Honsonital Lines eerie iei Hte MERI REOR SERRE EVE Petra eR 143 Headers Footers and DOO e ioco aio uis a Reha nas DDR EDU Venu Hind mde meee 144 Some Notes Concerning Headers and Papier ssec tr err ertet an legea sek e a ore 144 Inserting Page Numbers mi P OOtETS Luo oae ote e Rte een MEME M M OON ME 144 Pormatting Headers and FOOLorsiuia o esc ora vetere
176. Objects and Form Objects Draw objects that are inserted in a document using the Draw Functions floating toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size Likewise the user can do the same with form objects inserted using the Form Functions floating toolbar Turning on protection 1 Select Format gt Position and Size gt Position or Size tab 2 Check the Protect check box Turning off protection 1 Choose Format gt Position and Size gt Position or Size tab 2 Uncheck the Protect check box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 379 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Protecting Records Changes made in a document can be recorded by choosing either Edit gt Changes gt Record or Edit gt Changes gt Protect Records If Protect Records is selected one must enter the correct password in order to turn off the function or accept or reject changes 1 Select Protect Records This opens the Password dialogue 2 Enter a password consisting of at least 5 characters and confirm it 3 Click OK Digital Signatures and Encryption Overview Use of Digital signatures in OpenOffice org is new to with OpenOffice org 2 0 and is relatively new in other office applications Nonetheless the requirement to protect data from being modified has existed for a long time While OpenOffice org 1 1 x offered protection for documents with encryption and passwords digital signatures offer enhanced secure protection
177. Office org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help a home sun so docs user guide my draw sxd tZ cm E Le s do I Q invisible ooo HEE sack gt SS SSeS O eee eee eres eee eee Seen er er reny T ee mj Slide 1 4 H ea ae E BSS v 8 be 3 Depending on the type of gradient one or both of the objects can be moved with the mouse and thus determine the origin end and angle of the colour gradient When the colour bar is displayed assign colours by dragging and dropping the selection to each object to determine the start and end colours In a similar manner the transparency of an object can be set using the V Transparency icon With this tool defining a grayscale gradient which spans from black 096 transparency i e opaque to white 100 transparent is possible Organizing the Attribute Tables The icons Load Gradients List and Save Gradients List open dialogues for opening and saving gradients The current gradient list for instance might consist of all gradients which are custom defined for a certain project Save the list then reload the standard list This way the list and the memory space can be kept free from resources that are not needed To continue working on this project later simply reload the custom gradient list The same procedure applies for loading and saving lists of hatchings and bitmaps OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 317
178. Office org Help To personally define the line attributes and direction use the Line drawing object as follows 1 On the Standard toolbar click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Draw Functions toolbar 2 Click the Line icon The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair symbol with a line beside it 3 In a document locate where the line should begin click hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where to end the line Holding down the Shift key restricts drawing to horizontal vertical and diagonal lines only 4 Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length 5 To draw more lines repeat steps 2 and 3 6 End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Selection icon from the Draw Functions floating toolbar 7 Once all lines are complete select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key By using this multiple selection method one can assign all of them a common colour width or any other attribute as needed Note If these lines or other draw objects are exported in a text document to HTML Be aware that such objects are not defined as part of the Internet page description language HTML and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format but are exported as graphics OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 93 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Editing Text With FontWork The FontWork program mod
179. Once selected the user can decide whether to employ the context menu command the F3 key or double clicking the group to enter it Exiting Groups Exiting a group may be accomplished in these three ways using a menu command the key combination Ctr1 F3 or double clicking outside all of the objects in the group The group remains selected upon exit thus making it possible to quickly enter and exit a group using the keyboard OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 303 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Navigating Between Objects of a Group Using the Tab and Shift Tab keys the user can move forward and backward along the row of objects in a group edited with F3 or on a page If the keys are pressed again on a final object while going in one direction the first object selected will appear next OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 304 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes In Draw and Impress graphic objects may be combined in different ways Several single objects can be brought together to create new objects by using Boolean set operators on the original geometry Combining Objects 1 Select several objects 2 Choose Combine from the context menu In contrast to groups which consist of single objects a combination fuses the component objects into one single new geometric object with its own new properties The combination may be undone again later but the individual objects m
180. OpenOffice org User Guide for Version 2 x a Ea cc OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 0 15 First edition 2005 04 11 First English edition 2005 04 11 Copyright and trademark information The contents of this Documentation are subject to the Public Documentation License Version 1 0 the License you may only use this Documentation if you comply with the terms of this License A copy of the License is available at http www openoffice org licenses PDL rtf The Original Documentation is OpenOffice org User Guide for Version 2 x Contributor s G Roderick Singleton Portions created by G Roderick Singleton are Copyright 2005 All Rights Reserved All trademarks within this guide belong to legitimate owners Note a copy of the PDL is included in this template and is also available at http www openoffice org licenses PDL rtf Feedback Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to grsingleton openoffice org Acknowledgements I wish to recognize the Technical Writers of Sun Microsystems for the fine model they have provided for organizing this document I also wish to thank Erwin Tenhumberg for his blog Mary Ellen Dawley for indexing and Ross Johnson for his inspiration editing and corrections Version 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 122 0 13 0 14 0 15 2005 04 11 2005 07 11 2005 07 15 2
181. PPM File 2569 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 E File name fe Open Version P Cancel File type All files E Help Read only This dialogue is described in detail in the OpenOffice org Help However here are a few tips Change the size of the dialogue by dragging the borders of the dialogue with the mouse Click the Default Directory icon to go straight to one s work directory To define a work directory see the Changing the Work Directory section z S Long click or short click the Up One Level icon A short click takes the user one directory higher A long click opens a submenu with a choice of superordinate directories To only see files containing a certain name enter the name with wildcards in OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 16 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org the File name pull down list and press Enter If txt for example is used only the files having txt at the end of their names will be displayed If s is used all names beginning with the letter s will be displayed Documents may be opened with write protection enabled To edit a read only document click the Edit File icon on the function bar The Templates and Documents dialogue The Templates and Documents dialogue can be regarded as a kind of command centre for OpenOffice org documents It provides easy access to a user s work directory and to any supplied sample documents Here find all document templates both the supplied ones a
182. Select the area table that is to be written as a csv file 2 Where formulae are to be exported as formulae e g in the form SUM A1 B5 proceed as follows a Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View b Under Display check the formulae field c Click OK To export the calculation results instead of the formulae do not mark formulae 3 Choose File gt Save as to open the Save as dialogue 4 In the File type field select the format Text CSV 5 Enter a name and click Save a From the Export Text dialogue that appears select the records and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported b Confirm with OK Caution If the numbers contain commas as the decimal separator or thousands separator do not select the comma as the field delimiter If the text contains double quotation marks select the single quotation mark as separator and vice versa 6 If necessary after saving the document uncheck formulae in order to see the calculated results in the table again Importing a CSV File 1 Choose File gt Open to bring up the dialogue 2 In the File type field select the format Text CSV 3 Select the file from the list 4 Click Open When a file has the csv extension the file type is automatically recognized CA The Import text files dialogue opens 6 Click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 243 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 7 If the CSV file contains formu
183. Select the range D2 F11 i e all three columns Select Data gt Multiple Operations With the cursor in the formulae field mark cells B5 through C5 Set the cursor in the Columns field and click cell B4 Close the dialogue with OK Profit will be displayed in column E and the annual profit per item in column F Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns Calc allows joint multiple operations for columns and rows in so called cross tables The formula cell has to refer to both the data range arranged in rows and the one arranged in columns Select the range defined by both data ranges and call the multiple operation dialogue Enter the reference to the formula in the Formula field The Row field is used to enter the reference to the first cell of the range arranged in rows and the Column field the first cell of the range arranged in columns OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 232 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calculating with Two Variables Consider columns A and B of the sample table above Now try varying not only the quantity produced annually but also the selling price and calculate the profit in each case Expand the table shown above so that D2 through D11 contain the numbers 500 1000 and so on up to 5000 In E1 through H1 enter the numbers 8 10 15 and 20 Selling price Direct costs 10000 2000 1500 1000 2000 B4 B1 gt B2 gt B3 2000 2000 6000 Fixed costs 2 3 4 Quant
184. Style default dialogue Instead of default the title bar of the dialogue contains the name of the current Page Style 2 Go to the Page tab 3 In the Numbering pull down list determine how the numbering should appear on all pages with this Style 4 Close the dialogue with OK 5 Now select the As Page Style format for the field which shows the page number see the description of direct formats above Users may change other properties in the footer such as the font by editing the Footer Paragraph Style so that the changes will apply to all footers Place the cursor in the footer Call the context menu and choose Edit Paragraph Style Increasing the spacing of the footer from the text above is also a format attribute of the Page Style 1 Select the page style in the Styles and Formatting window 2 Right click and select the Modify command in the the context menu OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 76 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 3 In the Page Style dialogue set the desired width and height of the footer Page Styles Summary Unlike assigning a character style or paragraph style where one first selects the text then double clicks in the Styles and Formatting window on the name of the style to apply the chosen style applying page styles is different A page style is always a property of the first paragraph of a page whether or not this the first paragraph of the current page or the first p
185. Table is only available if Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables gt Index Table gt Protected from manual changes is selected This is because by default indices and tables of contents are protected from changes Editing the Format of an Index Table of Contents The Entries tab on the Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables dialogue permits editing the format of an index In this tab alter the way in which entries tab stops and page numbers are arranged et cetera Using the Styles tab assign other Paragraph Styles For detailed instructions refer to the OpenOffice org Help Hyperlinks can be automatically assigned to the entries in the table of contents using the following method 1 Go to the Entries tab page 2 Place the cursor in the structure row before the entry lt E gt 3 Click the Hyperlink button then place the cursor after lt E gt and click Hyperlink again Where the list is a table of contents for the document click a hyperlink to go straight to the first occurrence however for this to work the table of contents must be generated from headings Indexes Covering Multiple Documents There are several ways of creating an index covering multiple documents Create an index in each individual document then copy the indexes into a document and post edit them Amore elegant solution is to select each individual index as a section Insert gt Section and insert these sections in
186. The formula is I C n i 100 Note Formula can also be entered using the variable names Interest Capital Year Interest rate 100 Q 3 capita C Years n Interest rate i Interest ANN g s 15000000 1 7 5096 11 250 00 In this example the investment capital of 150 000 and an interest rate of 7 5 is calculated to result in annual interest income of 11 250 The cells are formatted after calculation A5 and E5 as currency and C5 as percent The cell width is adjusted automatically For ease of use assign names to cells so that they can be used in the formula Naming Cells Using the example graphic above 1 Select cell A5 in the example 2 Select Insert gt Names gt Define The Define Names dialogue appears 3 Enter the name C in the text field At the bottom of the dialogue the reference SSheet1 SAS5 is displayed Double check for accuracy Click Add Click Add 4 5 6 In the next field enter an i set the cursor in cell B5 7 8 Next enter ann in the empty field set the cursor in cell C5 9 Click Add 10 Close the dialogue with OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 230 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 11 Now enter the formula in E5 using the variables C n i instead of A5 B5 C5 Start Goal Seek Assume an interest rate of 7 5 and that the number of years 1 will remain constant However the user may want to know how much more or less investmen
187. To do this use the Mirror on even pages option on the Type tab of the Graphics dialogue choose Picture in the context menu of the graphic Captions and Number Ranges In text documents one can create separate continuously numbered captions for figures tables and drawing objects OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 138 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Users can also define as many separate number ranges as desired The captions are linked to the figures tables or drawing objects in a frame Select the frame when the object is moved Defining Captions 1 Select the figure or the object or place the cursor in the table that requires a caption 2 Open the Caption dialogue with the command Insert gt Caption 3 The dialogue shows a preview of how the caption will look Further text can be inserted in the Caption field 4 Click OK The paragraph format of an automatically applied caption is obtained from the Paragraph Style Illustration Table Drawing or Text All of these paragraph styles are derived from the Caption Paragraph Style So if all captions always are to appear in green for example simply modify the Caption Paragraph Style accordingly in the Styles and Formatting window To examine this switch the Styles and Formatting window to the A11 Styles view or to the hierarchical view Editing or deleting captions A caption is normal text which is placed together with an obje
188. U OL OO OS 290 Arrange me COGS uicem RA ECRIRE DIR a NENNEN URN eee d oa Uu a ERE A NA Ronan 290 ZEIT IUEBBS LL pue ede O emn EE 290 Dirsing Sectors and Segments isse vid Yao HAE OU RN HORA ESR EU IE INR RI Cod ER QUY talanasaanee 291 Eoen aM Lors one ee ne ee T S 292 ls oor BEL v E 292 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xvii Deb co aM AC CO TTC QE 292 LECT IPS NITET TTE 293 Convertino TOC DEO OE aeo od eedem A quae RUN Seta mmu Ute dust Desa ea 293 Digwing Bditing and Converting ossessi er RENDER KROHRV ERU UH aE UQ UR EE RO NAR RN PA 294 AURI LOTA RITE TOTO EUER 294 Dine Hb EE esise naira we Equo tana rtu uit en EUR Nis eR ID HR NUM dE 294 Editing EAN esie PRENNENT DRM NER UI UI a ee 295 Vectonz ne Bitmaps siere a E MA EE eae uo PIS RM ESEE AEA aaa 296 Cosverims Text Characters To CUEVES eise ep paa Leivadinsanneteesigaeidussuscenaed Ns EP Festi HERAUS 297 Cover To Curves Polygons SD aer dasotenakieme dre ie aw pi RU ces A Ra URS 298 Working Ni ANN Lea cns ados UR ARS DUI E REEE M Ie NUMEN MEM et RE 301 Doin tii ata OBJEC Lied tnde Rit and ban EK p PN ut UR A Go RR t 301 Cross Fading Between Two CADP si cope vbEr peste rernm RU t ur rus Y PPRd cd pU er edUS 302 Groupin Rel Los RECETTE LLL 303 Entenne ASM ooo ob Yet PORE RUNE NER Rep RR S Dv UA Fede ud SPD UR Hos E RET RUE 303 Exiting I ais en oto REDE Uo nana lin ax EMI I eae ean Mevesiana qt dud RR ORI 303 Navigating Between Objects of a IR OUID 52 aacaad
189. What to do when document prints or exports with blank pages This is issue is affected by the book centric paradigm of left right even odd pages that is so deeply ingrained into OpenOffice org that it applies even when using nothing but the Default page style 1 Create a Title page style from DefaultorFirst Page 2 Lay out the Title page however it needs to look 3 Next select Insert gt Manual Break and specify Next Styleas First Page numbered 1 This results in the phantom page which the following steps will correct 4 Select the Styles and Formatting window and modify the First page style layout to be Left Only 5 The status bar will now show Page 1 2 2 which is what is wanted The page style following First Page is default and the page numbering will proceed without surprises from there OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 420 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems What to to do with a General error General input output error This error message indicates that the files script xlc and dialog xlc could be missing or corrupted Look for them in the directory SHOME openoffice org2 user basic under NIX or under Windows C Document and Settings lt username gt Application Data OpenOffice org lt release gt user basic To fix the problem try exiting OpenOffice org including the Quickstarter if any and copy these from the directory where OOo is installed gt presets basic under NIX or un
190. Y DOCUMENTATION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT THE INITIAL WRITER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENTATION IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 7 0 TERMINATION This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach All sublicenses to the Documentation which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License Provisions which by their nature must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive 8 0 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 432 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER IN TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL THE INITIAL WRITER ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF DOCUMENTATION OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OF THE DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 9 0 U S GOVERNMENT END
191. a common index document as a link Ifone is working with a master document common indexes are possible across all sub documents More information about master documents can be found later in this manual OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 107 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Headings and Numbering Most text documents benefit from use of headings and numbering Writer provides automatic functions that help the user manage the structure and formatting of documents via headings and numbering Numbering and Numbering Styles Numbering in a document may be applied either as direct formatting or by using a Style in the same manner as is done with other paragraph attributes such as Justified or Line Spacing The icons on the numbering object bar and the options in the Format gt Bullets and Numbering dialogue apply direct formatting Direct formatting is also applied when automatic numbering is used via the AutoFormat AutoCorrect function A Numbering Style can be applied as part of certain Paragraph Styles or applied directly to the paragraphs With the former case one can take advantage of the paragraph formatting system for numbering as well Changing a Numbering Style ensures that all numbering created with this Style will be automatically reformatted Numbering Styles are described in the OpenOffice org Help Turning Bullets On and Off Bullets may be turned on an off in a document The following is one
192. a drawing from the Gallery to the page and convert it into a 3D object Draw positions the objects contained in the drawing in various 3D levels corresponding to their arrangement in 2D levels For example in 3D the stars from the European flag stand out vividly from the blue background of the flag Most objects can be converted to 3D OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 299 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Groups can be converted as long as they contain convertible objects Bitmaps will be laid as a texture over a rectangular object of adequate size e Metafiles will be broken down into a group of polygons and then converted Draw objects with text on them display the text in raised form on their surface e g a rectangle which was double clicked and on which text was placed OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 300 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Working With Objects Individual objects in an impress or draw document can be selected copied cut and pasted in much the same way as words in text Other actions are also possible that are only available for graphic objects For example objects may be duplicated cross faded or grouped Figures placed in the drawing area such as rectangles circles lines et cetera are treated as objects Duplicating Objects Objects in Draw are easily duplicated This feature allows the user to make a set number of copies of an object which differ in consistent degrees from one cop
193. aana aE si 147 Defining Difrerent Ple aer esent Dro Piste eee EEES ENE N 147 Inserting Pape Numbers of Continuation PA eS i esu ee gcn etch tape ra ont beke edu o andan Eo ep 147 Inserting Lines Under Headers ooi UR DERI DRE ARN DEBE DEIN SI emer eter reer 148 Footnotes and ESBOeSuns scito pe aO REA RN DOR eaea CURRERE PER PH LU A RV 149 Inserting and Editing TOWER esooeseotrim dob ri PPP RUNS ebed rimis maten riu nubi eee 150 T sertng a Tout Vid AN C oos vem evasit dca ata Mate vis aqaa pud reg 150 Tns rtine a foothote viaa CEOs oor annt SOR OK RA Ur eee mane re eee eee 150 Tips for Working with FG tt scoop one br be ERR Hn HR erede rasa nid 151 Spacing Between api a os sa pecan a P ESEFH RA IS RENRIISEEUD ERE Y MR IN CRUAT Ee eRe TRENE ERN etrini 151 Spellcheck Dictionaries DBypDSHSIODL ee pes oeasitosy niai N LUN HA ARR HI M 152 Controlling Spellcheck via the D DOE Deep ones mE er eee HA reer eee RH LUN DRM E rere 152 Automatic SPOUSE ios uiua brin VOU RU sweetie PA E MA Ea db M Ou do HERR 153 To exclude words from the SpCIICHOBE e eos eh titre pEDA Eat abla PERF GR raa XE eso ND In PERUS 153 Removing Words From User Defined Dictionaries use ree iret tri hrec 153 ECHO o osesecndtictn pu DNUS NE dO DE M NRI E 153 JZtonalic hyphen t cop escte d visiovr ae Rs bra v d Ri vba S ead ERR RS 154 Manual opera BOE ene Re 154 Mai ets scx eis EU mm 155 Pond Letters B siness Cards and E dels s ose pete e i E NER EAM 157 Creating Form Letters sec
194. ab 1 2 3 4 In the Numbering pull down list select 1 2 3 5 Inthe Start at spin box select the starting value in this case 3 6 Click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 120 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Numbering Lines When lines are to be numbered within a document select the line numbering properties that are wanted via the Tools gt Line Numbering The user can decide for the whole of the document whether blank lines should be counted as well and whether lines in text frames should likewise be counted Decide the intervals at which lines are numbered and insert separators between these intervals to identify a particular line number The line numbering appears on the screen and is printed Other line numbering properties can be applied to the paragraph Format gt Paragraph gt Numbering or to the Paragraph Style Doing it this way ensures greater flexibility as one can exclude a paragraph from the line numbering or restart the numbering at a paragraph with any value Line Numbering for All Paragraphs 1 Select Tools gt Line Numbering 2 Check the Show numbering check box This numbers all the paragraphs in the document Line Numbering for Particular Paragraphs Enable the line numbering for all paragraphs as described above Open the Styles and Formatting window and click the Default paragraph style Right click to open the context menu Click Modify to open the P
195. ab page Check the tables that should be visible in OpenOffice org 9 On the General tab page enter a name for this data source in the Name box 10 Close the dialogue by clicking OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 342 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Importing Data Into OpenOffice org If one is exchanging data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and which does not allow dBase import and export it is often possible to exchange the data via a common text format Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format To exchange data in a text format use the Calc import export filter 1 Export the desired data from the source database in a text format The CSV text format is highly recommended since it separates data fields by using commas and records by inserting line breaks 2 Open the data with the Text CSV file filter Select this file filter in the Open dialogue in the Files of type list box Select the file and click Open 3 This displays the Import text files dialogue Here users can decide which data to include from the text document Once the data is in a Calc spreadsheet it can be edited as desired Users have two ways of saving the data in a OpenOffice org data source Save the current OpenOffice org Calc spreadsheet in dBase format in the folder of a dBase database To do this choose File gt Save As then select the File Type dBase and the folder of the dBase database Check the data rang
196. adings that are formatted for example with the Paragraph Style Heading 1 Selectthe Heading 1 Style from the Paragraph Style list box and the option 1 2 3 from the Number list box below it 2 Select the first illustration to number 3 Select Insert gt Caption 4 In the dialogue that appears select Illustration as the category and Arabic 1 2 3 as the numbering Caption text can also be entered in this dialogue 5 Click Options Specify the chapter numbering in the Number Range Options dialogue For this example select option 1 under Level and specify the separator wanted for chapter wise numbering 6 Click OK 7 In the Caption dialogue click OK The illustrations are now numbered by chapters Do the same for all other illustrations in the document The numbering occurs automatically AII illustrations within one chapter level are numbered and the user can enter at which chapter level to switch the numbering in the Number Range Options dialogue NOTE Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General and under Caption mark the Automatic check box When the button next to Object selection is clicked the Caption dialogue appears This is where one can for example determine that from now on all illustrations in text documents receive a caption automatically Inserting Graphics Graphic objects can be inserted in a text document in several ways The following sections describe the
197. adsheet we would like to introduce the second method for transferring selected records from the data source view to the Calc spreadsheet Dragging and Dropping Copies into Spreadsheets This method works with all formats and users have the choice of transferring all or only selected records into the spreadsheet document To use this method log into the data source in Calc 1 Choose Tools gt Data Sources 2 The Data Source Administration dialogue opens 3 Click New Data Source 4 In the Database type field select dBase to log into a dBase database 5 Click the button OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 222 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 6 Select the folder containing the database file s in dof format 7 Click OK 8 In the Name field enter a name to be displayed for the data source 9 Click Apply 10 Click the Tables tab Put a check mark next to the names of the table s needed in the data source view 11 Click OK 12 Open the data source browser F4 13 Click onthe plus sign next to Tables to view the existing tables in the database 14 In a dBase database each dbf file in the directory is a table of its own 15 Click the name of the table The records are displayed in the data source browser pl amp t i v X v e3 er d amp Se dp Arressen sss esee we s caus sumens om www mmcss cu E 485 Bibliography Patricia PTH TV 2345 1st St Washing DC 20001 3456 US
198. again to disable superscripting Note At the end of a paragraph an easier way to disable superscripting is to press the right arrow key once 5 Continue entering the text Suppose that entering H2O with a subscript 2 is wanted 1 Type the H 2 Press Ctr1 Shift B Ctrl Shift B is the keyboard shortcut for subscript text Ctrl Shift P for superscript text 3 Type the 2 4 Press the keyboard shortcut again There is an even easier way when the cursor is at the end of a paragraph Press the right arrow key once 5 Type the O OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 57 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Applying subscripts superscripts retrospectively Let s say that while proofing text the text H2O needs to altered to include a subscripted 2 giving H O To do so use either the key shortcut method described above or use this method method via the menu command 1 Highlight the character that should be in subscript superscript For example select the 2 2 Choose Format gt Character This opens the Character dialogue 3 Click the Position tab 4 Select Subscript and click OK The 2 now appears in subscript Writing in Uppercase or Lowercase Writer has the following methods for re formatting text in uppercase or lowercase To display in uppercase Highlight the text and choose Format gt Character gt Font Effects tab and under Ef fects select Capitals Displaying in lowercase High
199. age Enabling this option gives a brief description of each item on the screen when the mouse pointer is hovered over the item for a moment Turning extended tips on and off Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Extended Tips to turn extended tips on and off The command is checked when the Extended Tips function is switched on Press Shift F1 to turn Extended Tips on temporarily The pointer turns into the k Extended Tips pointer Now see the Extended Tips for any element on the screen as the mouse pointer is moved As soon as the mouse is clicked or a key pressed the pointer returns to the normal mouse pointer Help Agent When certain actions are performed in OpenOffice org the Help Agent automatically appears This is a small window in a corner of the document The Help Agent normally remains visible for 30 seconds When clicked it is replaced by a help window providing some helpful advice about the current topic If a Help Agent dealing with the same topic is repeatedly ignored or closed instead of being clicked it does not appear again for this topic Resetting the Help Agent restores it to the way it was when OpenOffice org was first installed Turning the Help Agent on and off 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Help Agent to have the Help Agent appear If the command is checked the Help Agent is automatically displayed when certain actions are performed in OpenOffic
200. ainer of Using the TemplateT OOExsas org 4 Using thetemplate is fairly License straightforward 4 T Doubleclickonthe date inthetitle hietemplate i distributed in accordance with the LGPL license Page1 2 Default 100 INSRT STD HYP read only Table of Contents1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 164 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Creating a Newsletter From a Template In the File menu choose New gt Templates and Documents Locate and double click to open the Newspaper Template The document contains several useful elements that could be of good use of in a newsletter It contains for example an automatic page numbering system and a field with the fixed date One can now enter text and position graphic objects Modify the existing heading as needed and insert any graphics A few other texts highlighted in gray are variables which modifiable When the document is completed save and print it Edit the template File gt Templates gt Edit for any personalization and layout changes Creating Page Styles Where a page must include not only text but also several larger graphics create a separate Page Style for this purpose i l Open the Styles and Formatting window and click the Page Styles icon 2 From the context menu select the command New to open the Page Styles dialogue 3 In the tab Organize assign a descriptive Name for the Style 4 Next click the Page tab and de
201. ak Cancel Page break Help di Style Main Text Permittee Sores kesse Soret ene so osea s on 7 Choose Insert gt Manual Break The Insert Break dialogue appears 8 Select as Type the Page break option In the pull down list select the Main text Page Style which should be applied after this point Mark the Change page number check box and select the new page number 1 9 Now click OK Under Format gt Page gt Page one can select the page layout mirrored This lets the user define an inner and an outer margin for the text The left and right pages of the main text often have different Page Styles so that for example the left pages have a header but the right ones do not There are already Left page and Right page Page Styles provided for use so use these instead of Main text The first page of the main text is page 1 and contains the Right page Style assign the Left page Style as the Next Style and vice versa These Styles can be assigned to the corresponding pages in the Styles and Formatting window context menu with the Modify command On the Organizer tab page choose the Next Style Caution There is an active issue that inserts blank pages where one least expects them If this is a problem please use the workaround at page 420 Editing Page Styles The new Main text Page Style can have a page number in the middle of the footer To make it so do the following OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0
202. al conditions or calculate subtotals and totals Examining and Extrapolating Data The data in Calc tables can be examined in detail in many different ways Calc is useful for creating term papers because it supports many statistical functions such as regression analysis And for daily calculations at work the integrated financial functions are helpful because they can be used to print detailed tables of current credits and loans and other data What If Calculations Results of changes made to one factor of calculations composed of several factors can be views immediately For example see how changing the period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts Furthermore larger tables are made manageable by using different predefined scenarios OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 179 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Dynamic Charts Calc has a charting function that can display spreadsheet data graphically by selecting the data to be displayed and clicking the Insert Chart icon Drag open a frame at the required position define specific chart settings in the dialogue that appears The chart is inserted at the selected position and when the source data is modified is be dynamically updated Importing and Exporting Data Data from other spreadsheets programs can be imported edited in Calc and output in different export formats Users are presented with a dialogue similar to the following when they select Te
203. al length of the camera In addition the user can set the individual illumination and the texture model The sample object was given its special shape by adjusting the camera to an extremely short focal length OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 325 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw my draw sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 le mx File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help afhome sun so docs user guide my draw sxd 7 fee Eq amp 1 amp Z z i9 a ww f amp Q 2 invisible J oo Afm Black amp foor v Bue 7 7 r E Sree EEEE 1 m 7 9 e S 3D Effects x Tj fa me e m e rv m Favorites e amp 4 gt a e gj E ala IE e t s s w A EE EEN we ERES c zw les o 3D scene selected 1 0 45 0 92 7 04 x 6 34 48 Slide 1 1 Default OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 326 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Fourth Step Now add some text to the logo Start by inserting a text box and populate it with name of the company and in a format that is suitable To put a border around the text convert the text to a polygon by choosing Modify gt Convert gt To Polygon Of course the surface of the newly created object can also be modified Wim OpenOffice org 1 1 2 5x File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window
204. all existing Styles of this type in the Styles and Formatting window Select the Background Style Right click to open the context menu for this Style and choose Modify Choose the background for all slides with the current Page Style Click OK QN Un A W OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 264 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Note that this modification is only valid for the current presentation document Switching Page Styles The subordinate designs which make up the slide design determine the way an object looks including its background The slide design can also be called a Master Slide In Impress assign a different slide design to each slide as desired 1 Go to the slide that is to have a different Master page 2 Select Format gt Styles gt Slide Design to open the dialogue 3 Click Load to see the Load Slide Design dialogue 4 Select a new slide design from the dialogue e g from the area Presentation Backgrounds CA Confirm this with OK 6 If the Exchange background page check box is checked the new slide design applies to all pages of the current document If there is no check mark in it then this action only applies to the current slide This provides the flexibility to define a different slide design and thus a different background for example for one single slide Assuming that Exchange background page is not checked the background selected will now be assi
205. ames are the same as in text documents and can contain pictures multiple columns tables drawings et cetera Linking Text Frames Several text frames may be linked to each other over different pages of a document The text automatically flows from one to the next 1 In order to create a link click the edge of the frame to be linked Eight handles appear around the edges 2 Click the Link icon on the object bar 3 Click the frame that is to be linked When a linked frame is selected any existing links are indicated by a connecting line OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 88 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Note The height of a frame that is linked with a subsequent frame is automatically fixed The height is no longer automatically adapted to the content of the frame Only the height of the last frame of a chain can be adapted to the text content Click the Link of the object bar when a frame is selected and the cursor changes The cursor can display as on of two icons a chain with an arrow when two frames can be linked by clicking or a chain with a stop sign when linking is not possible where the cursor is positioned A note is displayed in the status bar in each case for example why linking is possible or not possible Note Linking is only possible from one frame to the next That means that a frame that is already Sa linked to a frame cannot be linked to another frame which follows Therefore th
206. amily and finally in all installed languages For example first in English US then in English then in All Languages OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 33 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org The following graphic shows the various functions available in this dialogue A detailed explanation of each function is given in OpenOffice org Help AutoCorect VE Eum Replace Exceptions Options Custom Quotes Word Completion Use replacement table v v Correct TWo INitial CApitals Iv Capitalize first letter of every sentence Iv Iv Automatic bold and underline C URL Recognition Iv Iv Replace Ist with 1 st Iv M Replace 1 2 with Iv Iv Replace dashes Iv lv Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Iv Iv Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Iv Apply numbering symbol Iv Apply border Iv Create table Apply Styles E Remove blank paragraphs iv Replace Custom Styles xi English USA M Replace while modifying existing text T AutoFormat AutoCorrect while typing Cancel Help Reset In addition to the functions shown here one can also select Custom Quotes This means that all quotation marks entered as a simple computer character with Shift 2 are automatically turned into correct typographer s quotes Users can choose the characters to be used for this purpose OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 3
207. anchor between cell and page and back by selecting the object and clicking on the Change Anchor on the object bar OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 369 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Drag and Drop With the Data Source View The simplest and quickest way of transferring data from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document or creating forms based on a data source is the drag and drop method R Copying with Drag amp Drop To reverse a mistake made during a drag and drop operation position the cursor in the document and choose the Undo command from the Edit menu or via the keyboard Note Copying by drag and drop is possible in the both directions A text table or a selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag and drop to a table container in the data source explorer or vice versa e Likewise simpler text can be copied using drag and drop from one document to a data field in the data source view Read up on how this happens in Help Using data in a text document A database field can be inserted in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document This inserts a field for this database field in the document This is especially useful when designing form letters Simply drag the desired fields such as home address form of address et cetera into the document The best way to insert a complete record is to select the corresponding header and drag it i
208. any 7 fio BiU A x t 3a e eel OR Al vy G3 X Miami Enter a name The name specified here cannot exceed 30 characters Validity X TEE EE aj Criteria Input Help Error Alert S Iv Show input help when cellis selected REC Ps ane Contents Tte interanme o Input help e name specified here cannot exceed 30 characters 2h my S84 B Cancel Help Reset OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 236 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The validity rule is a component of the cell format To copy the validity rule to other cells choose Edit gt Copy and Edit gt Paste Special and select Format Select Data gt Validation The Data Validation dialogue appears On the Values tab page enter the conditions for new values entered into cells Values already entered will not be affected In the field Allow A11 Values is selected by default This means that there are no restrictions As needed choose one of the other options Whole Number Decimal Date Time and Text Length This choice sets the first condition By choosing for example Whole Numbers values such as 12 5 are not allowed even if they satisfy the other conditions Choosing Date allows date information both in the form1 1 97 as well as in the form of a serial date Similarly the Time condition permits time values as 12 00 or serial time numbers Text Length stipulates that cells are allowed to co
209. apter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Select Personal Letter click Next to bring up a second page with additional options appears Choose the option No Logo click Next A dialogue will appear in which one can enter the sender details The sender address is displayed at this point Thus under Show sender select Yes Click the symbol top right in the Position and size area Click Next O 00 N ON tn A Q Note If the input field does not contain a sender the program will lack the necessary details In this case click Cancel open the User Data tab in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org and enter the necessary data After that re open the Wizard and carry on as described up to this point Sender details may also be entered directly in the input field of the Wizard however these details are not currently entered in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data this process for every must be repeated with new template created with the Wizard 10 Continue to click Next until reaching the page with the footer options 11 Deactivate the check box Footer on 12 Click Next twice 13 Enter the name of the template in the Name field If necessary enter any additional information in the Info field The template will be stored in the template folder under the name chosen 14 Click Next 15 Enter the printer trays if different paper trays are to be used for the first and subsequent pages This is e
210. aragraph Style Default dialogue Select the Numbering tab QN nA A UU Ne Uncheck Include this paragraph in line numbering As all paragraph styles are derived from the Default style no paragraph will be numbered unless a subordinate paragraph style exists and was modified accordingly 7 Now in the document highlight all the paragraphs that are to be numbered 8 Select Format gt Paragraph gt Numbering check the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box 9 Click OK when done OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 121 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Tables in Text Tables and spreadsheets can be included in text documents Inserting Tables There are a number of ways to insert tables in text documents Inserting an empty table using the mouse 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where to insert the table 2 Point with the mouse to the Insert table icon on the Insert floating toolbar EET 3 Press the mouse button and move the mouse down and to the right until the required numbers of rows and columns appear in the preview area under the icon 4 Release the mouse button To abort the process before releasing the button move the mouse up or to the left until the word Cancel appears in the preview area Inserting an empty table via the Insert menu or floating toolbar 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where to insert the table 2 Select Insert gt Table from the
211. aragraph of a previous page However not every first paragraph has the Page Style attribute Since this is the case OpenOffice org Writer searches for the page style attribute of the current page by starting at the current cursor position and continues to search toward the beginning of the document checking each first paragraph of a page to locate a page style as attribute To change from one page style to another use the context menu of the field in the Status bar which displays the current page style Page 9 106 OOoPageStyle 100 INSRT STD HYP 12 31 05 18 2004 Upon right clicking on this field one gets a popup containing a list of page styles select the page style wanted for this page and Writer searches backwards until the first paragraph at the beginning of a page has been found This paragraph is now be given the newly selected page style and this style will be applied from this point up to the end of the document or until a new first paragraph containing another page style is found OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 TT Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Defining default Templates Whenever users finds that they are forever changing the formatting of new documents to suit requirements it is time to use a separate template In Writer this is known as the default template If the user chooses this default template can be set so that every time a new text document is opened and this is the template that is emp
212. are automatically scaled down so that in the last example 3 8 is displayed Select other display options by choosing Format Cells All the defined formats are lists on the Numbers tab A preview shows how the result will look In this dialogue define personal formats that can then be applied to numbers or other content of a spreadsheets There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero Enter the number as text The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe for example 0987 The apostrophe will not be entered in the cell and the number will be formatted as text Because it is in text format no calculations are possible Format a cell with a number format such as 0000 This format can be assigned in the Format code box under Format gt Cells gt Numbers tab and defines the cell display as always put a zero first and then the integer having at least three places and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits Entire columns with numbers in text format i e in the form of 000123 can be turned into real numbers again without zeros in front of them i e in the form of 123 as follows 1 Select the column in which the digits are found in text format Set the cell format in that column as Number 2 Call up Edit gt Find amp Replace OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 190 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc In the Search for box enter 0 9 In the Replace with b
213. area as a Consolidation Area 6 Select additional areas and click Add after each selection 7 Specify where to display the result by selecting a target area from the Copy results to list box 8 If the target area is not named click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target area or the top left cell in the target area Alternatively select the area using the mouse or simply position the cursor in the top left cell of the target area 9 Select a calculation rule for determining how the values of the consolidation areas should be linked The sum function is the default setting 10 Click OK to consolidate the area OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 228 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc If a new sheet independent from the source areas should not be created but retaining links to the source areas or consolidating areas in which the order of rows or columns varies is preferred click the More button in the Consolidate dialogue Consolidate X Function OK Sum m Cancel Consolidation areas 5heet1 A 1 E 10 5heet2 A 1 E 10 5heet3 A 1 E 10 Help Source data area undefined s Sheet3 A 1 E 10 Copy results to undefined Sheet A 14 zi Consolidate by Options Row labels Link to source data pelete E ELE Sea el Column headers 1 Select Link to Source Data to insert only the formulae that generate the results in the target
214. arted due to an error in accessing the OpenOffice org configuration data Please contact your system administrator The following internal error has occurred Get Storage No Content The reason this message often occurs is because there is a file called Common xcu that sometimes gets corrupted In most cases it seems that this file sometimes ends up being filled with Os and the problem seems to occur more often under Windows possibly as a result of a crash or improper exit while OpenOffice org was open Under Windows To locate this file under Windows it is easiest to use Windows Explorer s Find function sometimes called Search Multi user installations Where OpenOffice org is installed as multi user under Windows NT W2Kk XP this file is likely to be in a special system user directory Therefore having administrator rights and enabling the option to view system directories in Explorer is essential before using the Find function This particular file should be found in C Documents and Settings user Application Data OpenOffice org lt release gt lt user gt regi stry data org openoffice Office Common xcu where lt user gt is an actual user name and lt release gt is the release of OpenOffice org Once the file is located simply rename the file for example to something like Common xcu old Now restart OpenOffice org a new Common xcu is created and the problem should have disappeared Single user
215. at template Remember to update the view of the templates in the dialogue to ensure that newly created templates are visible In this case select File gt Templates gt Organize and in the submenu of the Commands button choose Update To modify the template oneself call this file via File gt Templates gt Edit and then edit it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 386 Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros OpenOffice org provides a number of sample macros to help guide the user in programming macros but also to serve as useful aids that can be used immediately Use these to get an overview of how to write a macro These macros are only available in English regardless of the installation language Accessing the Sample Macros Calling the Sample Macros 1 Select Tools gt Macros gt Macro The Macro dialogue appears 2 In the Macro From field double click Gimmicks The Gimmicks modules appear AutoText ChangeAllChars GetTexts Read Dir Userfields 3 Choose on of the modules For example the AutoText module by clicking the entry 4 Click the Run button to run the module OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 387 Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 388 Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros Editing the Sample Macros 1 Follow the steps as described above in the sec
216. at is on the left of OpenOffice org main window Please ensure that at least Help gt Tips is enabled so that hovering the cursor over an icon provides a meaningful explanation of what each does Enabling Extended Tips gives even more information Note that the user can also access functions through the context menu instead of using menu commands which makes for less work with the mouse OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 286 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses and Entering Text The drawing module in OpenOffice org Draw has many functions for creating and editing vector graphics In this section introduces the most commonly used functions More detailed information can be found in OpenOffice org Help Open a new drawing document by choosing File gt New gt Drawing In addition to the blank drawing page notice the main toolbar on the left and the object bar for drawings at the top of the work area With the View gt Toolbars command adding the option bar and or the colour bar at the bottom edge of the window is easy and useful as shown in the following illustration HEE mt 3e b Gu NE DNO R If these instructions are used to create a presentation document instead of a new drawing document then notice one of the visible differences between Impress and Draw The buttons at the top right above the scroll bar only in Impress indicate drawing view while the buttons at the bottom left indicate
217. at more of the sheet can be displayed 3 Select the first two rows and for example click cell A1 and drag to A2 In the shrunken dialogue the user will see 1 2 Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat 4 Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area The dialogue is restored again 5 If one also wants column A as a column to repeat click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area 6 Click column A not in the column header 7 Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area Note Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet 8 Define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this via Format gt Page OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 241 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML Saving Sheets in HTML Calc saves all the sheets of a spreadsheet together as one HTML document At the start of the HTML document a heading and a list of hyperlinks are automatically added which lead to the individual sheets within the document Numbers are shown as written In addition in the lt SDVAL gt HTML tag the exact internal number value is written so that the exact values are available when opening the HTML document with Writer 1 To save the current Calc document as HTML choose File gt Save As 2 In the area with the other Calc filters choose the File type HTML Document 3 Enter a File name and click Save Opening Sheets in HTML
218. at once choose Control from the list box s shortcut menu or with the list box selected choose Control Properties from the Form Functions toolbar or Format Control from the menu Change the Drop down property to No OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 351 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Do any other controls have an wizard Most of the remaining controls are simple enough to configure that no wizard is needed or provided However the Table control is fairly complex It provides a grid type display of the data in a table along with navigation controls The Table Element wizard lets one choose which fields display and in what order Attaching a data source to a form As described in the last few sections using the wizards for some kinds of controls requires the user to specify a data source for the form However sometimes one may want to do so even if one is not creating a combo box or list box To link a data source to a form choose Form Properties from the Form Functions toolbar Choose the Data tab Figure 2 and then choose a Data Source from the drop down list Oncea data source is chosen select a table from the Content drop down list One can also specify a query or write a SQL command directly to provide the form data by changing the Content Type and then specifying the appropriate Content Associating data with a field General Data Events Data source Members o Content type ae j
219. at top left of the colour bar is for the colour Invisible Change the size of the colour bar using the mouse Alternatively hold down the Ct x1 key and double click in the gray part of the colour bar to obtain a movable variable size window that can be manipulated in the same way as most other windows For example it can be moved by dragging the title bar and its size changed by dragging the edges or corners of the window To dock the window again hold down Ct r1 and double click on a gray area of the floating colour bar OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 310 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Defining Custom colours Any number of colours can be defined by the user have names assigned and be saved in colour palette files 1 Ina drawing document choose Format gt Area to open the Area dialogue 2 In the dialogue click the colours tab Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Name Add Color E Bordeaux Modify Table standard Edit it tt hd he EE HE Derete E EH E m R 153 G 51 E B 102 7 Cancel Help Reset This provides everything needed to modify the colour of a selected object Here the user can also define and organize new colours To apply a colour that is not yet in the colour palette first define the new colour and assign a name to it Note Modifications to the standard colour palette are perman
220. at6ds eesideted e shezssnscnctensssuacvanechasuersen tede bete been e 67 73 85 JOIE n a AE 98 214 shaded eerte ee eei e eee ai 360 shadows ceseeeeeee 56 103 179 313 360 GAM vos T ic saversssestoen 321 transparency sese 345 350 352 354 artan Ng M nt hup D 107 assigning SCTIPUS eeeeeeeeeecseeceeceeeeceeeeeeneeeneees 403 404 attachments in e mails eee 25 AutoAbstract function for sending text to presentations 418 AutoComplete function in text and list boxes 90 92 402 AutoCorrect fUNCtION ccccccesseccecessaeceeecesestececeesesnees adding exceptionS sssssessesisisesiroircesoresessesrstsssseessssesse 92 OPUONS d M 37 replacement table eeseess 37 88 164 switching on and off sse 87 93 URL recognition eene 37 word completion eeeseeeerenrn enne 50 AutoFormat function esses applying to text tables 213 switching on and off sse 35 text documennts ssssesseseseeeeeeeeeeen eren enne 35 Automatic sese 30 31 32 88 164 automatic bullets ccccccesseccecsesssseceeceessaeeeeeeeneaeees 119 automatic captions sees 120 148 423 automatic changes on off ssessessss 87 93 to draw lin
221. ated into the table of contents To do so go to the Insert Index Table dialogue click the Index table tab and in the Create from area mark the Additional Styles check box Click the button to the right of the check box The Assign Styles dialogue will appear Assign Styles Styles OK Wed T B B e e e e e I9 pea Default Cancel Frame contents Heading Help Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Table Contents Table Heading Text body This is where the level of the Style is assigned in the table of contents for each Style used in the document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 170 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Choose more settings on the Entries and Styles tab pages and Click OK to create the table of contents Once the newsletter or newspaper is finished save and print it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 171 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Further Information Using Automatic Hyphenation When working with columns it makes sense to activate automatic hyphenation for every Paragraph Style do so by calling up the context menu of the Styles and Formatting window and clicking Modify to access the Paragraph Style dialogue gt click the Text Flow tab Enter a 3 for Characters at line end and Characters at line begin to ensure that hyphenated words have at least three characters at the beginning or end of a line For text alignment in columns choose Justify on th
222. ault 72 inset stp Hye read only OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 409 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 11 Because one usually wants to do something with the data from the form it is important to add a Submission Therefore toggle back to the design mode go to the Data Navigator again then click on the Submission tab and click the Add icon fe Untitled2 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help iB HemiESO VR X359 4 95 e amp 8 v Momm tTTOloR tb Defaut 7 Times New Roman Contractor o Name G Reodeict S gan m i De ee B9 2o LE EL b LR Pmei lodak 7 amp amp ms Sb Ww readonly WBS US S22 1235 AZ a Frese z e Instance 1 Submissions Bindings aaa fa ca X KAALA Instances v Str Ri tg Iz mm o PI E 12 Next fill out the Add Submission dialogue as shown below In this example data is simply saved to a file Users may employ more complicated methods as suits requirements Submission Mame Action Method Binding expression Binding Replace sion x Contractor Payments file tiftmpicontractora payment xml c ee OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 410 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 13 Toggle Design On Off to Off and test t xform odt OpenOffice org Writer lel sd File Edit View Insert Format Table T
223. ay also be chosen to start a dialogue that allows selecting headers or footers for the current Page Style Here find a check box Same content left right If this is not marked format different headers and footers on the left sides than on the right sides Note If one only wants to assign a single page a different header the user could also insert a text box to cover the header text Anchor the frame to the page and assign the Wrap Through option and the background colour White Inserting Page Numbers in Footers Suppose that the cursor is on a page that has a page style that now requires a footer be inserted By doing so all pages that also use this style will also display this footer 1 Choose Insert gt Footer and select from the submenu the page style corresponding to the style being used for current page This will toggle the footer on for this page style assuming it was not on already The cursor now appears in the footer 2 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number The page number appears as a field in the footer That s it If the user now wants to format this field for example by centering it across the page and adding some text so that it appears as Page 9 of 12 this is how it s done i Place the cursor anywhere in the footer and click on the Centered icon on the Formatting toolbar OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 144 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer ii Type the text Pag
224. ay not be recoverable The user should recognize the property that stands out the most in a combination when the individual objects overlap In this case the combination is the result of the Boolean logical operator XOR and shapes discussed later are other logical combinations The areas of overlap are the ones which stand out the most in a combination as they will be converted into holes In the illustration several objects are shown to the left as they are before being combined and at the right after being combined The combination is given the attributes of the object farthest to the back i e undermost object Constructing Shapes The commands Shapes gt Merge Subtract and Intersect also form a new geometric object out of the original objects The new object comes into being through the use of logical amount operators boolean O on the source geometries 1 Select several objects 2 Choose Shapes from the context menu In the submenu choose Merge Subtract or Intersect In the following illustrations the original shapes are shown on the left and the result on the right OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 305 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Shapes Merge Shapes Subtract All other polygons selected are subtracted from the undermost polygon This entails the other polygons first being merged and then subtracted from the polygon positioned under behind all the others Holes are taken into account
225. bottom of the dialogue select the desired function category and the function 4 If no suitable icon is displayed for this function click Icon and select an appropriate icon Confirm with OK 5 Now drag the selected icon out of the dialogue while keeping the mouse button pressed and drop it on the toolbar Release the mouse where the new icon is to be located 6 Close the dialogue 7 On a Windows system only to move this icon to a new position drag it to the new position while keeping the A1t key pressed OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 361 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org 8 Again for Windows only to remove an icon from a toolbar drag it out of the toolbar while keeping the Alt key pressed If the toolbar is to be docked with another border proceed as follows 1 Hold the Ct r1 key down and double click a gray area of the toolbar to open the toolbar as a floating window 2 Drag the toolbar to its new position If the mouse key is released while holding down the Ctrl key and if the toolbar is also over a window border the toolbar will dock with the window border Changing Icon Views Icon views can be changed between two choices flat icons and 3D icons 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org 2 In the View register uncheck Flat buttons 3 Click OK to confirm the new settings and close the dialogue The Flat buttons check box switches between flat and 3D view The Large buttons check box sw
226. box option to limit the search rather than causing the entire document to be searched The search will be restricted to the lines that are highlighted in the document If text is selected before activating the Find command the search will automatically take place only within that selected range Searching for Styles Quickly reformat all or part of a text using this feature For example text formatted with the Style Heading 2 can be replaced with the Style Heading 3 Select the Paragraph Style in the list box under Search for Then select the new Paragraph Style in the Replace with field Start the replacement process with the Replace button All matching styles found in the text will be displayed in sequence The user can decide each time whether or not to do the single replacement replace all matching styles found in the text or to cancel the process Searching for Text Attributes Select Attributes to open a dialogue from which to select those text attributes to be employed to search within a document OpenOffice org then finds all attributes that differ from the format of the Paragraph Style For example in this dialogue if the Font Weight checkbox is selected the program can find all words that have a heavier font than normal These could be words that have has the Bold attribute applied either through direct or indirect formatting or that have been highlighted with a font previously defined as a bold font such as ones contai
227. can be linked either from edge to edge or from middle to middle or a combination of both These possibilities are described below Edge to Edge Connectors Select the desired connector by clicking it and then drag it to the first frame A small symbol is displayed on every edge of the frame Put the mouse pointer on one of the symbols the symbol will be given a dashed line border Press the mouse button and drag the connector to the desired frame As soon as the mouse touches the frame symbols appear on each edge here as well Continue dragging the connector to the desired symbol that symbol also receives a small black border and release the mouse button When a frame that is connected to another frame is moved notice that the connector also changes position The actual connection line between the two frames remains the same so that for minor shifting of the frames the connector usually does not have to be edited With major frame movements however it is often necessary to reedit because the connector may shift to a different position To change the position of a connector simply click on it Small points appear at both the beginning and end of the connector If the cursor is rested on one of the points a small square appears next to the mouse pointer Press the mouse button and drag the beginning or end point to the desired frame OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 278 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Im
228. ce AUTO LOH EGD Thesaurus Language g English USA Options Dictionary office All Add Backwards Unknown word Help Close Word did EI EE OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 31 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Excluding Text From the Spellcheck If certain areas words or tables should not be spell checked because they are say in a foreign language for which there is no installed module then specify Unknown as the language to be checked by Spellcheck Do this by either using direct formatting by selecting the text and then choosing Format gt Character gt Font or by modifying the corresponding Style for the text e g open the context menu and choose Edit Paragraph Style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 32 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Using Automatic Functions OpenOffice org has all kinds of intelligent assistants to help all of which have names beginning with auto The section introduces a few of these auto functions For detailed explanations refer to the OpenOffice org Help Using AutoCorrect and AutoFormat In addition to catching typing errors OpenOffice org can format documents while typing or afterwards AutoFormat and AutoCorrect permit the user to draft documents much more efficiently by automatically formatting and correcting common errors while the user types Here are a couple of examples AutoCorrect is useful if one often makes
229. ce org Draw is an object oriented vector graphic drawing program The objects can be lines rectangles 3D cylinders or other polygons All objects already have set properties such as size colour of the surfaces colour of contours linked files associated actions when clicked and much more Any or all of the properties can be modified at any time Because of the vector technology objects can be rotated in any direction and have their size altered without unsightly step effects occurring on the edges Furthermore as all of the objects can be controlled individually they can be moved and overlapped as required Creating 3D Objects Draw does not restrict graphics to two dimensions Cubes spheres cylinders and other 3D objects can be created rotated at will and each object can be illuminated individually by means of various light sources These features together with default or freely defined colour gradients allow quick and easy creation of eye catching company and Internet presentations Manage Organization Charts OpenOffice org Draw is object oriented The objects could be rectangles for example containing text and linked to each other If rectangles are moved connectors will automatically follow This makes drawing and maintaining a company or departmental organizational chart much easier The connectors can also be freely placed at glue points which makes the creation of technical drawings with explanatory texts easier Drawing
230. ch a page 12 Click Create to create the presentation Clicking Create on any of the Wizard pages creates the document and eliminates the need to go through all the pages of the Auto Pilot Once created edit save and print or run the presentation et cetera To start a presentation on a computer screen simply press Ctr1 F2 key or click the Presentation icon on the main toolbar OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 259 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Creating a Simple Presentation Without the Wizard This section explains with the help of a simple example how to create a presentation based on one of the existing templates Open a new presentation document based on one of the supplied templates by choosing File gt New gt Templates and Documents or with Shift Ctr1 4N Inthe Templates and Documents dialogue that appears click the Templates icon on the left and then double click Presentation Backgrounds Double click one of the templates such as Note Pad Now there is a slide in which any predefined text can be replace with the text of choice Note If the document is in the Master view mode when opened switch to the Slide view mode using the respective icon in the lower left corner of the document window A document will always be opened in the view in which it was last saved m u r Jf Tips and or Extended tips is enables hovering the mouse pointer over one of these will popup whi
231. ch is which To create a second slide click the Insert Slide command in the small Presentation window If the small presentation window is not visible click the Presentation Box On Off icon on the EAF Object bar In the next dialogue select a page layout and confirm with OK pif Slide 1 e 7 Alternatively one can also click in the area right ofthe Slide 1 tab to create a new slide without any selection dialogue The new slide has the same layout as the current slide 1 The user will then see Slide 2 2 Press OK 3 Click once on the lower text frame and delete it say with the Delete key 4 Click in the text frame at the top and enter a title 3 Next insert a 3D object by long clicking the 3D Objects icon far to open its floating toolbar nN Select the Sphere icon 7 Click on the slide below the Live in 3D text drag open a 3D rectangle and then release the mouse button Voila a 3D sphere 8 Drag the sphere into the centre of the slide and enlarge it by dragging one of the handles in one of the corners When dragging hold down the Shift key so that the sphere remains a sphere OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 260 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 9 Assign an interesting colour or colour gradient to the sphere by way of the list boxes on the object bar Placing a bitmap as a pattern on a 3D object for example a world map from the Gallery is covered in another chapter
232. ch org OpenOffice org templates Samples OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 252 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress OpenOffice org Impress Toolbars and Windows Untitled OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help 9 vsu 4 BEE tt s Ez EI zm E LEE i E EIN EN E Ls 2 7 3 T Modify Slide Layout 4e she Desi 5 e Duplicate Slide amp 7 Expand slide Oma Oo 22 BAM rM oF D 2978 oe 2 x Pein Purple a miele e Effects R oe am ARB Background Background objects Notes Outline 1 Outline 2 xj m Styles e afha rr snae 1 lla eee me et mee EENEN SEEN Beeeees Cie fo ao o am x Sed Plain Bue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 253 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Zoom floating toolbar Alignment floating toolbar Text floating toolbar Arrange floating toolbar Rectangles floating toolbar Insert floating toolbar Ellipses floating toolbar Effects window 3D Objects floating toolbar Presentation window Curves floating toolbar Navigator window Lines floating toolbar Stylist window Color bar e e6GeeeeE GOELE Connectors floating toolbar How to Create a Basic Presentation The following brief step by step example demonstrates different methods of how to c
233. ch sheet has its own unique name displayed on the sheet tab at the bottom of the window 24 00 Eri Newyork fanden 7 Racine Additional sheets can be appended to a document or inserted in front of the current sheet Activate the context menu of a sheet tab and choose the corresponding command Choose Rename in the context menu to modify the name of a sheet Displaying Multiple Sheets M X Use these navigation buttons to display the sheet tabs of all the available sheets Click the button on the far right of this group to move to the the last sheet tab to see its name To display the sheet itself click on the name When there is insufficient space to display the sheet tabs on the lower window border increase it by moving the separator bar between the tab bar and the horizontal scrolling bar with the mouse button Keep the mouse button pressed and drag to the right Remember this shares the available space between the sheet tabs and horizontal scroll bar Working With Multiple Sheets Each sheet of a spreadsheet is completely independent of the other sheets in a spreadsheet document However the same data can be incorporated into several sheets For example the same data should be inserted at the same location in the first three sheets To do so select all three sheets together and enter the data in only one of the sheets Selecting several sheets together is simply a matter of clicking the sheet tabs of the sheets in question whi
234. ch the scenarios that differ by initial values are located are surrounded by frames Select the appropriate scenario in the list box appearing at the top of every frame Scenarios can also be selected in the Navigator 1 Open the Navigator with the F5 key or the Navigator icon on the function bar 2 Click the Scenarios icon in the Navigator the icon with the question and exclamation marks In the Navigator see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created Creating Personal Scenarios Assuming that the spreadsheet used in the previous section is available create a scenario by selecting all the cells that provide the data for the scenario For example create an additional scenario called High Dollar Rate using the following steps 1 Select the cells that are already highlighted by the frame of the existing scenario Remember multiple select cells that are not contiguous i e that are distributed across the table may also be selected To select multiple cells hold down the Ct r1 key as each cell is clicked However In this case simply select the range F18 F23 2 Choose Tools gt Scenarios The Create Scenario dialogue appears 3 Enter High Dollar Rate as the name of the scenario and leave the other fields at their default values 4 Close the dialogue with OK The new scenario is automatically activated 4 Change any values in the frames to the values that are to apply to t
235. changing Dato via the Clipboard secours moror aa eias 212 Creatine a Business DESDE escort dad e A Sea Hon Om ad 273 Creating a Business Report in Presentation Form essssessessssessessesresreseeseesesrrssesresresees 273 Entering Text imithe Outline VIEN e oes resorte ui ecm os re erbe he E Ferd rakei tarasem rt ius 274 Chanoine the SD Layout ue vci teca ekle CERIS ain amt annem POM DARIN 274 Ie C Shade os oO EPOD Dei RA HDI MEM aaa acne 274 Creating a Slide SED o daa op RU EUR TRU nos astonng GRE RIEF Q HEATER Vu END SEANA eats 276 Definmg or Changing Slide DIEGGE eos on feri UR a DES EROR IRR RH non PI I RANDO PhxVRM HE IMUE 2711 Creating Cross Fade BEES uo esconde dcm eR ee sa R DUIS RUNE cele Eae a Eai 277 Re NS Presea Nons rire ar ancy a TE a E 277 Working with CGE scinsioni Dead e eU ERI e ERE ECKE RR CAEN HR RR A 278 Edge to Edge OEC ITE OESTE 278 Middle t Middle Comes sea oes auro pa hd turi CH UO EE ce erp pit RR RUE Ea QU m dpa us 219 Editing LODS ooo oe mE ERE DH DIRK VIRA ca eaten ae eS 219 Using a Snap Grid ou csetera dr evt D a Ra Uo tan GI ERE EUR PUR RARE aA 279 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xvi Ja Tea Glue NORTE TET 280 Hints aud Tips fora Successful Presentati On ivseses cc citet qaa Orr Pur etr ee quive 281 Using tbe Monscas A PONBEGE eoe eoo Pai Vo S cd pano eee MERE T SEE EIE 281 Changing Bullet Symbols in Outline VIEW reper ree medico eve Chic Hp 281 Inserting Deleting and Renaming SUOes ss
236. ck Modify Slide OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 273 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Note Do not assign a name like Slide2 If the order of the slides needs to be changed later the label might not describe the content of this slide Clear descriptive names like Overview or Introduction are more useful e Insert additional slides as necessary from the insert menu on the main toolbar a long click may be needed The corresponding tabs appear at the bottom of the screen Click the tab of the slide to edit e g Overview and then click the Outline View icon above the vertical scroll bar Entering Text in the Outline View To establish an outline use the Outline View mode Using the icons in the object bar promote or demote an outline point one level or move it up or down in the hierarchy The icons in the main toolbar can also be used to determine which outline levels are to be displayed In the Outline view all slides in the presentation document are listed hierarchically and the title of each slide is preceded by a slide icon Enter the desired text and use the icons in the Main toolbar to structure the outline Create a subsection to a slide by placing the cursor at the start of the respective line and pressing the Tab key Use the Shift Tab key combination to move the line up one level in the hierarchy After completing the edit of the presentation outline click the Drawing View icon
237. ck on the first cell B3 hold down the mouse button and drag to B6 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 207 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc While dragging the mouse to highlight the desired range the Wizard dialogue will be automatically minimized so that only the active input field is visible The field indicates the area being selected with the mouse The dialogue can be reduced or enlarged manually by clicking the Shrink Maximize button to the right of the input field 5 Finally click OK to close the Wizard The formula is calculated according to the given arguments and the final result appears in cell B8 References to Other Sheets In any sheet cell users can show a reference to a cell in another sheet 1 Open a new empty spreadsheet 2 For example enter in cell Al of Sheet 1 the following formula and complete the input with the Enter key Sheet2 A1 3 Now click the sheet tab labelled Sheet 2 on the bottom window border to go to Sheet2 of the current document Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number 4 Upon switching back to Sheet 1 see the same content in cell A1 as was entered on Sheet2 If the contents of Sheet2 A1 change then the contents of Sheet1 A1 also change In a corresponding way a reference can also be made to a cell of another document Open another spreadsheet in addition to the new spreadsheet which is already saved as a file this does not work unless a document has previousl
238. click which may then be used as the starting point for creating a custom Style One then merely has to enter the properties that are different from the selected Style since the other properties are inherited from the parent Style The following table describes the base Styles and the various attributes available Style Type Attribute Selection Paragraph Styles Indents and Spacing Alignment Hyphenation Tabs Font Language Initials Character Styles Font Font Size Language Frame Styles Position Anchoring Borders Page Styles Header Footer Margins Columns Numbering Styles Numbering Type Outline Bullets Assigning Numbering Styles Hierarchical Styles Styles can be hierarchically linked to each other Thus one defined Style can be derived from another with the result that the new Style contains only the differences from the basic Style This is convenient if later one changes the basic Style to have all text with the derived Style also updated accordingly OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 66 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer For example start with the Paragraph Style default It uses the font Times New Roman in 12 point to create a Style called indented text where the only addition is aa left indent with no other changes Later the user decides to change the font in text body and then the font is automatically changed in the indent
239. click the Paragraph Styles icon to create a new Paragraph Style Likewise click the Character Styles icon to create a new Character Style d At the top of the Styles and Formatting window click New Style from Selection This opens the Create Style dialogue e Enter a name for the new Style and click OK As can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window a new Style has been created in the Custom Styles group making it available for use for indirect formatting in documents A user may also create a new Style without using an existing Style as the starting point Here is a method by which to create a new paragraph style a In the Styles and Formatting window choose Paragraph Style by clicking its icon the one farthest to the left in the Styles and Formatting windows toolbar b Call the context menu of the Styles and Formatting window click right mouse button c Choose New d Enter the data for the desired Style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 67 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer e close the dialogue with OK Yet another example shows how to define a Paragraph Style for a subtitle and assumes there are several subtitles in the text that are candidates for formatting with a custom Paragraph Style 1 Position the cursor in a paragraph in the text that to format with the new Paragraph Style 2 Apply a Paragraph Style to the paragraph as an initial format This way one does not need to define a
240. core triti SUP tns emt er viri dra rdum n ner RE EUR 281 Creating and Pintinge Handouts a srt pe beet ned p ea ud o aa Rod i ru UR eu RR 282 Urbano and Prin ng Notesin eee eee eee ree eer ee renee Desens eee eee ee et 282 Usine the At ENTER C 283 Edit Tump a eens ea ease ca oa sede ea asain roi Ren 283 PE a OBject S28 siirsin srpen ea ya PR cess Ru RN pru pu eh PM Nc 283 Creatine Additonal ODJECIS RETO E tO LL D TOM 283 Changing Font and Pont SIRE oe Were REA IRE NEU GERA PERLE EE E Cra Re prie Rd pA 283 BI Pene Colours 5 o vom edet ipo neee UE n EEE EELE a v aera IN dap eer 283 Chapter 6 Creatine Drawings with DEM osse rdc tag SHE OY RR PER VA UD RR ERE N naaien eiai as 284 pent fbr ore Draw EXnct Poll oem ROAD ERR UR Ur DUR IrDA EM MINORUM RN Mta 284 Creatine and Publishing Vector Orgplifos oise vr eb e pk eR RR Feci LU Ee a K pA 284 JT DIE Ie SENI ONT RO A E E 284 Manace Oran GF cde eed prre una eye bc to pb veda inen i 284 libio ro PRENNE Nr HEIN 284 c sopra P 285 nlii Re DHT cc HQ 285 nori Md m I 285 EhoOpgeut ctore Draw WNdOW e uoi ped ache ER MER ENSE NN CURA MH NIMM 286 Toolbars and Windows in OpenOffice org Draw iuioee e etre rent anh ient tatis 286 Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses and Entering Text eseeeeeee 287 R tatine and TR es G1 keressen ends gekex Cosi dox o eg clu iui aia 289 Arane ime eT e DULCE NIRE TC
241. crease decrease the value of the upper or lower spacing 9 Click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 151 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Spellcheck Dictionaries Hyphenation Controlling Spellcheck via the dialogue Choose Tools gt Spellcheck or press F7 In a document where there are no unknown words Spellcheck will complete and display a message box to say as much Clicking the Ok button there will close the Spellcheck dialogue so one needs to deliberately spell a word incorrectly to see how Spellcheck works Spellcheck English USA X Original sratement Ignore Word ev Ignore All Suggestions Always Replace AUTO GTEC sratement Thesaurus Language g English USA J Options Dictionary soffice All m Add Backwards Unknown word Help Close aeg Normally the Spellcheck dialogue appears when called manually via the menu or by pressing F7 Selecting text before calling the dialogue and then checking the spelling only in the text that is selected can be an advantage The Spellcheck dialogue is described in detail in Help A manually initiated Spellcheck always begins at the cursor position unless the text was selected in which case it begins at the beginning of the selected text and ends at its end When the spell checking does not begin at the beginning of the document or if the end of the document is reached during the checking process a dialogue appears askin
242. ct in a common frame 1 Edit the caption text just like normal text 2 Delete the caption text just like normal text Inserting an object in a number range Suppose the document contains illustrations as linked graphics and these are labelled in a number range called Illustration Now the user wants to add a drawing obtained with the drawing tools as a further illustration Extend the automatic number range Illustration as follows 1 Below the additional illustration insert a new line and apply the Paragraph Style Illustration 2 Open the Insert gt Fields gt Other dialogue Pressing Ctr1 F2 is another way to open this dialogue 3 On the Variables tab select the Type Number range Under Selection select Illustration 4 Click Insert 5 Close the dialogue box If illustrations are moved with their captions by hand so that the sequence changes it may be necessary to update the numbers by pressing F9 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 139 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Numbering Illustrations by Chapters Numbering illustrations by chapter so that illustrations are labelled Illustration 1 1 Illustration 1 2 etc in the first chapter and Illustration 2 1 Illustration 2 2 et cetera in the second is often useful Here s how to 1 Organize the document by chapters if this is not already done Select Tools gt Outline Numbering to number the chapter he
243. ction To display a grid click the option Use Snap Grid under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt Grid In addition one can also select Visible Grid to help position the objects more easily OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 279 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Editing Glue Points By default the connectors dock to the handles in the centre of the object pages However using the glue points the user can make the connectors dock to any point of an object For detailed instructions refer to the Help gt Contents gt Index gt Search term gt glue points using OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 280 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Hints and Tips for a Successful Presentation Using the Mouse as a Pointer There are occasions when using the mouse as a pointer is preferable to other methods such a a laser pointer To use the mouse select the option Mouse pointer as pen in the Slide Show dialogue This allows highlighting charts or pointing to important aspects during a presentation To change slides manually double click the mouse Changing Bullet Symbols in Outline View To change a bullet symbol whilst in the Outline view place the cursor in the desired line paragraph and click the Bullets and Numbering icon only visible in the Object bar of the Outline view A dialogue appears from which to choose a different symbol Inserting Deleting and Renaming Slides 1 To insert an add
244. d acta Rap AA MARRE LUCERE REUS 217 Esterni Database Rang C Senoi E E A aee Od M Ma on EEUU UM 218 Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals esses 220 Transferring Data From a Data Source to a Spreadsheet sss 221 Crete a Database File 0 C MIU de omes desk ek or ene epus ia Coal bun clin i a 221 Evaluatma Data Va eM NEE EA ETE EEN 224 PENEI lio E N 224 What u seais ibe EA tect obest tein ru neee rasas pst canna 225 Circ tine DataPilot DUBIE Lausessseuiseon ip it tt pret aer ap Ra ud ni ERU PRO D nd uA aSa 225 Selecting DataPilot Oufput Ranges ous cane dace on au eam eas DN a 227 Editne DataPilot Tables oae rk s d aa eio ERU E POR S RELU RARO NERA PAPAE UHR uide 227 Filtering DataPilot Tables 252 cevelncvannnaneceon ue vavennasuntagvencadeseeseetesteerasessasuruaverenateeraveetelentones 227 Updating Datapilot Tables vue eio spqvl o rl oie ri veo n aqu Re ERR NR pA UE 227 Deleting DataPilot TABE Se iinne nin a ee a R ee eee TEETE 227 Consolidatine Data si SEARE CRES at 228 Applying Goal BOIS ssiri siringi Ir RO a RU EIN ER PERPE a O OR Eesaia a meee 230 Naming Celler eiaei Eaa E nia nose rb coda eK EEE e a aiia 230 Stat Ta hs cocoa A E A E E DUNG MM SEE bU iE 231 Applying Multiple Operations ines nr talentis RR enin prs ORDER LR GEB d VPE Ne EA 231 Multiple Operations in Columns Or ROWS ieeene er
245. d at any time by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data and entering new information or editing existing details Predefined elements will appear but users always have the final say on what to include in their letter Thanks to the Wizard one doesn t have to start from scratch but can use preexisting texts when creating custom templates whether for business letters faxes memos or other documents OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 37 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Find amp Replace When working with a computer it is often useful to be able to locate certain pieces of text quickly The Find function in OpenOffice org Writer Calc Impress and Draw is the tool to use for this purpose Find can also locate variations in the given search term or limit the search to certain places in the document such as the beginning of a word or the end of a paragraph Text strings found in the text can be replaced by other strings with or without confirmation although sometimes manual editing is still necessary where for example there are deviations in gender found in other languages Find amp Replace X Attributes Close Replace with X Format Help Ho komnat Options Whole words only Match case Similarity search E Backwards Gurrent selection only Regular expressions Search for Styles Finding a Word in Text Let s say the word Holland appears somewhere in a
246. d in the font list Now one can type some numbers select them then change the font and Voila POSTNET bar code that is almost correct In other words this bar code is incomplete and will be unacceptable if printed on the envelope as it is Note Disable the default font preview mode so that one can see the font name listed Failure to do so will cause this font set to appear as a blank entry in the list a In OpenOffice org2x Use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View gt Font Lists and uncheck Show preview of fonts b In OpenOffice orgl 1 x Use Tools gt Options gt General gt View gt Font Lists and uncheck Show preview of fonts Building a Complete POSTNET Bar Code fro Printing While numbers can be represented by the bar code a correct POSTNET bar code for most postal services requires additional information The first piece of additional information is a check digit which is calculated from the postal code as follows 1 Start with the Postal code say 12345 and sum the digits 14 2 3 4 5 15 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 177 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 2 Calculate the number that is needed to add to this number to make the last digit of the sum a zero 0 Thatis 15 0 The answer in this case is 5 be DE 5 20 3 Add this number to the postal code as the last digit In this example the POSTNET sequence is now 123455 4 Finally wrap the digit sequenc
247. d one can simply drag the dividing line to the desired position The user may need to click once outside the table before this procedure will work The dividing lines on the ruler can be moved in the same way When the keyboard is used to enlarge and reduce a table always hold down the Alt key while pressing one of the four arrow keys The current column or row is enlarged or reduced by whatever amount is set under Tools Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Table gt Keyboard handling Rows and columns are handled separately The current row or column is enlarged or reduced at its right hand or lower edge If ones presses the Shift key as well as Alt the left hand or upper edge will be moved Here are two examples that expect that the cursor is set somewhere in the middle of a medium to large text table 1 Hold down the Alt key and press the right arrow key The current column is expanded by the amount specified Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Table The left edge of the column remains fixed while the right edge moves 2 Now hold down the Alt key together with the Shift key and press the right arrow key The right edge will remain fixed while the left edge will move to the right thereby reducing the column The height of the rows can be adjusted in the same way However since the rows are preset to a minimum height one must first increase their size before the result is obvious By pressing the Ct r1 key durin
248. d put a combo box on the form The wizard Combo Box opens Combo boxes always draw their contents from a data source If a data source has not yet been associated with the form either by using it for another control or by explicitly doing so see How to associate a form with a data source below the first page that appears lets teh user choose a data source and table for the form Click Next to move to the Table Selection page once a data source is chosen If the form already has a data source the wizard opens on the Table Selection page The data displayed in the combo box doesn t have to come from the table the form is linked to and in fact often comes from another table that contains look up information Click Next once the table that contains the list of items to appear in the combo box is chosen The Field Selection page lists the fields from the specified table Choose the one to use in the combo box The specified field not only provides both the list of items the user sees but also the value to store based on the user s choice With a combo box there s no way to display data from one field but store the value from a different field List boxes do provide that option see the next section How do I set up a list box Click Next to move to the Database Field page to indicate where to store the user s choice Click Create to create the combo box How to set up a list box A list box has a lot in common with a combo box so it s not
249. d to the Head1 Paragraph Style This style is still selected in the Styles and Formatting window 4 At the top of the Styles and Formatting window click iB the Update Style icon All headings formatted with Head1 will be automatically reformatted with the modified Style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 69 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Styles can also be configured to adapt to any changes automatically In the properties dialogue for the Style click the Organizer tab and mark Auto Update This allows users to change the formatting of say a paragraph formatted with this Style and have the formatting of all other paragraphs with the same Style be automatically changed as well Page Styles and Page Numbers Often text documents are created without a page number on the title page but with lowercase or uppercase roman numerals on the pages of the Table of Contents one does not know how many yet and to start numbering the rest of the pages with Arabic numerals Page numbers are better located in footers or headers rather than in the running text to ensure that they do not change their position when text is inserted or deleted The steps below show how to do this 1 Create a new Page Style 2 Apply the new Page Style 3 Edit the Page Style 4 Use the footer Paragraph Style to format page numbers Note Do not use the Offset box under Insert gt Fields gt Other gt Document tab to change the
250. dard filters see erret tret rene ee eer RE 235 text fortatsa ciue qup oH Eee Hore eb Ee AE IE Ea Rus 385 viewing 170 173 174 237 238 239 385 398 415 databases in conditions esesseeeeenere apply conditions to the data sesssse 244 Filter conditions ese 244 398 401 402 special conditions eese 191 Date Field iet 169 235 391 MEM fixed variable eee 168 169 177 date format eseeeeeee nnn 169 208 232 427 ALES formatting essere enne 212 IDSEFHBe iie riecett iecit eee set te aes 169 dBase xxix 231 237 238 239 378 379 385 387 DDE karienn ne a e E 64 65 130 153 decimal places in NUMDbETS ceesceeceeeseceeeeceteeesaeeeneees Decimal Place 4 ceti eccrecie lees vi pre raeden 207 212 default directories seeseseseeseeenenee 17 21 default file format seen 3 nelli MEC comparison Operators 398 nEIEDCRII Rn 235 default languages 32 33 164 default printer ecrit desierit etus On E M 26 296 default tab stops in text 431 default templates eee eeeeeceeeeessseecseeeceeneecseeceneeeeneeees Changing tese et tie Deo E RIPE etna 435 defmibg nisi eeepc tie E eee Re niega 83 POS CUD eE 435 a E C
251. data source view Press the Shift key and or the Ct r1 key to make a selection To print a form letter for all the records in the table click the empty field above the row headers to select all records 5 Edit to suit personal requirements 6 Save the document 7 Now click the Mail Merge icon on the Table Data toolbar at the top of the data source view The Form Letter dialogue appears where two choices are offered to save as file s or print One can also choose to print selected records all records or a particular range If printing a range for example records 1 to 5 ensure that the numbers follow the order displayed in the data source view To sort or filter records in the data source view by click the respective icons on the database bar For example to sort all records according to postal code place the cursor in the POSTAL CODE ZIP field of any record and click Sort Ascending Now the form letter is all ready to go Note If a completely new document containing the necessary form letter fields is being created use drag and drop to do so Open the text document and press F4 to show the desired database table Point to a column header and holding down the mouse button drag it into the document The field for inserting this item from this database table is automatically placed in the document Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards Designing Business Cards via dialogue Choose File gt New gt Business Card
252. decide if the text should have a normal format as in a text document or if the text should be handled as a graphic object that can be rotated expanded minimized et cetera Normal text can also appear in the form of a legend in a frame with an arrow Open the Text floating toolbar from the main toolbar Note Where Asian language support is enabled under Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages there will be additional icons for entering vertical text les Fit text to frame Legend Normal Text 1 Enter normal text by clicking the Text icon 2 Drag open a delimiting frame in the document which sets the position and maximum width the text area should have If the text is long extend the frame in order to incorporate the whole text Position and the size of the frame can later be changed using the mouse but the frame cannot be made smaller than the text itself 3 Enter the text Select the text by holding down the Shift key while using the arrow keys or use the mouse The font and font size can now be modified as in regular text documents When the mouse is clicked anywhere on the document other than the text text edit mode is no longer in effect Clicking the text once again the text will be selected as an object Now it can for example be rotated or the entire text moved By double clicking the text it can be edited it again for example delete characters or set additional font attribut
253. der Windows from C Program Files OpenOffice org release NMpresets basic to C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data OpenOffice org lt release gt user basic How to recover content from a Openoffice org file The following set of instructions may or may not work depending on how bably damaged the file has become The steps outilined assume the user has some basic technical skills as these are needed in this instance Prerequisites for using this method are a A zip utility such as Zip for most platforms or WinZip for Windows and similar tools b Sufficient disk space to allow multiple copies c Patience Steps for recovering a damaged Openoffice org file 1 Make a backup of the file 2 Create a directory in which to work 3 Use the zip utility of your choice to upack the damaged Openoffice org file to unpack into the directory created in step 2 NOTE sometimes changing the extension of the Openoffice org file to zip is required 4 Use Openoffice org to create a new empty file of the same type as the damaged one and save it 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 with the new empty file 6 Replace the contents xml file in the directory created in Step 5 with the contents xml from the damaged file unpacked in Step 3 7 Use the zip utility to repackage the files and directories in the directory created in Step 6 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 421 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems 8 Re
254. dialogue appears There is an exception in text documents where a certain area of text is selected and in this instance a dialogue appears upon clicking the Print icon This dialogue asks for confirmation of printing the whole text or only the selected area When printing via the Print dialogue Impress offers choices of whether to print only a selected range of pages only certain pages identified by their page numbers or all pages of the document Take a look at the print dialogue which is opened via File gt Print or by pressing Crri P The appearance of the Print dialogue may vary according to the selected printer However in most cases there are options to specify whether to print the entire presentation certain slides or only the current selection Other options specify how many copies to print and how these should be collated Click the Options button in the Print dialogue to display additional options When printing text drawing and presentation documents the Brochure option is available for two to a page text on a single sheet The size of the pages is reduced and printed in two columns per page and double sided so that the pages need only be folded and fastened in the middle to create a complete brochure Since presentation objects are usually in the form of vector graphics they can be printed out in any resolution supported by the local printer or film recorder Where the slides are to be sent to a film recording service or
255. ding levels esses 119 design mode after saving eese 389 396 d sign VIeW ciet eene tite ette teres E ERE ae ERE credtinis TOMS uec HR Eee testes e ened 455 a IIS Dope HIE database tables eese 387 OBS eee ect EE RN UNS 56 102 103 104 147 detaching toolbars seseo e ka raniket 15 iE o opening and SAVING se eeeeeeeseeceeeeceseeeecensecetteeeeeeees 17 dictionaries sseeeeenenenenee nennen eene nennen hehehe nennen spelling check eee teinte tenes 88 163 thesaurus eeseeseeeeeeneeenennnnnn nennen 32 47 167 Digital Signatures ss 4 4277 428 429 dite Ct cut SOL terrere Pepe o E REREE VERRE NS 51 direct Formatting eere eer ro rre Reese reped applying iiec heres o EO ECHO RET R Vae EE REIR 66 CETT 63 disablin Ge sis ise C AUTOCOEEeCt esaet iced Pe EE eee DURS 87 document protection sssseeeeeeeeeeee 268 SuperscriptiDp 2 35 e edo dee ect EE 61 Doc ER 8 display of fields essere CON GIONS voici asn isian eo Er gn 138 139 140 iC EAST MEE formulas instead of results eceeeeeeeeee 268 non printing characters essen 63 notes in spreadsheets esses 209 268 GISTANICES ERROR TREES 408 431 docking isis RUNE TERET Navigator window
256. documents of this type or can connect the configuration to a specific document which must exist as a file 1 Load the document to which to connect the configuration or open any document of the same type 2 Set the configuration For example select the toolbars that should be visible or define what is on the toolbars menus or status bar and so on All such configuration options are found under Tools gt Configure 3 Click Save in the dialogue under Tools gt Configure Another dialogue appears from which to save the configuration 4 In the File Type list box select lt A11 gt 5 In the large list box of the Save dialogue select the file that is to be connected to the configuration 6 Click Save A prompt appears asking whether to replace the file or not This query concerns only the configuration connected to the document not the actual contents of the document 7 Confirm overwrite The configuration is now connected to the active document Check this by loading the document and choosing File gt Document Template gt Organizer then double clicking the document As soon as one loads or opens this document the configuration that was saved with it becomes active The global default configuration is restored when another document is loaded or opened that does not contain custom configuration information Select manual settings at any time by choosing Tools gt Configure and clicking the Reset button Ins
257. down list When opening a document that contains linked sections a popup asks the user to update these sections If the answer is yes the current versions of the linked sections will be updated Under Windows the DDE method can be used to keep inserted sections up to date with the current status of the original files Sections can also be used as files in HTML documents The inserted sections are automatically updated when OpenOffice org loads the relevant HTML document again Web browsers show the content of the sections as at the time the content was saved as an HTML document Editing Sections Edit the sections in the text document by choosing Format gt Sections This dialogue allows the user to protect sections unprotect sections reveal hidden sections change the conditions and remove sections that is turn them back into normal text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 61 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Formatting Text With and Without Styles Plain text can be too bland unless one applies visual effects to it such as giving overall structure to the text emphasizing individual words quotations or references or breaking up solid areas of text Thus the user should consider giving special formatting to sections of text Direct Formatting or Formatting With Styles When working with Writer choose between direct formatting and formatting with Styles to apply text attributes such as bold italics font type and
258. drag and drop will move the cells Press the Shift key when dragging create a copy Inserting Data From Text Documents Text can be transferred into other document types such as spreadsheets and presentations but there is a distinction made that depends on whether the text should be set in its own text frame transferred into a spreadsheet cell or transferred into the structure of a presentation ftext is transferred via the clipboard one can paste it to the destination with or without text attributes Use the shortcut keys Ct r1 C to copy and Ct r1 V to paste To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted do a long click on the Paste icon on the function bar Select the format from the submenu To obtain a selection of formats choose Edit gt Paste Special OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 371 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Ina text document use File gt Send gt Outline to presentation to create an new presentation document that contains the headings from the text document as the outline The headings must be formatted with a corresponding Paragraph Style before the user can see this command To transfer the same headings to the first superordinate paragraph or several paragraphs of the text select the AutoAbstract to presentation command Again the headings must be formatted with a corresponding Paragraph Style before the user can see this command Copying Text Using Drag and Drop fone
259. e before the field and of after the field iii Now choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count 1 Inserting Chapter Information in Headers Fields containing the file name date time chapter headings et cetera can be inserted into a header 1 Enter text in a document and apply the style Heading 1 to chapter headings 2 Activate the header for the page style used by the current page Format gt Page gt Header or Insert gt Header 3 Click within the header to position the cursor in it 29 4 Type Chapter OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 145 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 5 Select the Insert gt Fields gt Other command a In the Fields dialogue Fields X Document References Functions Docinformation Variables Database Type Select Format Chapter number Chapter number and name Chapter number without separat File name Page Sender Statistics THN N b Select the Document tab c Choose Chapter in the Type box d Format Chapter name Where the header to contain paragraphs formatted with Heading2 instead of Headingl enter a 2 under Layer e Click Insert to add the desired information to the header and then close the dialogue box f Now every page of the document using this page style will automatically display the chosen chapter heading in the header Other information can be inserted into a header in the same manner
260. e End of document Styles Character Styles Paragraph Footnote Text area Footnote anchor Page Footnote Footnote area Footnote Characters Continuation notice End of footnote Start of next page ma e One can jump from a footnote anchor in the document to the footnote text quite easily by clicking on the footnote anchor Press PgUp to return from the footnote to the text The footnote format can be changed by modifying the Paragraph Style Footnote which is automatically applied to all footnotes in a document To delete a footnote simply delete the footnote mark in the text and the footnote text is automatically deleted as well Inserting and Editing Footnotes Footnotes can be inserted in two ways via an icon or via a dialogue Inserting a footnote via an icon 1 Set the cursor at the point where the footnote anchor should appear 2 Open the Insert floating toolbar EET on the Tools toolbar 3 Click on the Insert Footnote Directly icon 4 Inserting a footnote via a dialogue 1 Set the cursor in the document at the point where the footnote anchor should appear 2 Select Insert gt Footnote to open the Insert Footnote dialogue When inserting a footnote using the icon footnote numbering is automatic The Insert Footnote dialogue on the other hand allows individual settings for the footnote OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 150 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Write
261. e Paste icon on the Function Bar OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 122 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Options Is inserted as Calc OLE object as with Ct r1 V or drag and drop GDI metaFile Graphic Bitmap Graphic HTML HyperText A HTML table Markup Language Formatted text RTF A standard OpenOffice org Writer table object DDE link only under Table structure and contents without formatting With Windows updating Unformatted text Plain text with Tab delimiters Inserting from OpenOffice org Calc using drag and drop Open the text document and the Calc document from which to insert a range of cells 1 Highlight the range of cells from the spreadsheet that should be in the document 2 Click in this selected range of cells and hold down the mouse button Wait a moment until the cursor changes 1 Without releasing the mouse button drag the selected range of cells into the text document Should the text document not be visible first move the mouse pointer to the text document icon on the task bar and wait a moment until the text document opens In the text document a gray insertion cursor follows the mouse pointer to the location of where the table is to be placed 3 Release the mouse button when the gray insertion cursor is at the location where the table is to be inserted Deleting Tables When deleting a whole table from a text document the user has the following options 1
262. e This lays the map of the world on the sphere as a texture 9 alf the Gallery hides the globe users can fix the Gallery window so that it no longer overlaps with the document At the edge of the Gallery window click the Stick Floating icon looks like a thumb tack The texture is laid onto the sphere in its original size in the default setting Since the map of the world is much larger than the sphere only a small segment is seen as a green area on the sphere This will soon be changed 1 Click the sphere to select it 2 Display the context menu for the sphere and choose Area The Area dialogue appears with the Area tab page Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Fill C None Color Gradient Size Bitmap 1 SQQO Bitmap 2 Griginal Width OOc B RRRS Bitmap 3 ees Bitmap 4 Relative Height OOcm EJ Position 0 y we hf set fox H e ce L_e d Offset o ES Tie M AutoFit JT Set Row C Golumn x Cancel Help Reset 3 Select the Bitmap field removing the mark in the Tile field 4 Close the dialogue with OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 319 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Now the world map can be seen as texture on the sphere OpenOffice org has automatically selected the most appropriate projection method To see this double click on the sphere and then rotate it In Tools gt Options gt Ope
263. e via a hyperlink in each file of the Documentation that takes the reader to a page that describes the origin and ownership of the Documentation If You created one or more Modification s You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in the Appendix You must also duplicate this License in any Documentation file or with a hyperlink in each file of the Documentation where You describe recipients rights or ownership rights You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Documentation However You may do so only on Your own behalf and not on behalf of the Initial Writer or any Contributor You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty support indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Writer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Writer or such Contributor as a result of warranty support indemnity or liability terms You offer 3 6 Larger Works You may create a Larger Work by combining Documentation with other documents not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product In such a case You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Documentation 4 0 APPLICATION OF THIS LICENSE OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Public Documentation License Version 1 0 This
264. e 1 1 Default 100 INSRT STD HyP OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 45 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Entering and Formatting Text There is no prescribed sequence in which to work One can enter text and let us say underline it or italicize it while typing or choose to do this later Users can also decide whether or not to split a section of text into two columns immediately or to delay the action Text never has to be deleted and retyped simply because formatting needs changing Basically to edit text first select it and then choose the relevant command such as the one to format the text in italics There are several ways of selecting text for example using the arrow keys whilst holding down the Shift key or with the mouse whilst keeping the mouse button depressed Often there are different ways of choosing a command for example with a menu command with a toolbar icon or with shortcut keys Entering New Text To enter new text 1 Open an existing text document or create a new one 2 Enter text using the keyboard When special characters such as the copyright symbol or accented characters that are not available on the keyboard are to be entered select Insert gt Special Character and chose what is needed from the table 3 Press Enter to begin a new paragraph Line breaks Users never need to worry about line breaks as the software inserts these automatically Only press Enter at the point to start a
265. e Alignment tab OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 172 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Letters With Envelopes With OpenOffice org Writer a letter can be written in no time These instructions show how easy it is There are two really easy ways to get a result Use a letter template or Use the Wizard to create a custom tailored letter template Using a Ready Made Letter Template 1 Press Shift Ctr1 N to open the Templates and Documents dialogue 4 Templates and Documents Default 2 New Document E Bank_Account briesenickMiniDVCover cap1107 A CD back inlay Templates cd_dvd_insert_avery_8693_8931 A FA cd_dvd_label_avery_8692_8931 ig cd dvd label memorex CS CD booklet My Documents E CD Cover and inlay CD labels_Neato i CD labels_Verbatim c3 Checklist CorporateReport Z DLTCartridges E TRETEN TOT T a an a or Samples 2 Select a template 3 Enter the details required for the various wildcards such as the salutation 4 Type in the remaining text Templates include the user data that was entered in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data and which may be modified at any time Creating a Letter Template Using the Wizard 1 Start the Wizard by selecting File gt Wizards 2 Click Letter in the submenu to see the first page of the Wizard for Letters OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 173 Ch
266. e Always create backup copy is checked the old version is first copied to the backup directory The default backup directory is HOME OpenOffice org release user backup Change this as described above in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths gt Backups entry The backup copy retains the same name as the document but the extension is changed to BAK If the backup folder already contains such a file it is overwritten without warning Saving Recovery Information Automatically Every n Minutes 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Check Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval in the list box 1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 20 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org OpenOffice org File Formats OpenOffice org uses an XML file format as the default for saving and opening documents XML file format names In saving and opening OpenOffice org documents if no other file type is selected OpenOffice org uses the following XML formats Application File extension OpenOffice org Writer odt OpenOffice org Writer templates ott HTML Document html HTML Document Template oth OpenOffice org Calc ods OpenOffice org Calc templates ots OpenOffice org Impress odp OpenOffice org Impress templates otp OpenOffice org Draw odg OpenOffice org Draw templates otg OpenOffice org Formula Math odf Master documents odm These file name extension
267. e Configuration dialogue Configuration Menu Keyboard Status Bar Toolbars Events Menu entries New V ersions Versions ill New Menu D ac bwc acbwc acbTools Wordcour Modify extendedPd f extendedPdf extendedPDF uz aig as P DF Export as PDF Delete Document as E mail Send Document Document as P DF Attachment Send document as PDF Att t gt 4 Functions Category Function El extendedPDF epdf epdf addLinkToList extendedPDH epdf epdf addOutlineToList pdfm epdf epdf addPdfBookmarkToList epdfc 4 lepdf epdf checkFilenames epdf epdf checkPreconditions epdf epdf extendedPdf extendedPdf Customizes and saves current menu Pb layouts or creates new menus You 8 cannot customize context menus 3 Click the Menu tab 4 In the large list box scroll to find the command in which to integrate the new extendedPDF command e g Export and select it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 360 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org 5 Locate in the Functions menu the category and function to add In this case this would be found in the category OpenOffice org Basic Macros gt extendedPDF and the Function would be extendedPDF 6 Click New The new menu command is inserted in the large list box 7 The order of the items by moving the names to the large list box using Drag amp Drop 8 Click OK to close the Configure dial
268. e Data gt DataPilot gt Start The dialogue Select Source appears 3 Select the option Current selection 4 confirm with OK 5 The column headings of the table will be shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialogue which can then be positioned via drag and drop as required in the layout areas Column Row and Data 6 Drag the required fields into one of the three areas The field will be dropped accordingly DataPilot Layout OK Article ea Cancel Sum 1998 Salesperson 1998 Help irit tr Drag the fields from the right into the desired position More gt gt i If the button is dropped in the Data area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used in the data range to create the data Double clicking on one of the fields in the Data area calls up the Data Field dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 225 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Use this dialogue to select the functions to be used for displaying the data in the data area To make a multiple selection press the Ct x1 key while clicking the functions Data Field X p Count Numbers only StDev Sample StDevP Population ar Sample WarP Population Name 1998 The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by simply moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse e Replace a button by dragging it to the other buttons When double clicking one of t
269. e Edit Points icon Tu on the option bar top left in the graphic below Click the object to see all the B zier points of the object The object bar provides various icons for editing inserting and deleting points A 1 4 2 af RONSELT ELARRE al A OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 297 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 5 Use the Zoom floating toolbar to enlarge the view If the black filling of the characters is a distraction during the editing process temporarily change it to say 10 gray by choosing Format gt Area Converting to Curves Polygons 3D Many objects quite effectively edited by converting them The following examples illustrate this concept Open a rectangle This has the default settings for colour line thickness etc and should now be selected Choose Modify gt Convert in Impress the corresponding command can be on the context menu of the rectangle The menu subcommands are To Curve To Polygon To 3D To 3D Rotation Object Choose Modify gt Convert gt To Curve to convert the rectangle into a B zier curve Now edit the existing points As shown in the following graphic move the points convert them from corner points into rounded points delete them insert new points et cetera as the rectangle is converted into a heart shape All these options are described in detail in Help under the search words Edit points and B zier object bar amp c a b
270. e Text icon The mouse pointer changes to a which indicates that a text frame may defined and opened Open up a text frame release the mouse button and type in any text Cf Click on the edge of the text frame Now see the Draw Object Bar which contains the Object Rotation Mode icon appears Click on it Now if one clicks on one of the handles in the corners of the text frame and OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 52 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer p Open the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar on the Standard toolbar drag the mouse the whole text frame turns with the text From the context menu of the Text Frame a user can start the Position and Size dialogue by selecting the Rotation tab This allows the precise angle of rotation to be defined numerically Defining Borders Borders of pages paragraphs tables and other objects can be defined in two places Choose Format gt object name gt Borders where lt object name gt is page or paragraph In tables use the Borders floating toolbar on the object bar Choose Format from the menu bar Borders tab page To set a border select Format gt Page gt Borders or Format gt Paragraph gt Borders which opens the following dialogue Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Alignment TextFlow Asian Typography Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Style Dome 4 3h 7T om
271. e Wizard to import an AddressBook uu aie so ip PEE H ERR dea ORE NEUE 339 Manually Registering an Existing Address Book eee eene 339 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xix System Address Book as Data SOUtCB us eee rrr er rre tret en titer tt raa kao er d rn e YEAR UE 341 Toteortns Data Inte Cpoti TDIOR DER Lu encode eec etat erg tuas euet dug etn rd Ra VM OR 343 Importing and Exporting Data in Text Poena iue HH n CUIU SERRE K el E MV at MUE 343 bExporne i CSV Text Format reo eiie venio a RR DI led PURI RA ORARE Deu RR 343 Perso cr oM lio RTT T ENDURO EE 345 Table i c n E 345 LTS Mas ari oi oo pe oa RR PRIN RA ORUM RIMIS 346 Fonn BRI MEM E 347 Forms in OpenOf ce org THIOGENLL uoces text ratIx FREE Dobis RRURR PEE KE UK iR ee bU RE 347 Available Contool ss usegcorrytec ird e Og NADA RUE ONERATUS er ULM 348 Customizing oT eas o eco OPEN CULPAE E EE GN UD DER On MENU UM 349 Creating a group or option BUlTOTIS eod S bd FR REO b FE Eee et PE rg e UR il eda 350 pete TELUS a CORRIDOR eae dede EISM RT RUDAT Pu pit rte c PD prid re meen va na ne E ERE Ko 350 How toset p a DC DOR ooon pred ts ive induite idu bau ac neni ethan DIN aO RR 351 Doany other controls have am wizard eee en eee E ERU RAS 352 Attaching adata source toa TORIO us corper bu aa reden PERDE Eiei 354 Associating data with a TOL a errare t or rra eum eset bapi ee pn ORA epit rtv IUE 352 Activating T
272. e available publicly in Editable Form under the terms of this License via a fixed medium or an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism 3 3 Description of Modifications All Documentation to which You contribute must identify the changes You made to create that Documentation and the date of any change You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived directly or indirectly from Original Documentation provided by the Initial Writer and include the name of the Initial Writer in the Documentation or via an electronic link that describes the origin or ownership of the Documentation The foregoing change documentation may be created by using an electronic program that automatically tracks changes to the Documentation and such changes must be available publicly for at least five years following release of the changed Documentation 3 4 Intellectual Property Matters Contributor represents that Contributor believes that Contributor s Modifications are Contributor s original creation s and or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License 3 5 Required Notices You must duplicate the notice in the Appendix in each file of the Documentation If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Documentation file due to its structure then You must include such notice in a location such as a relevant directory where a reader would be likely to look for such a notice for exampl
273. e current work will be available For example if the cursor is located in a text document then only the text editing menu commands are available Likewise if graphics are selected in a document then only the menu commands that can be used to edit graphics will be available The other inactive menu items are hidden By choosing Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View one can select the Show inactive menu items field and then see the inactive menu items as gray entries in menus OpenOffice org lets the user change and customize the menu bar the way as desired Many of the toolbars and the status bar may so be modified to suit personal requirements The Toolbars Below the menu bar is the Standard toolbar This toolbar contains icons for several important commands and functions that can be used in OpenOffice org to open a document export to PDF undo and redo access the navigator or gallery or print the current document Immediately above the horizontal ruler is the Formatting toolbar This offers features that are always appropriate to the current context such as alignment font styles lists and indenting For example if a piece of normal text is selected one will see different icons from those within a text table On the left edge of the document is the main toolbar This varies depending on the document type text spreadsheet presentation drawing or formula Other toolbars such as the option bar and colour bar will be desc
274. e eer DU pe tg ND toD rn eeer area 8 RBS c 8 Tutius the Help Agent on and OM 5 2 aca GREEN NUR ae cae gon I AMBRE RU UM OE 8 Chapter 2 Working With OpnenGOTflee DER eu sc erre E eL aS SK RR ARN EY sand FPE 10 The User Inter Ede seo oo ous ooo urat nee Rr E TEKENEN ENES PU Xr IRE du EEDA taU sagem 10 Staring SP PD SS DER ua eant ated eI Dn RE E E K be RAM Pa GUN RD EE ees 10 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 i The OpenOffice org ABN cn dec censdeaoecancindussdssannaoieaseeen IE un hes P IRA EAT UU PI COE 11 Toolbars in the OpenOffice ore TO seccion dnt raisen aaa iieii 11 MRENE PE Lo ooi E E dd a E E E AE 11 The Men Batu eee dri dn A SEU UR x FIR a POR Cox a do on tul Mae 12 d UTEM D or RR TERT ET TO Tm 12 Examples ot Floating TOG bafs uoce essit requis xvob vba ue va it i bet tub p tog I Pe 13 Using Floating Toolbars au as bp RED ORERU e D RR RPM ERU MR ODE nM UE 14 The Mosman Window uiuos dpa ta i E HG daiwa adn Moe A Fg RE bI Gra etn ad un PENA RR 14 LB ST toolbars QE TOO TOSS 14 Dino qo DOE assise as Gc oen occus dup E RN ot d EEE EEE EE 15 Changing the Visibility of Buttons on Toolbars ueteri rre par ER HORE PHEIE x UR HEYS DE cag 15 Opening and Savine Docureuis ssai ieie E a rane cea S RE EEEE aE SEE 16 peer DISION TTT AAE PE E EEEE A E A 16 suns scade osson eeii e av E a S E EREE EAEE UU 19 Chancing the Work Direc aeo said eon On a aS 20 Saving Documents Autormatipsl Ty saison moron PR
275. e first Goto the beginning of the second paragraph and press Backspace usually above the Enter key the second paragraph merges with the first paragraph but keeps its format known as deleting to the left Pressing Enter creates two paragraphs but both have the format of the second paragraph Using Sections Sections in OpenOffice org Writer text documents isolate blocks of text for special purposes One example of their use in Writer is in preparing complete documents using Master documents Another is in preparing contracts from a set of fixed codicils The following are the ways that sections can be incorporated in a Writer document Sections of text that have a different number of columns than the master text Sections protected from further editing Sections that are only to be shown under certain circumstances or hidden OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 59 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Sections that are to be inserted into a document as files or parts of files Sections that can be incorporated into other text documents via DDE A section must consist of at least one paragraph When selected text is defined as a section it automatically ends with a paragraph break Another text document may be inserted as a section within a text document A section from another text document can also be inserted as a section Sections can be linked within a single document to other locations To insert a new
276. e for 2 0 50 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Inserting Protected Spaces Hyphens and Conditional Separators Non breaking spaces To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press the Ct r1 key while typing the space between the words This is important for example between a title and the person s name Non breaking hyphen An example of a non breaking hyphen would be in a company name such as A Z Obviously having A appear at the end of a line and Z at the beginning of the next line is not usually desired To solve this problem press Shift Ctr1l minus sign In other words hold down the Shift and Ctr1 keys and press the minus key Hyphen em dash and en dash To enter longer dashes add the character sequences and replacement under Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace NOTE There is a Replace dashes under the Options tab but be aware that this selection is for creating paragraph borders when a sequence of three hyphens or three equals signs are entered these are replaced by a single line border and a double line border respectively Here is a method to use 1 Open a text document and place the cursor in a convenient location 2 Use the Special Character dialogue to find the long em dash to use and insert it in the document Copy the character Open Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace Paste the dash character into the With field ON tn BR UU Enter the de
277. e for 2 0 256 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 4 Page three of the Wizard deals with the slide transition a In the first list box select the slide effect Cross Fade From Left b Select the default Medium for the speed of change wi AutoPilot Presentation New Product Intoduction Select a slide transition SEE Effect E A New Product Introduction Speed Medium Select the presentation type Default C Automatic 5 Select Automatically as the presentation type 1 e repeatedly runs through presentation with fixed time lapses until the Escape key is pressed 6 Now one can determine further parameters a Use the Duration of page spin box to determine how long each slide is shown before the next one appears Once the presentation is completed a different duration for each slide can be set individually b Use the Duration of pause spin box to determine how long the pause will be at end of the presentation before it starts again If the Show Logo check box is marked the Created with OpenOffice org logo will be displayed on the pause page The Default presentation type runs the presentation from beginning to end with manual slide transition e g by mouse click OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 257 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 7 Click Next wi AutoPilot Presentation New Product Intoduction Describe your basic ideas What is
278. e in a year if a particular number of toys are sold Consider the following table Selling price 10 Annual sales Annual profit 500 6000 Direct costs Fixed costs 10000 Quantity 2000 1500 2000 Profit B4 B1 gt B2 gt B3 2000 6000 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 231 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calculating With One Formula and One Variable pa Open a new spreadsheet for this tutorial To calculate the profit first enter any number as the quantity items sold gt in this example 2000 The profit is found from the formula Profit Quantity Selling price Direct costs Fixed costs Enter this formula in B5 In column D enter certain annual sales one under the other e g in steps of 500 from 500 to 5000 Highlight the range D2 E11 and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E Choose Data gt Multiple operations With the cursor in the formulae field click cell B5 Set the cursor in the Column field and click cell B4 This means that the quantity in B4 is the variable in the formula which is replaced by the highlighted column values Close the dialogue with OK Profit will be displayed in column E Calculating with Several formulae Simultaneously O 1 A tn A QU N e Use the spreadsheet created above Delete column E Enter B5 B4 in C5 This calculates the annual profit per item sold
279. e in square brackets The final text for the POSTNET bar code should now be 123455 When one formats this text using the POSTNET bar code font a POSTNET bar code For example enter 123455 into Writer select the whole 123455 text and change the font to the POSTNET bar code font that has been installed Note Calculating this sequence and putting it on an envelope easily may prove problematic Perhaps others can help out with automating the process however by using a database or spreadsheet to store an address list then one could simply add a POSTNET sequence column with the postal code pre computed in POSTNET format or perhaps as format the bar code as part of a database query Using OpenOffice org macros is yet another way to obtain results With respect to using 9 digit postal codes where there is a 5 digit zip plus 4 digit suffix the rules are the same Add all 9 digits find the check digit sum check 0 append that digit to make 10 digits and finally wrap the sequence in square brackets e g 1234567895 There is apparently another two digit code that can be added if it is wanted and the same rule applies for the 11 digit version to make a 12 digit code wrapped in All three forms are valid OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 178 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calc is the powerful spreadsheet program of the OpenOffice org program It provides the functions necessary for
280. e in the OpenOffice org Calc spreadsheet and drag the area into a table container in the data source view The table container is the area on the left of the database explorer that is designated Tables see diagram An Wizard is started automatically m e tiu Licc 8 ske xse eseom E d Bibliography Editor Howputish nstitutn m iib linkz Kaarst Bitt Sautter Ka o nueres BA Kaxrst Bitt 5zetocrger Ei Er Tables 9 M nchen Borges Mal TE M nchen Staas Diet Dosseldort Esser Heirs Borges Mal Borges Mal Staas Diet Dangel Dev a i ne Exporting in CSV Text Format The current Calc spreadsheet can be exported in a text format which can be read by many other applications 1 Choose File gt Save as 2 In Save as type select the filter Text CSV 3 Enter a file name 4 Click Save OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 343 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources 5 This opens the Export of text files dialogue in which to select the character set field delimiter and text delimiter 6 Click OK A warning informs users that only the active sheet was saved OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 344 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Database Tables This section describes how to create a new database table via the OpenOffice org design view Table Design Open the data source browser F4 Open a data source by clicking the plus sign in front of the name The tables container called Tables
281. e link icon cannot be activated if a frame already has a next link Also two frames can only be unlinked with the Unlink Frames icon rom the first frame Linking of frames cannot happen under the following conditions The target is not empty Automatically captioned frames are not considered empty and thus can not be the target of a link The target already has a previous link Source and target are in different sections For example one frame is in a header and the other frame is in a footer The source already has a next link Source and target are the same Closed chains or chains from the inside out or from the outside in are also not permissible The latter is the case if a frame is inserted into another frame and these must be linked with each other OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 89 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Using Text Animation Writer s Text Animation feature enables composition of applications with coloured animated text For example for a simple web site The following step by step procedure shows how to do it 1 Open a new blank OpenOffice org Writer document 2 Select Format gt Page to select a background for the whole page 3 Open the Draw Functions toolbar using the Show Draw Functions icon in the Standard toolbar 4 Click the Rectangle icon EH 5 Create a rectangle in the centre of the page EB untitledi OpenOffice org 1 1 1 File Edi View Ins
282. e must select the Connect to an existing database radio button and choose dBase from the drop down list box This should work even if one never had any dBase installed on the computer because a basic dBase functionality is built in to PRODUCTNAME However the controls should be renamed to give a better understanding I would suggest Connect to or open another data source and rename the first control to Create anew HSQLDB database Changed this issue to be an enhancement request for an UI change in the dialogue Registering a Data Source To register a data source for viewing and or editing in OpenOffice org select Tools gt Data Sources This command opens the Data Source Administration dialogue and is described in detail in Help Data Source Administration New Data Source i Bibliograpny General dBase Tables Queries Links Name Bibliography Connection Database type dBase m dbc dbase file D Star Of fice6 0 user database biblio Si Data source URL To continue registering a data source in OpenOffice org click New Data Source in the top left corner of the dialogue Then choose the type of data source in the Database type pull down list Select from the following database types depending on the operating system Database type Meaning Adabas A slightly scaled down version of the well known relational database system Adabas is installed with its own setup prog
283. e or Black amp White and click OK From now on all presentations or drawings will be printed without colour Selecting the Default quality option allows documents to be printed in colour again later on Grayscale converts everything to a maximum of 256 gradations from black to white Black amp White converts everything into the two values black and white OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 27 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Printing only text in black and white In Writer the user can choose to print colour formatted text in black and white This can be specified either for all text documents to be printed subsequently or only for a printing process of the current text document Printing all Writer documents with black and white text 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer or Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Web Writer 2 Then choose Print 3 Under Contents mark Print black and click OK All text documents or HTML documents will from now on be printed with black text Printing the current Writer document with black and white text 1 Choose File gt Print This opens the Print dialogue 2 Click the Options button This opens the Printer Options dialogue 3 Under Contents mark Print black and click OK The text document or HTML document now being printed will be printed in black text Printing Brochures OpenOffice org text documents consisting of more than one page can be printed automatically
284. e org Also by accessing Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General from the main toolbar users can reset the Help Agent OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 8 Chapter 1 Using OpenOffice org Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 9 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org OpenOffice org is reasonably intuitive but is sufficiently different to other suites that a period of familiarization required before use is fluid and effective This chapter starts with a general explanation of the most common control features in OpenOffice org such as toolbars floating toolbars and dockable windows This is followed by information on functions that can be used in most of the program modules of OpenOffice org The User Interface OpenOffice org provides not only the usual control elements found in other applications such as menus and icons but a host of other special features besides For example many of the special OpenOffice org features can be accessed via a context menu opened by right clicking on the selected objects Other user friendly functions are available by dragging and dropping with the mouse Starting OpenOffice org Under Windows once the program is installed see the separate setup guide that is part of the download image and is on most CDs the OpenOffice org group should be on the Windows Start menu under Programs Under NIX its location depends upon where it is installed a
285. e printer to landscape there In the Print dialogue under Print range select the pages to be printed All All sheets will be printed Pages gt Enter the pages to be printed The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards If one sees in the Page Break Preview that sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and only the first two pages of sheet2 enter 5 6 here Selection gt Only the selection will be printed If cells are selected these are printed If no cells are selected all those sheets whose names at the bottom on the sheet tabs are selected will be printed By pressing Ct r1 while clicking a sheet name this selection may be changed If under Format gt Print range the user has defined one or more print ranges only the contents of these print ranges will be printed Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page Suppose a sheet is so large that it must be printed on four pages The pages will be arranged as follows Page 1 Page 3 Page2 Page4 The top two rows of the sheet should not be printed on pages 1 and 3 but should be the topmost rows on print pages 2 and 4 The first column A should not be printed on pages 1 and 2 but should be on pages 3 and 4 1 Select Format gt Print ranges gt Edit and the Edit print ranges dialogue opens 2 Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 240 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The dialogue shrinks so th
286. e table has changed Calc recalculates the tables to bring the analysis up to date Here are the steps to accomplish to recalculate the tables 1 Click with the right mouse button on one of the button fields 2 Choose the Refresh entry or choose Data gt DataPilot gt Refresh Deleting DataPilot Tables To delete a DataPilot table select any cell in the analysis table then choose Data gt DataPilot 7 Delete OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 227 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Consolidating Data During consolidation the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place Choose a function so that for example displays the sum the standard deviation or the variance of the data 1 Open the document that contains the areas to be consolidated 2 Choose Data gt Consolidate to open the Consolidate dialogue Consolidate X Function OK Sum m Cancel Consolidation areas Help Source data area undefined Esneetisasisesi Copy results to Ad NR EN EN _ Pelete undefined J ssheeti a 14 e More gt gt 3 From the Source Data Area list box select an area as a starting point to consolidate with other areas 4 If the area is not named click in the field next to the Source Data Area A blinking text cursor appears Type a reference for the first source data area or select the area in the sheet with the mouse 5 Click Add to insert the selected
287. e the other application to try saving the document another export format such as in RTF format and then import this new document 2 Use the Find amp Replace dialogue a Select the string of characters which now appears at the start of each list and copy to the clipboard This could be for example an asterisk followed by a tab b Start Find amp Replace c Insert the contents of the clipboard in the Search for field Ct r1 v Note To ensure that the search text is only found at the start of the paragraph by inserting a caret before the search text and checking the Regular expressions box d Click on Find All To select all imported lists but do not close the Find amp Replace dialogue at this time e Click on the Bullets on off icon on the Object Bar to convert all the imported lists to OpenOffice org lists f Back in the Find amp Replace dialogue click on Replace All Since the Replace with field is empty all selected strings will be deleted For example the asterisk and tab used above will disappear g In the Bullets and Numbering dialogue define the type of bullets for bulleted lists ia ois Numbering via the Keyboard To move the numbering down a level in the hierarchy or further to the right place the cursor at the beginning of the numbered paragraph and press the Tab key Press Shift and Tab together to move an indented bulleted or numbered list up one level to the left To insert a tab s
288. eader Click the Bold icon Select the entire column A by clicking on the column header 2 3 4 Open the context menu 5 Choose Format Cells 6 In the Cell Attributes dialogue click the Numbers tab OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 215 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc 7 Choose a date format for Column A 8 Select column C by clicking on the column header 9 Apply a currency format Clicking the Number Format Currency icon on the object bar is sufficient Cell Attributes TIGHTS etia places m E THeHativ ETTUTTI ET TE Leading zeroes o E Ts Thousands separator MMos BR Lom jo ce oe ome OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 216 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Defining Database Ranges 1 Select the three column area and define the selected area as a database range by choosing Data gt Define Range 2 The selected range already appears in the Define Database Range dialogue Be sure to mark the check box Contains column headers so that the first row is correctly taken into account This box becomes visible when the More button is clicked 3 Enter a name for the range 4 Close the dialogue with OK Define Database Range X Name OK Database Cancel Help E E me Add pelete Range Sheet1 4 1 C 32000 Options MV Contains column headers Insert or delete cells Keep formatting Don t save imported data Source Ope
289. eak This shortcut only works directly in the cell not in the input line When text must break automatically at the right border of the cell proceed as follows 1 Select all cells in which the text should break at the right border 2 In Format gt Cell gt Alignment 3 Check the Line break field 4 Click OK Calculations are possible even in text For example enter text in cell A1 and more text in A2 In cell A3 insert the formula CONCATENATE A1 A2 which will concatenate the two texts in other words to string them together Numbers may also be entered in the Text format Format the desired cells as Text open the context menu of the cell by right clicking and choose Format Cells gt Category gt Numbers gt Text and enter numbers in the cells These will be interpreted as text The display of these numbers is left justified just like normal text however calculations with numbers in text format are not possible If normal numbers have first been entered in cells and the format of the cells has been later changed to Text these numbers remain normal numbers and will not be converted Only numbers entered later or numbers which are then edited become text numbers OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 188 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc To enter a number directly as text enter an apostrophe first for example for years in column headings 1999 2000 and 2001 The apostrophe will be not visible in the cell as it
290. ed If the Link box is not checked the copy created with the first insertion is embedded and used 4 Click Open to insert the image Editing Bitmaps When a bitmap image is selected the object bar offers the tools for editing the image Only a local copy is edited in the document even if an image is inserted as a link The object bar may look slightly different depending to the module being used The illustration shows the object bar in Draw X Defaut A aps a aps 4a aps x 4 Ops Yo 4 vps x A number of filters are located on the Filter floating toolbar that the user can open with the icon on the far left of the object bar pa NS Some of the filters open another dialogue when started and the user can use these options for example to select the intensity of the filter dub Text and graphics can be added to the bitmap image by selecting these objects together and exporting the selection as a new bitmap image Applying Text to Bitmaps To apply text to a pixel image and save it in JPEG format for example follow these steps 1 Open a new drawing document 2 Insert the pixel image by choosing Insert gt Picture 3 Unselect the image by clicking somewhere else in the document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 307 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 4 Open the Text floating toolbar from the Main toolbar and select an option for example the Fit Text to Frame icon 5 Draw a frame around the pixel image a
291. ed text Style as well Sticking with this example if one redefined the left indentation in the default it would have no effect on the paragraphs formatted with indented text because in the hierarchy the more closely associated format always has priority Numbering Styles Simple bulleting and numbering in a document can be easily set using the icons on the Writer object bar Likewise the icons for bold italic et cetera can be used to assign direct formatting that is not already part of the Style The Styles and Formatting window too offers various Numbering Styles that may be applied by double clicking the name of the Style For more control of numbering in a document use Format gt Bullets and Numbering which offers several other options that may be more suitable and which can be used to create custom styles Creating New Character Styles or Paragraph Styles Creating a new Style on the basis of an existing Style is a straight forward process The following is a step by step procedure with which to start a First of all apply new direct formatting to any characters or any paragraph which will become the Style To do this either use the text object bar or open the Format menu and choose Character or Paragraph b Select the text or paragraph containing the new formatting For words or paragraphs simply position the cursor in the respective word or paragraph c At the top of the Styles and Formatting window
292. een entered click Next On the second page indicate which item in the list should be initially selected Users can also specify no item be selected Click Next to go to the third page which allows one to associate a value with each item Specifying a value is particularly significant when data on the form is tied to a data source See Activating form controls in a document below To specify the value for an item click that item in the list and then type the appropriate value in the text box By default character items are associated with numbers starting from 1 Click Next to move to the Database Field page The Database Field page lets one automatically save the user s choice to a field in a table If preferred users can specify that the value is available only in the form Click Next to reach the final page of the wizard On this page one specifies a name for the option group the name appears as a caption on the surrounding box Click Create to exit the wizard and create the option group Setting up a combo box Like an option group a combo box lets a user choose from among a mutually exclusive group of options However a combo box usually takes up less space than an option group and also allows the user to type in a value not on the list Again the easiest way to configure a combo box is to use the wizard OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 350 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Make sure the wizard s On Off button is on an
293. eet is made up of individual sheets Each sheet contains various cells arranged in rows and columns Each cell can contain either an arithmetic formula text or value of virtually any length A calculation can be entered directly as a mathematical formula For example 4 5 But the main reason for using a spreadsheet is that its formulae can refer to other cells An example of such a mathematical formula might be SUM A1 A8 This calculates the sum of the values in cells A1 through A8 and enters the result in the cell containing the formula Additional formulae may also be entered in cells Al through A8 each referring to other cells and their contents and so on As one can see this allows calculation of extremely complex relationships A new spreadsheets is opened with the command File gt New gt Spreadsheet Initially it is named Untitled1 and remains with that name until saved under a different name Look at the new still empty document for the several typical elements that are discussed in the following sections OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 182 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Rows and Columns On a spreadsheet rows are numbered from 1 to 32000 and the columns are designated with the letters A through Z AA through AZ and so on the last column is labelled with the letters IV Each cell on the sheet can be uniquely referenced by row and column For example cell A1 is the first cell in the upper left corner
294. eft underneath the second slide to preview the selected effects 5 Save the presentation again using Ct r1 S or from File gt Save menu item Showing a Presentation By following the previous steps there is now a finished presentation ready for display To run it click the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar and the presentation will start automatically in default mode that is to say in full screen mode Click once with the mouse and the second slide will be displayed preceded by the defined transition effect After the last slide a black slide is displayed which means that the presentation is over End the presentation by pressing the Escape key The Escape key may also be used to stop the presentation before the end as necessary At this point more slides may be added to the presentation or some of the other effects attempted OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 263 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Editing Presentations This section shows how to use the versatile features of Impress to fine tune a presentation Many of the methods available in Draw can also be used in Impress such as entering text and converting it into 3D turning objects into curves and polygons editing connectors and glue points and so on For details please refer to the chapter on Draw Defining Background colours The background of a slide in a presentation or drawing document can be handled either in the master view or by assigning anot
295. elves when these are defined in the documents involved For example if figures in a subdocument are numbered from Figure 1 to Figure 10 figures in the next subdocument can numbered starting at Figure 11 A Master document together with all its parts can be saved as a combined OpenOffice org Writer document To do so do the following In the Navigator click the Toggle icon In the Navigator list double click Sections Right click a section name and choose Edit 1 2 3 4 Select all of the sections in the Section list and then click Remove 5 Click OK 6 Choose the command File gt Export and select the normal OpenOffice org Writer text format in the list box File type Printing a master document with all subdocuments texts and indexes is the same as printing any other OpenOffice org document Simply use the print direct icon on the Function bar or via File gt Print dialogue To check if a link exists for a single subdocument or all subdocuments position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the corresponding entry The path information for the original document appears in a small popup window Should the file is no longer be found at the original path a warning File not found is shown along with the original path and the entry is displayed in red in the Navigator Warning Graphics inserted in a sub document and anchored to page will not be displayed in the master document even though the g
296. ences in formulae So far users have been introduced to formulae containing absolute values absolute and relative references and references to named ranges Occasionally we have also mentioned the Wizard Functions Here is an example of references used in formulae with the help of the Wizard Functions Consider the example from the previous topic Now use the functions Wizard to calculate the average of monthly sales for each location L3 S b T t 4 Autopilot Functions 4 y ste Functions Structure Function result L4 London Category AVERAGE All X AVERAGE number 1 number 2 Function Returns the average of a sample Result Err520 Formula 1 Position the cursor in cell B8 where the average will be displayed Activate the Wizard Functions by clicking its icon on the formula bar 2 Select the AVERAGE function Where the category that contains this function is unknown simply leave the default set to all categories and repeatedly press the letter A until the AVERAGE function is selected 3 Click Next in the Wizard Functions On the right half of the Wizard another input area will appear where one can enter the arguments of the function 4 Click in the input field into which values are to be entered in this case starting with field number 1 Enter either B3 B6 or January or use the mouse to select that range in the sheet To do so simply cli
297. ened later find it under that name Save documents regularly as work progresses The simplest way is to save the current document by pressing Ct r1 S This replaces the document on the data medium with the current document Note An untitled document must be given a unique name for AutoSave to obey the settings in Tools gt Options gt Load and Save gt General Disabling AutoSave is not recommended OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 19 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Changing the Work Directory When the Open dialogue comes up the work directory is displayed The user can change this directory as follows 1 Select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths 2 Double click My Documents to open the edit dialogue 3 In the Select Path dialogue enter the work directory wanted and click Select 4 Close with OK Likewise other directories can be selected using the same method For example to display a different default directory for inserting graphics change the path for the entry Graphics Saving Documents Automatically Backup a File Automatically To create a backup copy of a document every time a document is saved 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Check Always create a backup copy If the current document is saved using the same path and file name with which it was first opened using File gt Save or Ct r1 S the old version will be overwritten by the new version If th
298. ens automatically The first page allows starting with an empty presentation a template or the last presentation opened By clicking the From template option OpenOffice org Impress collects all existing presentation templates and displays them in the list box For the purposes of this example select the template new product intro and click Next On page two of the Wizard dialogue choose another Page Style if needed The selection of presentation layouts available to choose from are from the predefined template directories As on the first page of the Wizard all templates are displayed as Page Styles OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 255 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress wi AutoPilot Presentation New Product Intoduction Select a slide design Presentation Backgrounds m Original Dark Blue with Orange Select an output medium Original C Screen C Overhead sheet Slide Creates a computer screen C Paper presentation only Help Cancel lt lt Back we Create On this page however the default is Presentation Backgrounds From this page select the presentation medium for the presentation Slide Overhead Screen or Paper The dimensions margins and orientation of the presentation will depend on these selections 3 To continue following this example do not change the background or medium of the presentation Click Next OpenOffice org User Guid
299. ent These are saved automatically and are irreversible This should not present problems if only adding a new colour to the palette but it can create difficulties if the standard colours are changed 1 To define a new colour the best thing to do is choose a colour from the colour palette which resembles the new colour It will be displayed in the upper of the two preview boxes 2 The list box provides two settings RGB and CMYK for defining the colour Select the colour model in the list box that corresponds to what is needed for this colour OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 311 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw The colour models RGB and CMYK are just two of the models most used to define colours RGB stands for red green blue and this model is particularly useful for colours being displayed on a computer monitor as it combines the three basic colours used CMYK stands for Cyan Magenta Yellow black or Cyan Magenta Yellow Key andis the colour model that best describes the subtractive colours used in printing Select the colour model that corresponds to the desired output medium monitor or a printer When exporting image files it is best to ask the photo exposure service in which colour model and format the image is expected 3 Define the colours by modifying the values in the spin boxes Enter values directly or click the buttons to change the existing values The result is shown immediately in the lower preview box If
300. ents that are used extensively or are to be templates It does not make sense to use Styles for documents that are only printed and discarded Using AutoFormat for Tables A quick way to format a table or a cell range is offered by the Format AutoFormat function In a spreadsheet first select the cells to which to apply AutoFormatting including the column and row headers and any sum rows or columns At least 3x3 cells must be highlighted before this menu item is activated Then start the AutoFormat dialogue AutoFormat X North 6 7 8 21 Format 0 Cancel Help AN dd Delete Currency Lavender Currency Turquoise Dras More gt gt A The preview shows an example of how each selected format in the Format panel will look Click OK to apply the format to the selected range in the spreadsheet Note If there is no change in colour of the cell contents then under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View gt Show or in the View menu Highlight values may be checked In this case the specified colours will be used A user format can also be set as an AutoFormat 1 Format a spreadsheet to as desired 2 Select the whole sheet e g by clicking the empty button in the top left corner above the first row header 3 Call up the AutoFormat dialogue and click Add A dialogue will appear in which to give the new format a name The format defined in this way can then be used in the future on o
301. enu Remember to check Synchronize contents on the Options tab 3 Click on New Document to close the dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 161 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 4 When the label document open invoke the data source view by pressing the F4 key 5 Click the Tack icon at the edge of the data source view to avoid having it cover the first label 6 In the data source view select the address data source table 7 Drag the data fields needed for the Address individually into the top left label For example click on the column header NAME and keeping the mouse button depressed drag it into the label This inserts a field 8 Put the fields in order to complete the address in the first label at top left 9 Place the cursor at the last text position after the last field in the first label 10 Open the Fields dialogue by pressing the shortcut keys Ctr1 F2 11 Choose the Database tab a Select the type Next record b Click on Insert c Click Close 12 Now synchronize the labels by clicking the Synchronize button in the small window 13 In the data source view select the records that will printed on the labels by clicking on the row headers to the left Use the Shift or Ctrl key in the usual way to select several records at the same time 14 On the Table Data toolbar click 54 the Data in Fields icon 15 Now save and or print the label document After the last label on the page the c
302. er 9 Same dialogue select Orientation This depends on how the envelope feeds see step 5 In any case landscape means that the text is rotated 90 degrees so that it is parallel to the long axis of the envelope and vice versa for portrait 10 If there is a manual feed tray select this under Device 11 Click OK 12 Click OK 13 Select New Doc if one only wants the envelope or insert to add it to the existing document 14 In the new window check that all is okay and click the print icon Adding a POSTNET Bar Code to an Envelope Get a POSTNET font First thing to do is get a suitable POSTNET font Do not be duped by the shareware notion of free which must be interpreted as free download of a demo or crippled version of a commercial product for which you must pay to use but thanks to the the tenacity of Ross Johnson there is one available that works Please see http www adams1 com pub russadam fonts html and in the POSTNET group select http www adams 1 com pub russadam shareware uspsbarcode ttf This is listed as 4 POSTNET TTF author unknown and which is unconditionally free On Windows simply install this font set by following the instructions for installing fonts that come with Windows This TrueType font can also be successfully installed into OpenOffice org on Linux in a similar manner using standard utilities Once you ve done that shutdown all OpenOffice org windows and restart them the font will be liste
303. er that the right and left arrow keys will replace the cell cursor if Ent ry mode by clicking in a cell and entering characters is enabled Double clicking or pressing the F2 key or clicking in the entry row enters the Edit mode The left and right arrow keys now replace the text cursor Upon pressing the Enter key the text in cell A1 is finished and the cursor automatically moves to cell A2 The active cell is always the one with the cell cursor and that is where entries and changes are made Multiple Sheets in a Document At the lower edge of the spreadsheet document there are tabs for switching among the various sheets of a document A new empty spreadsheet initially contains three sheets each titled SheetX where X stands for the numbers 1 through 3 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 183 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Inserting Sheets 1 Using the mouse put the pointer in one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the window 2 Right click to open the Context menu for the commands governing editing sheets Delete Rename Move Copy Select All Sheets amp Cut Strg X Copy Strg C e Sheet 1 3 Default 3 Choosing the Insert command opens the Insert sheet dialogue 4 Select the position and quantity of sheets to be inserted 5 Click OK Renaming Sheets 1 Right click the tab of the sheet for renaming e g Sheet 1 Open the context menu and choose the Rename command A dialogue box appears
304. er 4 Spreadshe ts i ERE ieeresr rores oe en dea a Ier x utter RR UEM intu een eee 179 Ov rvieW of the Fut i Io CUC aseissa tae EPA Run ESI ER RA MURDER ERU 179 ESTHER eoo eR RERNUREMN IE NKM NIRE Eta MI dM IERIMDUDEE QU mM MEME 179 Database Functiofis uei UR EUR FP EVLRIAISR EU a EE neuen NUR M TREO ERE LR ER RUE 179 rtu eet ide 179 Examining and Exttapolatuli TA susce receptus sen paese a eR AH 179 What ER Ie CUI C TO TL OO LETT 179 Dsnaguo 6 Batista ate ERR HR REP UR M EA UR ERA VERENA LE ORI UAM RI ME Mes 180 Importing and Exporting Duis reeie cir eetr plebe petto Era per bt Rubi turas ace ipa REX rEe eR RUN RENE RUN 180 Tripp mato C db ios use Rises bxc denssa i tica E d CUN Au 180 Bata Om EC siie a E RU NIB NN EEUU 181 Referencing Data in Networks and the Internet siirinsesi isinin 181 The Cale WAdOW esses srir tma t Usum eon 182 Spot ofa Spreadsheet isinen sinine Er a e Ee E ESEESE Ret tv 182 Rows URN DT a OO EDITT 183 Multiple Sheets in a DOCURISOE uie poser oe gen CP CUR D RR ke RA rsen ua PAR tud RR pA 183 Uribe ct EE 184 Renaming IN 1S css peces aiuti HRS ax RERO eg cir E a EEEa D IN RR CHR KU INR cases 184 Acatuecs nnd Fomnulae as Cell CORIOHES race ERO PUR ERE UE HIN NIME emia evacuees 185 Calculating in Sertadsheels ie uo o du esi a ERE severe A Exe RO Ur VIRA E FEN DR 185 Using Built d ROSSI TECTUM 187 A Short Description of What Cells Can Coma ccssxesencuedacsaneoanencasevswe
305. er 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Rotating and Resizing Objects When clicking an object for the first time eight handles appear with which the size ma be changed The whole object can also be dragged to move it to another position on the slide Click the Rotate icon on the main toolbar under Effects and directly on the main toolbar in Impress When the mouse pointer is positioned over a handle the mue pointer indicates that the object can be rotated by dragging the mouse In the middle of the object a small circle indicates the pivot point It can be moved to any other position with the mouse When the corners of the object f are dragged with the mouse the object rotates around the EX pivot point Dragging the middle points on the sides slants the object in relation to the opposite edge Click on the object once again to display the eight handles By double clicking within the object the handles change and the text cursor appears positioned in the middle of the object Text can now be entered which is automatically connected to the object Some interference may appear on screen Press Ctr1 Shift R to refresh the screen To resize an object simply click on one of the handles and drag until the object is the size needed OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 289 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Arranging and Aligning Objects Arranging Objects Where objects are overlapping and the position of the individual Dru
306. er Guide for 2 0 197 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Formatting a Spreadsheet A spreadsheet is hardly ever used without formatting Cell contents such as texts and numbers are given certain formats and the cells themselves are formatted with different colours borders and other attributes Either create the numbers format or use one of the many predefined formats For cells a wide selection of cell Styles is provided and personal cell Styles can be defined in the same way as one does text Styles Certain values in spreadsheets are often given particular emphasis e g in a table of turnovers to show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red This is possible using the Conditional Formatting for spreadsheet documents covered in a later chapter Formating Numbers Enter a number into the sheet for example 1234 5678 This number will be displayed in the default number format with two decimal places One will see 1234 57 when the the entry is confirmed Only the display in the document will be rounded off internally the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point 1 Set the cursor at the number and choose Format gt Cells to start the Cell Attributes dialogue 2 On the Numbers tab there is a selection of predefined number formats A preview box n the bottom right of the dialogue shows how the current number will appear with a particular format 3 This dialogue also
307. er LiInyux ieeo cn erento ret trek er aen 364 Creating a LAN Friendly Faxing Solution under Windows sess 364 Sending a Fax via dialogi IDE COCOS m 365 Configuring OpenOffice org for Faxing via DEGB casucinnssssiaveradoriessdsintwsnevactdecnmennanenesieoratses 365 Lal igo Perl 1S 0 37 1 aS ee a En KUNDE EE e mI NINE NEUE 365 Chapter 0 Advanced Techiialies aepo rte dine nix b bep iad oap eden A ci FAR NE 366 Copying and Moving Data Using Drag and Drops erre rrr rte rre rre 366 Dragging and Dropping Within a OpenOffice org Document sess 366 Rnscran Objects Froni he COE sc Lees RUE OM See ee Pet ees CUR UG Ren PEN UR US 366 Inserting am object a B COD ud eoo en aab ndi er i i Re Debt b a ER I SUA 366 Inserting anobject s a DEC cc ances ps nne mera etr AR snout BEN MI PU t iT Fa UE 367 Inserting an oiect as a background BESDDIG uiuos artis koI S M chine niaii 367 Inserting an object as a texture pattern for another object rene 367 Copying Graphics Prom the Oallgpe seeaoose peii preter is aa REL ERO Hi EU Pub Una URS ua RA 367 Inserting Graphics From a Document in the Gallery eene 367 Copving Graphics Between DOoOUMIONIES License iced tirer ansias eiai 368 Copying Draw Objects into Other Documents sessi Gisk ria UR AE E MAS 368 Inserting a Draw object 10 a text document sssini aiaa 369 Inserting a Draw object in a Spree SN os cac aavnnscssaxeerew
308. er and number in an absolute reference e g SAS1 SBS 2 Calc can convert the current reference in which the cursor is positioned in the input line from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift F4 When starting with a relative address such as A1 the first time this key combination is pressed both row and column are set to absolute references A 1 The second time only the row A 1 and the third time only the column A1 Pressing the key combination once more both column and row references are switched back to relative A1 Calc shows the references to a formula If for example the formula SUM A1 C5 D15 D24 is clicked in a cell the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in colour For example the formula component A1 C5 may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue The next formula component D15 D24 can be marked in red in the same way When to Use Relative and Absolute References First examine what happens without a relative reference Assume a calculation in cell E1 that sums the cells in range Al B2 The formula to enter into E1 would be SUM A1 B2 If later a new column must be in front of column A the elements to be added would then be in B1 C2 and the formula would be in F1 not in E1 After inserting the new column all formulae would therefore have to be checked and corrected in the current sheet and possibly in other sheets Fortunatel
309. er mode gt INSRT Insert mode is enabled The text cursor is a blinking vertical line Click in the field to enable overwrite mode OVER Overwrite mode is enabled The text cursor is a blinking block Click in the field to enable insert mode default layout of the status bar Page 5 104 OOoPageStyle 100 INSRT STD HYP 16 02 05 17 2004 After clicking e Ur LLL SBNEUBEUBESEDULOLLLLLODIELSLLLLLLLLIULLLAID OLZZOOLGLLLOOLLLNLG CLAOLULU H Pace 5 104 OOoPageStyle 100 OVER STD HYP 16 00 05 17 2004 mj Entering Text Anywhere on a Page Writer enables one to enter text at any position within the type area in the text document This is the direct cursor function it Click the Direct Cursor on off icon on the Tools toolbar Clicking the icon turns the direct cursor on and off When the icon appears pressed the direct cursor is enabled 2 Click on a free space in the text document The shape of the mouse pointer shows how the text that is entered will be aligned P lt gt Align Left Centre Align Right 3 Enter the text OpenOffice org automatically inserts the requisite number of blank lines tabs and spaces OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 47 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Selecting and Deleting Text Some basic steps to start Deleting characters To delete one character to the left of the cursor press Backspace above the Enter key To delete one characte
310. er table Where no data are selected in a OpenOffice org Writer table selecting Insert gt Object gt Chart also inserts a chart containing sample data in OpenOffice org Writer Values in a chart containing sample data can be changed by double clicking on the chart and then choosing Edit gt Chart Data When the values of a chart obtained from selected data are changed the values in the cells of the table must be changed If the chart is in a text document press F9 to update the chart Modification of chart data is also possible if for example a chart is copied a chart from a Calc document into a Writer document and is now double clicked in the Writer document Remember however only this copy is being edited and not the original document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 211 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The type of chart can also be changed after the fact Double click on the chart and choose Format gt Chart Type a dialogue appears offering various types from which to choose Chart Type X Chart category zm Cancel f Help Experiment with the different options in the Chart Type dialogue Try switching between 2D and 3D representations With the Columns chart type a Combination Chart of lines and columns can be created The three dimensional representations make special effects possible In 3D charts one can even adjust the illumination settings such as light source ambient light and the c
311. erm A 4 finds the first A to the last 4 i e AX4 A4 Note The and M 19 reference RE combinations will be familiar to programmers who have used standard RE s however the OpenOffice org version is confined to the search term The 1 9 cannot be used in the replace term as would normally be expected for standard REs Use amp to transfer the entire matching search term to the replace term OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 42 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer In this chapter the user will learn about the OpenOffice org word processing module called Writer Starting with the basics it will introduce the more sophisticated functions and lastly provide an explanation of some of the templates and sample documents that are part of the distribution Remember to examine other chapters in the guide for other important information on working in Writer Usage of menus windows floating toolbars et cetera is described in Chapter 1 Information about customizing the user interface of OpenOffice org working with data sources e g for form letters and about the revision marking function is contained in a separate chapter Advanced Techniques The OpenOffice org Writer Functions This section contains a brief overview of the functionality and capabilities of OpenOffice org Writer Writing Writer helps users to create all sorts of written documents O
312. ert Format Tools Window Help x PME zm g B 2 ge x Li R I e M n E 5 Fee TEES Ki BE Puetrtt 0 e o sra STD HYP F Erazmo O aoso 6 Open the context menu for the rectangle object by right clicking somewhere within it 7 Choose Area to open the Area dialogue and then select the Area tab 8 In the Fill section list box choose either Colour or Gradient if the one wanted isn t currently selected 9 Select a colour or a gradient 10 Close the dialogue with OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 90 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 11 Open the context menu once more 12 Select the Line command to define the border properties of the rectangle and choose a colour and a width Line line Styles Arrow Styles Line properties Arrow styles Style Style Color Width jo light red 485cm H 485cm Width Center Center 4 90cm Transparency ox H Synchronize ends Cancel Help Reset 13 Close the dialogue with OK 14 Double click in the middle of the rectangle and enter any text regardless whether the text extends beyond the width of the rectangle or not 15 Click again on the border of the rectangle in order to select it 16 Open the context menu and select Text 17 In the Text dialogue click the Text Animation tab 18 Under Text Animation select Effects 19 Select the pull down list the option Scroll Through 20 On the Text tab page
313. erting and Editing Tab Stops Set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler Alternatively a user can set tab stops by choosing Format gt Paragraph Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs Click the ruler once to set a left justified tab Right click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which the tab type can be changed To set several decimal tabs one after the other keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown then click on the ruler i Setting left tabs Fl Setting right tabs Setting decimal tabs A Setting c entered tabs Double click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 382 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Double click the white area of the ruler to set one tab The Paragraph dialogue appears with the Tabs tab page Note To assign tabs directly to a current Paragraph Style open the context menu of that paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style to call the Paragraph Style dialogue where tabs are then entered Moving Tabs on the Ruler There are three ways to set tabs 1 Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse 2 To move several tab stops on the ruler press the Shift key before clicking a tab Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it The spacing between those tabs remains the same 3 Press Ct r1 instead of Shift when draggin
314. ery Graphics from HTML pages and other similar sources can be placed in the Gallery by drag and drop OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 367 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques 1 Display the Gallery theme to which to add the graphic 2 Position the mouse pointer above the graphic without clicking 3 Ifthe mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the graphic refers to a hyperlink In this case click the graphic while pressing the Al t key to select it without executing the respective link However if the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol simply click the graphic to select it 4 Once the graphic is selected release the mouse button 5 Click again on the graphic image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds to copy the graphic image to memory 6 Without releasing the mouse button drag the graphic into the Gallery Note Draw objects that are created using the Draw functions floating toolbar cannot be incorporated in the gallery Copying Graphics Between Documents Graphics can be copied from one document to another Note If the document is to be published please observe copyright laws and for safety obtain the consent of the authors of the original i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Open the document in which to insert the graphic object Open the document from to copy the graphic Click the graphic to select it Right click to open the context menu or use Ct r1 C Select Cop
315. es Fitting Text to Frames 1 With the Fit Text to Frame icon draw a delimiting frame which predetermines the position and size of the text 2 Enter any text in the frame 3 Click in any free area of the document Notice that the entered text is scaled so that it exactly fits into the frame OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 292 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Callouts 1 Using the Callouts icon drag the mouse from where the callout arrow should point to the point where the callout text should appear 2 Release the mouse button 3 Edit the size of the frame of the callout 4 To start entering text into the callout just double click the line The callout frame appears with a wide gray border indicating text edit mode 5 Enter the callout text 6 Change the line properties by clicking on the line opening the context menu and clicking on the Line command Select arrowheads for the lines in the Style pull down list on the Line tab page Converting Text Into 3D Selected text can be transformed into a 3D body by choosing Convert gt To 3D from the context menu The 3D body will fill the area created for the text frame Text 3D text can be rotated using the Rotate icon C from the Effects floating toolbar on the Main toolbar By clicking inside the delimiting frame and dragging with the mouse button pressed the object will rotate on all the axes at the same time However by clicking one
316. es eight handles appear which can be used to change the size and shape of an object For example drag one of the handles in the desired direction 10 Finished FontWork objects can be copied to the clipboard and so pasted into other documents for modification sizing or other attributes OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 95 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Aligning Text With Lines Aligning text on a free form line 1 Draw a free form line using the free form line function on the Draw Functions floating toolbar y 2 Double click on the line 3 Enter the desired text or copy it from the clipboard 4 Choose Format gt Object gt FontWork 5 Click for example on the Rotate icon Aligning text with straight lines Slanting text so that it follows an angle from one point on the text page to another point uses a similar procedure to aligning text on a free form line Here s how Using the draw functions draw a straight line from one point to another B In the list box on the object bar select the line style Invisible Double click on the line which is now invisible but the two ends may still be seen Double click exactly between them Enter the text NH nA A U N Click outside the line object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 96 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer The Navigator The Navigator is another important feature of OpenOffice org that along with the
317. es ico MN candenti etit d dcn EK ERE 167 Deining ty TP LAG on sense RU QU dab eRReR NU id um UU RH AU ERU 167 Using coloured or Graphic Backsrounds uioiseir ertt pr er rh ra E ia aini 169 Creating a Table of CUBIEBES eer aei pae i tr op ends reesen den an aperte pedet ER ques earned 169 Further afotniti Mies diri tide beso tte es dias nu rte aka Ed eo Eo ui e RR HERE 172 Using Antomate Hyphenation eg RW RS 172 Letters With Bovelopes sueco WEM od OR HIER EH RP TU BIRANR DINE IRRAR ER DR rM Ni RN RR 173 Using a Ready Made Letter Teraplale sie eeesen rio deen II ERIS 173 Creating a Letter Template Using the Wiisaml ues mers eme ta ots taxon ens 173 Creatine an Envelope TOSmldit 2o quee EURO DEED ENS E UI VD M UNE ME 174 Inserting an Envelope ito a Docurmietb iusees e reo tre a erbe E PO videa 175 Adjusting the Printer for the Printout auod ensi e deno SEPOE DR E EVAE FEE etRE HA RENRO Eva NUS 176 Appling varus PODIS sisie ioris ioniese ae DH ARCH Dg E E aaao ds 176 Creating and Printing a Letter With an Envelope ss esssseseesessessresesssesersresresssseesresresees 176 Creatine an Single Envelopes adir retia aaraa eto a E Up aa RR e na S 177 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xi Adding a POSTNET Bar Code to an PhS circ exes rtm map cdabaeeaddcebeyexedeaaeeeaeenses 177 Geta POS PNET M ror arpi ranea a E EAEE EEEE 177 Building a Complete POSTNET Bar Code fro Printing osa cette tenens 178 wel mira AF Y 178 Chapt
318. es in text sess 100 automatic hyperlink formatting eseeesss 37 bullets iie esee i ante ae EEEEDE RS automatic hyphenation in text 33 56 165 166 184 adding and edititig a 3 eei e rete sade 71 automatic numbering eese Hi M ME MR CD EMEN 35 119 OF Objects vsisi Dido 107 re ee sissi iringi iia d in imported lists seeeeeeeeee 126 automatic saving seseseeeeenenrennnnnnnnnnn 20 21 replacing aiia eia eedem 35 automatic word completion sse 50 turning on and off sss 116 AutoShapes feature in Microsoft Office 3 business CALS ccccccecceeccccesceccceecsececcessecetscesseceeseecseees AUtOT CX teececcccccccccccccccccececeeceees 38 89 90 91 92 439 442 creating and synchronizing sess 171 ARES OE chia si cL i Se eee s dabonedbhnsebidss BINH ae aedi dut teddiaet ausu neta 230 big small sssssssseeeeenenen 407 scaling oo eee ceeccescesceeseceeceeeeeeceeeeeceseeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeeeeens 230 changing VIEW etascasecsnsnenchasierassnsrnoneronsnannenedineantneni 407 form CONTOS ceecee edeno nieri bee eset ye kon c eda 39 B TOON DAES eerte ee ine re reete eive 403 405 406 backerounds eie en t te IRE a Rd EHE C colour esee 56 132 154 177 182 269 392 for cells and pages arerin erara a eE n ee Ee ne 216 calculating E E E A E
319. et rtr ertet ert etre rivers anos 231 JETO ics nra ida Dt giam xad ebd aaa uq a bu ut GN ERREUR RO UU RN case 231 Calculating With One Formula and One Variable eei eite R tertie RR e RR PHPES 232 Calculating with Several formulae Simultaneously eese 232 Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns eene 232 Culculatne With Two Variables soper ERE tepido d xev Y rt Ya AR 233 Ung SEDINO TET TD PP IMS 234 Using Ready Made SOenDaflOs iie prever E SUP PM eR REL YEN DEOR E RH rdi oa RH RARO D 234 Creating Personal SOCBEROR eee ooa ne E FERMER NER iD DN MGE M E HM EE 234 Validity of NS ULIS NITIDE QOO DE OO OT 236 Using Cell Contents Validiy AETHER 236 Sample marO esaet se pe iR Go aaa REE MUR RU or epa baeo ea o ED RA EERE Nene 238 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xiv Printing or Exporting ATC 55s oerte i Hi pride eripit a Uv Rhe DUE RARE Vx OF MUR E KUUE E REUS 239 Pautas Sheet Details icici iisa aE EE SEA EEE HM eg 239 Defining Nu mberof Paces for PONUDE eee eee Pee va MEN S LOI RE 239 Printings Sheets in Landscape Format rt t npa er OR AS MN covanietaaziosavenssantadensaes 240 Printing Rows or Columns on Every PuREE eee der rer rapid erar he eer EMEN ER YE NS uE CERES 240 Saving and Opening Sheets m ETDMD usedebez nre etin eii be Ru oiia VN MB i s ou 242 Savine Shes on HTNIE oai Hen RENDUM INE EDU NN MNA MERDA EN EE 242 Opening Shests m HTML ancire bid FR ERU a Ue
320. ext Documents With Writer Paragraph Styles that the user defines and uses in the subdocuments are automatically Paragraph Style Heading 1 X Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Background Borders rE Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation C Automatically at 2 H Gharacters at line end at 2 H sara Gbers ab line Degn E EN Maximum no GT consecutive hyphens Options v Break Page C Column Before C After IV with Page Style Right Page Page number 0 Don t separate lines v Keep with next paragraph Orphan control E ines Widow control 2 H lines Cancel Help Reset Standard adopted in the master document If the master document is saved afterwards these Styles will be available everywhere in the master document The Styles defined in the master document have priority over Styles with the same name in subdocuments Note When using master documents use the same template as a base for all subdocuments and the master document itself As a new Style is needed in the document simply add it to the document template and reload the master document so that the new Style can be applied to all documents automatically Use Page Styles to ensure that all subdocuments always start on a new page 1 e always on a new right page There is a built in Page Style called Right page that could for example be linked to the Paragraph
321. ext TEMAS ec aeons ee gu repe ran ree es mane a ene as naga FATUM NE RR ATE ICH ME 85 ES MOT Oo me fe GU p QURE OH HORN MI I OLI Ur MI DNU UN Eaa a EEEN EEEE EEES 85 Junto Teser Wih Ato tna 525 beh PIER USER EO PFERDE en MER E DEM ME NOU te E RIEN IM ES 86 Exceptions In AULOLDEEBOL a serpere abord ein bx eie rl bx A CR V RUP E EER AEREE aR 86 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 vi DUA ei aeos E E E ica enis E apicc cern indiam E 87 Inserting Editing and Linking DEXEPUIENRGS ae e arte tup a c eo e cia eee bu 87 Iuser pne Text FESTIES cec eren nai Nob bl petia Ves riti RR gd AO UR Pu RR MuR 87 Editus Text TE RIS ouch ce des nd dones cta OEE seed AEE EE dut E DUM eerste meena 88 Ea Text Frares IEEE ITE IE CT LS 88 Using Text Aia uoi soca P DNA IM DEM ND TUM 90 Drawing Lines in Text scorie Een abd e UR DN Qa Rua enu pad ue es aes 93 Editing Text With PORA OE Leer sey cats m ER ERR teased en Re 94 Alone Text With LES soccorso pavor aa eda ert tdi nte x eO DAE 96 bons tektona Too TORRE DIES es eee eer er ee eee 96 Alieusis text with Stra gt Bess eec o eie brc rk ebr e a aai a Ea aat 96 pU Ruins TT Nr ee s 97 Jumping Eram One Object to Another m Text assem ces rin peo eaa oR e eb ed Lari p a 97 Durepmirio a SpOOI NCDSES LL osos Ue CDS Rari ata ia MT E Nee EM aa 98 Chapters 1 NONTEBOE eo doris inr iser tan RR HR IH IRR HE NO d PAR Pep ub UU Ub d eda A 99 Indexes and Tables of Contents in VVEHGE eos proie rrr as ERO a UE Ur pET PU pubU ur n ER dK TE 1
322. f the Styles and Formatting window click on the KE Fill Format Mode icon The mouse pointer changes to a symbol indicating this mode as soon as it moves back into the document 3 Click once on every paragraph in the text to which to apply the selected Style 4 Finally to switch off this mode click the Fill Format Mode icon again or press the Escape key Changing a Style the Easy Way The section provides a scenario for making a style change quick and easy To start one has used the custom Style made in the previous sections to format a document with the new Head1 Style However later the user may decide that it would look better if the headings were spaced with slightly wider gaps between the letters The following gives the steps to making this change 1 Locate the longest heading formatted with the Head1 Style in the document and click three times in that heading to select the entire line 2 Make the desired changes To lock the character spacing use this method a choose Format gt Character or choose Character from the context menu for the selected line b In the Character dialogue click the Position tab and in the Spacing list box select Expanded In the spin button increase the spacing to make the heading wider c Close the dialogue with OK 3 Now additional direct formatting has been on one of the headings formatted with the Style Head1 All direct and Style formatting should now be adde
323. f those margins If different headers and footers are not needed simply choose a mirrored page layout under Page Layout in the tab Page Switching between odd and even Page Styles and between First Page and Left Pages can be done automatically by defining the Next Style If one defines the Page Style with Next Style and apply the new Page Style to the first page then OpenOffice org will automatically apply the correct Page Styles to the continuation pages Here is a method 1 Open a new text document 2 Click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window Format gt Styles and Formatting 3 Choose the Style First Page to use as the basis for a custom Page Style 4 Open the context menu and choose New 5 In the Page Styles dialogue go to the tab Organizer a Give the Page Style a name such as Pagel and b define Left Page as the Next Style 6 For the Left Page define Right Page as the Next Style and for the Right Page choose Left Page Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages Footers are inserted using Insert gt Footer 1 After creating the footer set the cursor in it and select Insert gt Fields gt Other 2 Choose the Document tab and under Type select Page under Select select Next page and under Format select As Page Style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 147 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 3 Fina
324. fine Custom Slide Show New Custom Slide Show SS a EE Contribution Margins Sales Development 1 Open the Slide Show gt Custom Slide Shows dialogue 2 Click the New button The Define Custom Slide Show dialogue appears 3 In this dialogue enter a name for the presentation On the left there is a list of the existing slides Select a slide to show in the custom presentation and click the button with the arrows pointing to the right 4 The slide will be inserted in the right field Any slide listed on the right will be shown in the custom slide show 5 Rearrange the order of the slides in the right field via Drag amp Drop OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 269 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Exporting Printing and Presenting There are many possible ways of outputting finished presentation documents For example electronically display finished presentations print the pages in colour on paper or print high resolution transparencies or transfer them wholly or partially to other applications and then use them within those applications Printing offers a choice between outputting the document directly to a printer or printing it to a file that may then be copied to a printer Printing a Presentation Slide In Impress the current document is easily printed by clicking the Print File Directly icon in the function bar Printing is immediate according to the printer default settings and no
325. fine the page format and margins 5 Check Register true and choose the reference Paragraph Style Text Body Note If the register true option is activate the baselines of all paragraphs with the Text Body Style will be exactly aligned so that they are at the same position in each column and on each page in relation to the page With double side printing the baselines of the register true paragraph will have the same position Normally use the Paragraph Style used to create the actual text To define another Paragraph Style as register true call up the properties dialogue of that Paragraph Style Call it up for example in the Styles and Formatting window via the context menu of that particular Paragraph Style select the Modify command On the Indents and Spacing tab in the field under Register true select Activate Editing Headers To edit a header click in the header field in the document With the context menu Page activate the Page Styles dialogue Select the Headers tab and click Options In the Borders Background dialogue choose a background colour and click OK then confirm the following dialogue as well Editing Columns To change the number of columns or create a dividing line between columns activate the Page Styles dialogue via the Page context menu Click on the Columns tab Change the number of columns in the spin box Amount and modify the distance between the columns in the spin box Spacing Make sure that the Au
326. first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button in the Desktop Task bar Continue to hold the mouse button down and the document addressed in this fashion is displayed and the still pressed mouse pointer may be moved within the document and released 1 Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor 1s at the position to insert the copy of the graphic object If the object is connected to a hyperlink and the method outlined in the note above is not used the hyperlink will be inserted instead of the graphic object Graphics inserted from a webpage are generally linked to the remote web site Use Edit gt Hyperlink to embed the graphic in the document Inserting Graphics via Drag and Drop From the Gallery A user can Drag and drop a graphic object from the gallery into a text document spreadsheet or presentation to insert the graphic object 1 When dragging and dropping without pressing a key or while pressing the Ct x1 key a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer and the graphic object is inserted as an object 2 When dragging and dropping while pressing the Shift and Ctr1 keys together a linking arrow is seen next to the mouse pointer and the object is inserted as a linked object A linked object is not copied into the document but refers to an object elsewhere If the object elsewhere is modified then all linked instances of it are also changed The size of the object in the document does n
327. font size Apply direct format by directly setting a certain attribute s to the selected text area For example clicking the Bold icon on the text object bar directly applies the bold format to a selected text area or to subsequent characters at the cursor while typing Direct formatting is more appropriate for one time use If for example to make a word bold just position the cursor in the word and click the Bold icon This works quickly and intuitively Styles on the other hand apply attributes to text in an indirect manner A Style is a labelled collection of default settings that format text Indirect formatting with the help of Styles is much preferable when formatting lengthy documents in a uniform fashion Styles do require some advance preparation First create the Style then apply the Style to the text Both tasks are best done using the Styles and Formatting window By way of example let s assume that each of the headings is formatted with a 24 point Helvetica font but this now needs to be changed in all the headings to a 20 point Times font and in bold Doing this manually requires time and patience however had the format been defined as a Style say with the name Head1 that was applied to the headings in the document one could simply modify the Head1 Style and all headings would be automatically changed to match the new settings OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 62 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer
328. g a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin Changing the Properties of Tabs To change tab type click the tab to be changed on the ruler then open the context menu Deleting Tabs Deleting a tab with the mouse is easy Simply hold down the mouse button while dragging the tab outside the ruler Changing the Defaults To change the settings of the default tab stops see the settings in Tools gt Options gt Document Type gt General The Context Menu of the ruler toolbar allows changes to the displayed units to centimetres inches point pica et cetera These changes are only valid until exiting OpenOffice org and they only apply to the ruler from which context menu the changes were made To change the ruler measurement units permanently choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General and change the measurement unit there OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 383 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Changing the colour of Text Click the Font colour icon in Writer and other modules and keep the mouse button pressed to obtain a floating toolbar from which to choose from the range of colours A Font colour Writer ig Font colour other modules The following applies to all modules Writer Calc Draw Impress Select the text that is to take another colour then click the colour
329. g confirmation that checking continue checking at the beginning of the document The system always searches first through the selected user defined dictionaries and if the word is not found there it searches through the main dictionary Should the word not be there either the dialogue shown above is displayed and which allows the user to replace the word Type it correctly in the Word field or select a word from the list of Suggestions and click on Replace The word in the Word text box can be permanently added to the user defined dictionary First select the Dictionary pull down list Then click Add When replacing a word in the Word field with another word one can check this other word by clicking on the Check Word button OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 152 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer If needed all unknown words in a text can be automatically entered in the active user defined dictionary For instructions refer to OpenOffice org Help Automatic Spellcheck From within a text document click the AutoSpellingCheck on off icon on the Standard toolbar All words marked as incorrect by the spelling checker will then be underlined in red Right click on words underlined in this way and a context menu appears The context menu often provides a list of suggested words one of which may be clicked to select it The suggested word then replaces the word underlined in red If a wrongly typed word us
330. g the process the enlargement or reduction will apply only to the active cell rather than to the entire row or column The proportions of the table remain fixed Adapting Table Widths The display attributes of a table are defined by the settings under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Table Behavior of rows columns Fixed means for example that if one cell is made wider the adjacent cell will become narrower Other cells will not be affected and the overall width of the table stays the same Behavior of rows columns Fixed and Proportional means that all adjacent cells become proportionally narrower In other words wide cells will shrink more than narrow ones Again table width remains constant Behavior of rows columns Variable means that the width of the entire table is variable Whenever an individual cell is made wider the entire width of the table expands as well When inserting or deleting cells rows or columns the table mode decides how the neighbouring cells rows or columns should behave In the table mode new rows and columns are only inserted in a fixed way if there is sufficient space OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 137 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Images Drawings Clipart and FontWork Images drawings clipart and special FontWork objects can be inserted in the text document Positioning Objects There are various ways of anchoring the objects on a text
331. ge Visible icons and menus can be customized as well Drag amp Drop The drag and drop feature enables users to work even more quickly and efficiently with text documents in OpenOffice org For instance one can drag graphics directly from the Gallery into an active document Extensive Help Functions The program provides an extensive Help function which serves as a reference guide to the program elements in OpenOffice org as well as includes a variety of instructions for simple and complex tasks OpenOffice org User Guidefor20 sss Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer The OpenOffice org Writer Window Windows of OpenOffice org Writer The above graphic shows the various windows and toolbars available for use in managing documents and where their associated icons are located For clarity the windows listed counter clockwise are Insert floating toolbar Insert Fields submenu Insert Object floating toolbar Form Functions floating toolbar Draw Functions floating toolbar Navigation Window Navigator Window and Styles and Formatting window Window mined OpenOffice org 31 1 5 Ele Edit viei Insert For Toos Window Help J S2ea 2 86 e2e6 z Rl ale x pu NP x Default Timed New Rome 12 Se eae al Bee ACE 4 Peed yexraoenadi pups pmypogunm meme azm os Ee n nng ARA 182 175 168 16 154 147 140 133 126 119 112 105 98 91 g m R R D amp E S N m m m E N 4 Pag
332. ght click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link Inserting an object as a background graphic 1 Open the Gallery 2 Choose a theme from the left area 3 Select the object by a single click 4 Open the context menu and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or Paragraph Inserting an object as a texture pattern for another object 1 Open the Gallery 2 Choose a theme from the left area 3 Select the object by a single click 4 Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing Ct r1 Copying Graphics From the Gallery Graphics dragged from the Gallery are inserted into a text spreadsheet or presentation document where they are dropped If the graphic is released directly on a draw object please note the following If it is moved by dragging without pressing any key no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer only the font attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object where the mouse button is released If it is copied by dragging while holding down the Ct x1 key a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer the graphic is inserted as an object If a hyperlink is created by dragging while holding down Shift 4Ctrl a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery however the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained Inserting Graphics From a Document in the Gall
333. ging and dropping elements from one template or document to the another the mouse pointer shows the location to which the content may be dragged Either the mouse pointer is a circle with a line through it in which case the content cannot be move d to that place or the mouse pointer has an insert line that marks the place where the content will be moved to when the mouse button is released OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 79 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Creating New Styles From Selections Create a new style by copying an existing style as follows 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In the document select formatted text or a paragraph that has the format from which to create the new style 3 Click the icon 2 on the Styles and Formatting window function bar New Style from Selection New styles can also be created from a selection by dragging and dropping it 1 Select the type of style to be made by clicking the corresponding icon at the top of the Styles and Formatting window e g Paragraph Character Frame Page or Numbering 2 Select that part of the paragraph text or object form which to form the new style 3 Drag this to the main Styles and Formatting window area and release the mouse button over a free area when the insertion line is no longer visible Transferring Formats With Fill Format Mode Applying a new Style in Fill Format Mode 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In t
334. gned to the slide currently in use Presentation Styles As part of slide design there are a whole set of Presentation Styles that may be assigned to the slides Open the Styles and Formatting window to see a list of the predefined Styles Presentation Styles Background Existing Styles may be modified but any modifications are i ores valid only for those slides in the current document that uses Outline 1 this slide design or new Styles created naa The built in Styles Outline 1 through Outline 9 enable the Dutline 4 user to give the outlined headings and topics on the slides a Dutline 5 uniform look Outline 6 Outline 7 Open a new empty presentation with a slide layout that parish 3 allows greater structural depth The slide layout called Subtitle Title Text is suitable for this purpose TAL 1 Activate the outline view mode by clicking View gt Master View gt Outline View starting in the Menu bar or by pressing the F12 key OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 265 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Using Outline View One way to create a completely new presentation is in the Outline View mode All slide titles appear in a list along with the headings and sub topics The hierarchy of the headings as well as the sequence of the slides can be easily modified Times New Rom 7 44 7 Bi uA Q 1m S 1 5 2 3 4 5 iii 8h M a a eu n Wan So ders dor
335. gure 3 shows the Events tab for a text box For each event one can specify what happens when that event fires Do so by clicking the ellipsis button next to the event and then pointing to the OpenOffice org macro that performs the desired action L x General Data Events e ee N g a Text modified E a When receiving focus When losing focus E m el a al di Le ee J zl Mouse inside RI E Mouse moved while key pressed dT 2i Mouse moved 2 J H Mouse button pressed a P Mouse button released J ES Mouse outside sss M mi Figure 3 Every control has a number of events that occur as the user interacts with it One can associate actions with events The form itself has events as well To access these click the Form Properties button on the Form Functions toolbar and go to the Events tab As with control events a user can assign a macro to any form event How to use the form Once one finishes laying out a form it can be run by clicking the Design Mode On Off button on the Form Functions toolbar When design mode is off the controls operate as expected the user can select and clear check boxes open combo boxes and drop down lists and so forth Ordinarily when one opens a saved form it automatically has design mode off So a user opening a form the designer supplies sees it as they would ex
336. h slide transition effects are defined In the Slide Transition dialogue select the option Manual Transition which will switch from one slide to the next in the presentation on clicking the mouse or pressing the right arrow key Starting Presentations The easiest way to start a presentation is by clicking the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar or choose Slide Show gt Slide Show The on screen presentation starts immediately Presentation settings can be adjusted under Slide Show gt Slide Show Settings Slide Show x Range Aj slides C From ET z Cancel C Gustom Slide SH Help E Type Options Default Change slides manually C Window v Mouse pointer visible C Auto Mouse pointer as pen oo 00 10 a Navigator visible IV Animations allowed Show logo Vv Change slides by clicking on background This dialogue also lets the user determine which slides to include in the presentation Select any other desired options and click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 277 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Working with Connectors In addition to the individual frames connectors are important components of an organization chart because they help represent the relationships within the organization Impress provides a variety of connector types Click on the Connectors icon in the Main toolbar and a floating window with the available types appears Connectors Frames and connectors
337. h is derived from the custom style OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 64 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer By way of example if one changes the left indent to 2 54 cm 1 inch in the Paragraph Style Heading for example that this will change the left indent for all Paragraph Styles Heading 1 to Heading 10 to 2 54 cm Changes that users make directly in one of the Style dialogues have priority over the properties inherited from higher ranking Styles Right click on a style and open it with Modify to get the Paragraph Styles dialogue and then choose the Organize tab If the Linked with list box is checked one will see from which Style the selected Style is derived OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 65 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Character Styles In the following illustration the Styles and Formatting window displays a list of available Character Styles These Styles do not modify the whole paragraph but only the single word in which the cursor is currently positioned or a selected text range Character Styles magann R gt 48 iE Bullet Symbols Caption Characters Definition Drop Caps Emphasis Endnote anchor Endnote Characters Example Footnote anchor Footnote Characters Index Link El All v Use or modify the supplied Styles or define custom Styles and use those The best way is to start by selecting a Style from the Styles and Formatting window with a single
338. h to the application into which to insert the object 4 Insert the contents of the clipboard at the desired location with Ctrl V OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 272 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Creating a Business Report This section explains how to create a business report for a presentation In the following example it is assumed that the presentation will be shown via a computer Creating a Business Report in Presentation Form Since OpenOffice org Impress has no business report template this section will start with a completely new document To start follow these steps 1 Create an empty presentation document File gt New gt Presentation Using Wizard Presentation is described quite well in OpenOffice org Help 2 Select Empty presentation 3 Click Create This brings up the Modify Slide dialogue where the appearance of the first slide can be defined 4 Enter a name and select the desired layout e g Title slide Modify Slide X lide 1 Cancel Select an AutoLayout Help Blank Slide Display IV Background v Objects on background 5 Onthe Title slide click on the existing text and overwrite it with appropriate text for example Elegy Software and Annual Report 2003 6 To insert another slide click the area next to the tab at the bottom of the screen Assign a name for the new slide and choose a layout in the context menu of the slide tab cli
339. he Styles and Formatting window select the style to copy 3 Click the Fill Format Mode icon 4 Position the paint can pouring cursor on the object to which to apply the style selected 5 Press the mouse button Note There is an exception to this procedure when applying a Character Style in the Fill Format Mode select the character with the mouse paint can pouring while holding down the mouse button instead of only clicking To quit the fill format mode click the icon again or press Esc Warning If the watering can icon is activated a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last paint can pouring action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions that should be kept Updating Styles From Selections This is how to update a Style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In the document select a formatted text or paragraph with the format to adopt as a style 3 In the Styles and Formatting window select the style to update single click do not double click 4 In the Styles and Formatting window click on iE the Update Style icon OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 80 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Style can also be updated by using drag and drop 1 Select the style to be updated in the Styles and Formatting window 2 Select the section of paragraph text the format of which is to be used to update the style selected in the Styles and Formatting window 3
340. he automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position users may define the page distribution themselves 1 Go to the sheet to be printed 2 Choose View gt Page Break Preview 3 This displays the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines and user defined ones by light blue lines The page breaks line breaks and column breaks are marked as black lines 4 The blue page break lines can be moved using the mouse Look for further options in the Context menu including adding an additional print range removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column breaks OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 239 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Printing Sheets in Landscape Format In order to print a sheet use one of the number of interactive options available under View gt Page Break Preview To make a hard copy in landscape format proceed as follows 1 Go to the sheet for printing 2 Select Format gt Page This command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit file icon on the function bar Select the Page tab Select the Landscape paper format Click OK ON tn A W Choose File gt Print to open the Print dialogue Depending on the printer driver and the operating system it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change th
341. he buttons in the Row or Column area the Data Field dialogue appears Here select if and to what extent Calc should calculate and display subtotals Exit the DataPilot by pressing OK A Filter button will now be inserted into the table the default position is under the selected area and two lines further down the DataPilot table is inserted with a bold outline 23 Filter 24 Sum 1998 Area 25 E ee New York Washington Total Result 100 000 00 10 000 00 175 000 00 80 000 00 365 000 00 250 000 00 210 000 00 830 000 00 240 000 00 1 530 000 00 250 000 00 150 000 00 689 000 00 200 000 00 1 289 000 00 600 000 00 370 000 00 1 694 000 00 520 000 00 3 184 000 00 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 226 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Selecting DataPilot Output Ranges Click the button More in the DataPilot dialogue The dialogue will be extended Select a named area from the list box Results to into which to create the DataPilot table If the required output area does not have a name enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area into the field to the right of the list box Results to Clicking on the appropriate cell with the mouse also enters the coordinates By activating the check box Ignore empty rows these will then not be taken into account when the DataPilot table is created If the check box Identify categories is activated the categories will be recognized by means of
342. he local system Under Windows OpenOffice org supports the TWAIN standard while under Unix OpenOffice org supports the SANE standard 1 Set the cursor at the position in the document where the graphic is to be inserted 2 Select Insert gt Picture gt Scan The submenu contains a command to open a dialogue for selecting the scanning source 3 From the submenu select the command to request scanning The scanner driver opens a window in which to follow the scanner manufacturer s instructions 4 Once the scanning process is completed the image is inserted in the document Inserting a Chart From OpenOffice org Calc Dragging and Dropping the Chart with Move or Copy 1 Open the OpenOffice org Writer document into which the chart will be inserted 2 Open the OpenOffice org Calc document containing the chart 3 Click and hold the mouse button on the chart Wait until the mouse pointer changes to the Atrow with Frame pointer Drag the chart into the OpenOffice org Writer document This will move the chart To copy the chart press and hold the Ct r1 key while dragging Note If the Writer document is not visible first arrange the windows appropriately If the operating system or windows manager provides a task bar drag the chart to the Writer button on the task bar hold that position for a moment while the Writer window opens in the foreground and then drop it in the now visible document 4 In the Writer document positi
343. he new scenario In this case modify the dollar rate and all other values that could be affected by it i e economic growth and sales prices As changes are made moments later the results from these operating figures are displayed OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 234 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc To discover which values in the scenario affect other values choose Tools gt Detective gt Track to Dependents Arrows appear that point to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 235 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Validity of Cell Contents For each cell the user can define in advance what type of contents will be valid for this cell This will make it easier for other users to employ these sheets correctly The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell or if a value is inserted in the cell either with drag and drop or by copying and pasting the validity rule will not take effect To determine and display which cells contain invalid values choose Tools gt Detective at any time and select the command Mark Invalid Data Additional details about Data Validity can be found in the OpenOffice org Help Using Cell Contents Validity 1 Select the cells upon which to define a new validity rule Where needed select multiple cells by clicking on all respective cells while holding down the Ct r1 key Ab
344. he original The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes In other words all normal text must be identical 1 Open the original document into which to merge all the copies 2 Select Edit gt Changes gt Merge Document This opens a typical file selection dialogue from which to choose a copy of the document 3 After merging the documents the designated changes from the copy in the original document will be visible Recording Changes The review function is available in OpenOffice org for both text documents and spreadsheet documents Not all changes are recorded for example the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded However all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded such as additions deletions text alterations usual formatting et cetera 1 To start Revision Marking open the document to be edited and choose Edit gt Changes and click Record which display a check mark when enabled 2 Now start making any changes Note that all new text passages entered are underlined in colour while all deleted text remains visible but is crossed out and shown in colour 3 Ifa marked change is moved with the mouse pointer one will see a reference to the type of change the author date and time of day for the change in Help Tips If Extended Tips is also enabled on the Help menu any available comments on this change will be displayed
345. he tab pages Envelope and Format specify the envelope format and the position of the addresses of the sender and addressee on the envelope Use the Printer tab page to define appropriate print options Inserting an Envelope into a Document Click on the Insert button in the Envelope dialogue The envelope will be inserted above the first page of the active document In this case before the first page of the personal letter template To continue editing the envelope for instance to change the format again open the Page Style Envelope dialogue in the context menu of the envelope click Page and select the Page tab OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 175 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Adjusting the Printer for the Printout Printing envelopes depends very much on the type of printer used Some printers require a special cassette while others have a multi purpose tray that can feed envelopes If in doubt consult the manual for the printer Specify any print options in the Page Style Envelope dialogue To open this dialogue click an empty spot on the envelope open the context menu and select Page Then select the Page tab Define the desired settings under Paper Format Check File gt Print gt Properties to ensure that the printer knows the size of the envelope being used When this step is skipped printing of an envelope becomes unpredictable Creating and Printing a Letter With an Envelope With the
346. her Page Style to the slides or by modifying the current Page Style lafo mlajar Switch to the master view by using the icon in the lower left hand corner of the work area The master view permits editing the background for all slides All objects that are entered in this view whether company logos lines or text are displayed in the background on all slides that use the current Page Style the master page This allows headers and footers on to be reproduced on all presentation slides Objects inserted in the Master View cannot be modified in the normal Slide View Change only the background used in the presentation using the following steps a Right click in any slide b Choose Slide gt Page Setup c Select the Background tab d Choose a colour gradient hatching or bitmap for the background e Click OK f The next dialogue asks if the settings should apply to all slides or just to the current slide By answering Yes to the question Background settings for all slides the Background Presentation Style will be modified for the current master page and all slides with this Page Style will have the modified background Answering No means that only the background of the current slide is modified Modify the Presentation Styles in the Styles and Formatting window by following these steps 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 Click the Presentation Styles icon gi if it is not already selected to see
347. highlighted place and the next word that could be hyphenated is displayed When Spellcheck recognizes the word the default hyphens are displayed as well Thesaurus The OpenOffice org thesaurus provides a means to look up words that may be used instead of the highlighted word Thesaurus English USA X Variations Word Replace clean clean Cancel Meaning Synonym Search To make or keep an area clean EE To make or become clear by the re i rouge e Free from evil and corruption i Free from dirt stain or impurities straighten Help b Kat lamid ar ohccana spruce 1 Highlight the word in the text for which an alternative is desired from the thesaurus For example the word clean 2 Select Tools gt Language gt Thesaurus or press Ctr1 F7 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 155 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 3 In the dialogue which then appears scroll down the two lower list boxes until a suitable word is found If the dialogue is closed by clicking on OK the selected word is replaced by the word in the Replace field Note Not all languages have a thesaurus to accompany an installed dictionary When looking for alternatives for a word in another language for which a thesaurus is installed for example an English word 1 Select the word in the text 2 Call up the thesaurus 3 Click on the Language button to switch to English UK or English US
348. his case users are expected to know and understand the basics of the procedure Product Vendor SelfCert exe Windows Microsoft part of Office abylon SELFCERT Windows http www abylonsoft com frame htm Certificate Assistant Mac OS X Built in CA pl Linux BSD Solaris10 Comes with OpenSSL keytool JDK or JRE Part of Java Solaris Please see the instructions in the Operating System documentation for your system Certificates from a Certificate Authority Depending on user needs getting a certificate from a Certificate Authority may be free or have a cost attached Some Certificate Authorities offering certificates are listed below Vendor Thawte Free Email Contact http www thawte com Comodo Verisign Free 30 day trial Cost Server and email All types http www instantssl com http www verisign com CAcert Free All types http www cacert org Integrating a Certificate with OpenOffice org See Help gt Contents gt Index gt Search term gt digital signatures for instructions on enabling Digital Signatures in OpenOffice org for instructions OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 381 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Changing Defaults and Other Configuration Items Saving Configuration With Document Users can set a global configuration so that it applies to all
349. ifferences between versions with colour markings In the dialogue to open a document choose which version of the document is wanted for editing from a list box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 376 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Protecting Contents in OpenOffice org The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in OpenOffice org from being modified deleted or viewed Protecting All Documents When Saving All documents that are saved in XML format OpenOffice org Format can be provided with a password These documents can no longer be opened without the password The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor either This applies to content graphics and OLE objects Turning on protection 1 Select File gt Save As 2 check Save with password 3 Save the document Turning off protection 1 Open the document and enter the correct password 2 Choose File gt Save As and uncheck Save with password Information that is entered under File gt Properties such as the name of the author date created word and character counts et cetera are not encrypted Protecting Revision Marking With every change made in Calc and Writer the review function records who made the change This function can be turned on with protection so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered Until then all changes continue to be recorded and acceptance or rejection is not
350. ilter icon OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 219 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals Assuming there is sample data that can be expanded and actually used for a budget the date should be summarized and printed in totals and subtotals This can be done in just a few steps Place the cursor in the database range Choose Data gt Subtotals The Subtotals dialogue appears Specify the desired options for calculating the subtotals 1 2 3 4 Group subtotals according to Date i e calculates a new subtotal for each date and 5 Use the function Sum adds the subtotals to calculate Amount 6 1st Group 2nd Group 3rd Group Options Group by Calculate subtotals for Use function Count numbers only StDev Sample StDevP Population Mar Sample VarP Population Cancel Help Reset Delete When the Enter key is pressed or OK is clicked the sheet will be grouped according to the subtotals For every group of entries with an identical date a subtotal is calculated OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 220 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The grand total is displayed at the bottom 1 Date Item Amount 2 01 02 00 Flowers 12 80 3 01 02 00 Sum 12 80 01 03 00 Breakfast 2 48 5 0103 00 Sum 2 48 01 04 00 Software 49 50 7 0104 00 Sum 49 50 01 05 00 Newspaper 0 60 9 01405 00 Sum 0 60 01 06 00 Fishing T rip 22 50 11
351. in Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 86 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Text Frames Making text look as good as it as reads is likely something desired To achieve this users can customize its appearance for maximum impact Inserting Editing and Linking Text Frames A text frame is a bounded area that can contain text graphics and other objects and be placed anywhere on a page for example to make columns for a newsletter Linking the content of a frame to another let s the text flow backward and forward between them Click the edge of any text frame to select it and eight handles appear four of which are located in the corners and one in the middle of each side Inserting Text Frames Existing text into a may be put into a frame or an empty frame opened into which text can be added later Following these steps to create a frame If using existing text highlight the text for the frame then proceed as shown below 1 Long click the Insert icon on the Tools toolbar and open its floating toolbar ER I Ead 2 On the Insert floating toolbar press the mouse button on the Insert frame manually icon to open the column preview 3 In the preview move the mouse point to select the desired number of columns 4 With the crosshair cursor create a selection frame to define the new location and area for the paragraph Press the Escape key to cancel frame formation Any text that was highligh
352. in a cell 2 Press the Enter key 3 The result of the calculation appears in the cell However functions can also be entered in a formula An example could be SIN 1 which will give a result of sine of one rounded to two decimal places 1 Calc has several other functions too and additional functions can be added using StarBasic or AddIns Help has a section outlining how to do this In most cases though the standard functions provided in the program are sufficient for most requirements The function with the Syntax CONVERT arguments is shown here as an example that will convert a sum of US 100 into Euros by entering the following formula in a cell CONVERT 100 USD EUR The result will be the number of Euros per 100 US dollars The value for conversion is always stated first within the parentheses It can be entered directly as shown or by reference If the amount is for example in cell D2 enter D2 in the formula as the first part of the function The remaining parameters of the function name the unit of the amount and the unit into which it is to be converted All three parts of the function are separated from each other by semicolons Thus using the formula convert 50 EUR USp displays the number of US dollars that is the equivalent of 50 Euro dollars To try this proceed as follows In an new spreadsheet enter in column D from D2 to D20 a number of USD sums 1 Designate column E from E2 to
353. in the Replace field and click the Bold amp icon in the text object bar to boldface all occurrences of the search term The dialogue graphic above illustrates that there are several ways of expanding or restricting searches by combining selections from the Options group box and the buttons Examples for each option are described below Searching for Whole Words Only Select the Whole words only option to find whole words that match the searched for word For instance if the word in is entered as the search term in the Search for field all instances of in or In as stand alone words in the text will be found Words like bin or chin will not be found if this checkbox is selected If searching using regular expressions or for Styles do not select this option Match Case When this checkbox is selected the search is case sensitive to uppercase and lowercase letters So if searching for in it will be found but not the word In Combine a Match case search with the Whole words only option as needed Searching for Text With Wildcards 1 Start Find by selecting Edit gt Find amp Replace dialogue or use Ct r1 F 2 Check the More Options gt Regular expressions box 3 Enter the search term with the desired wildcards and click Find Regular expressions are entered using text combined with keyboard characters and symbols that have special meaning in this context The wildcard for any number of a
354. in the document where the table is to be inserted 2 Choose Insert gt Table to open the Insert Table dialogue and insert a table of the required size e g 4 columns and 3 rows 3 Select the whole table by pressing Ct r1 4A twice then click the Borders icon on the object bar On the floating toolbar click the icon at top left which means No Border OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 54 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Borders mim En E m gg 55 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 4 Now with the mouse select the whole of the first row open the context menu and choose Table to open the Table Format dialogue Paragraph Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Asian Typography Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Style omm Bmg None anc o 0 nm 2 50 pt oom Es 400 pt o Omm n 5 00 pt 110pt M User defined M 1 00 pt Color Meck O z Shadow style Position ola fo fo o 4 9mm Color oO Gray OK Cancel Help Reset Open the Borders tab page 5 6 In the line field select the required line thickness e g 2 50 pt 7 First select full bordering from the Defaults 8 In the large Line arrangement field click once in the area between the two top angles see illustration to remove
355. in which to enter a new name 2 3 4 Enter a new name for the sheet 5 click OK 6 Alternatively hold down the A1t key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly As an alternative this feature may or not work with the installed window manager Note The name of a sheet may consist only of letters and numbers Spaces are also permitted The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet Enter the spreadsheet name when saving it for the first time as a file The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets each of which can have different names OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 184 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Values and Formulae as Cell Contents Individual cells can contain text numbers dates or formulae Cell contents are very easily specified or modified and these may be updated at any time by recalculating the formulae with current data Values in spreadsheets mean numbers dates times and results of formulae Emphasize values by marking Value Highlighting in the View menu If desired check this option in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View in which case this function will apply permanently for the current document and all documents created in the future other already existing documents retain their settings If this function is enabled numbers and dates are automatically shown in blue and values in cells containing formulae in light green Text remains in
356. ing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells just follow these steps to load this page in Calc 1 In a Calc document position the cursor in the cell in which to start inserting the external data 2 Select Insert gt External Data The External Data dialogue appears 3 In the dialogue enter the URL of the document or Web page Write the URL in the following way fictional example http www my broker com table html Enter a file name from the local or network file system in the usual way i e via the File gt Open dialogue OpenOffice org loads the Web page or file in the background that is without displaying it In the large list box of the External Data dialogue are the names of all the sheets or areas from which to choose 4 Select one or more sheets or areas optionally activate the automatic update function to every n minutes and click OK The contents are inserted as a link in the Calc document 5 Save the spreadsheet Upon re opening Calc updates the linked cells 6 Under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Cale gt General choose to have the update on opening execute always upon request or never The update can be started manually in the dialogue under Edit gt Links OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 209 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Using Charts Data from spreadsheets can be represented graphically in a chart A wide variety of charts and diagrams suited for illustrating the struc
357. ing numbering on and off can be accomplished as follows 1 Highlight the paragraphs to be numbered or returned to normal text 2 Click on the Numbering on off icon on the Text Object Bar The paragraphs are formatted as a numbered list or with an existing numbered list the paragraphs will turn back into normal text Numbered lists are best controlled in the same manner as bulleted lists i e with the icons on the Numbering Object Bar When a numbered list is moved down a level the subordinate numbered list at this level starts from one again Using the Show sublevels box in Format gt Bullets and Numbering gt Options select which previous levels should be included in the numbered list OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 109 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Example numbered list with sublevels 1 Line one 2 and line two If one enters a return the next the new paragraph will automatically be numbered 3 Pressing a Tab at this point increments the list sublevel indents and changes the number to 1 at which point one can add text 1 and now there is a sub level of line 2 To decrement the sublevel of a list paragraph put the cursor at the beginning of the paragraph text and press Shift Tab The above list is not numbered as fully as it might be but serves as an example Normally the full number of the last line should indicate the sublevel as 2 1 as well To do this apply Format gt Bullets and Numbering gt O
358. ing the AutoCorrect function is replaced in the context menu the word pair is entered in the AutoCorrect replacement table To call up this table choose Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace tab If the word underlined in red is correct one can place it in a custom dictionary using the Add command To exclude words from the Spellcheck Select the words Open the context menu of one of the words Select Character Select the Format gt Character gt Font tab nA A WY N Select the language None Removing Words From User Defined Dictionaries 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids tab 2 Select the user defined dictionary and click Edit 3 Now the Edit User Defined Dictionary dialogue appears allowing the user to search through an alphabetic list 4 Select the word 5 Click Delete Hyphenation Hyphenation in text documents either can either be done automatically or manually Automatic hyphenation is an attribute of paragraphs and Paragraph Styles This means that one can switch the hyphenation on or off for a paragraph or for a paragraph format and select its properties Manual hyphenation gives individual control but can be tedious OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 153 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Automatic hyphenation In OpenOffice org automatic hyphenation is turned off by default The following steps are useful for enabling hyphenation on an
359. into paragraph breaks enter n in the Search for and Replace with boxes and then click the Replace all button Finds a tab space Users can also use this expression in the Replace with box Only finds the search term if it appears at the end of a word For example book gt finds checkbook but not bookmark Only finds the search term if it appears at the beginning of a word For example gt book finds bookmark but not checkbook Searches for empty paragraphs Searches for the first character of a paragraph Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the For example Texts finds the words Texts and Text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 41 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Character Result Use Use this character in the Replace with box to add the characters that matched the search criteria when a replacement is made For example if one enters window in the Search for box and amp frame in the Replace with box the word window is replaced with window frame Users can also enter a amp in the Replace with box to modify the Attributes or a different Format of the search criteria entered in the Search for box abc 123 Finds the characters that are between the brackets Finds the characters that are between a and e Finds the characters that are between a e and h x Finds a special character based on its four digit hexadecimal code XXXX The code for the special cha
360. ion Button Jsed with one or more other option buttons to allow choice among mutually xclusive options See Group Box Cc 9c Check Box Jsed for on off or yes no choices Label Field Jsed to provide labels for other controls Doesn t accept input Group Box sed to visually combine several controls as well as create groups of option ttons Jsed to enter free form text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 348 Cc Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources List Box Offers a list of choices User can choose one or in some cases several Offers a list of choices User can choose one or enter a new value Date Field Used to enter a date Supports up arrow and down arrow to change portions of the date Time Field Used to enter a time Supports up arrow and down arrow to change portions of the time Numerical Field Used to enter numbers Optionally has spinner arrows to change value with the mouse Used to enter monetary values Supports up arrow and down arrow to change value Optionally has spinner arrows to change value with the mouse Table 1 The selection of controls available for use in forms is extensive Controls are shown here in the order in which they appear on the Form Functions toolbar Customizing controls With some controls one can simply drop them on a form and use them as is That works for things like a Text Box Date Field or Time Field With others though once the control is added o
361. irst field should be inserted OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 223 Evaluating Data With Calc Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Calc provides several powerful tools for evaluating data The DataPilot helps produce any kind of sub evaluation of the data as a separate spreadsheet With the DataPilot analyzing the data thoroughly is made easy via consolidation Goal Seek and multiple operations DataPilot The DataPilot helps to analyze and assess data that has already been entered It allows the user from one and the same value to generate reports as a function of the point of view that is most prominent Imagine a data analysis table containing a company s sales figures not only for specific product groups but also for branches and years Use the DataPilot to quickly find the data which is interesting and pertinent to current requirements Area Sales pers on 1998 New York Fisher 200 000 00 New York Fisher 350 000 00 Accessories New York Fisher 50 000 00 i New York Fisher 300 000 00 New York Fisher 270 000 00 Accessories New York Fisher 25 000 00 New York Fisher 189 000 00 New York Fisher 210 000 00 ccessories New York Fisher 100 000 00 i Miami Brown 150 000 00 Miami Brown 210 000 00 ccessories Miami Brown 10 000 00 i Kissimmee Clark 250 000 00 Audio Kissimmee Clark 250 000 00 Accessories Kissimmee Clark 100 000 00 i Washington Smith 200 000 00 Washington Smith 240 000
362. is updated to SUM B1 C2 Row numbers are also automatically adjusted when a new row is inserted Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in Calc OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 203 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Addressing by Name A neat way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulae legible is to give the ranges names For example name the range A1 B2 as Start then in the formula simply enter SUM Start Following the insertion or deletion of rows and columns OpenOffice org also correctly assigns the ranges identified by name Remember range names cannot contain any spaces For example it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if written as Amount Tax rate insteadof A5 B2 Inthis case cell A5 would be named as Amount and cell B2 as Tax rate Sales Tax Rates Amount 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 In order to specify range names follows these steps 1 First highlight the area to be named 2 Select Insert gt Names gt Define or use the Ctrl F3 key combination 3 Enter the name for the first area 4 Click Add Other cell ranges can also be named in this dialogue by entering the desired name in the field and then selecting the respective cells Use the Define Names dialogue to define names for formulae or parts of formulae needed more often 5 Close the dialogue with OK Recognizing Names as Addressing OpenOffice org can correlate names with areas
363. itches between large and small icons OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 362 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org Changing the Look of the User Interface OpenOffice org has different ways of display that reflect different operating systems Thus the user can change the windows and dialogues to suit personal taste Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View In the Look amp Feel combo box choose an appearance reminiscent of Macintosh X Windows or OS 2 The Standard setting has the familiar look of a Microsoft Windows application Selecting Measurement Units One can select separate measurement units for Writer Writer Web Calc Impress and Draw documents 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Click on the document type that is to have its measurement unit changed For example click on Text Document to select the measurement unit for Writer 3 Click on General 4 On the General tab page under Settings is a combo box for selecting the measurement unit 5 Close the dialogue with OK Moving Deleting or Copying Icons To move an icon keep the Alt key pressed and drag the icon to its new position It will be moved within the same toolbar and copied between toolbars To delete an icon from a toolbar keep the A1t key pressed and drag the icon to a place where there is no toolbar To insert or delete a dash drag the icon in the same way to the side OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 363 Cha
364. itional slide do the following a Select the slide that precedes where the new slide will be put b Now click the empty space between that tab and the horizontal scroll bar and a new slide appears with the page layout of the previous slide Alternatively choose Insert Slide from the context menu of the slide tab area In the Insert Slide dialogue assign a name to the new slide and define a layout 2 Deleting a slide is easy a Click the tab at the bottom of the work area to activate it and b Open the context menu c Choose Delete Slide and d Confirm the subsequent warning with Yes to delete the slide 3 Likewise renaming a slide is simple To rename a Select the respective slide by clicking the name on the tab b Press the Alt key and c Click the slide name again The old name will be selected and can then be overwritten OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 281 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Creating and Printing Handouts Providing handouts to help the audience follow a presentation is often useful To prepare handouts use the Handout View mode Since the handouts contain both the individual slides and space for notes they can be a very helpful presentation aid In the vertical scroll bar click the Handout View icon Open the Modify Slide dialogue via the context menu Slide Modify Slide to specify how many slides are printed on a single sheet of paper Modify Slide Mame
365. ity 5 Profit 1 Highlight the range D1 H11 Select Data gt Multiple Operations With the cursor in the formulae field click cell B5 KR WwW N Set the cursor in the Rows field and click cell B1 This means that B1 the selling price is the horizontally entered variable with the values 8 10 15 and 20 5 Set the cursor in the Column field and click in A1 This means that B4 the quantity is the vertically entered variable 6 Close the dialogue with OK 7 See profits in the range E2 H11 In some cases pressing F9 is needed to update the table OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 233 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Using Scenarios Scenarios are important aids for making numbers that are dependent on each other and their resulting calculations visible Modify specific basic requirements in the table and see the new result Name a scenario created in this manner and compare it with other scenarios Using Ready Made Scenarios If the samples from http www pathtech org OpenOffice org templates are installed choose one of the ready made example scenarios with which to work 1 Choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents and from the dialogue open the Samples 2 Open the spreadsheet examples to see the spreadsheet documents available 3 Double click the document with Recar in the name This is a sample spreadsheet in which several scenarios have been created Areas in whi
366. ivery by post 1 Choose Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard 2 Follow the dialogues OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 24 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Printing Documents Upon creating a document normally one will want to print it out on paper for distribution Print the current document either directly to a printer or to file When printing to a file all the information that would otherwise be sent to the printer is initially written to a file On another computer the file can then be copied directly to the printer connected to it em Click the Print File icon on the function bar to print the current document without the intervention of a dialogue To retain finer control of printing either select File gt Print or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl P In the File gt Print dialogue select a specific printer if there is more than one installed printer Under Print range determine how many pages to print or only certain pages and how many copies are wanted Printer Name Properties Status Default printer Type SGENPRT Location Comment Print to file Print range Copies All Number of copies 1 C Pages 4 2 a C Selection GH Options Cancel Help In addition to the general printing options already mentioned one can choose special printer options for the different document types in OpenOffice org using additional dialogues that allow the user to control the way the contents or the pages
367. lae The best way to examine an individual formula is to click the cell containing the formula and then click the Wizard Functions icon on the formula bar Using print ranges Print ranges have been used in the sample document to print specifically targeted cells Freezing Columns Select the column to the right of the column to be frozen say a list of names by clicking on the column header and click Freeze in the Window menu This makes is possible to scroll horizontally while the area to the left of the freeze line remains fixed This fixes the display so that the column containing the names is always in view This function is especially useful for large sheets Splitting a Calc Window Sometimes a user may need to work with a spreadsheet in which the active data is in different rows Scrolling up and down can be inconvenient In this case splitting the display can be an advantage Select the cell tat which to split the display and click Split in the Window menu This make is possible to scroll vertically in each of the split sections This function can be especially useful for large sheets Conditional Formatting With this function information can be displayed simply by entering a letter For example if this is an employee list use this feature to instantly find out if a particular employee is present sick or on vacation To do so use the following steps 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window click the icon in the Function bar
368. lae as formulae uncheck formulae in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View so that the calculated results are visible in the table OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 244 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc AutoFill Copying text values and other cell contents to a spreadsheet is very easily using the mouse Here the user needs to consider a few special features When several values are copied at once Calc forms a logical series out of the initial values such that if certain texts are entered that are in sort lists the list will be continued accordingly Applying Sort Lists By way of experiment enter the text Jan or January in an empty cell Select the cell and click the mouse on the box in the lower right corner of the cell border Drag over several cells to the right or downwards Upon releasing the mouse button the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months This predefined series can be found under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc pen gt Sort Lists Custom lists can also be tailored to local needs such as a list of a company s branch offices These lists are handy for expanding as headings and other repetitive tasks by simply entering the name in the list with which to start and then expanding this entry by dragging as described above Automatic Row Filling 1 Enter a number in a cell 2 With the mouse drag the bottom right corner of the cell downwards 3 When the mouse button
369. lbar button appear is in the Writer help file 10 info about inserting the fax number in the Writer document is in the Writer Help file Done A fax out solution for OpenOffice org that doesn t require anything on the Linux workstation except for CUPS which should be available in any case Go and vote for the OpenOffice org feature request for doing the spadmin steps automagically at http ga openoffice org issues show_bug cgi id 49980 if they do that then the workstation requires no configuration at all It ll all be done through CUPS auto browsing Creating a LAN Friendly Faxing Solution under Windows While Windows does not use CUPS printer management is similar and the steps outlined for Linux should enable one to configure a Fax printer in a similar manner Remember to test at each stage OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 364 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org Sending a Fax via dialogue Print the current document with the fax machine as a printer 1 Open the Print dialogue by choosing File gt Print and select the fax driver in the Name pull down list 2 Clicking OK opens the dialogue of the fax driver where one enters the fax recipient Configuring OpenOffice org for Faxing via Icon OpenOffice org can be configured for faxing such a way that a single click on an icon is sufficient to send a fax 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print 2 Select the installed fax driver from the Fax pull
370. lcheck will take all installed languages into account Words that are correctly typed in any of the installed languages are regarded as correctly typed irrespective of their language attribute In multilingual texts the automatic checking that was enabled by clicking the icon on the Standard toolbar offers another facility as well In the context menu of a red underlined word that is recognized as incorrect specify that the word or the whole paragraph is one of the other installed languages The language of the underlined characters or all characters of the paragraph is automatically assigned as a character format Starting Spellcheck To check the entire text for spelling mistakes in the classic way i e letting Spellcheckgo through the whole document on its own go to the Tools menu and choose Spellcheck The Spellcheck dialogue will only appear if there are words in a text unknown to the Spellcheck The various options to be seen in the Spellcheck dialogue are described in detail in the OpenOffice org Help In the Spellcheck dialogue if an unrecognized word is included in a user dictionary the user can also define the permitted hyphens for the automatic hyphenation Enter the hyphens in the word as an equals sign Note placing an equals sign at the end of the word means that this word will not be automatically hyphenated Spellcheck English USA X Original sratement Ignore QV Ignore All Replace Suggestions Always Repla
371. le pressing the Ct r1 key All selected sheets will now have white sheet tabs instead of the gray sheet tabs of the unselected sheets To undo the selection of a sheet click its sheet tab again whilst pressing the Ct r1 key Clicking the sheet tab of the current sheet while pressing the Shift key ensures that only this one is selected Calc includes the name of the sheet in the reference when assigning sheet references Thus instead of referring to A 1 Calc refers to 8heet1 A 1 which makes multi sheet referencing easy and straight forward as shown in the examples below To address the first cell from both Sheet 1 and Sheet2 in a single reference for example summarize the 3D formula will read SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet2 A1 The sum function has one addend here namely the range from Sheet 1 A1toSheet 2 A1 In this range there are two cells as long as no more cells are included between Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 The simple formula not a 3D formula would only list two addends SUM Sheetl1 A1 Sheet2 A1 To include any subsequently inserted sheets found between Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 the formula would then be SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet2 B2 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 196 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The full address of a cell also contains the complete path and file name of the spreadsheet document So in its full form the reference to cell A1 in Sheet1 of the document name sxc could be file home username name sxc Ssheetl1
372. leased defines this direction c Moving the mouse without holding the button down and the curve will follow the movement of the mouse d Click where the second point of the curve should be By holding down the mouse button the direction of the curve from the second point can be defined to the next point in the same manner as was done at the starting point release the mouse and move to the third point click again and keep the mouse button pressed and so on But when the mouse button is released after clicking on the second point of the curve and another point in the slide is clicked the second point will be defined as a corner point At a corner point the curve abruptly changes direction thus forming a corner If there is a point three defined as a corner point in this way a straight section between points two and three will appear When the Shift key is held down directions are limited to multiples of 45 degrees By holding down the Alt key the curve will be closed and an additional curve can be drawn These can be combined with the first one to form a single object 4 To end curve drawing double click the last point to be set then continue working with other tools OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 294 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw The curves that have been drawn using the above steps are B zier curves The points on a B zier curve are called data points Each data point on the B zier curve can be
373. left stack 3 1 right t 3 t 1 Matrix Matrices are composed using the matrix command as follows Command Input Field left matrix 1 2 2 3 right x 12 X 2 2 abs matrix a b c y a y C abs matrix 1 over 2 b c d z 1 b 2 z c d OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 398 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Formatting There are some additional formating commands that are available in Open Office Formula These allow adjustment of the size colour and layout of the equation Size The instruction size changes the size of text in the equation Command Input Field size 2 atb size 10 C a b C Colour The instruction colour changes the colour of the text in the equation colours available are red blue green yellow white and black default Command Input Field colour blue A A left matrix colour red 1 colour blue 2 colour green 3 4 right colour black x E 3 4 X Layout Various text formating commands are available to change the layout Command Input Field bold bold newline newline bold newline OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 399 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Alignment The alignment commands are available to change the position of the elements of an equation with respect to each other Command Input Field stack alignr a alignr b c d a 12 stack align 12 alignl b 2 2 b c d b 2 54 1
374. leted 6 Press the Delete key to delete the selected text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 48 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Status bar uses Setting the Viewing Zoom Factor La Page 5 104 OOoPageStyle 100 OVER STD HYP 16 00 05 17 2004 li By right clicking in the area shown above the user can select the display Zoom factor for the document The optimal setting is particularly useful when the Styles and Formatting window or Navigator are docked and opened off and on during a session in that the full width page of text is always displayed Editing or Activating Hyperlinks ud Page 5 104 OOoPageStyle 10090 OVER STD HYP 16 00 05 17 2004 ail Display Effect HYP Click a Hyperlink to load the corresponding URL SEL Click a Hyperlink text and edit it as with normal text To edit the URL instead of the Hyperlink text the status bar must have HYP displayed in this field Point to the Hyperlink then click and hold down the mouse button as the Hyperlink is dragged to the Hyperlink Bar Both the text and URL can be edited from here If the Hyperlink is inserted as a button rather than as text see Link button the Hyperlink can only be editeid if one changes the properties of the control field Select the button open its context menu and choose the Control command and then edit the text on the button and the URL from the Properties dialogue of the button Click a hyper
375. light the text and choose Format gt Character gt Font Effects tab and under Effects select Lowercase Converting to uppercase Highlight text then choose Format gt Case Characters gt Uppercase or right click and make the same selection form the popup menu Converting to lowercase Highlight text then choose Format gt Case Characters gt Lowercase or right click and make the same selection from the popup menu Moving Text Sections in Documents 1 Select the text that to be moved 2 Place the mouse pointer in the selected text then press the mouse button and keep it pressed 3 Drag the mouse until a symbol appears next to the pointer indicating that the selected area will be moved In addition a gray text cursor moves with the mouse pointer indicating where the selection is to be inserted Mouse Pointer Shape Meaning n Moving X Copying Ry Creating a link OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 58 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer To copy the text rather than move it press Ct rl while performing the actions described above As shown the action is indicated by a plus sign next to the mouse pointer One can press and release the Ct x1 key as often as needed the action applies to the condition prevailing at the time the mouse button was released Resetting Font Attributes While Typing Users may apply direct formatting while typing text and later decide to reset all formatting and c
376. link in a document brings up a dialogue asking to open the linked document Applying Various Fonts Modify the Paragraph Style to permanently change the font size and style for all paragraphs with that particular paragraph format First position the cursor in the text that to be modified and select the command Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu The Paragraph Style dialogue opens with various tabs Click on the Font tab and specify the type size and style of the font OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 49 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Make any other necessary changes then click the Save Document icon and close the document template Note When creating a template remember not to type a text for a particular letter The main purpose of a template is to define the general layout of a document Use the documents based on the template to add text for a letter Keyboard Navigating and Selection in Writer Navigating and selection using the keyboard is done using the arrow keys One can also use Home End PgUp and PgDn Certain keys have different functions depending on whether they are simply pressed or are used in combination with the Ctrl key The following table provides an overview of the keys used for navigation Right left arrow keys Go one character to the left or right Go one word to the left or right Up down arrow keys Go one line up or down Move the current paragraph up o
377. ll of the attributes oneself For example double click on the Heading 1 Paragraph Style in the Styles and Formatting window 3 The paragraph is now formatted as Heading 1 4 Highlight the entire paragraph It will appear highlighted 5 Modify the type of characters by selecting an italic font in the Character dialogue Choose Format gt Character gt Font or by clicking the Italics icon on the text object bar 6 In the Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style by Example icon and enter a name for the new Style in the dialogue box for example Head1 7 Click OK 8 Now apply the new Head1 Paragraph Style by placing the cursor in the paragraph and double clicking the Head1 Style name in the Styles and Formatting window Where the desired Style already exists in a document select and apply it from the Apply Style pull down list on the object bar Creating Document Templates For any user defined Paragraph or Character Styles to be available in other documents first create a template It is best if one uses a current document so that the template will contain all the Styles wanted and needed The following steps will help create a new template 1 Have the documents open If desired delete all text from the current document leaving only the Styles 2 Call the menu command File gt Templates gt Save 3 In the dialogue Document Templates select the category into which to save the template
378. lly Likewise OpenOffice org1 0 might also work In either case when the document is opened using OpenOfficel 1 x the line described above is added with value true so that will be no further problems with outline numbering OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 419 Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Common Problems How get the page count to not count a title page How do offset the page count If one has a title page or cover page in the document Writer s page count field still counts those pages and will be too high Unfortunately there is no way to offset the page count field Thus using a formula instead will insert the proper page count Here s the procedure 1 Place the cursor where to insert the offset page count perhaps in teh header 2 Press the F2 key to bring up the formula bar Type in the formula page 1 the will already be in there The page variable is the number of pages in the document not the page currently selected Subtract the number of pages that should not be counted in the page count in this example 1 for a title page 3 Press the Enter key to insert the formula 4 Choose Tools gt Update gt Fields from the menu or press F9 to force the formula to refresh Otherwise the page count formula will just be 0 5 To edit this formula again later place te cursor immediately before the formula and press F2 Note Every time the page count changes refresh the formula again
379. lly click Insert to insert the field command in the footer of the current document The document will display the page number of the next page with the exception of the last page If the words Continue on page should also appear in front of the page number but should not appear if there is no next page do this 1 Set the cursor in front of the field that just inserted in the document 2 Open the Fields dialogue 3 Select a field of the Page type under Select select Next page and under Format select Text 4 Inthe Value text box enter the text to be displayed if a next page exists in the document Enter Continue on page note the space at the end 5 Click Insert Of course one can also enter instead of Continue on page something else For example to indicate the number of the next page Inserting Lines Under Headers Adjust the appearance of the header directly in the header itself For example by clicking on an existing header users can format the text individually or as a whole paragraph Additional attributes are available in the Format gt Page dialogue in the tab Header Selecting the Header tab permits defining a document header for the first time Mark Header on When the dialogue is closed by clicking on OK a header is created which can then be filled out in the document Click the More button on the Header tab to choose additional settings for the border and
380. long text and the user wishes to locate it Activate the Find function with Ctrl F Enter the string one wants to find in the Search for field and press Enter OpenOffice org starts searching from the current cursor position toward the end of the document Upon reaching the end of the document a new dialogue appears asking whether or not to continue the search at the beginning of the document Tap the Enter key to confirm If the text string is found it is highlighted OpenOffice org starts searching from the current cursor position toward the end of the document Upon reaching the end of the document a new dialogue appears asking whether or not to continue the search at the beginning of the document Click the Enter key to confirm If the text string is found it is highlighted The Find amp Replace dialogue can remain open without interfering with text entry and it can be moved to any place on the screen However when it is closed it remembers the previously entered strings so they do not need to be reentered for the next search but can be selected from the list box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 38 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org One very useful feature is the multi selection facility Find All For instance using Find All one could set every occurrence of the word document in the text to boldface Enter the search term in the Search for field and then click Find All All occurrences are now selected Place the cursor
381. loyed upon selecting File gt New gt Text Document The following demonstrates one way that this can be done 1 Create or open a document that contains the user s favourite styles and formatting 2 Delete the text of the document as desired so that only the styles and other settings remain 3 Save the document as template by choosing File gt Templates gt Save Doing so saves the document as a template in HOME OpenOffice org lt release gt user template under NIX and under Windows HOME OpenOffice org lt release gt user template This is the user s default template directory 4 Select File gt Templates gt Organize 5 In the left list box of templates double click My Templates The expanded list view will include the name of the default template that was saved Click the name 6 Open the context menu and choose Set as default Template Close the dialogue This template will now be used as the default template OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 78 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Templates and Styles OpenOffice org templates are files that one can use as base for creating personal custom documents in the manner of a road map Templates can contain text logos other graphic objects and other constructs Also every template contains a set of styles that are viewable in the Styles and Formatting window For each document type text table drawing presentation etc a single template file i
382. lp Window URLs Help Agent Tips and Extended Tips abstract AutoAbstract Index Keyword Search in the Help accens Find The Full Text Search inserting aa ea ae ee Managing Bookmarks Contents The Main Help Topics Getting Support OpenOffice org Step by Step Help To access Help use the Help menu item or click the Help buttons in the individual dialogues OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 7 Chapter 1 Using OpenOffice org Help OpenOffice org Help is context sensitive This means that when Help is opened in Writer it is specific to Writer Similarly to get help about Calc either first open a spreadsheet and only then look for help or select Help for the specific module from the pull down list at the top of the Help window The pull down list at the top of the Help window sets the selected module as the current section for searching Tips Tips are on at installation by default and it is recommended that this feature should always be switched on With Tips activated one can for example let the mouse pointer rest on an icon so that its name is displayed Tips may also be seen in many other places in OpenOffice org For example when scrolling through a table the tip shows the row or column Turning tips on and off Select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Tips to enable or disable this feature Extended Tips Switch on the Extended Tips during the first few weeks of OpenOffice org us
383. lygon using the Polygon icon in the Draw Functions toolbar Place the polygon over the text and assign the text the Wrap gt Contour with its context menu A wrap contour to 3D objects can also be defined Create a 3D object with OpenOffice org Draw copy it to the clipboard and paste it into the text document Open the context menu of the inserted object and choose Wrap gt Contour In the context menu of an object with a wrap contour is the Wrap gt Edit Contour command This command calls the Contour Editor from which manually re editing the automatic contour is possible Refer to the instructions in Help Linking Frames and Facilitating Text Flow If the text should be continued in the same manner as in a newspaper i e from a frame on page 1 to say a frame on page 4 and where the text flow from frame to frame must be done automatically use linked frames 1 Create two or more frames by opening the Insert floating toolbar clicking Insert Frame 2 Select the first frame click the border of the frame 3 Click the Link Frames 889 icon on the Frame toolbar 4 Now click the second frame To enter text in the linked frames position the cursor in the first frame and type in text or insert it from the clipboard 6 Now decide if the text should be a copy in the frame or if it should keep a link to the original document in this case it would always return to the actual stand of the original document If the text is
384. m Full Screen Ctrl Shift4 J Insert Q Zoom Insert Object Media Playback OLE Object Page Preview Picture Standard Standard Viewing Mode Table Text Object i Bu e e B8 e 1 9 F8 Tools e ee 1 roc ae aa OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 an b 0 2E w 1B o r3 E T Q1 B mi AU EEA Y la xl Instance Submissions Bindings ES Instances Y ks le rz rm ms a EB EH e S E T sp e The user can now switch off design mode for use Where the finished form is to be shared with others the user should also set the form to open in usage mode by default 402 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 2 Then Use View gt Toolbars and ensure that the Form Control and Form Design bars are checked E Untitled2 OpenOffice org Writer E EE me Toolbars f E A 08 instanceData iD Ba eS ee Fo TORTE Ben o e i eC OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 403 Chapter 12 Building Forms with Xforms 3 Ensure that Data Navigator is enabled as shown below Iri Untitled2 Ope EES org Writer iB Eritrea ELS 2 5 e i amp E viMommt aloR B saree A v 2 5 EE feu Untitled2 OpenOffice org B EEE Py 9415 e usn 7 etes fimesnewroman AS A BU Contractor Name m Spa e SSS Se lS ree roe Js rz le a En eR nn 2
385. m 52 User defined 1 00 pt omm j d L 4 00 pt 0 0mm 500 pt 110pt A M Color q r Black Shadow style Position ojo io c n 4 9mm Color O Gray OK Cancel Help Reset OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 53 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer On the left of the dialogue panel is the Line arrangement group Notice that the four outer edges of the User defined area are marked with small angles To edit an outer margin click in the appropriate position between the small angles Above this area are four predefined Default borders which may also be used In both cases the selected border elements will be indicated by black triangles Now now choose a line style or a colour it will be applied to the selected part of the border Clicking repeatedly on an element in the Borders dialogue switches between three alternative modes The element is displayed as a line Clicking OK will apply the format to the element The element is displayed as a thick If OK is clicked the object remains unchanged black line The element is not displayed Clicking OK deletes the element Use the Borders floating toolbar with Tables Suppose the following table border is required for a document Berlin New York London Country Germany USA Great Britain River Spree Hudson Thames gt 3 Million Citizens gt 7 Million Citizens gt 6 Million Citizens 1 Place the cursor at the position
386. m the Gallery into the document After the details are positioned on Layer1 do the following 1 click the Sketch2 tab and arrange elements there as well Notice that the elements from Sketch1 are visible 2 To change this click the Sketch1 tab and call up the context menu and select Modify Layer 3 In the Modify Layer dialogue remove the check from the Visible check box Modify Layer Layout Cancel Properties v Msible Help IV Printable Locked 4 Click OK to view only the Layout level and the Sketch2 level As a rule all layers will be displayed To view a particular layer deactivate the Visible field on all the other layers After completing the drawing save and or print the document as needed Using One colour per Layer If more than one layer at a time is displayed apply an identical colour to all elements on the same layer for a better overview OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 336 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources This chapter needs to be completely re written to focus on the built in HSQLDB database Unfortunately the 1 9 development snapshots are incomplete at the time of writing This chapter will therefore be updated frequently Nonetheless the data sources of various types may be still registered in OpenOffice org The following is 1 1 x but should provide some guidance NOTE for 2 0 dBase users To open a connection to a dBase database on
387. most useful Inserting Graphics via dialogue 1 Set the cursor at the position in the document where to insert the graphic 2 Choose Insert gt Picture gt From File The dialogue Insert Picture will appear 3 Select the desired graphic and click on Open By default graphics are inserted with its alignment centered above the current paragraph Inserting Graphics From OpenOffice org Draw or Impress Graphic objects can be copied and inserted from one document to another by dragging and dropping the object 1 Open the document in which to insert the graphic object 2 Open the document from which to copy the graphic object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 140 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 3 If the graphic has a hyperlink connected to it then the mouse pointer will change to a Grabbing Hand when the mouse is over the graphic In this case switch from ny mode in the Status bar to SEL select mode by clicking in the box where it appears 4 Select the graphic by clicking on it Note On some systems pressing the Alt key and clicking the graphic object selects the object while in HY P mode without activating a hyperlink that may be connected to it On other systems the Alt key is used to shift the focus to the Menu bar 5 While holding down the ctr1 key keep the mouse button pressed and drag the graphic object into the other document Note When the documents are not visible next to each other
388. nOffice org gt View tab check the appropriate box for 3D objects to refresh during interaction Using Illumination Now one needs to provide illumination for the world globe Select an overall blue illumination for example so that the oceans will have a blue colour and a yellow highlight that will shine on the side of the earth facing the sun 1 Select the world globe since the illumination preferences being set always refer to the currently selected object 2 Open the 3D Effects window by clicking the 3D Controller icon ot at the bottom of the main toolbar 3 In the 3D Effects window click the Illumination button em a Use this feature to change the default setting of the light source to blue and move it down and to the left b Click Assign 4 Repeat step 3 to apply a second light source in yellow to shine on the earth from the above right More 3d Effects Take a look at the 3D Effects window The individual tabs and icons are described in detail in Help What follows is just a brief overview 3D Effects Favourites 3D Effects mr mm mim ze Favorites This dialogue window offers a few special effects that can be used on the 3D object To save interesting effects so that they are available for selection on this tab file the appropriate 3D object in the Gallery more specifically in the 3D theme folder OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 320 3D Effects Geometry
389. nabled to automatically convert the second of two capital letters at the beginning of a word to a lowercase letter enter any exceptions that are correctly written with two capital letters such as PC and CD These exceptions can also be automatically included by selecting the Autoinclude checkboxes on the Exceptions tab When this feature is enabled and one then uses an idiom in the text that is automatically corrected but which should not be corrected immediately press Ctr1 Z Doing this not only undoes the automatic correction but also sees to it that this particular correction will not be made automatically again in the session AutoCorrect can also be used to replace one word or abbreviation with something more appropriate For example replace ASAP with the text as soon as possible however the OpenOffice org AutoText function is a better choice for doing this OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 36 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Creating a Letter Template With the Wizard If one is writing a personal letter the Wizard and standard AutoTexts are not essential but in formal business correspondence these aids can save a lot of time and make work much easier Note To produce a standard letter have a look at the supplied templates Simply press the shortcut keys Shift Ctr N or choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents Start the Wizard with the File gt Wizards gt Letter menu command AutoPil
390. name the new zipfile with the extension used with the original file 9 Open the new file in Openoffice org and fix any formatting problems including inserting graphics Users can get these from the appropriate sub directory of the directory created in Step 3 10 If the contents is recovered using this method cleanup 11 Openoffice org has a good recovery mechanism and users should ensure it is enabled by going to Tools gt Options gt Openoffice org gt Load Save and enabling the following a Always create a backup b Save AutoRecovery information every and select the interval from the spin box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 422 Index This index is a work in progress and page numbers may or may not be correct in the draft Index They are a guide only 1 I Zseplacement 2 eee te ee ee 204 2 2D charts selection i eter eter 228 3 ID eNA IS tiec e esecoc sechs ese teet eee eee eet e hee eret ONENE SENINE esses 227 ep 228 VIC HT HP s 228 3D text creation eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeem emere 327 A abbreviation replacement sess 38 90 abbreviations iesu ciseetee es coec cete ose oe erre FERES EDU ERU 89 ACC CNS sess acs ces re Fla se a P EE E ER LER EE EIER kv Ra Seen 50 accessibility as sciat o Rieti shortcuts 17 19 26 39 50 56 61 62 89 107 142 173 202 285 293 392 394 403 404 418 ZR M
391. ncencadsachossdneventseiaaneneaeaenuateeedieranaese 74 Changing the Format OF Page NUM BEL S isisisi a veri tb Peu v eH d C Rad 75 Pape Styles SUMINA Y 2 ou epis Mox Vui iut ud Nd oU uma MI UM EDAD 77 Dennis default Templates icnn bx ria a ah res i bedient NR YA 78 Templates and SES RORIS TO QT OE Pe EEan EES 79 Copying Styles Between Templates and Documents ciscanscassioiansdtocesecusds ruis petiti iie tienne 79 New Style Troia Sel ec DIOH osos ei rab RP EM Fr ee EE CUN Sat 80 Transferring Formats With Fill Format Mo rde iiie iue ternis enrxt ebbe rarae ro tU terio sa Ssouavace 80 Updating Styles From NN isses edi pao tn npo them i qu t dn Xue PY ROR ARR Per usen Germano 80 Tiis is how toupdate a Style ouais antea natu TE A i pdt d cnin 80 Style can also be updated by using drag and kopiert Od S HEMRE SEMIS 81 Entering sud Formatting Text Automalically eoas sit m i Facies aaia 81 Disabling the AutoCorrect Paiatii503 lt 4en0cpnendeosicaenesecsdse encesconsesnsygnsannacensvawannvnauseomeusence 81 ASCII Quotation marks are replaced with Custom Quotes sss 81 Sentences always begin with acapital IUE eid OR US PHRASE RERO SEHE MSS 81 Three identical characters will become a whole hne eret etes 81 AUT C gS cle S 1 oos a cc cn ee eee eee eee eee eT eee re eres ares 82 Tocxclud words from SoplIC DE usta rive on erro rauca ERE RAN HD neca Rae Ru Hu 82 LECHE UIN Do oM CR 83 Defining Anto Verc 84 Using AutoT
392. nd Backgrounds for Cells and Pages Basically a format can be assigned to any group of cells by first selecting the cells for multiple selection hold down the Ct x1 key when clicking and then activating the Cell Attributes dialogue via Format gt Cell In this dialogue select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet choose Format gt Page This permits defining headers and footers for example to appear on each printed page OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 201 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Addressing Cells Cells can be addressed directly by means of their coordinates in the row and column matrix Use absolute or relative referencing or give cell ranges their own names Addresses and References Absolute and Relative Relative Addressing The cell in column A row 1 is addressed as A1 Address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell For example the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as Al B2 By addressing an area in this way one is making a relative reference to A1 B2 Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when the formulae are copied Absolute Addressing Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing A dollar sign is placed before each lett
393. nd any personally created ones To open the dialogue choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents or press Shift Ctr1 N In Windows double click the OpenOffice org Quickstarter icon on the task bar W Templates and Documents english zn 26 em Eg Ee 8987 avery lables apa 4thEd New Document Bank_Account EA briesenickMiniDVCover cap1107 CD back inlay Templates fA cd dvd insert avery 8693 8931 fA cd dvd label avery 8692 8931 FA cd dvd label memorex CD booklet ta CD Cover and inlay CD labels Neato CD labels Verbatim ey Checklist CorporateReport DLTCartridges E ee E Organize Cancel Help CP PO My Documents Samples The dialogue offers the following areas which can be selected by clicking one of the offerings in the shortcut bar on the left New Document A way to create a new empty document from a set of prepared templates Templates Choose from the many ready to use document templates OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 17 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org My Documents A quick route to the documents in a work directory A work directory may be defined by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths and entering the path required for My Documents Samples This is an empty folder when installed however some examples may be downloaded from http documentation openoffice
394. nd enter some text inside this frame 6 If desired select this text and assign another colour to it The background of the text is automatically transparent 7 Select the pixel image and the text by drawing a frame around both The Status bar will read 2 draw objects selected 8 Choose File gt Export and in the Export dialogue 9 select the file type JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group 10 Enter a name 11 Check the Selection check box to export only the selected objects 12 Click Save Another dialogue permits setting options to define the quality of the JPEG image Remember that the higher the quality the larger will the file be When a graphic object for example an inserted Pixel image is selected in Impress or Draw the graphic object bar will be automatically be displayed This bar enables modification of the colour tone brightness and contrast of the graphic object Changing the transparency value of graphic objects is also possible At a higher transparency values a graphic object becomes see through and objects lying behind it will be visible When the work is saved as an OpenOffice org document the transparency is saved too Saving Bitmaps Saving changes to a bitmap image as an image file for example in one of the GIF JPEG or TIFF file formats is only possible in Draw or Impress by selecting and exporting the bitmap image The following provides a step by step procedure 1 Select the bitma
395. nd select the type of anchor under the heading Anchor to If the frame is to always remain on the same page which is important for a table of contents for example select Page For the frame to flow with the text e g for small symbols which always appear in the margin accompanying a certain word in the text select To Character Or in flowing text the frame should move with the text as a character select As Character Select Paragraph to anchor a frame to a specific paragraph The type of anchor can also be specified from the context menu Alternatively click the Change Anchor icon in the Object bar to quickly change the anchor Defining a Frame Wrap Open the Frame dialogue context menu gt Frame to define the frame wrap and click the Wrap tab Select the desired wrap style and under Spacing define the spacing between the frame and text Finally select the option First Paragraph The First Paragraph field or the menu command in the context menu ensures that when a graphic is positioned between two paragraphs only the first paragraph wraps around the picture Defining a Wrap Region Note As one follows this procedure ibut cannot find an icon in a toolbar to which the description refers check the OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 167 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Making a newsletter more attractive with objects or graphics is done easily by having the text flow around an object Simply draw a po
396. nd which window manager is used however under Gnome and KDE the OpenOffice org group may be found in the Main menu To create a blank text document in Writer click Text Document For a blank spreadsheet in Calc click Spreadsheet and so on NOTE Under Windows the OpenOffice org Quickstarter should be in the Windows task bar The z icon may be double clicked or right clicked to open its context menu Right clicking Quickstarter opens a submenu rom which a new blank document can be opened Double click Quickstarter to open the Templates and Documents dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 10 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org Writer Window A text document is displayed and edited in the Writer window Spreadsheet presentations or drawings are displayed in very similar windows except the menus and icons change automatically depending on the context v Untitled1 OpenOffice org Writer LEL File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help x 2 SEaR ESR Ve xse v Sm y MommtTao j Default Bitstream Vera Serif 12 B 7 zx zm TH gE A V ass 15 016 y 1B 5 Close Document Menu Bar Horizontal Ruler Formatting Toolbar Standard Toolbar Vertical Scrollbar B Page Margin Horizontal Scrollbar Page Edge Vertical Ruler Bi This Page Page Style Zoom Page 1 1 Default 100 INSRT STD HYP Status Bar
397. ne NER uos 419 How get the page count to not count a title page How do I offset the page count 420 What to do when document prints or exports with blank pages sessssessss 420 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xxiv How to tecover content from a Openatpce ori DI srci 421 Steps for tecovermpg a damaged Openof ceorg TIles oo eo aca eu Qe Wet vr tH UR ME 421 TOR C T eR 423 Public Documentation License Version 1 0 ss ce epesirrr ehm lao REVISE KE NP DIVER MA PN RAD OR EN ESR UR HEUS 431 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 XXV Overview Overview This the OpenOffice org User s Guide attempts to provide answers to questions about working with OpenOffice org It is focused on OpenOffice org 2 x releases but it should be useful with 1 9 and 1 1 x releases Graphics are for the most part using the older style icons rather than the newer Crystal graphics that are only in the en_US and de_DE releases of 2 0 2 Some where very similar are from the 1 1 x user guide All these change frequently as the 2 0 cycle progresses In addition use of the OpenOffice org Help facility is also covered Through Help users can get detailed answers to all questions at any time by pressing F1 opening the Help menu or clicking the Help buttons More information on using OpenOffice org Help can be found in Chapter 1 Working with OpenOffice org Other sources
398. ne can produce personal letters form letters brochures faxes and even professional manuals Documents that are used often can be saved as templates for example an invoice form Spellcheck and thesaurus functions are at one s disposal If desired have the AutoCorrect and hyphenation functions active while typing There is no restriction to the length of a text document in OpenOffice org Use the Navigator to move around easily and quickly within the document OpenOffice org Writer comes with a variety of templates for almost every purpose Also users can create their own using the Wizard Designing and Structuring OpenOffice org offers a wide variety of options to design documents Use the Styles and Formatting window to create assign and modify styles for paragraphs individual characters frames and pages In addition the Navigator can help create structured texts and also allows modification of the structure for instance by shifting paragraphs from one position to another Additionally various indexes and tables can be created in text documents One can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to individual needs Live hyperlinks and bookmarks allow jumping directly to the corresponding items in the text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 43 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Desktop Publishing with OpenOffice org Writer OpenOffice org Writer contains numerous functions to assist in
399. ne may need to provide additional information Even for those that work immediately a user may customize their appearance or behaviour To set up a control click it to select it green sizing handles appear around the edges and then choose Control from the shortcut menu Format Control from the menu or Control Properties from the Form Functions toolbar The Properties dialogue for the control appears The contents of the Properties dialogue vary depending on the type of control Just as the contents of the Properties dialogue vary with the type of control so does what one needs to do to get it working Table 2 lists some of the items common to a number of controls Table 2 The Properties dialogues for the various controls lets one set them up as wanted The properties shown here are common to a number of the controls Property Meaning Name Identifies the control In some cases including option buttons assigning the same name to several controls turns them into a group The caption that appears on the control Label field Links the control to a Label Field control Used for controls like Text Boxes that don t have their own label Enabled Determines whether the control is available to the user Tabstop Determines whether the control is part of the tab order that is whether the user can reach it by tabbing from one control to the next OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 349 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Source
400. ning the words Bold or Black in their name By default Find searches only for direct attributes However after searching for the attributes one may enable the Including Styles checkbox in the groups section of the Find amp Replace dialogue where Search for Styles was previously Then the search extends from the direct attributes we selected previously to include indirect attributes such as those set with styles Searching for Special Formats By clicking the Format button one opens a dialogue from which to select the specific formats in the search For example if one has manually centered a few lines in the text find them using the options of Format in the Find amp Replace dialogue Now let s say that the found attribute must be replaced with another to do this take the following steps 1 Position the cursor in the Replace with field 2 Click the Format button OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 40 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org 3 Choose the replacement attribute The chosen attributes are listed under the Search for and Replace with fields If no replacement is indicated for the attribute found in the text the default settings are automatically applied Similarity Search This function seeks not only for the search term but also for similarly typed words As needed fine tune the degree of similarity by clicking the button immediately to the right of the Similarity search checkbox List of Regular
401. nsert a frame Insert Frame menu command In the Frame dialogue select the Anchor as As Character a Deselect the border b Click OK to close the dialogue 1 Deselect the frame by clicking outside it Note when entering text in the frame click in the very centre of the frame The frame should not be selected but the text cursor should be inside the frame OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 133 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer c Insert a single cell table inside the frame using Insert gt Table d Set a row and a column value of 1 uncheck Heading and uncheck Border e Click OK f The cursor is positioned in Table2 b Define the formula by either pressing F2 or typing an equal sign into the cell this is a short cut at which point the Formula bar will be displayed The formula for calculating the total of cells B1 to B10 is Tablel Bl1 B10 But don t type this yet because there is a simpler way 5 Highlight the cells in Tab1e1 to be summed Do this by keeping the mouse button pressed as the pointer is dragged from the first to the last cell being summed 6 Close the mathematical formula by clicking the Accept icon on the Calculation Bar The result of the calculation will be seen in Table2 7 If there are changes in the cells being summed update the result by pressing function key F9 Note Instead of first inserting the border and then inserting a table inside the border
402. nstant True TRUE not equal to 0 False FALSE sum lt C4 gt Calculating in Text 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where the calculation result should appear 2 Press F2 to display the Formula bar at the top of the main edit window above the horizontal ruler if rulers are shown 3 Enter the desired formula for example 446 100 4 Press Enter or click on Apply to insert the result Use the Formula icon to perform more complex calculations Clicking on this icon opens a branched submenu from which to select a formula The formulae are placed on the formula bar at the cursor position and users are free to switch between inputting formulae and values from the keyboard and via the Formula icon As an example of a more complex calculation to be performed in a text suppose we want to calculate the mean value of three figures 1 Display the Formula bar with F2 2 Open the submenu of the Formula icon 3 Choose Mean from the statistical functions The input field will display mean 4 Enter the first number and then a vertical bar as the list separator 5 Enter the second number another separator and then the third number The input field may now show for example mean 12 22 34 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 128 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 6 Press Enter to inset the result as a field in the text 7 Double click on the field to edit it
403. nt Ms LIKE H llo returns field names with field content such as give and gave LIKE S returns data fields with field contents such as Sun BETWEEN 10 AND 20 returns field names with field content between the values 10 and 20 The fields can be either text fields or number fields IN 1 3 5 7 returns field names with the values 1 3 5 7 If the field name contains an item number for example create a query that returns the item having the specified number NOT IN Smith returns field names that do not contain Smith Remarks about possible wildcards and operators can be found in the Help gt Contents gt Index gt Search term gt queries designing If filter conditions are entered into several fields they will be joined by the Boolean AND E If on the filter bar the Apply filter icon is clicked the filtering is performed in the database The form bar is seen and the habitats navigated By clicking the Close button in the filter bar the form will be displayed without a filter F In the form view click the Apply Filter icon to change to the filtered view lt The filters that have been set can be removed by clicking on the icon Remove Filter Sort Ek If several filter conditions are to be connected with OR click the Filter Navigation icon on the filter bar The dockable Filter Navigator window appears The filter conditions that are set appear in the Filter Na
404. nt type and size Upon clicking OK the text in all of the frames will be displayed according to the selected settings Modifying colours To assign a different colour to a frame use the mouse to drag a selection frame around the respective frame Select Area in the context menu to open the dialogue of the same name Select a colour on the Object Fill tab Further design options are available with the various colour schemes in the Gradients tab Choose one of the existing colour gradients all of which can also be edited and modified OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 283 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw OpenOffice org Draw can be used to create drawings with different degrees of complexity This ranges from a simple drawing to an interactive multi page document To create drawings or graphics open an empty document and design all the elements by hand or work with the templates and sample graphics that can be reached by selecting File gt New gt Templates and Documents or directly from from the Gallery inc the case of graphics Draw enables creation and saving vector graphics These graphics can also be exported as pixel graphics Furthermore it is also possible to insert pixel graphics bitmaps into draw pages at any time OpenOffice org Draw Functions This section contains an overview of some of the OpenOffice org Draw capabilities Creating and Publishing Vector Graphics OpenOffi
405. ntain text only After setting the first condition under Allow select the next condition under Data According to what is chosen additional text fields Value Minimum and Maximum may appear to further specify the condition A few possible conditions resulting from this register could be as follows Integer greater than 1 Decimal between 10 and 12 5 Date earlier than or equal to 1 1 2000 lime not equal to 00 00 Text with a length of more than 2 characters After the conditions for cell validity have been determined if any values are subsequently entered which do not meet the conditions Calc displays a warning message Fill out the other two tabs in the dialogue to specify more detailed messages to aid a user working with a spreadsheet On the Input Help tab page enter the title and the text of the tip which will then be displayed if the cell is selected On the Error Alert tab page select the action to be carried out in the event of an error If Stop is selected as the action invalid inputs are not accepted and the previous cell contents will be retained Select Warning or Information to display a dialogue in which the entry can either be cancelled the cell value will be retained or accepted even if the new value violates the validity rule If Macro is selected then specify the macro to be carried out in the event of an error via the Browse button OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 237 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets
406. nter is pressed a page wide line of various thickness results The line is a border of the previous paragraph Choose Format gt Paragraph gt Borders to edit or delete it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 81 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer To turn this feature off 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect 3 Go to the Options tab Uncheck the Apply border check box if this automatic conversion should no longer occur Automatic Spellcheck From within a text document click the AutoSpellcheck on off icon on the Standard toolbar All words marked as incorrect by the spelling checker will then be underlined in red Click on words underlined in this way with the right mouse button A context menu then appears The context menu often provides a list of suggested words one of which one may click to select it The suggested word then replaces the word underlined in red If the wrongly typed word is replaced using the AutoCorrect function in the context menu the word pair will be entered in the AutoCorrect replacement table To call up this table choose Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace tab If the word underlined in red is correct it can be stored in a custom dictionary using the Add command To exclude words from Spellcheck For words marked as incorrect users can exclude them from spell checking as follows 1 Right click on the word to open the context menu 2 Choose Ignore All
407. nto the document When the mouse button is released the Insert database columns dialogue appears where one can decide whether to use all database fields and whether to copy the data into the document as text a table or fields All currently selected records will be inserted Applying data to a table document One or more records can be inserted into the current sheet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet The data is inserted in the place where the mouse button is released Inserting controls in a text form When a text form linked to a database is created one can generate controls by drag and drop from the data source view When a database column is dragged into the text document a field is inserted By holding down Shift Ctrl while dragging a text field is inserted grouped with an appropriate label field The text field already contains all the database information that is needed for the form OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 370 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Copying Sheet Areas to Text Documents 1 Open both the text document and the spreadsheet 2 Select the sheet area to copy 3 Point to the selected area and press the mouse button Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment then drag the area into the text document If the documents are not visible next to each other first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button Continue
408. nu instead of using menu commands which makes for less work with the mouse Using a Grid To work with great precision for example to place rectangles one on top of the other use the grid function To turn on the grid choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid and select the Snap to Grid option As an additional aid selecting Visible Grid makes it easy to place documents exactly on top of each other in the document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 329 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Mechanical or Construction Drawings This section explains how to produce a mechanical drawing with OpenOffice org The same method can be used to create other similar drawings such as construction blueprint garden layout et cetera Engine P 1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 330 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Creating a Construction Plan To create a drawing like the preceding illustration click the Rectangle icon and drag the floating toolbar into the work area Then select Curves and Lines and Arrows and drag these floating toolbars into the work area as well Choose a tool with which to begin such as the Rectangle and use it to drag open an area to represent the first surface Finally draw in the details with the Line tool OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 331 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw svi engine complete sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Wind
409. o be set up on A11 The dictionary file is not a read only file Open a text document Choose Tools gt Configure The Configuration dialogue appears Select the Keyboard tab to specify a key combination Search for an available key combination in the Keyboard list box such as F4 Click Modify Select Category gt Options area at the lower left of the Keyboard tab select the Adding unknown words function next to it OO ON ON tn d UUN close the dialogue with OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 359 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org Now by pressing the F4 key or whatever shortcut keys were selected one can start a spelling check of the current text document automatically placing all unknown words in an active user defined dictionary Configuring Menus Configuring a menu item is similar to configuring a keyboard shortcut as shown above The step by step procedure that follows should help in setting up a new menu item in this case the extendedPDF macro from ooomacros org While OpenOffice org modules include pdf export commands these do not allow HTML links thus it may be convenient to add this feature This procedure will work only if there is an installed extendedPDF macro The following explains how to integrate extendedPDF commands into the File menu Note Installing the extendedPDF macro is covered by the macro document itself 1 Open a document 2 Choose Tools gt Configure to open th
410. o bet Ro cod aare aaa SU ER Fore XR RUD SR IA DE E ORAS Parts 157 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 x Brief Instructions For Quick Regia es cisccsccsosasesscsaennerencadenionencnenacsa wesaveeneescacssveoudesss 157 Fixed and Variable Fields ieste eieiei E a EEEE OSE EE eds 157 Creating and Printing Labels and Business Garda us cae teat csntg eon ease Dans pa NR PM IE 159 Designing Business Cards via duiloeue iueso i beris tier tu ete er EVI Reda n 159 Designing Labels and Business Cards sse eset res sts eo treten ae posto mr epe ensi pta vEx adeo g UA 160 Prints Labels With Se al OItnbefe es ce mdp ed etai rs ots i ava cR dU Bu PO b EQUUS EV RR 160 Pontine Address Labels osse d PP oD NR PO RONDE ENERO MEO IP MD 161 Av idine Blank Parggcaplis scscn eror ep HUI POUR E HURA RU IR AU MR FX TRO UNE MR DURO 162 PIECE nk eo eee een ee en ane AE eee eer eee EE 164 Cesare a Newsletter Froma Template oer rosca ino esrtalonvenvnesanecusyeninlanonndueneenvarits 165 Creatine Page SIES irei i ne ne ne RR ee enon ee NN eee uM eer 165 Editing EIGHiota iod adsense aed br ada iieri e kiana nan RD Rena px cat ras 165 DE C OUINHE Le scrub FOR ORO enia ae tta ics ee meee din msn 165 Editing Paragraph ty Iis secie ers nes NERO Gad xd rh UN RR 166 BG Ayo wih Fres ois eee eee Pen a re eer eer ae MER eee reer 167 Formatting n BESIDE aos ported s etia t Reciba ooa S Dici E SEHR Rr MEG 167 TS Te uen gl ld S1 E TTC OE Ge 167 Delos d Frame Wrap sucses dieg
411. objects in the reverse order Press the Tab key to select an object Press Tab again to select the next object Press Shift Tab to go through the objects in the reverse order Individual Presentations A slide show presents the slides in sequence from beginning to end To start presenting the slides in the presentation either click the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctr1 F2 Presentations usually start with the first slide however to begin with the currently selected slide proceed as follows 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt General 2 In the area Starting the presentation check the Always with current slide box Other options permit the user to show only or to never show certain slides 1 To prevent display of a slide go to the Slide View for example by choosing View gt Master View gt Slides View select the slide and select Slide Show gt Show Hide Slide The name of the selected slide will now appear highlighted in gray meaning that the slide will not be shown 2 Choose Presentation gt Show Hide Slide again when the slide should be included again OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 268 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress A more elegant way to keep individual slides hidden in certain presentations can be found under Presentation gt Custom Slide Shows os tain Custom Slide Shows DEI re E a M De
412. of document content both inside OpenOffice org 2 0 and externally Another aspect of using digital signatures is for ensuring Macro security This can be a very important topic because when user accesses a document containing macros or receives them via email the user cannot know if these can be trusted or whether they may harm the system Being that there is no easy way to determine whether a macro is harmful the decision whether to trust a macro or not to trust must be based on the trustworthiness of the macro author Unfortunately one cannot know that the macro really comes from the author or that it has not been modified by somebody else Digital certificates and signatures are the solution Authors can sign the macro with a private key and user can then verify the signature with the author s public keys An added benefit of using digital signatures is the assurance that the content has not been modified Certificates How to get a Certificate There are really only two ways to get a certificate One to create one for oneself or secondly to obtain one from a trusted signing authority 1 Specification http specs openoffice org appwide security Electronic Signatures and Security sxw OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 380 Self signed certificates Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques These are user created using certificate creation tools The following list provides some that are know at the time of writing this section In t
413. of the document are printed Define these printer options for the current print job by clicking the Options button in the Print dialogue Select Tools gt Options gt name of document type gt Print to create a general definition for normal use OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 25 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Note There are many different printers with widely varying properties The printing functions differ according to the operating system printer driver and printer model used The selected printer defines the width and height of the characters and hence also the line and page breaks OpenOffice org Writer and Calc always format the pages in the way they will appear when printed Displaying Print Previews Before printing out a document reviewing how the printed document will appear on paper is often a good idea OpenOffice org offers a Print Preview feature for this purpose thereby allowing adjustment of margin widths optimization of page breaks et cetera 1 Switch to the document for preview 1 Select File gt Page Preview ps I Be Use the icons on the object bar to zoom in or out 3 Bh bh Use the arrow keys or object bar icons to scroll through the pages of S the document and check how they will appear in print OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 26 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Reduced Printing of Documents To get a reduced printout of a text document choose File gt Page Preview
414. of the field is greater than the specified expression lt less than the content of the field is less than the specified expression OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 355 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Operator Meaning Condition is satisfied if gt greater than or the content of the field is greater than or equal to the equal to specified expression lt less than or the content of the field is less than or equal to the equal to specified expression Commands OpenOffice org SQL Meaning Condition is satisfied if command command IS EMPTY IS NULL is null The field name is empty For Yes No fields with three states this command automatically queries the undetermined state neither Yes nor No IS NOT EMPTY IS NOT NULL is not empty the field name is not empty LIKE placeholder for LIKE is an element of the data field contains the indicated any number of placeholder for expression The placeholder indicates whether the expression x occurs at the beginning of x at the any number of characters characters placeholder for exactly one character Placeholder for end of x or inside the field content exactly one x Either the SQL character or character the familiar file system placeholder can be entered as a placeholder in SQL queries in the officename interface The or placeholder stands for any number of characters The question mark in the
415. ogue OpenOffice org automatically saves the changes The new menu items should now be available Changing Toolbars To copy an icon say from an object bar to the function bar so that it is always visible simply hold down the Alt key and drag the icon to its new location OpenOffice org automatically remembers the configuration of the toolbars To delete an icon hold down the Alt key while dragging it out of its toolbar and drop it outside of the toolbars To have a separating dash on the toolbar drag an icon slightly to the right while holding down the A1t key To delete a separating dash drag the icon to the right of the separating dash slightly to the left while holding down the A1t key The context menu of a toolbars contains a Visible Buttons command This opens a submenu with a list of predefined icons Icons with check marks beside them are visible on the selected toolbar Click on an item to switch the icon from visible to hidden and vice versa The Visible buttons command in the context menu of the toolbars may also be used to have a quick overview of the icon names and their functions Inserting Moving and Deleting Icons on Toolbars 1 Open a document of the type which has the toolbar to modify For example to modify the text object bar for all text documents open a text document and then do the same for the other document types 2 Open the context menu of the toolbar and select the Edit command 3 At the
416. olour filter 3D charts can be rotated and flipped with the mouse for optimal design By choosing Insert gt Statistics users can apply statistical indicators to XY charts such as standard deviations with regression curves and more besides A single or double logarithmic representation of the axes can also be set here Inline charts there are various icons that can be applied automatically via OpenOffice org Chart as desired Manual application is also possible using graphic files or graphics from the Gallery such as Bullets OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 212 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc In a chart individual data series or data points can be selected by clicking on them and then opening the context menu to choose one of the numerous options to format the view Editing Chart Titles Suppose the user has inserted a chart in a Calc document and wants to change the title 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Double click on the default title text A gray border appears around the text which can now be changed 3 Press Return to create a new line 4 Asingle click on the title instead of double clicking allows moving it with the mouse 5 Select Format gt Title gt Main Title to edit the formatting of the main title This opens the Title dialogue 6 Select the Characters tab to change the font
417. ommand Next Record is effected automatically Therefore do not insert the command manually afier the last label on a page Avoiding Blank Paragraphs Sometime fields in a form letter can be empty and a blank line is printed For example there is a field named COMPANY that should appear in the recipient field but for some records this field is empty To prevent these empty fields from being included do the following 1 Place the cursor in the text document before the form letter field COMPANY 2 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Other to open the Fields dialogue 3 On the Functions tab select the type Hidden Paragraph 4 In the Condition field enter the following text without quotation marks not Company Now the COMPANY line will not be printed and the rest of the lines will be moved upward if the COMPANY database field is empty OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 162 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 163 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Newsletters In this section learn how to create a newsletter newspaper as a text document This is useful for creating newsletters for a company or club or in celebration of a special event Currently OpenOffice org does not have a resident newsletter template but there is a nice one that works available from http ooextras sourceforge net and this is one used in this section To install the template after downloading do
418. on the chart or modify the scale as one would any object 5 To later modify the chart data double click and edit it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 142 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Charts with Linked Data If a chart depends on data in a Calc document and this data changes a chart inserted by the above method is not automatically updated To keep the chart and the data up to date do as follows 1 In the Calc document copy the cell range from which the chart is created 2 In the Writer document long click the Insert Object icon on the Standard toolbar to open the submenu 3 Select Insert OLE Object The data is now in a table in the Writer document and is always linked via OLE to the source data in the Calc document Note DDE is related to OLE and is handled as part of the implementation 4 Position the cursor in the table 5 Long click the Insert Objects icon on the Standard toolbar to open the floating toolbar 6 Click the Insert Chart icon Inserting Decorative Horizontal Lines Choose Insert gt Horizontal Ruler to open a dialogue for selecting decorative lines The lines are graphics anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the margins These lines may also be found in a Gallery theme If one wants to continue using a line from the Internet add it to the relevant theme in the Gallery The line can then be selected from this dialogue OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 143
419. only signals that the entry is text This can be useful when entering numbers such as a telephone number or ZIP code that begins with a zero 0 since a zero 0 at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 189 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Numbers While numbers are displayed in various ways internally these always remain numeric For example 1 and 1 0 are the same Ill amp xX t Tz i 73 II Enter the number 12345 6789 for example and the number will appear in the sheet with only two decimal places i e 12345 68 Nonetheless the exact number with all four decimal places is kept by the program Fractional numbers can also be entered in a cell and used for calculation 1 Enter 0O 1 5 ina cell 2 Press the Enter key and in the input line will be the value 0 2 This will be used for the calculation providing that the cell format is number Calc does recognize fractions and will automatically use 1 5 and display this However if 0 1 2 is entered AutoCorrect replaces the three characters 1 and 2 with a single character Likewise with 1 4 and 3 4 This replacement is defined in the Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Replace tab If multi digit fractions such as1 10 are needed change the cell format to the fraction view Context menu of the Cell choose Format cells Fractions such as 12 31 or 12 32 may be entered however the fractions
420. only to be copied choose the command menu Insert gt File OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 168 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Insert Section xi Section Columns Background Footnotes Endnotes New section Link section Iv Link DDE File name fite 70 Auser documents wc Section Write protection M Protect With password a Hide Hide With condition Cancel Help Reset 7 Ifthe text is a section linked to another file choose Insert gt Section In the Insert Sections dialogue that appears click Link and select the file wanted with the button 8 Finally click the Insert button Using coloured or Graphic Backgrounds To assign a coloured background to a paragraph place the cursor in that paragraph and click the Background colour icon in the Object bar A floating colour palette appears from which the desired colour is selected by clicking it once Note When frequent use of a background colour for certain paragraphs is used it is best to create a Paragraph Style for this purpose A background can be a graphic image rather than a colour The background graphic image is assigned to a paragraph either via the Paragraph Style in that case all paragraphs based on this Style will have the same graphic background or use Format gt Paragraph to edit it Click the Background tab and in the list box As select graphics in order to pick
421. ontinue entering text using the default format Text is entered using direct character formatting to reset the formatting to default press the right arrow key once which causes the prior text to revert to the default Paragraph Style Now continue entering text at the end of the current paragraph Example procedure for resetting Font Attributes Suppose one wants to type the words bold italic and set the last two words to bold italic while typing First type Enter this in then click on the Bold and Italic icons on the Object Bar followed by entering bold italic To continue with normal setting simply press the right arrow key once and finish the paragraph This is simpler than clicking on the two icons again Quick Formatting Using the Adjacent Paragraph Format When there are two consecutive paragraphs with different paragraph formats that should be formatted the same way do it quickly with the following method a Delete the paragraph mark between two paragraphs b Press Enter Both paragraphs now have the same format with the same Style Note to see paragraph marks enable View gt Non printing Characters Delete paragraph marks in the following two ways 1 Go the end of the first paragraph and press the Delete Del key This action merges the second paragraph into the first known as deleting to the right To turn the text back into two paragraphs Press the Enter key twice and the second paragraph has the same format as th
422. ools Window Help iB cNua ziass VR Xba gH gE i by Defaut z rives New Roman zi z Bi u a 2 3 4 Mt p E TEMP contractor payment x lt 3 Method Put x5 Reference x5 Binding Replace None Contractor Name G Rzadevict Simon A rount i RM SEIS B So BRIS Rc EET Pi e E Iz m e m o EEG e n S E Page 1 1 Default 72 msar sm e read only 14 This graphic shows the content of the submit as stored in the files specified above D contractor payment xml Notepad Elle Edit Format View Help lt xml version 1 0 0 instanceData Amount 2560 05 Amount Name G R oderick singletonz Name instancepata lD Using Xforms and further xml processing can thus produce very usable reports et cetera OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 411 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements This section contains hints and tips for using Tools gt XML Filter Settings to create new filters Flat XML filter There are two different ways to get OpenOffice org to output Flat Xml files 1 Using the method from the SDK See http api openoffice org 2 Using Tools gt XML Filter Settings Outputting Flat XML files and importing them is fairly straight forward with the built in tool The following is a step by step procedure that will let one save and open flat XML files 1 Click on Tools g
423. or other similar attributes 7 Click OK 8 In the document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Editing Chart Legends Suppose there is a chart in a Calc document that requires application of a colour gradient to the legend 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Select Format gt Legend or double click on the legend This opens the Legend dialogue U Select the appropriate tab for example the Area tab for modifying the background of the legend From the pull down list select Gradient Select a gradient from the list Click OK Md ON Uta A In the document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Note Users can define custom gradients hatching bitmaps and colours in OpenOffice org Draw To select the legend first double click on the chart see step 1 then click on the legend Now e the legend may be moved within the chart using the mouse OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 213 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc If the legend is moved over another object of the chart its Properties dialogue can no longer be opened by double clicking on it as Calc won t know which object is meant To open the Properties dialogue either use the Format menu or click once on the legend then open the context menu and select Object Properties The same applies to all other objects of
424. orders Background Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Asian Typography Numbering Tabs Hyphenation Automatically lulu Breaks Iv Enable Type Page Position Before Iv With Page Style main Text Page number 1 Options Do not split paragraph Keep with next paragraph Orphan control 2 Widow control 2 OK Cancel Help Reset If a particular paragraph should be on a new page with a new Page Style then that would be a property of that particular paragraph Assign this property under Format gt Paragraph gt Text Flow Changing the Format of Page Numbers Page numbers may be specified as either direct or as a property of the Page Style just like other text attributes Using direct formatting however should only be employed in a few instances When direct formatting one edits the the field directly as follows 1 Double click the field with the page number The Edit Fields Document dialogue opens OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 75 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Edit Fields Document Xx Type Select Format OK Cancel i Help Offset 2 Select the desired field format 3 Click OK Better than the direct formatting method just described is to make the page number format a property of the Page Style as explained below 1 Open the context menu on the page and select Page Then the user will see for example the Page
425. org Anew Common xcu is created and the problem should have disappeared Outline numbering is not retained after a save This is issue 27534 which is fixed in release 1 1 4 However in documents generated by OpenOffice org1 1 0 up to 1 1 3 one must employ a workaround to achieve expected behaviour The problem is that a line in settings xml is being set incorrectly when a document is saved Unfortunately the only way to fix this is to manually edit the sxw file The following provides a procedure to follow 1 Make a temporary directory in which to unzip the sxw file For example my text 2 Change into this directory 3 Use unzip or similar zipfile utility to unpack the document file that is not retaining its numbering 4 Edit settings xml and locate the line in it that looks like the following lt config config item config name UseOldNumbering config type boolean gt false lt config config item gt 5 Set the value from false to true 6 Now using zip or similar utility repack the files in the temporary directory under a new name and give it the sxw extension Under Linux the command could be zip r my new fixed document sxw 7 Open the fixed document in OpenOffice org and check that numbering is what is wanted If a copy of StarOffice 6 0 is available one can get the same effect by opening and saving the document in StarOffice6 0 By doing so this line will be removed tota
426. org Samples Templates User template index html See New Document for example templates OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 18 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Saving Documents Saving the current document can be done in three ways using File gt Save command the Save Document icon on the l function bar or just press Ctr1 Ss For a first time save use File gt Save as A dialogue box pops up to allow choosing where to store the file wv Save as a home sun so docs user quide 05 13 2004 13 11 30 ppm Folder 05 13 2004 13 11 30 Chapter1 sxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Tex 78 0 KB 05 08 2004 12 18 46 Chapter2 sxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Tex 162 1 KB 05 13 2004 23 09 52 Main sxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Tex 79 5 KB 05 08 2004 01 02 25 user_guide_masterisxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Tex 9884 Bytes 05 08 2004 08 29 33 5 user_guide_master2 sxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Tex 11 4 KB 05 08 2004 13 14 50 M File name Chapter2 save File type OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw 5 Cancel Help Save with password v Automatic file name extension With File gt Save as one assigns the document a name whereas the other two options save without asking for the file to be named Therefore using the Save as feature is especially important when saving files for the first time For the most part choose any name desired limited only by the restrictions imposed by the operating system When the document is to be op
427. org User Guide for 2 0 274 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 3 Select a background style and 4 Open the Modify dialogue via the context menu 5 Click the corresponding slide tab and make any changes By modifying the Background Style all slides can be assigned the same background Presentation Styles OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 275 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Creating a Slide Show In completing a slide show it is necessary to take a few additional steps to ensure a successful presentation OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 276 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Defining or Changing Slide Order To change the slide order click the Slide View f gc icon above the vertical scroll bar In this mode all slides in the presentation document PB are displayed in reduced size Click the slide to be moved and drag it with the mouse to the desired position The position where the slide will be inserted is indicated by a vertical black bar Creating Cross Fade Effects To apply cross fade effects one must have Impress in the Slide View or Drawing View Effect Fy In From Left Medium Transition Semiaute 4 E3 m 4Sides 4 Click on the slide when in the Slide View mode Set the effect and transition period that is to apply to the slide Transition using the two left list boxes In Drawing View choose Slide Show gt Slide Transition to bring up the dialogue in whic
428. orte controls m 3 OCUBMOHE sues eai tero ai nesini Pp debes 353 Esqui dh DOBLE RR PLUR UR UE UMS UN MN Ed Diu NU UI re 353 Searching in Tables and Form Documents usui use rn dco p ri Ra Retenir eo a nda 355 Searching With a Form Filter use sees Det de rU RR tUm FUE Sen RR net Quei pU PvE Un EYE 335 OPSTAO ao neos ne d mai Lud eres nearer buts een ee feda Dind UR UNDA 355 EDS pio nenea rn En OD US E MEER NI N 356 Chapter 8 Customizing DpenO TUE EB son pen eI e XM DA Foi OA RR FER a aa PE EO UA 359 Modifying and Customizing the User Interface of OpenOffice org sssssss 339 Cop Scb the POE eeepc ea ned NV uh VN nd 359 LXI MENi Serei FRU sine cence gina TURPE E EIN N EN NEUEN AU NUM US DAMM 360 Changing Toolbats eee vise bua APA TURN KG GIU N a Ea Ea aE R E i 361 Inserting Moving and Deleting Icons on Toolbars eene 361 Cham Too VOU os ea dir e rra ate PMOR A NUR ARI Cep edito Ub RN REA CMM US TIL RU RUN RR US 362 Changing the Lookof ihe User Matsa aca coe SR EN UPPER IO DOR EORR REUS eRe 363 Selecting Measurement LU mnils oie oriri UH b ti n EHI LH AER TEKA EE OA ER UR A 363 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 XX Moving Deleting or Copying G0BB sesso ces essausnssannedoncneesdevnsavtennsedentieeaadeavanennedelasneanaeess 363 Sending Faxes and Configuring OpenOffice org Tor Faxing cscccscasssiestssanassdstseserssviacieevnsosees 364 Creating a LAN Friendly Faxing Solution und
429. ot Letter Select the letter template you want to create Business letter C Personal letter Which layout do you prefer Modern C Classic C Decorative Help Cancel Next gt gt Create Treat this section as a tutorial on the OpenOffice org template Wizard Although the Wizard does produce a document that can immediately be filled in printed and sent using the Wizard is really meant to help create customized templates Customized templates for such things as business letters faxes and other types of documents for which there is a Wizard ensures that correspondence has a consistent format While one may there is no need to go through all the steps of the Wizard each time one wants to write a letter However in order to get the most from the following it is recommended that one accept all the defaults provided without changing them and then print the result Click Next on each dialogue page so that every page is seen at least once during the learning process Examine each of the Wizard pages while going through the process of creating a letter template Enter data or modify options on each page as necessary Each page allows modifications according to each user s preferences including sender and recipient addresses both of which can also be entered manually For example sender information is automatically taken from the personal details that each user enters at the time of installation These details may be change
430. ot change so OpenOffice org will automatically scale the view of the object if necessary When a graphic object 1s released directly on a drawing object the following rules apply 1 When dragging and dropping without pressing a key or while pressing the Ct x1 key a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer and the graphic object is inserted as an object on top of the existing object 2 When dragging and dropping while pressing the Shift and Ctr1 keys together a linking arrow is seen next to the mouse pointer and the existing drawing object is replaced by the object from the Gallery The position and size of the object that is replaced remains valid for the new graphic OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 141 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Adding Graphics To the Gallery via Drag and Drop Graphic objects can be added to the Gallery and thus have them conveniently available for use in any document 1 Select My Theme in the Gallery themes box or add a new via the New Theme button and select it 2 Press and hold the Ct r1 key while dragging and drop a graphic object from the document to the Gallery images box 3 Open the context menu of the new gallery image and select Title Enter a name for the image and press OK Add any themes to organize personal ready use images Inserting Graphics With a Scanner To carry out scanning in Writer a scanner with appropriate driver software must be installed on t
431. ot register true Cancel Help Reset 5 Enter Title Page and press the Enter key The properties of the new Page Styles can be changed later OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 71 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 6 In the context menu of the Styles and Formatting window click the New command again and define the Page Style with the name Table of contents 7 Repeat the whole procedure again for the new Main text Page Style Of course the names used here are only meant as examples In a real situation one would naturally enter the names of choice With the completion of the above steps there should now be three new Styles that have been created 1 Place the cursor on the first page of the document Double click the Title page entry in the Styles and Formatting window So now the first page is assigned this Page Style To confirm this one will see the name Title page in the Page Style field on the status bar below By the way users can also edit double click and assign existing Page Styles via the context menu of the Page Style field on the status bar If however one now scrolls through the pages of the document it may be noticed that the Title page Page Style has been applied to every page If all the pages had been defined by the Standard Page Style they are now all defined by the new Style Page Styles always apply to all preceding as well as following pages unless a page break occ
432. ow Help Tm Pic so docs user quide engine compe Ef a ug Gp bi Q amp xp EL W eack 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 co e v CN PE T m Ke T w Lx ce A N N T N ve C oo N m olmi K Engine Slide 2 Slide 3 Slide 4 g Dur ea p wh e SEES a v XHEHENEEE ae HH EREN EEE SeE att tt ELLE z B zier curve selected i 1 71 6 88 125x115 34 Add some more details OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 332 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw svi engine complete sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help Vaone sun so docs user quide engine comple 7 A g gt amp ome re Q o o 00 Bl Black 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 5 14 12 10 8 co T e N N N T N e N co C IK Engine Slide 2 Slide 3 Slide 4 B BE zo i e e ES me 00 MENHENEEE HS ie TT eet A 2 group objects selected 4 27 2 79 1279x363 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 333 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Complete the drawing engine_complete sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help ECTS so docs user qguide engine comple v ug gt E xv qx ET o 00 E MM Black 7 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 Engine Slide 2 Slide 3 Slide 4 amp v Es it a a OLET NEHENEEE ES HH HEN EEEN HE eet LEE Pe 3 2 64 8 43 2 0 00
433. ox enter amp Check Regular expressions Check Current selection only Click Replace All NDA Nn A Q Cells in the Currency Format p In Calc numbers can have any currency format Clicking the Currency icon in the object list formats the number and the cell is given the default currency format as set in OpenOffice org under Tools gt Options Language Settings gt Languages Without currency formats the international exchange of Calc documents could lead to misunderstandings For example an Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format Cell Attributes X Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language English USA vi Default 12 345 00 Options Decimal places 2 Iv Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 IV Thousands separator Format code 0s 409 0 00 REDI 16 4091 0 00 v ep x Cancel Help Reset OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 191 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc In Calc users can define a number formatted as 1 234 50 to remain in Euro dollars in another country and does not changed to the local currency Use the Cell Attributes dialogue to influence the currency format Choose Format gt Cells gt Numbers tab by two country settings In the Language li thousands separators In the st box select the basic setting for currency symbol decimal and Format list box
434. p Left guide 0 00cm H e IV AutoVertical Right guide o 00cm El v AutoHorizontal Measure below object Show meas units automatic Y IV Parallel to line 15 02 t To increase the space between a dimension line and the measured object move the mouse pointer to one of the points on the dimension line The mouse pointer will turn into another icon enabling either expansion or reduction of the space Note To obtain an absolutely horizontal or vertical dimension line or one at a 45 angle press the Shift key while dragging the dimension line OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 335 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Working With Multiple Layers The next step is to position the details in the motor drawing It is a good idea to use the layer function if testing several different variations TE To get a better overview turn on the Layer view by pressing the symbol on the bottom left border of the work area Alternatively choose View 7 Layer a check mark will appear in front of the command To insert a new layer open the dialogue Insert Layer It can also be opened through the context menu of the tabs Layout Controls and Dimension Lines arranged at the bottom of the screen Enter a unique name e g Sketch1 Repeat this procedure for another level and enter the name as Sketch2 Now click the Suggestion1 tab and place the details of this level for example by dragging the desired clipart fro
435. p image Also select any additional objects as necessary Pressing the Shift key for each selection or by open a frame around all objects to include say text with the bitmap image 2 Choose File gt Export to open the dialogue 3 In the File type field select the file format desired For example GIF JPEG et cetera 4 To only export the selected objects check the Selection box If Selection is not checked the entire page of the document is exported 5 Enter a name for the file 6 Click Save OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 308 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 309 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Working With colours The object bar has a list box from which to choose the colour for a selected object from a number of predefined colours The colour of the border line can be chosen independently of the colour of the filling The colour Bar If wanted or needed the colour bar can be displayed on the edge of a drawing or presentation The colour bar offers a choice of colours Selected objects can be coloured by simply clicking on a colour To display the colour bar select View gt Toolbars gt colour Bar The colour bar displays all predefined colours with their respective names in the same order as in the list box of the Object bar User defined colours appear at the end of the colour bar and the bottom of the list box RESNNEN NANAREN eee NN The field
436. path takes the AutoText list from the user work area When two AutoText lists from the different locations have the same name OpenOffice org uses the one from the user location Printing AutoTexts To print a list of all AutoTexts run the AutoText macro from the OpenOffice org Basic Gimmicks library This macro lists all AutoText names and shortcuts in a new text document 1 Select Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro 2 Double click OpenOffice org Macros and then double click Gimmicks in the expanded left hand list 3 Select AutoText in the newly expanded list 4 Click Run OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 85 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer AutoText With AutoComplete To enable AutoCompletion of selections in the AutoText dialogue check Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing A W AutoText x Insert Frederick Fexample Fexample Acme Ch Name Elegant with Name Shortcut ELE2 s n Gee Help Elegant with Name AE AutoTex w Elegant with Name without Slogan Ki Modern only Company i Modern with Name ee El Business Cards Work 3 v x 2 Path Elegant only Company eem Elegant with Name Elegant with Name without Slogan Iv Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing El Business Cards Work 3 2 x 2 1 4 Elegant only Compan
437. pect Be aware however that a user can turn design mode on and change the form If one is working on a form and wants it to open in design mode each time click the Open in Design Mode button on the Form Functions toolbar before saving the form OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 353 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources When a form linked to a data source has design mode turned off the database bar appears at the bottom of the form lt Office org doesn t have a mechanism to prevent users from changing forms to Design gt In Microsoft Office you can protect a form document and give it a password to prevent users from seeing inside OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 354 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Searching in Tables and Form Documents In spreadsheets and documents in which form functions are used one can click the Find Record icon to open a dialogue to find any text and values Use the icon at the bottom of the form bar not the similar looking icon on the main toolbar on the left Searches may be in all data records or in all data fields Select whether the text must be at the beginning end or any location of the data field The and wildcards can also be used as in the Find and Replace dialogue Additional information about the database search function can be found in Help Searching With a Form Filter 1 Open a form 2 Switch on the design mode For example open an empty text document and press
438. placed outside of the text margin on the side of the page c Text frames can be linked when text should flow from one frame to another Choose Format gt Paragraph gt Background to apply a background colour to the paragraph H Use the Draw Text function Open the Draw function toolbar on the Standard toolbar select the Text icon drag open a frame and enter the text This text can be positioned as desired which includes rotating at various angles or curving and slanting the text with the help of Format gt Object gt FontWork Changing the colour of Text Click the little down arrow of the Font colour icon in Writer and other modules to obtain a floating toolbar from which to choose a colour from the range of colours Alternatively long click the icon itself A Font colour icon Note the colour name is shown in the bar at the bottom When using a short click with no text selected the mouse pointer changes its appearance to a tilted paint can pouring paint Drag the hot spot of the mouse pointer across the target text area This text area now takes on the selected colour The function remains active for as long as the icon is active looks depressed or until simply clicking without dragging or until the Esc key is pressed Rotating Text Text can be rotated by entering it into a text frame as follows p Open the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar on the Standard toolbar T On the Draw Functions toolbar click on th
439. press Middle to Middle Connectors If a connector is selected from the Connectors floating toolbar and click in the middle of one of the frames a black dashed line border appears around the entire frame Press the mouse button and drag the connector into the middle of another frame which also receives a black border and release the mouse button The advantage of this method is that when the frames are moved later the connector fits perfectly so that the beginning and end of the connectors lie in the middle of each frame This function comes in handy in switching the position of two frames because the connectors need not be edited manually Editing Connectors To change the properties of a connector select it and click Connector in the context menu to open the Connector dialogue Connector X Type Standard Connector Line skew Cancel lne 1 000cm H Help inez H lineg H Line spacing Begin horizontal 050cm H Begin vertical 050cm H End horizontal 050cm H End vertical 050cm H Choose the desired connector type from the list box The Standard Connector is the default The user can also modify the line skew and the line spacing in this dialogue All changes will be shown in the small Preview window To apply a different colour to the connector open the Line dialogue with the context menu Hints and Tips for a Successful Presentation Using a Snap Grid To work with greater precision use the grid fun
440. programming WordPerfect Filters OpenOffice org 2 0 includes a WordPerfect filter developed by the open source community Developers are invited to contribute to this project OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 4 New Features with 2 x Calc now has 65 536 Rows OpenOffice org 1 1 x supported only 32 768 rows in spreadsheet documents which caused Microsoft Excel interoperability issues The new version now takes OpenOffice org to the same level as Microsoft Excel Enhanced DataPilot Support With the DataPilot in OpenOffice org 2 0 similar to Microsoft Excel s PivotTable feature it is now possible to create new groups filter data based on values show differences and percentages instead of absolute values etc The new DataPilot features turn OpenOffice org Calc into a very powerful tool for data analysis Native Installers OpenOffice org 2 0 supports the native installation mechanisms For example MSI and CAB files are provided on Microsoft Windows RPM and deb files are available for Linux For users with more sophisticated management requirements Sun provides configuration management tools as part of the StarOffice software StarOffice 8 will also introduce Macro migration tools Native Desktop Integration OpenOffice org 2 0 integrates nicely into the desktop environment Thus OpenOffice org looks and behaves like any other application on a given platform On Windows XP it looks like a Windows application and
441. pter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org Sending Faxes and Configuring OpenOffice org for Faxing To send a fax directly from OpenOffice org both a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem must be installed as they would with a printer Creating a LAN Friendly Faxing Solution under Linux 1 Install fax software such as mgetty or sendfax Don t forget to run faxrunq asa cron job Test by sending a postscript file to someone Install fax4CUPS assuming CUPS is the printer control software If not consider it Make a printer in CUPS following the ax4CUPS instructions which points to nget t y a A vc N Test by sending a postscript file to someone as a non root user with lpr P printername o phone faxnumber filename if it doesn t work try it as root If that works try changing the permissions on the cups spool directory 6 test the same 1pr command from another machine on the LAN This should work if CUPS browsing is enabled 7 find and run spadmin as root a Create a new fax type printer Current versions of OpenOffice org may not allow reconfiguring the printer properties as a OpenOffice org fax device in that case just use a different printer name b Use the command lpr P printername o phone PHONE c do the test page in spadmin A fax number prompt should pop up 8 try printing to the fax printer in Writer should work 9 info about making a fax too
442. r Tips for Working with Footnotes 1 Click in the text of a footnote to allow editing or modification 2 Press PgUp to jump from the footnote area to the footnote anchor in the text Place the cursor in a document immediately before the footnote character of a previously inserted footnote to edit its properties and choose Edit gt Footnote or double click immediately before the footnote character When defining general settings applied automatically to footnotes in the document select Tools gt Footnotes to open the Footnote Settings dialogue 1 Format footnotes with Page Setup by choosing Format gt Page gt Footnote In multicolumn pages the footnote is inserted in the column where the footnote anchor is located Users can also use the mouse to jump from the footnote anchor to the footnote The mouse pointer changes its appearance as soon as it is over the footnote anchor Spacing Between Footnotes If a bigger distance between the different footnotes or endnotes is wanted one can add an invisible white line as the lower border to the corresponding paragraph format Set the cursor in a footnote Open the Styles and Formatting window Click on the footnote Paragraph Style to be modified Open the context menu Select Modify QN nA A UU Ne On the Borders tab page select a top and a bottom line and give them both the colour white J In the Spacing to contents area uncheck Synchronize 8 In
443. r down Home Go to the beginning of the current line Go to the beginning of the document Home In a table Go to the beginning of the current cell 1 Go to the beginning of the current cell 2 Go to the beginning of the table 3 Go to the beginning of the document End Go to the end of the current row Go to the end of the document End In a table Go to the end of the current cell 1 Go to the end of the current cell 2 Go to the end of the table 3 Go to the end of the document PgUp Scroll one page up the screen Switch to the header and back PgDn Scroll one page down the screen Switch to the footer and back Inserting Special Characters This is how to insert special characters such as check marks boxes telephone symbols etc in text Select Insert gt Special Characters to view the selection of characters available In the large selection field select the desired character or more than one by clicking with the mouse or by navigating by keyboard in succession The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialogue box Upon closing the dialogue with OK all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document at the cursor If a special character is required in any text input field such as in the URL field of the function bar or in the input fields in the Find amp Replace dialogue press Shift Ctr1 s to pop up the Special Characters dialogue OpenOffice org User Guid
444. r that if it were the computer would use all its resources updating the sheet When spreadsheets contain a very large amount of data or very complicated formulae that may be modified before viewing the calculation results it may be prudent to cancel or disable the automatic calculation function Calculation time naturally becomes longer as the complexity and size of a spreadsheet increases Inserting and Editing Notes A note may be assigned to each cell by choosing Insert gt Note All notes are indicated by a small red square the note indicator in the cell Notes made visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell provided Help gt Tips or Extended Tips is active Fora selected cell choose Show Note from the context menu of the cell Doing so keeps the note visible until the Show Note command is deactivated from the context menu To edit a permanently visible note just click in it When the entire text of the note is deleted then the note itself is deleted Another way to delete a note is by choosing Edit gt Delete Contents or calling the same dialogue with the Delete key Select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc View to show or hide the note indicator by checking or unchecking the Note indicator box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 195 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Handling Multiple Sheets Spreadsheet are not limited to just one sheet In fact several sheets laid on top of each other Ea
445. r Ra QURE Pr RR EUR eui S AUI RA 242 formulae and Val es s CSV MIC TETTE QE TOTO 243 Exporting formulae and Val s as CSV Fil S see eerta ri sva ric iais 243 i i ea a CSV Pileri TTE LS 243 PTET E E E 245 Applying Sort Arai osito ar CRI oireita ro Eo RM sees ens ap mee OM aa eo 245 Automate Row PH au oscura el ni RR MO aonb aula acta e e EREE 245 Protecting E220 soda eom RR ROREM BRI NDA UM UR DE eee 246 Creatine a BETOISDER d epi aiias po be Pie dbrd RUN Urn EEEE Cab ba rau e RUP a RA 247 Further Ti etn senso cosa ay ana panacea UNTERE REN MEE 247 Bi S Ioco m Febr osi Quaternus BS rade XV MO ECRANS DUE QU Lg 248 Inserting ashect mito another CODICE out e Mes ULP AR RSS REI ern neem E 248 Displaying TT ae osos vite eb nocasiavieh Gra i occ SRI TURN UA RR Ret RR coU DR Nd Rb A 248 Usine pint ranges NOTTE Oe T T OPEP 248 Be C OTURDOS css pud mas conta ctia d inne EN 248 Splitin a Cale VECTOR eos EAD URP DAE O NNNM Nae T AS M MON DM NNI ME 248 Conditional Forbes D ERR RU en DUIS Unt d HN UR RR RO ee A RA EUR ire TN UAR Rob 248 SENE SEINE oro caren age OD UR RUIN Mad NIMM DS 250 Creatine Thou Helpers en nsa vd Qua RV EEEE 250 Isp Sheet Inf op NOR iasta a pH ee ck ema ve usando MY M aeRO aA 251 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress eremi aede Edd bas 252 OpenOffice org Impress Toolbars and Windosys S s iier retorno mieten entrare 253 Howdo Create a Basic Prosonbafioli us omo rm teret aes Viet d Ge nn ANE AE a Ep 254
446. r of a number Example 2 POW 8 displays 256 00 Operators Various operators may be inserted in a formula Choose from the following functions OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 126 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer List Separates the elements in a list Separator Example of using a list MIN 10 20 50 C6 A2 B6 20 Equal EQ or Checks if selected values are equal If they are unequal the result is zero otherwise 1 true appears Example A1 EQ 2 displays 1 if the content of A1 equals 2 Not Equal NEQ Tests for inequality between selected values or Example A1 NEQ 2 displays 0 wrong if the content of Al equals 2 Less than or LEQ Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value Equal Example A1 LEQ 2 displays 1 true if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2 Greater than GEQ Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value or Equal Example A1 GEQ 2 displays 1 true if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2 Less L Tests for values less than a specified value Example A1 L 2 displays 1 true if the content of A1 is less than 2 Greater G Tests for values greater than a specified value Example A1 G 2 displays 1 true if the content of A1 is greater than 2 Boolean Or OR Tests for values matching the Boolean OR Example 0 OR 0 displays 0 false any
447. r shows a plus sign when copying and an arrow when making a link or hyperlink Mouse Pointer Shape 3 Moving t Copying x Creating a link Pressing Ctrl or Shift Ctr1 when releasing the mouse button usually influences whether the item is copied moved or a link is created Drag objects out of the Navigator in the submenu of the Drag Mode icon specify whether to copy the object insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink Drag and drop operations in OpenOffice org can be cancelled at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button Inserting Objects From the Gallery Objects can be inserted in a document as either a copy or as a link A copy of an object is independent of the original object Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy Links on the other hand remain dependent on the original object thus changes to the original object are also reflected in the link Inserting an object as a copy 1 Open the Gallery 2 Choose a theme from the left area 3 Select the object by a single click OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 366 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques 4 Drag the object into the document or right click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy Inserting an object as a link 1 Open the Gallery Choose a theme from the left area 2 3 Select the object by a single click 4 Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and Ctr1 keys or ri
448. r to the right of the cursor press the Delete key may be labelled Del Deleting text Selecting text to delete with the mouse 1 Left click to set the cursor on the first character to be deleted 2 Keeping the mouse button depressed drag the pointer to the last character to be deleted The characters will be highlighted 3 Release the mouse button 4 Press the Delete key to delete the selected text Selecting text to delete with the keyboard Use the arrow keys to go to the first character to be deleted Hold down the Shift key Using the arrow keys move the cursor to just after the last character to be deleted Release the Shift key The text is highlighted A A U N Press the Delete key to delete the selected text Note To put the selected text into the clipboard for use later or to put elsewhere in the document press Ctr1 X rather than Delete This cuts out the text and places it on the clipboard To paste it back in wherever and as often as desired press Ctr 14V when the cursor is set to the correct location Deleting non adjacent pieces of text 1 Press Ct r1 and keep it pressed 2 Left click to set the cursor at the first character of the first piece of text to be deleted 3 Press the left mouse button and drag the pointer to the last character of the text to be deleted 4 Release the mouse button and the Ct r1 key 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each piece of text to be de
449. r where the reminder is to be set 2 Click the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator The reminder will not be visible in the document 3 When jumping to a reminder select the Reminder entry in the Navigation window and one can now move through the reminders by clicking the Previous and Next arrows Jumping to a Specific Page Moving quickly to particular pages in long documents is easy even if the Navigator is not opened or docked Double click the current page number on the Status bar and the Navigator window switches between open and closed Enter the number of the target page number into the spin button at the top of the Navigator panel After a short delay the page is automatically displayed Press Enter and the cursor is automatically placed at the top of that page A keyboard shortcut Ctrl1 Shift F5 places the cursor in the Navigator page spin button If the Navigator is inactive it is opened first OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 98 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Chapters in Navigator In long documents use the Navigator to obtain an overview and change the sequence of chapters or their level in the hierarchy of chapters and sub chapters The only condition is that Heading Paragraph Styles must be applied to the chapter headings or choose the Paragraph Styles which will be recognised as headings under Tools gt Outline Numbering Drag and drop to change the sequence of chapters Users can also
450. racter depends on the font used Users can view the codes by choosing Insert Special Character a Finds the search terms that occur before and after the For example this that finds both this and that in the search 2 Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs For example tre 2 finds tree 1 2 Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur For example tre 1 2 finds both tree and treated Defines the characters inside the brackets as a reference One can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with 1 to the second reference with 2 and so on For example if the text contains the number 13487889 and one searches using the regular expression 8 7 1 1 8788 is found digit Finds a single digit number To find a number with more than one digit use digit g Finds all characters except for a s j Finds white space such as spaces and tabs Finds printable characters Finds alphanumeric characters numbers and text characters alpha Finds alphabetic characters Finds lowercase characters if Match case is selected in the Options area Finds nonprinting characters upper Finds uppercase characters if Match case is selected in the Options area Note The longest possible text within the paragraph is always found If the paragraph contains the text AX4 A4 the search t
451. ram See http www softwareag com adabasd JDBC Link to databases contacted via a JDBC driver ODBC Link to databases contacted via an ODBC driver dBase files can be edited directly with the driver for direct access in the file OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 337 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources Database type Meaning system ADO Link to databases contacted via the ADO driver Text Register text files such as comma separated CSV files read only Spreadsheet One can register OpenOffice org Calc and MS Excel spreadsheets read only Address Book This address book driver allows the user to register the system address book or another address book source read only It also ensures that data fields are correctly assigned to the templates provided with OpenOffice org in form letters for example How to register a new data source of a particular database type is explained in Help Use the data source icon on the Main Toolbar or select View gt Data Sources to view and if necessary edit the data sources via spreadsheets and queries At the upper edge is a window which can be shown or hidden moved around and or docked to another edge In the Data Sources view on the left is the Data Sources Explorer and on the right the table view maltese T a jolar de X S G 6 m mw El amp Bibliography Author m jh ticks arst Sautter Ka ER weris 5 Karst S2etoerge B
452. raphic always appears correctly in the subdocument According to the closing entry on issue 50669 this is expected behaviour To quote OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 117 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer It s a limitation of the OpenOffice org master document concept It is not possible to use reference to a certain page defined in a subdocument because the master document reorganizes the page flow page number and references to collate all documents together This way the absolute reference to a page X ina sub doc is lost in the master doc The graphic loses its anchor reference and simply disappears WORKAROUND To avoid this problem do the following a Set the anchor to To Character or To Paragraph and b Choose suitable horizontal and vertical references to the page in the properties dialogue under Type gt Position OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 118 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Importing Lists From Other Text Programs Word processors internally organize bulleted and numbered lists in a unique manner such as using special fonts or graphics that may not be available in OpenOffice org So should OpenOffice org import foreign text and present this information incorrectly use the following steps to overcome these import problems 1 Import the document from the other application File gt Open and then the Files of type list box Where bullets are not applied correctly us
453. rations The selected range is now defined as a database range which among other things means that the rows records can be conveniently sorted Any sort lists and filters that have been defined for the database range will also be updated Sorting Database Ranges Select a range of cells and define these as a database range by choosing Data gt Define Range Set the cursor in the database range and choose Data gt Sort In the dialogue that appears select the column to be sorted fro example Amount as the sort criterion and click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 217 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Sort Criteria Options Sort by Ascending C Descending Then by Ascending undefined m C Descending Then by c Ascending undefined Descending Cancel Help Reset Up to two additional criteria can be specified one to follow the other for the sort function For instance sort the expenditures first by date then by item if they have the same date and then by amount if they have the same date and item Filtering Database Ranges To filter out only certain records so that they can be modified use the spreadsheet filtering function Choose between using a dialogue to specify the criteria exactly in that case range definitions are also possible or creating an AutoFilter that will help filter according to specific values or text Imagine that the output list is already 80
454. reate a presentation document As with text documents there are various ways to start creating a presentation Open the Wizard Presentation by choosing File gt Wizards gt Presentation The Wizard starts automatically each time a new presentation is created If desired switch off the automatic mode on the first page of the Wizard The Wizard is described in detail in the Help By turning off the Wizard in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt General a new empty document for example by choosing File gt New gt Presentation is opened Alternatively open an existing presentation document that is modified and saved under a different name Or use one of the many templates available in the Templates and Documents dialogue Pressing Shift Ctr1 N opens this dialogue or use File gt New gt Templates and Documents For more information on the various dialogues used here refer to Help Creating a Presentation With the Wizard 1 Choose File gt New gt Presentation OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 254 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress wi AutoPilot Presentation New Product Intoduction Type Empty presentation From template A New Product h troduction C Open existing presentation Default z CD labels Neato CD labels Verbatim New Product Intoduction Iv Preview Do not show this dialog again Help Cancel Back wes Create The Wizard Presentation op
455. rect suggested spelling to replace the red underlined word Spellcheck not only replaces the red underlined word with the suggestion selected it also remembers this replacement while the document is open If the same typing error is made again Spellcheck automatically replaces the mistyped word with the corrected spelling If the word is spelled correctly it may be added to a dictionary by clicking Add and specifying to which dictionary it is to be added To ignore a correctly spelled but infrequently used word click Ignore All Checking Multilingual Texts OpenOffice org Writer can manage spellcheck plus thesaurus and hyphenation in multiple languages 33 at the time of writing The OpenOffice org setup program offers this via Custom Installation and after installation via the Modify option in setup where one can choose which language modules to install Select the language of an entire text document with Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages If it applies to the user s needs check For the current document only For all paragraphs formatted with the same Paragraph Style apply a language via the Paragraph Style A language can be defined for individual words via Character Styles or directly with Format gt Character OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 30 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org In Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids check the option Check in All Languages Now Spel
456. riable The first step in the process is defining a variable for the condition statement Type Reminder in the document and then add space 1 Select Insert gt Fields gt Other Click the Variables tab Click Set variable in the Type list Type a name for the variable in the Name box for example Reminder a A W N Click Text in the Format list OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 130 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 6 Enter 1 in the Value box fe Click Insert To display integers click the 1234 format Defining a condition and the conditional text The second step in the process is to define the condition that must be met the text to be displayed when the condition is met or not met and to insert the place holder for displaying the conditional text in the document 1 2 Choose Insert Fields gt Other 3 Click the Functions tab 4 5 Type Reminder EQ 3 in the Condition box In other words the conditional text will Place the cursor where the conditional text is to be inserted in the text Click Conditional text in the Type list be displayed when the variable in the field that was defined in the first part of this example is equal to three The quotation marks enclosing the number 3 indicate that the variable defined in the first part of this example is a text string See above for a list of operators that can be used when defining a
457. ribed later It is easy to change the position of the toolbars For example if the position of the main toolbar should be on the right edge of the document instead of on the left simply drag the knurled handle at the far left in the toolbar to a new location around the edge of the main window Note under Windows one only needs to use Alt Some icons have small triangles to indicate that there are more functions available These are called floating toolbars When a long click is applied to these icons a new window opens giving access to all those features associated with that icon Short clicks deliver different behaviour than a long click but give the same functionality OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 12 Examples of Floating Toolbars Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org SETUP_GUIDE_draft odt OpenOffice org Write File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help r 990 0399 9 9 Tels ot BEDA MAS Lu Aa B iri wes 4 8 12 16 20 84 80 76 72 68 64 60 56 52 48 44 40 36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4 iJ Derun gt Times NewRoman v 2 v B 7 U M A E s m A ace ew A e cmuHcl z BSR Fa x 5 amp e e 68 4 ae sva o amp L IL HL JeL rl Joissssu L5E m oes BRE ie h mecTHuewo Q e tn O x
458. rmulae in Text Documents Pressing F2 opens the Formula bar Clicking the formula icon in the formula bar opens a submenu from which one can insert a formula The formula appears in the input line at the current cursor position To specify a range of cells in a table select the desired cells with the mouse The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line Enter additional parameters as necessary and click Apply to confirm the entry A formula can also be entered directly if the appropriate syntax is known This is necessary for example in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogues Note The SUM function is only valid in formulae within a table cell Formula Options Basic Calculation Functions Addition Calculates the total Example lt A1 gt 8 Subtraction Calculates the difference Example 10 B5 Multiplication MUL or Calculates the product Example 7 MUL 9 Division DIV or Calculates the quotient Example 100 DIV 15 Basic Functions in the Submenu Sum SUM Calculates the sum of the selected cells Example SUM lt A2 C2 gt displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 Round ROUND Rounds a number to the specified decimal places Example 15 678 ROUND 2 displays 15 68 Percent PHD Calculates a percentage Example 10 15 PHD displays 10 15 Square Root SORT Calculates the square root Example SORT 25 displays 5 00 Power POW Calculates the powe
459. ropriate to the toolbar because toolbars may be placed side by side OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 15 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org Opening and Saving Documents There are multiple methods of loading or opening documents For example by using the File gt Open dialogue the Open icon on the Function Bar or the File gt New menu NOTE Under Windows a system dialogue is automatically displayed when opening and saving OpenOffice org documents Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General and check Use OpenOffice org dialogues This enables a user to be presented with the OpenOffice org dialogues shown in this guide Opening Documents To open an existing document that was saved on the hard drive or on a removable disk there are three possibilities Either choose File gt Open click the Open File icon on the function bar or use the Ct r1 0 shortcut keys Is each case the Open dialogue is displayed Open x a home sun so docs user quide ppm ug 000 ppm PPM File 05 06 2004 13 52 54 A ug 001 ppm PPM File 714 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 3 ug 002 ppm PPM File 1377 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 ug 003 ppm PPM File 3016 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 ug 004 ppm PPM File 4744 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 ug 005 ppm PPM File 1398 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 A ug 006 ppm PPM File 1482 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 A ug 007 ppm PPM File 3016 Bytes 05 06 2004 13 52 54 ua 008 ppm
460. rrounds the circle The delimiting rectangle will later be obvious from the eight handles that appear when selecting the circle To draw the circle such that the first click defines the centre press the Alt key while dragging the mouse 3 Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the desired size Now notice that a radius which follows the movement of the mouse is drawn in the circle 4 Position the radius at the point where it is wanted so as to place one boundary of the sector and click once 5 Now when moving the mouse notice that the first radius is set and a second radius follows the movement of the mouse Click again to complete the circle pie Drawing ellipses is done in a similar fashion The dimensions of the delimiting rectangle formed when first drawing the shape determines the dimensions of the ellipse When drawing a segment proceed in exactly the same manner as described above for sectors The only difference is that in the last step no second radius follows the movement of the mouse but rather a secant straight line cuts through the circle 6069600 eulomescetc The other icons in the Ellipse floating toolbar can be used to draw ellipses and arcs This process also functions as described above although only the perimeter of the ellipse or the circle is drawn OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 291 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Entering Text To enter a text in a drawing
461. rt or with the chart selected choose the individual functions from the Format menu For example double clicking on the colour preview in the legend automatically reformats all relevant data points On the other hand clicking on the background in the box of the legend formats the background to the legend If the chart was created from the data of a Calc spreadsheet clicking on the data series in the chart becomes highlighted p Suppose there s an Calc spreadsheet in the background and now it needs to be rd selected for further editing Open the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar mcm and select the first tool the Select arrow This allows the chart to be selected by ls clicking In a Calc chart a data series can be forwards or backwards A series can be arranged in such a way that the lowest 3D representations are as far forward as possible and the higher ones further back To change the arrangement in the chart use the appropriate command from the context menu of a data series or choose Format gt Order The output data in the Calc spreadsheet will not be rearranged Note When a chart is inserted in a presentation or drawing document with the Insert gt Insert Chart floating toolbar it is displayed with a set of sample data To insert a chart in a spreadsheet highlight the cells in the spreadsheet whose values should be displayed in the chart In Writer documents too charts can be inserted that are obtained from the data of a Writ
462. ry dialogue This opens a dialogue in which to enter a name for the index This name later appears as the title of the index The title of an index can be changed without the content of the index changing OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 100 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries All defined index entries are shaded gray in the document for easy recognition but which is never be printed If display of the shaded entries on screen is unwanted switch the highlighting on or off using View gt Field Shadings Insert Index Entry X Selection r Index Alphabetical Index Close Entry e ist key Help ZAd Key M Main entry Apply to all similar texts J Watch case E hoe words ony 1 To edit an entry place the cursor immediately before or inside it 2 Then choose Edit gt Index Entry 3 Alter the text in the Entry text box as needed 4 Click on the Delete button to delete this entry from the list If the displayed text of the entry is modified the altered text is inserted into the generated index Only a thin gray mark in the document remains where the entry was To edit an entry such as this place the cursor directly after the thin mark and choose Edit gt Index Entry Use the arrow buttons in the Edit gt Index Entry dialogue to switch to the next or previous entry of the same index type OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0
463. s Create a user dictionary by selecting Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 29 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org bg MOP HONE Language Settings z Writing Aid s ciant El OpenOffice org Writing aids User Data General Available language modules NY fd OpenOffice org MySpell SpellChecker Edit M ALTLinux LibHnj Hyphenator Print External Programs Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Load Save Language Settings Languages Searching in Japar Asian Layout Complex Text Layi Internet Text Document HTML Document Spreadsheet Iv OpenOffice org Thesaurus User defined dictionaries D El Check uppercase words Check words with numbers lv Check capitalization Iv Check special regions a Check in all languages IH AA LE of Cancel Help Back As text is proofread the wavy red underlines draw attention to possible spelling mistakes Of course Spellcheck will not catch spelling mistakes that form other recognizable words such as fun instead of run As long as the automatic spellcheck is activated the red markings can be seen on the screen but are not printed The easiest way to correct a red underlined word is to right click it This opens a context menu that offers suggested corrected spellings and options to add the word to the dictionary or to ignore it Simply click the cor
464. s Order Determines the position of the control in the tab order Character set Specifies the font characteristics for the control Default value Specifies the initial value displayed in the control Background Specifies the background colour for the control colour Specifies the tooltip for the control Individual controls have additional properties related to their purpose For example a Check Box has a Default Status property that determines whether it s initially checked and a Text Box has a MultiLine input property that determines whether one can put multiple lines of text into the control Some controls need certain properties specified in order to be useful In some cases wizards are available to help the user specify the necessary information The next few sections consider some of those controls Creating a group of option buttons Option buttons also known as radio buttons let users choose one item from among a mutually exclusive group There are a couple of ways to set up a group of option buttons but the easiest is to make sure the wizards On Off button on the Form Functions toolbar is on When it s on it has a thin border around it Next put a Group Box on the form When one does so the wizard Group Element appears to guide creation of an option group On the first page specify the options to appear in the group For each type it in and then press Enter or click the gt gt button When all the items have b
465. s such as PDF are also available in the same manner as for Writer or the other OpenOffice org modules Referencing Data in Networks and the Internet Rather than being restricted to having only a fixed value or formula that refers to other cells in the sheet each Calc cell can also contain a reference to contents in other documents The documents referred to do not have to exist on the local computer they can also be stored on a network or anywhere in the Internet OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 181 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The Calc Window Untitled OpenOffice org LLZ File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help BEIE eo 2 Agl 9 96 t xa a E mS if E teal La ee ae Pati I El F H I SES K A Background qM Navigator No Fill Column A H wk BEES y an NE row p g Eare EEH COMBS 8 EES HE faa Range names m BEERS Gi Database Ranges BHZNH P Linked areas Y coser ee e EES oo Graphics so A2 Crows El Sen OLE objects EHHE Notes 14 GY Drawing objects mas Seinrawrunaiens x No Fill j jh vv 16 NE TEETAR TEE ETS Untitled1 active e es W Form Functions X z 20 El 2 4 C ax EI E 8 g OD oo mw ts FB ES sls nis 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 All Styles T 31 32 33 34 35 36 7 Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 ri Sheet 1 3 Default 10096 STD Sum 0 Structure of a Spreadsheet A spreadsh
466. s 329 saving automatically serere 2l uyinoBBE aeo deett ui cr diste odi ott 148 sending as e mall niic eee teo regt teet 25 positioning ecetettttt nn 147 148 369 styles changed sssseee 67 74 86 rectangles and ellipses ssse 318 324 version management esses 420 421 TOTAN E wees SE SS E AN 57 Word COUNT arriaren eneen oine anen taen CERES MER UNE EE eor ae 4 sectors and E QNI 324 dotted ALeaS ccccccccccessessssseecececeeesesseeees 230 288 352 SIZES iterato re Ep ie A 321 drag and drop oss RU RENE 325 cancelling eese eerte 415 Using Dimension Lines 375 chapters esses eene nnne iniiis 107 Using Snap Lines 375 copying a slide 286 vector graphics 296 300 315 318 328 331 COPY IE dM ANS draw iere iit the peste ee ete RR from Gallery to draw objects sssss 151 Drawing Lines seeeeet n nen tentis 100 SEYIES M Y 86 drawing toolbar een 56 TEX DITAIIOS aereto cesses u eue U Ne ERES 95 R n CPA WINES MEE visible CELIS 0 cecccececccecceececececececececececececeseceeeescs 221 pec PPM 48 315 PAW ODI ECS i em Mechanical or Construction eese sess 370 ANCHO p C X EE ERE S 147 pinting in blank and white ces 28 ee AE E S N E T e Vectorizing Bitmaps es 331 s l
467. s case the table names serve as table identifiers Here s how 1 Enter numbers into cells Al of Tablel and A1 of Table2 2 Position the cursor in cell A2 of Tab1e2 3 Press F2 to bring up the Formula bar It already starts with an ready for the user to type a formula 4 Click on cell Al of Tab1e1 OpenOffice org will insert the cell reference lt Tablel A1 gt into the formula bar 5 The formula bar is still waiting for the user to continue entering the formula so now type the multiply operator 6 Click on cell A1 in Table2 OpenOffice org will insert the cell reference A1 into the formula bar with no user action Note that this time the reference does not need the table identifier 7 Press Enter now to complete the formula and the product is presented in Tab1e2 cell A2 1 Note With the help of the Navigation Bar one can navigate quickly and easily between the table formulae in the document If a table formula refers to an invalid table cell a Faulty expression is displayed in the cell Invalid table cells are either deleted cells or those which are themselves faulty It is only possible to refer to table cell values from within tables One trick to inserting a table calculation result within text is demonstrated by this next example To add cells B1 B10 from Tablel and present the sumina line of text Create the text and Tablel 1 Place the cursor in the text where the sum is to appear 2 I
468. s defined called a default template file This template is always used as the default when for example create a new usually empty document with File gt New Nearly every document type has its own template Lists of the different templates for text documents can be found in the OpenOffice org Help about text documents as can those that that apply to drawings presentations and spreadsheets Copying Styles Between Templates and Documents By selecting File gt Templates gt Organizer the following dialogue appears Use this dialogue to copy the Styles contained in a particular template or in a particular document individually to another document Double clicking the name of a folder in the left window expands to list all the templates contained in that folder Double clicking one of these Template Management x E AutoText BW Circuit Boardi E Untitled E Untitled2 Commands v Help C3 Default 9 Business Correspondence 3 Education 3 Finances EJ Forms and Contracts EJ Miscellaneous 3 Other Business documents 9 Personal Correspondence And D CJ Presentation Backgrounds CJ Presentations Address Book Templates i Documents File files causes the category Styles to appear Once again double click to expand the list of the styles contained in the template document But in the case of a document one only sees the Styles that are actually used in that document When drag
469. s permit reasonable differentiation when searching though a lot of files of different file types in a directory Since these are compressed XML files it should be evident that these must first be unpacked before being manipulated for example by a text editor Note If a user wants to work permanently with another file format define this as the default Select Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General for alternative file formats that can be selected for each OpenOffice org document type OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 21 Chapter 2 Working With OpenOffice org OpenOffice org XML file structure The OpenOffice org XML file formats follow the OASIS OpenDocument standard and are compressed and packed using ZIP Use an unpacking program such as WinZip on Windows or unzip on NIX to unpack the contents of an XML file The structure is similar to the following illustration Archive example odt Length Method Size Ratio Date Time CRC 32 Name 30 Stored 30 0 00 15 05 05 15 25 3931a5el mimetype 4260 Stored 4260 0 00 15 05 05 15 25 al0af03b Pictures 100010DA222DD884 gif 9022 Defl N 2147 76 00 15 05 05 15 25 cd8d5105 content xml 2447 Defl N 954 61 00 15 05 05 15 25 08c57cab Basic wizard Create xml 1586 Defl N 642 60 00 15 05 05 15 25 55c931dc Basic wizard Save xml 389 Defl N 223 43 00 15 05 05 15 25 75648953 Basic wizard script lb xml 287 Defl N 193 33 00 15 05 05 15 25 528021b8 Basic Standard script lb xml 405 Defl
470. s to open a dialogue with several tabs that help design the look of business cards These are generally fairly simple which may or may not be what is wanted OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 159 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Designing Labels and Business Cards Using File gt New gt Labels for designing business cards as business cards may be regarded as a simplified special kind of label is often the best method Like labels all business cards are the same and as labels can be filled with different contents graphics data obtained from a database or they can be marked with serial numbers 1 Select File gt New gt Labels to open the Labels dialogue 2 On the Labels tab under Format define the label format Writer contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels badges business cards etc User defined formats can also be added 3 On the Labels tab under Inscription choose what to write on the labels This often involves database fields so that the labels can be printed with varying content when sending Form Letters for example But it is equally possible to have the same text printed on every label Use the pull down lists to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained Click on the big arrow to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area Press Enter to insert a line break Entering spaces and any other fixed text is also possible
471. s will look when displayed Select Tools gt Bibliography Database to open the bibliography database Examine the columns and find one labelled Type then use different entries for magazine articles than for entries concerning books For this reason the bibliography database is divided into different types of sources of literature A new record can be inserted in the Insert Bibliography Entry by clicking the New button but these ad hoc records will be saved only in the current document not in the Bibliography Database and then only if the relevant new entry is actually inserted Note When saving a document with bibliography entries all information belonging to the entries will automatically be saved in a hidden field In this way all data will be included when the document is distributed for example on a disk It does not matter whether the bibliography was created in the document or not 1 To insert the bibliography entries into the text position the cursor in the text where the entry is to appear and then choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Bibliography Entry The following dialogue will appear OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 105 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Insert Bibliography Entry X Entry From bibliography database C From document content Author Sautter Karlheinz Title Der bhv Coach Star Office 5 0 Short name sauss 2 First decide whether to select the
472. s with Draw 2 Draw further rectangles These can be overlaid with the existing rectangles 3 Click the Ellipse icon Wf and draw a few ellipses Also try drawing a few 3D objects as shown in the illustration Several examples are available in the 3D three dimension theme in the Gallery 4 Click each of the objects and modify the fill colour line colour and the line width using the list boxes and icons on the object bar umy_draw sxd OpenOffice org 1 1 2 Bx File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help a home sun so docs user guide my drawsxd 7 EZ A o OS X4 BE D gt t A m Klas v joo HE sack 2 foor 7 ES rea J a 4 SE iv B c5 e a Ww Ellipses x lg eeeee R GIOCO B my e x g g ag d Slide 1 l of E P im H Joje se DA xt y Gl ERO GE v 2 KNENEENENHEES ENTEN NAAN eT TT CSESNNEHENHES ONU EH DRE H BH BES Ellipse Segment selected 3 5 18 0 84 15 1 53 x 1 55 47 Slide1 1 Default Note Clicking once on any tool makes the tool available for only one single task Double click the icon to allow it to remain active until another tool is chosen Defaults such as blue as the filling colour can be changed Make sure that no object is selected and choose a different colour on the object bar as the new default OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 288 Chapt
473. seasiir rrvrert air o eri e tea I pH Epi ar dva 304 Combining Objects aad Construetiri SAE iic uud scite mer seisi E 305 Lb 909 ack sae ec wera ds pium mera de ad SOR UEM vU DI MU QUIS TE 305 Constructing Img ione deter da ira aei or ad d va S Ru E dE ER RA UR 305 Shapes Me SNNT TET TO TT LEO 306 Shapes SUBMAC bod vai yan tn paved lt se ea pea apa Dundee abu neuer Ru lt 306 Graphic Objects an Drawings and Presentations cipe po CHEER URP totam vere eta 307 Dea DUINDHDS iro pep RU shauna a e OR ECC EEA deka neem Hu OD aO nn GO aEE 307 BOB Fe Locis Seven eo eiere Patti Mw Men MN qd main DM IMEEM 307 Applying Text to BMApS ssec eg ER ERRRAM nd rE E aE NSE EEEE NEEE 307 Savine BIAD eh ere acess ee came Ne NE hp ttam ATENE Ra EE EE E E 308 Working Wuth COTOUEE o ee a od RR d OR eden RR EEE du eR Ulp la a end d 310 The colour Bane ee eee ea MEE Oc ee 310 Definimi Costi ODDS sssini ionen een FIDE GER a EHE Eras Oaai ia tee 311 Replacing colours using the OS 11108 0 6 Ae ne oe ne ere ene ene NE EENEN Evam S 313 Gradients and Patterns for Objects and Backeround eerte ettet ntn 315 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xviii AP AE eR GMT Tm 315 Definim a esto colai IAT iei roro esa end eed daria ebhtkabid did ew dui ele 315 nt ractively Defining a colour Gradient asco eae hd e POP ere ee rete are Sey s ee 316 Orgamzing the Attribute Tables sses eniin ratto RR a Fb YN E S FU Reo RR RARO RB AA 317 SIDE O n oe ceperunt du a
474. selected at once use the Distribution command In Impress this command can be found in the context menu while in Draw it is found as an option in the Modify menu The selected objects are distributed so that their borders or midpoints are the same distance apart The two objects that are the horizontally or vertically farthest apart from each other are fixed points 1 e immovable The other objects between the outermost objects can be moved using this function Note Remember that everywhere in OpenOffice org a multi level undo function is available Activate this function by clicking the Undo icon on the function bar or by pressing Ctr1 4Z Each time this command is used it reverses a previous action OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 290 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Drawing Sectors and Segments The Ellipse floating toolbar contains several icons for drawing sectors and segments Sectors look like perfectly cut pieces of pie Segments look like halves of a pie Drawing sectors of an ellipse or circle requires multiple steps though the process functions intuitively 1 Open the Ellipse floating toolbar and click on the Circle Pie icon The pointer changes to a cross hair symbol accompanied by a small sector symbol 2 Use the mouse to drag open the shape of a circle The outline of a circle follows the movement of the mouse Note The first click defines the first corner of the delimiting rectangle which su
475. selects a text section and drags it into a spreadsheet with drag amp drop it will be then be inserted as text into the cell where the mouse is released When a text section is dragged to the character view of a presentation an OLE object is inserted as a OpenOffice org plug in ftext is dragged to the outline view of a presentation it is inserted at the point where the cursor is positioned OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 372 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Revision Marking Function The revision marking function in Writer and Calc highlights changes to documents so that whomever is editing the file can see who changed what and when Recording and Displaying Changes When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet the review function marking changes redlining makes it possible to document who made which changes so that this is clear to everyone On the final edit of the document it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected For purposes of illustration imagine having to deliver a report Now before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader and both will add their changes Perhaps the senior editor writes clarify after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely The proofreader checks the spelling of the document and notes two cases where explicit references to the gender of an imaginary person could be re
476. seuiusienivacnsseanteecevaniiawiinantrndnadstasees 377 Turine OM AON cease DRESD E aa ah casi ca gunn nana a E E IN E IIS M aE 377 T rmine off protection iecore UU pia e i RE RU Rd FUR SEVERI EEEa EERE aa 377 Protecting cadi ooh a dI LR E 377 T rming on revision protectio serisi tiro nuo nre viria E Rp Ad Hg 377 Turning Me OMNI abe isei snake bt osa M EE DE Pet T RE 377 Protecting Coll Hadecs i alg usos aoi omen i vecchi eros aei ada a Oa HR EN a 3T Prot cting Sections ini EIEBR eeu e cp rar REG RENI ONNUIREURE ERE NA EM Nene OD eran pe tir RP EEs 378 Brea NORUNT TETTE OOo SLOTS 378 Turning off BEOPOCIIGRE ios eie EYE pU INS EE aR 378 Protecting Cells m d OpenOffice org Writer Table iere m re rrt ven tx Sete dita eo nepos 378 Automatic Protection of Indexes and Tables prem ern vertu in Re vas tip ENS 379 Turpe PL DEDE coupure ira nd An ERR rV EE AC e pk atlas 379 Turne ctt BOR DORE o ceo pads da md vea Dont ROME RU NR TP EREMO MEM 319 Protecting trames graphics and OLE objets c petri e ER Fn n pa 379 Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects seeeereee retento roin threat ra peritus rrr treno 379 T r pub Protetores nalis raesent buo Ee Er HIR UHR OK 379 Turing off 0 2 00 Ree ee OT D LO OLLI 379 Protecting IN iau cesssansgeraciavecoaeaacnsiansiiaadsevs RE Vc IURI ce bei E EE A Eia 380 Digital Signatures and Encryption sesessesesesseseeseseessseeetsesststsstststesesteststesesessestsseseseese
477. sieasiuansvanaundeenedoustvlens 188 EI ceca cept ses cca eh uss ves aus see ara ove ee nS ER 188 lis rud CENTER EE D D ODD LETTER 190 Calculating With OTROS oen Or SX NIE e REDDE aa nV CH ten HR RT RUNE 193 Catones With Dates dnd TS oe eoe nce epp Endet aaa a UB UR EX RES NUR ARE RI INR 194 Inserting and Editing Notes oo ee net EROS AME M REN Nase EN Re p MER ME M 195 Handling Multiple SBeels i aceoe i oet po e dr ins n ka Pa ERR Re PERRA MEA ER FEHLER ER VAR 196 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xii EAS en tee Mul pl TIES s Leere uoces chinh en RS MAU SS Fn eS iR aen hor hisspasi e id epu un EEE U ds 196 oues With Multiple S OBS uua asdeci adeguate EBXYENANEMEE NIA UR a E RBS 196 Pipino cat seca ed nc din qai E MIU al me pde N 197 Formatting a Spreadsheet os 4 ede aki deri e ER tC RE M RON Ree RO RH MAR ERR RUND 198 Fonnatng TUBESDOES ces oq te be p Hp exo cain asec eia eu vade EEES S nx ANS M RUFUS 198 BE E c TN 198 Formatting Cells and SERES ninine EHE DEP DER DEM RCM etes RU RUNE 199 Usine AutoForm t for T3568 or EHI De i Fo ehe ir d UE A PA VUE KR DRE 199 UB rc els en m ETE COTES DTE 200 Designing Spreadsheets Clearly usages eiat eg nib tate rena lt c Ha t vo RII Resa 200 Forpating Text mg Spreadsheet nee te a dv dai as ER UFU E ME 201 Pormatting Numbers in a Smeadsheets ue Ix rt repo aaa REX devine 201 Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages sssssss 201
478. sired character sequence into the Replace field For example two hyphens to trigger the replacement Now there is a shortcut that defined that automatically replaces the user defined input sequence with the optional dash selected This dash can also be in another font Manual Hyphenation Although OpenOffice org offers automatic hyphenation by entering a separator inside a word users can override this feature by entering Ctrl minus Thus the word can be hyphenated at the end of the line regardless of the state automatic hyphenation for this paragraph Emphasizing Text There are many ways of emphasizing text in a special way Here are some of them Use the icons in the Object bar for regular Formatting needs For example change the text to bold or to another font style change the text colour and background or centre the text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 51 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Whole paragraph can be emphasized using borders Place the cursor in the paragraph that is to be emphasized right click to its context menu and select Paragraph then click on for example the Borders tab At this point a border may be selected to frame the paragraph and also with shadow shading if desired If necessary the distance between the border and the paragraph text can be adjusted under Spacing to contents Using a Text Frame provides the following possibilities a Text can receive a border b Text can be
479. sive license to use reproduce prepare Modifications of compile publicly perform publicly display demonstrate market disclose and distribute the Documentation in any form on any media or via any Electronic Distribution Mechanism or other method now known or later discovered and to sublicense the foregoing rights to third parties through multiple tiers of sublicensees in accordance with the terms of this License The license rights granted in this Section 2 2 Contributor Grant are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Documentation 3 0 DISTRIBUTION OBLIGATIONS 3 1 Application of License The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License including without limitation Section 2 2 Contributor Grant The Documentation may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released in accordance with Section 5 0 Versions of the License and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Documentation You distribute You may not offer or impose any terms that alter or restrict the applicable version of this License or the recipients rights hereunder However You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3 5 Required Notices 3 2 Availability of Documentation 431 Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be mad
480. slide title to jump to that slide Edit Jump Targets In the bottom corners are areas for which one can define an interaction To edit or view the interaction click again in background mode on the area while pressing the Alt key and open the context menu and choose the Interaction command Modifying Object Size To change the object size drag a selection frame around the respective objects After selecting the frames open the Position and Size dialogue from the context menu In the tab Size apply the same size to all selected frames under the group box Size Note Alternatively rather than using a selection frame click on the individual objects and press the Shift key at the same time to make a multiple selection Creating Additional Objects For additional objects copy one and simply insert it as often as necessary Then position the rectangles in the document and align them using the snap lines Note To display vertical and horizontal snap lines click on the respective ruler and drag a snap line from the ruler to the desired position Changing Font and Font Size Change fonts and font sizes using a Style so that these changes once only have to be made once Click in one of the frames and open the Styles and Formatting window The Graphics Style Object with shadow is selected In the context menu choose Modify to open the Graphics Style Object with shadow dialogue and click on the Font tab to define the desired fo
481. sntantieeesaaseantasndeasaesnneaetaenstnarsneases 369 Duis and Drop With the Dati Sor e VIN siii ora R eeu eH E Loki Y Pe otn ON eM EORR SOS 370 Using data Deed CHOC ge FRA RED MORE NODI QR E AE eee reer eee 370 Applying data lo table docut erl iiiuiosuvece pi ebd Sr P Rb dS Rer VU HE CRGA NR ARR RAD Re deis 370 Liegt DIU EBEN TS UE DIETO T LISTO A 370 Copying Sheet Areas fo Text Documents seni rires b Pea Nate bride ce Praia svo 371 Inserting Data From Spreads BOB uio seo eee Da Han MD tb REV TR DANN UE AT 371 Insertine Data Prom Text Docut enlis uio oes d ree eere tinea e phan ien ir vate a ba 371 Copying Text Using Drag and DEL eoo eoe E PIN FERIN MUR DAERNMI ERR RR S oe SENE RUE 372 Revisi n M rki g Puebla doge puer ode o pei sn ua oti cedi ipM UNA RERO NIU araia iee 373 Recording and Displaying Coe epo Heo UP PERO DD HS E RUN NU UNE UE 373 Acceptine or Rejectmg Lanses i sesiis ad RU ERR aeaa RE EU Ea SERES tai CNES 374 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xxi Comparing Versions Of a DOCurent 5 lt 0 icconsesnnecareacsasonnsscaassesonsaiconvenstiveonteosvennsosinenisarexeeess 375 IG siiin esi espace edu acp D cR EDU a 375 B ccondu C Mang soi wens Races asp LO Dim toUt on vin IR DU VN MAE n eU 375 Version Iam gerens cien c pa eei exe e aE RO eb RR EE ur RU EEEa 376 Protcotine Contents m Open PES esae caravans hemrex tecti Sehr etim antec n d DATEN PR Fn REESE 377 Protscng All Documents When SOVIMIB occississcsuvansadsmsoan
482. so that the other document always reflects the current content of the cell After setting all the necessary preferences and changes save the document and print it Further Information The document based on this template is protected In order to make modifications in the protected cells first disable the protection via Tools gt Protect Document gt Spreadsheet This must be done individually for every protected sheet including the hidden sheets OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 247 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Inserting a note To keep a note perhaps reminding one to sell a certain share later on select the relevant cell and choose Insert gt Note A shadowed area in the document appears in which to enter text To make this note visible all the time click in the relevant cell cells with notes have a small red dot in the corner provided Note Indicator in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Cale gt View is marked open the context menu and choose Show Note Otherwise one only sees the note when the mouse pointer is moved on to the cell Inserting a sheet into another document Select the cell range and copy it to the clipboard Copy icon on the function bar Open the document into which to insert the sheet generally a text document and insert the sheet Insert command Displaying formulae To display the references in the spreadsheets choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt View and mark formu
483. specially practical when the only the first page is to be on letterhead paper 16 The last step is to click Create After clicking the Create button OpenOffice org creates a document template and places it in the template folder At the same time a new unnamed document appears on the screen that has been generated as a copy from this template Now start entering text and then save and print the document However if one would like to keep on working on the layout of the document template or create an envelope for it close the new document without saving it Creating an Envelope Template This section contains a description of how to create a template for an envelope after completing a letter template plus some tips on how to continue polishing template design As the envelope should be saved together with its template open the letter template 1 Select File gt Templates gt Edit OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 174 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 2 Locate the letter template wanted and open it The templates are found in the OpenOffice org directory user template in the user s home directory Path names may vary with different releases 3 Go to the Insert menu 4 Select Envelope A dialogue of the same name appears Envelope X Envelope Format Printer Addressee Database Database field j F MV Sender Sun Microsystems Inc Insert Cancel Help Reset 5 On t
484. ss are to be placed These fields have a direct connection to the database table which contains the address list A field will be inserted in the form letter for each data field such as name street city et cetera When printing Writer inserts the desired data fields in the fields from each record In most cases create the form letter template 1 File gt Wizards gt Letter to open the dialogue 2 Setup the template 3 Select the database containing the addresses for the form letter 4 Set the fields as directed by the Wizard OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 158 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 5 With each dialogue select the features needed 6 Click Create to add this document to the templates and to open a Writer session to complete the body 7 If the body text will be used in the future use File gt Template gt Save and overwrite the initial instance of the template Having done this this template may be used for other form letters 1 Select Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard to start the process of creating a form document based on the template just created The letter based on this template will be displayed and already contain the fields for the address date sender et cetera 2 Choose From a template in the Mail Merge dialogue 3 Press F4 to open the data source for the current document 4 Select the records necessary for use in the form letter by clicking the row headers at the left in the
485. ssesestes 380 DDVOLSTENULesepderaoputontatdia ide Hab ap Nue tux cH PUR UE EM obe X nU E RNC UU cus 380 COUCE Leid Reine Mau UU M eM NA MM e DRE 380 Haw t g t a Ct ARS iso oue dion OREGON VEI UNE Roca PAR EUR rcu PURI QUE diu s 380 Selfsiened mA NAD aee essen e t voces RENDER Ce PRE meat u PU EHE DAY FRA HERE 381 Certificates from Certificat ATTY soos eei piget tai eR Led pa Un Mo PERROS 381 Integrating a Certificate with Open HEISE DER os ice qoo bo HER I eee eee rete ere eer 381 Changing Defaults and Other Configuration It6ps uuoseeci orien senem as bre b reet er eR vert apa 382 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 xxii Saving Configuration With DOG IGM 5 sea oen eoors ort rerba eer rn rot dar e Fete RR o PR ER RUPEE egi en 382 Diseno and Editine Tab SOHSE a eie Nae 382 Ium Tabs omte Rie reii at eE rE EA E AA a a A 383 Changing the Properties OF Labs iore mei Dei RA RR IS RR 383 DIE OT Ee o aso esto ne n arida Mem ani E DI prm UAM ENDE 383 Changing the DO erba iei o cds teni i Rr MI HUNE I PRIN ORAN 383 Changing the colour of TEE o pH ARR UI NU Dd MI PR M DAMM HR MSIE 384 Inserting Landscape pages into a Portrait oriented Document sssssss 384 Morc on Templates RETI een CT TO DT S 385 Chancine Detanlt Templates usse re ixi ameti Rc gp ves icr RA RV VA HN RH 385 Ntadibang Default Deni ideis epi rtp Foe la pM QU EU DOM E DAR UM UMS 385 Resetting Default Templates oio eei ad enixe tne ER RR b retia ua E dc
486. ssing and naming 196 211 217 219 221 248 blocks o text i e eiit e iei te 64 89 75 OLE OBISESohigunicsdcsntiei huni istis ug d assigning a background colour to 132 hine TETTE attributes ss 206 208 212 215 216 232 266 formatting while typing eee 63 backgrounds 215 orders erno anaa aider meas venari c e EERE 221 automatic drawing on off 87 currency format sse 206 cells On SCREEN 6 035555 se reete hers 216 enlarging and reducing in text tables 145 CELMIN SD 57 entering fractional numbers in sss 204 elements OE iiis eem iE ies 58 entering numbers as text in esee 203 Tor tables ert ie tei repe petita 59 142 formatting text in 202 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 424 increasing Wit ertet rere 196 inserting a formula into serene 134 inserting a range of 129 130 inserting an object into sesee 132 Inserting and Editing Notes sess 209 inserting paragraphs before sesss 131 invalid table cell essen 141 line breaks eene eet 202 SOOTS REAT aT AREETA ETAT 131 143 144 number formats esee 143 203 204 232 printing ange eicere ete tenetur tob ees ete une do 21 protecting ede se bere bres etd 424 425 selecting a range of sess 129 22
487. sssesesss 146 editing ed ases en bn ESI ede 178 finding labels automatically 220 reezing iecit Ee Uncen 268 inserting or deleting seeeee 129 144 Multicolumn section eese 65 printing iced OREMUS 260 Selecting iio e EHE e eo T erra ERE Qe ERR en 231 combination charts seen 228 combo box eeeeee 391 393 394 395 408 461 COMMEN IS TERCER OM CHEN GES iania nre S Se rE Eee ENEL 422 COMPAHSON Sessies nigran Ee rel ve E eera E eie E hidden text fields sess 138 139 140 completion of words seen 50 COMPOSE Key terio entree t reete eth he eu e eie ERE PUER IER special characters 37 44 50 54 55 117 332 444 449 concordance files esses eene definition essere 111 oc m E ERES 111 Conditional Separators eese 55 conditional text eee rere cbr ree rores e EE REESE RR ERR NSE ona ETT 138 139 140 CONCILIONS RENTE in fields and sections esee 65 CONMBUMNG neces reete e Eee Dee ee Ee RE Eee ERR eR SEE E for FAXING iion tere dn 409 410 for specific document essere 430 keyboard onses 403 Inm M C 403 404 ieri c ote eae 403 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 contents protections isses er trennen 424 context menus 11 15 32 33 34
488. st box c Click the New User Defined Index icon in the dialogue i Name the new index ii Click OK d Add entries for this new index At least one entry must be inserted into the new index before closing the Index Entry dialogue or the index won t be created i In the document find a candidate location or text for the new index ii Position the text cursor at that position or select a word or phrase that will go into the index iii In the Index Entry floating window click the Insert iv Repeat this process from step 1 d i or continue with step 1 e e In the Index Entry floating dialogue click the Close Step 3 Finally create the index in the document 1 Position the cursor on the place where the user defined index is to be created a Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables to open the dialogue Insert Index Table b In the Type list box select the entry matching the name that was given to the index collection in step 1 c 1 Insert Index Table Type and title Title BEEN Type Table of Contents Protected against manual changes Create index table This is the content from the frst chapter This is a wer directory entry for Evaluate up to level Create from Outline Additional Styles Heading 1 1 This is the content fom chapter 1 1 This is the entry for the table of contents Heading 1 2 This is the content from chapter 1 2 This keyword is a main entry Index marks
489. symmetric The curve then has the same curvature either side of the point Or the data point is smooth The curve then has different curvatures either side of the point Ifthe curve is not steadily continued at the data point but instead forms a corner or tip it is a corner point Any type of data point can be converted into any other thus giving good control over the shape of the curve Note When precisely linking two existing points in a drawing using lines click the Line icon on the main toolbar and also activate the option bar via View gt Toolbars gt Option Bar Select the Snap to Object Points icon on this toolbar Editing Curves Data points can be edited if they are displayed as small rectangles To work on a curve later when it is no longer selected click the Edit Points icon on the object bar and select the curve If the object bar is not visible click briefly on Select on the main toolbar 1 Now click Edit Points on the far left of the object bar or on the option bar 2 Click once on the point for editing It will appear as a filled square and there should be two B zier lines with control points at the ends Please note that sometimes one of the control points is directly on top of the B zier point and thus hard to see In the case of corner points which define right angles the control points lie directly on the B zier point Now move the B zier point and the control points as needed Note ho
490. t XML Filter Settings 2 Click on New XML Filter New Filter Filter name New Filter poplin uin Tz pe file type Untitled File extension m Comments 3 Enter any settings as shown in the following illustrations OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 412 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements XML Filter New Filter Filter name Flat XML Text Application OpenOffice org Writer odt x E file type Flat XML Text File extension Comments XML Filter New Filter DocType DTD XSLT for export XSLT for import Template for import OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 413 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 414 Chapter 13 Xml Enhancements 5 Test the filter using the current document BA display will open that provides output similar to the following lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt office document xmlns office urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns offic e 1 0 xmlns style urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns style 1 0 xmlns text urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns text 1 og xmlns table urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns table 1 0 xmlns draw urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns drawing 21 0 xmlns fo urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns xsl fo compatible 1 0 xmlns xlink http www w3 org 1999 xlink xmlns dc http purl org dc elements 1 1 xmlns meta urn oasis names tc opendocument xmlns meta l o xmlns number
491. t gt Character On the Font tab select Language None If a word should be permanently set to prevent automatic hyphenation such that it will never be separated place it in an active user defined dictionary with an equals sign after it Choose Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids Select a User defined dictionary Click the Edit button Where there is no user defined dictionary as yet create one by clicking the New button In the Edit Custom Dictionary dialogue enter the word e g Companyname without quotation marks Click Close to close the dialogue Click OK Now the word Companyname will never be hyphenated OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 154 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Selecting Tools gt Language gt Hyphenation avoids searching manually through the text in order to find words to hyphenate This starts the following dialogue which shows all words that could be hyphenated with the current line break one after the other Hyphenation English USA X Word els Hyphenate Cancel Next Remove Help senenate ELS ERN a ee The syllable at which the word could best be hyphenated at the current line break is highlighted In the case where the word to be hyphenated should have the hyphen at an earlier place in the word use the left arrow button to move the highlighting to the left Click on Hyphenate to hyphenate the word at the
492. t least 5 characters Turning off protection For spreadsheets Choose Tools gt Protect Document gt Sheet For documents Choose Tools gt Protect Document Document Where a password has been assigned enter the correct password Protecting Sections in Writer Any section of a OpenOffice org Writer text document can be protected against changes with a password Turning on protection 1 Select the section 2 Choose Insert gt Section gt Section 3 Under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes If the section already exists Format gt Sections 4 Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters Turning off protection 1 Choose Format gt Sections gt Section 2 Under Write protection uncheck Protect 3 Enter the correct password Protecting Cells in a OpenOffice org Writer Table The contents of individual cells of a Writer text table can also be protected from changes Turning on protection Place the cursor in a cell or select cells Choose Format gt Cell gt Protect Turning off protection First ensure that Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids gt Cursor in protected areas has Enable checked Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells Then choose Format gt Cell gt Unprotect Select the table in the Navigator open the context menu and select Table gt Unprotect Use Shift Ctr1 T to remove protection for the entire current table
493. t would be needed to attain a particular annual return For example calculate how much capital would be required for an annual return of 15 000 by performing the following steps 1 Place the cursor in cell E5 Select Tools gt Goal Seek and the Goal Seek dialogue appears The correct cell E5 should already be entered in the field Formula Cell Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell In the sheet click in the cell A5 that contains the value to be changed ON tn A W N Enter the expected result of the formula i e the desired value under Target Value In this example the value is 15 000 J Click OK 8 A dialogue appears with the result of the Goal Seek The result is provided for use as desired If the result should be used click Yes to enter the result in cell A5 Applying Multiple Operations Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows If the data of a data range is one above the other for columns or next to each other for rows select the data range together with the cell or cell range next to or below it as the target range In the Column Row field enter the cell reference to the first cell in the data range In the Formula field enter the cell reference to the cell with the formula that applies to the data range Examples The company produces toys which sell for 10 each Each toy costs 2 to make in addition to which there are fixed costs of 10 000 per annum How much profit will be mad
494. tains an icon for an interactive cursor and an icon for inserting special characters Command Icon Box The command icon box provides a method of writing an equation using GUI similar to other word processors w Selection vA asb aeA fix Xa d a 8 Li a a Fa 74 a b a b axb asb aab a b T asb a b avb sb The upper two rows in the icon box are menus that call the actual command buttons into the lower portion of the command box The command buttons are used to insert the appropriate command at the cursor position in the command field Command dialogue Box OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 392 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math The command dialogue box displays the commands that create the equation The dialogue box can be edited directly Creating an Equation with dialogue Commands To create an equation with equation editor enter the programming commands in logical sequence into the dialogue box The commands entered are similar to the commands used to generate equations in TeX a scientific publishing format Maintaining logical consistency of the commands entered into the dialogue box is important The brackets used in the dialogue box must be matched for example all must have a corresponding Here are some examples As can be seen it is really simple to type formulae in the dialogue box Command Input Field 1 122 14122 The next example shows how round brackets and braces
495. tation marks 2 Highlight this cell and the 11 cells below it 3 Select Edit gt Fill gt Series 4 In the dialogue select Date and Month 5 Click OK The first date of each month automatically appears in the selected cells Protecting Sheets To prevent the values entered in a sheet from being modified by another person protect the sheet To do this follow these steps 1 Display the Protect Sheet dialogue Tools gt Protect Document gt Sheet 2 Enter a password 3 Click OK Likewise the entire document can be protected so that it is only possible to open it by entering the password All cells in a newly created spreadsheet document have the protected attribute This attribute can be turned on and off via the Cell Protection tab page of the Cell Attributes dialogue which is opened by choosing Format gt Cells or via the Format Cells context menu command The Protected attribute can be set or removed for each cell individually In any case it does not take effect until the entire sheet and or the entire document is protected Apply this protection using Tools gt Protect Document gt Sheet or Tools gt Protect Document gt Document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 246 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Protect Sheet X OK ELI ome Cancel Password fl Confirm Help e While a password can be applied for protecting the sheet and the document this is not required However
496. ted against manual changes Heading 1 Create index table This is the content fom the first chapter This is a for Entire document Evaluate up to level Create from Outline GD Additional Styles Heading 1 1 This is the content from chapter 1 1 This is the entry for the table of contents Heading 1 2 This is the content from chapter 1 2 This keyword is a rsin entry Index marks ff rL r First define entries for the index es as entries in the document in the following manner 1 Select the word or words in the document which are to be listed in the index Several words can be selected by holding down the Shift key if they are listed one after the other or by holding down the Ct x1 key if they are spaced apart When selecting a single word simply position the cursor in the word it does not need to be highlighted For a Table of Contents using Headings is easiest 2 Enter the selected words in an index by choosing Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Entries If a different term to appear in the index enter it in the Entry field For example one could enter dictionary defining whereas only the word dictionary appears in the text To define all similar words in a text as entries select Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Entry and check Apply to all similar texts To include the words in a separate index with a name of one s choice click on the New User defined Index icon in the Insert Index Ent
497. ted is now automatically deleted from the normal continuous text and inserted into the text frame OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 87 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Editing Text Frames Select a text frame by clicking on one of its edges Once selected a user can drag and drop to change its position by grabbing an edge and thus move the whole frame If one does the same action using one of the handles the size of the frame changes So dragging a handle on one of the sides enlarges or compresses the text frame in one direction only whereas dragging a corner handle enlarges or reduces it in two dimensions Right clicking within a selected frame popups the context menu Th options in this menu allow one to make further adjustments Arrange De Left Anchor O Centered Wrap 70 Right AA Frame Top yer Caption amp Center X Cut Strg x Li Bottom Copy Strg C As seen in the above graphic a number of selections can be made For example choose Alignment which positions the frame relative to other frames drawing objects graphics et cetera Use the Wrap submenu to choose if normal text should wrap around the frame wrap on one of the sides or not wrap at all Selecting Frame in the context menu is the same as choosing Format gt Frame from the menu bar and opens a dialogue that gives access to managing all properties of the frame The contents and functions available fro use in text fr
498. tep rr ahai oE loeo tete actontetiend 350 Drop M dE buses suepdee neck E T E E T E T 179 combining rtt 34 drop down lists esee converting to 3D 327 334 363 Drop down property 394 COPYING a eiecti ont ce deine dete 300 copying between documents eesese 414T Cross fading eeeeeeeeennnnnnnn nnn 337 338 A o e A E E e RRR Ree 228 t DERE 328 duplicating sees 336 effects in Impress 293 T placemient eee e cover eie eee eee e eei tane EUR 204 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 429 Index OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 430 Public Documentation License Version 1 0 Public Documentation License Version 1 0 1 0 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Commercial Use means distribution or otherwise making the Documentation available to a third party 1 2 Contributor means a person or entity who creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications 1 3 Documentation means the Original Documentation or Modifications or the combination of the Original Documentation and Modifications in each case including portions thereof 1 4 Electronic Distribution Mechanism means a mechanism generally accepted for the electronic transfer of data 1 5 Initial Writer means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Writer in the notice required by the Appendix 1 6 Larger Work means a work which combines Documentation or portions thereof
499. ter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Under brace Over brace Command Input Field 18 underbrace plus 1 2 3 4 underbrace H18 124 34 4 minus pm minus 18 overbrace plus 1 2 3 4 overbrace 2 minus minus 18 1 2 3 4 Various types of Brackets In almost all equations various types of brackets are required OpenOffice formula allows the use of several kinds of brackets structural braces used to group parts of an equation for programming purposes Parenthesis used to group parts of an equation Parenthesis are displayed in the final equation square brackets usage is the same as parenthesis 3 braces as the keyboard characters are used for program commands and are not displayed in the resulting formula braces must be typed as Ibrace for and rbrace for The size of brackets can be controlled with the commands left and right Command Input Field 142 2 cdot 2 over 2 1 1 2 2 oy T left 1 2 2 cdot left 2 over 2 1 right right 2 1 2 2 2 1 left Ibrace a 2 b 2 c 2 right rbrace a h c OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 395 Chapter 11 Using OpenOffice org Math Special Characters Many equations use special characters in addition to the usual characters of the alphabet Open office provides an easy method to use Greek characters while any other character in the available fonts can be used The Sigma appears in the tool bar when Open
500. the chart Adding Texture to Chart Bars Assign a bar type to a bitmap rather than say using full colour 1 Switch to edit mode by double clicking on the chart 2 Double click on the corresponding bar all bars of this colour are now selected 3 From the context menu select the Object Properties entry 4 5 6 Choose the Area tab page Click on Bitmap Now select a bitmap from the list box as texture for this bar Clicking OK to accept the setting Editing Chart Axis When the scale of the vertical Y axis requires changing do the following l Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart Select Format gt Axis gt Y axis to edit the Y axis or double click on the Y axis This opens the Y axis dialogue Modify as needed To modify the scale of the x axis l 2 3 Select the Scale tab and make any adjustments Click OK In the document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 214 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Database Functions in Calc Spreadsheets in Calc are also able to manage records consisting of several fields as in a database Think of each row of the Calc spreadsheet as a record whose fields are arranged in the individual columns Then for example sort or group the Calc database by rows look for key words and calculate totals Note
501. the following 1 Open the template in OpenOffice org Writer 2 Select File gt Templates gt Save 3 Choose where to save the template Default is probably best as no special permissions are needed 4 Name the template 5 Click OK Voila there is now newsletter template ready for use Untitled OpenOffice org LL2 x ES git View Insert Format Tools Window Help J Es alel Res tels s v a Arial Biiui lmzmzzs mTmw isim AIAZE Contents Heading Mf OOExtras Newslettersf iei Put Logo Here gt Saturday December 30 18994 Template Introductionq videas a column Now itwill flow et another article cx i with the text sothat as youw insert Thistemplate isto assist inthe new next the graphic willstay with Blah BlahBlah Blah Blah Blah Blah creation of anewsletter It includes th earticle Ifyowalwayswantthe Blah BlahBlah Blah Blah Blah Blah a tableofcontents on the lowerleft zraphicto stay atithesameplacein Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah hand comer page numbers on thetext anchorittothe page Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah alternating pages for photocopying Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah back to back Note that as Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah Blah exu It includes athree column format and the text will lowthrough the Autho rq columns around th etable of Thisnewslettertemplate was writte contentsand ontothenextpagesf by Travis Bauer i56 ooextras org the creatorand maint
502. the new page style e g Landscape 10 Click OK OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 384 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques More on Templates Changing Default Templates When a new document is opened using File gt New a blank document appears based on the default OpenOffice org template for that document type Users can edit or modify this document or replace it with an existing document so that the new document contains personalized custom format attributes or other contents Modifying Default Templates If there is an existing OpenOffice org document which is satisfactory use it However this step is not necessary However if one is not what is needed one can do the following to create a new template 1 Open a new empty document 2 Edit it until it makes a good template For example edit the styles in the Styles and Formatting window 3 By way of example the following describes how to proceed for text documents and these steps can be applied for other types of OpenOffice org documents Templates of course can be defined for each OpenOffice org module 1 Now save the document created in step 2 by choosing File gt Templates gt Save and saving the document in say the Default category 2 Select File gt Templates gt Organize 3 Double click Default in the list on the left This will display the user defined templates in the user template directory 4 Select the template was just saved and open the conte
503. the respective field and enter the help text in the field below This text is then displayed as a Help tip for the user OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 250 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Linking Sheet Information The information contained in a schedule can also be used by linking it to the vacation accounts and automatically subtracting used vacation days for example OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 251 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Presentations have more than just drawings and graphics to offer Use presentations to link several slides to form a slide show to animate the elements on the slides and to assign special transition effects between slides Slides often contain text which in the outline view mode is displayed and entered in a hierarchical structure Change the text or rearrange the order of the slides at any time There are several ways to create a presentation Use Wizard Presentation Use the templates and sample documents supplied which are modified as necessary Start with an empty document OpenOffice org Impress provides many graphics features for creating presentations all of which are found in OpenOffice org Draw too Please take the time to read chapter 6 on OpenOffice org Draw to discover the complete capabilities of Impress The sample documents referenced in this section may be found at the time of writing at http www pathte
504. the slide view Draw and edit vector graphics in the drawing view The other views which are only available in Impress by clicking the buttons at top right Help create presentations They are introduced in the chapter on Impress and are also described in Help In the slides view the user works on the individual slides of the presentation whereas the master view allows defining a uniform background for all slides In addition the layer view can be turned on and off as desired For example the layer view is where objects that are not always supposed to be visible can be managed The main toolbar contains several floating toolbars When opened these toolbars provide additional related icons The floating toolbars are indicated by small triangles on icons and are opened by long clicking the corresponding icon on the main toolbar until the floating toolbar appears When a toolbar is floating it can be moved from its original position and placed anywhere else in the work area Long click the Rectangle icon to Bii open the floating toolbar and click on the Rectangle icon The pointer changes to a cross hair symbol with a small square Rectangles m nm 1 Draw a rectangle on the slide It has preset attributes including a blue fill and a thin black line as a border There are eight handles with which can be dragged to change the size of the object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 287 Chapter 6 Creating Drawing
505. the spin button Then click Replace OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 314 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Gradients and Patterns for Objects and Background The objects in drawings and presentations do not have to have uniform colours They can also have colour gradients transparency gradients patterns and hatching effects Users can also define a colour a gradient or a pattern for a background that is visible in all slides of a presentation Defining Gradients To assign a predefined gradient to an object proceed as follows 1 Select the object 2 From the context menu or under Format on the menu bar choose Area 3 Select the Gradient option then make a selection from the gradient list Area X Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Fill C None C Hatching Color C Bitmap Emm Gradient 1 Increments um e IV Automatic SE Gradient 4 EN Gradient 5 BY Gradient 6 J Cancel Help Reset Defining a custom colour Gradient Before defining a new custom colour gradient save the current colour gradient list as a file to ensure there is a backup say why or load a different list from another file If the user has selected an object and then defined a new gradient the new gradient is immediately assigned to the selected object If one does not want immediate assignment undo the selection before opening the
506. the top level i Select one of the existing document paragraph styles from which to generate each entry at this level of the index When changing headings rearranging their sequence or inserting new chapters remember to update the table of contents as follows e Place the cursor inthe Table of Contents Right click to active the context menu Select Update Index Table Select Tools gt Update gt All Indexes and Tables to update all the indexes and tables of contents in a document OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 102 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Creating Alphabetical Indexes 1 Place the cursor in which to create the index 2 Select Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables The Insert Index Table dialogue appears Insert Index Table Type and title Title Type Table of Contents Protected against manual changes Heading 1 Create index table This is the content forn the frst chapter This is a user drectory entry for Entire document s Evaluate up to level Create from Outline G Additional Styles Heading 1 1 This is the content from chapter 1 1 This is the entry for the table of contents Heading 1 2 This is the content from chapter 1 2 This keywondis arrsin entry Index marks a L eT 3 On the Index Table tab select Alphabetical Index in Type 4 Click OK to generate the alphabetical key word index using the default set
507. their headings and assigned accordingly when the DataPilot table is created Editing DataPilot Tables Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down A special symbol appears next to the mouse pointer Dragging the button to a different position in the row alters the order of the columns If a button from the row to the left edge of the table is dragged into the line headings area a column can be changed into a row The mouse pointer alters its appearance from the icon for a column heading to that of a line heading To remove a button from the table just drag it out of the table Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer becomes a not allowed icon The button is thus deleted Note Double clicking on the name of a table element hides or shows the merged elements below it Filtering DataPilot Tables Although the DataPilot tables are usually created according to user requirements there may be occasions when not all of the data provided by the tables is of interest If this should be the case filters should be used that apply conditions to the data such that 1f the conditions are not met the excess data is removed from the tables Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the entry mask for the filter conditions The Filter dialogue will appear This dialogue provides different criteria which can be used for selecting data Updating DataPilot Tables If the data of the bas
508. ther spreadsheets By choosing an appropriate background colour and a pattern for the cells in the sheet an eye appealing spreadsheet is created OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 199 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Use the More button to display additional options in the dialogue In the additional section that is then displayed select which properties of the chosen format are to be excluded from the automatic formatting For example removing the check mark in front of Font the font will not be taken into account by the AutoFormat Layout of Spreadsheets Sheets do not have to have the look of any of the predefined formats There are many ways to apply a different layout for spreadsheets as well as tables in text documents Designing Spreadsheets Clearly Calc assists in designing a sheet in a variety of ways For example here are three different views of the same sheet varying only in layout Sales 2001 September October November New York 1234 2398 4325 London 1024 512 256 Auckland 999 888 777 Berlin 1233 2397 4324 Total 4490 6195 9682 September October New York 1 234 00 2 398 00 4 325 00 London 1 024 00 512 00 256 00 Auckland 999 00 888 00 777 00 Berlin 1 233 00 2 397 00 4 324 00 Total 4 490 00 6 195 00 9 682 00 The above graphic shows the sheet formatted using one of the AutoFormats it will look appealing without requiring any further editing OpenOffice org User
509. thing else results in 1 true Boolean X XOR Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR Or Example 1 XOR 0 displays 1 true Boolean And AND Tests for values matching the Boolean AND Example 1 AND 2 displays 1 true Boolean Not NOT Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT Example NOT 1 true displays 0 false Statistical Functions Choose from the following statistical functions Mean MEAN Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list Example MEAN 10 30 20 displays 20 Minimum MIN Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list Value Example MIN 10 30 20 displays 10 Maximum MAX Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list Value Example MAX 10 30 20 displays 30 00 Trigonometric Functions Choose from the following trigonometric functions OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 127 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Sine SIN Calculates the sine in radians Example SIN PI 2 Cosine COS Calculates the cosine in radians Example COS 1 Tangent TAN Calculates the tangent in radians Example TAN A1 Arc Sine ASIN Calculates the arc sine in radians Example ASIN 1 Arc Cosine ACOS Calculates the arc cosine in radians Example ACOS 1 Arc ATAN Calculates the arc tangent in radians Tangent Example ATAN 1 More Defined Values PI PI STATS 2 Euler s E 24 114925 2s co
510. tings The are several options that can enhance the usability of any index For example to highlight letters under which entries exist as subtitles alphabetical delimiter in the Entries tab or to allow case sensitivity to be taken into account when sorting and much more Editing the paragraph styles in the Styles and Formatting window is the best method for changing the formatting of the individual lines in the index as all direct formatting is overwritten at the next update Using a Concordance File A concordance file is a variation of an index in that it provides exact references to words in the document and permits cross referencing and sub indexing Thus a concordance file contains a number of key words and information as to how these words are to be seen in an index 1 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 2 On the Index Table tab page select the type Alphabetical Index 3 Mark the Concordance file check box Click the File button to select whether to open create or edit a concordance file Further information on the structure of the concordance file can be found in OpenOffice org Help OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 103 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Creating User Defined Indexes Users can create as many user defined indexes as needed Step 2 Create a named index entry collection a Open Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Entry b Select User Defined from the Index li
511. tion Calling the Sample Macros clicking the Edit button instead of the Run button in the last step 2 The Basic IDE appears This is where one can view and edit the program code The following illustration shows a self defined program code File Edit Mew Tools Window Help doje Orus itear r t A LE PIPAK ao alOr sea isotficel standard he e unction Vol L1 L2 L2 im iVol as Long iVol L1 L2 L3 ol iVol nd Function Eoffice Standard Module amp iniz co13 JNsRI Instructions on how to use the Basic IDE can be found in Help gt Contents gt Macros and Programming gt General Information and User Interface Usage gt OpenOffice org Basic IDE OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 389 Chapter 10 Introducing OpenOffice org Basic and Macros The Sample Macros The following sample macros are in the Gimmicks module AutoText This macro opens an empty Writer document and inserts a table in which the names of all the AutoTexts are listed One can print the document to have a handy list of the available AutoTexts ChangeAllChars Use this macro in a text document to replace all text and numbers with the characters x and X This can be helpful for example if the document is to be used as a template but the original text is not to be legible If one edits this macro other replacement characters can be defined in the program code GetTexts This macro carries out a
512. to be printed on a high resolution colour printer in a print shop mark the Print to file check box in the Print dialogue It will then be printed to a file that can be sent to the film recording service or commercial printer Note first install and select the printer driver for the printer or film recorder that will be used by the printing or ilm recording service Most printing and film recording services require files created for a PostScript printer If there is no PostScript printer available OpenOffice org permits installation of a PostScript printer driver that can be used to print to a file On UNix based systems use spadmin to active this driver OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 270 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress Exporting Presentations as Web Pages When the Web Page export file format is chosen Impress automatically starts an Wizard to help produce an attractive HTML presentation A number of HTML pages are created that are connected to one another by hyperlinks and in which the graphics are saved as GIF or JPEG images One can work on these HTML pages in Writer to give them headings and additional hyperlinks for example 1 Select File gt Export 2 Choose the file format HTML 3 Enter a file name 4 Click Save This opens the HTML Export Wizard This Wizard is described in detail in OpenOffice org Help In the HTML Export Wizard choose whether the created Internet presentation should contain
513. to hold down the mouse button The document addressed in this way is displayed and the mouse pointer can be moved within the document 4 Once the cursor is located in the place where to insert the sheet area release the mouse button The sheet area 1s inserted as an OLE object Select and edit this OLE object at any time a To edit the OLE object simply double click on it Alternatively select the object and choose Edit gt Object gt Edit or choose Edit from the context menu The object can be edited in its own frame within the text document but the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets are visible b Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object Inserting Data From Spreadsheets When copying the contents of a cell text or numbers using the clipboard is best Copying formulae that are in the cells into the clipboard such as from the input lines of the formula bar is also possible thus they can now be inserted into the text To copy a simple rectangular area of cells into a text document as a sheet select the cells in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag amp drop to insert them into the text document This will be an OLE object in the text document that can edited fcells are dragged to the character view of a presentation document they will also re appear there as OLE objects Once dragged into the outline view each cell will form a line of the outline view Dragging using
514. tomatic Width field is selected OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 165 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer To create a dividing line select a narrow line from the Line list box under Separator set the Height to 75 and define the position as Centered Finally click OK to close the dialogue Page Style Default X Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Settings Columns bg E Width and spacing Column Kd 1 2 3 2 width 28 E 488 E 488 E Spacing p20 H V AutoWidth Separator line Line ooS5Spt a Height 75 Position centered m Cancel Help Reset To place headings or subheadings that are more than a column wide into a multi column text try putting them in a text frame The text frame can the be freely scaled and positioned on the page Insert a frame using the Insert Frame icon on the Insert floating toolbar Text frames can may also have borders but this is not always necessary Editing Paragraph Styles 1 Click the Paragraph Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window and select the paragraph style to be modified 2 Select the Modify command from the context menu call up the Paragraph Styles dialogue In this dialogue there are several tabs with various settings and options Experiment with font effects for example drop caps Click the respective tab and select Show Drop Caps Drop caps may
515. top at the beginning of a numbered line press Ct x 1 4 Tab OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 119 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Interrupting and Continuing Numbering Sometimes with a series of automatically numbered paragraphs there is one paragraph that must not have a number as the following example demonstrates 1 First paragraph 2 Paragraph two An unnumbered paragraph 3 Paragraph number three To do this choose from the following methods Delete the automatic numbering 1 Select all paragraphs 1 to 4 and click on the Numbering on off icon 2 Place the cursor before the first character of the third paragraph 3 Press the Backspace key to delete one character to the left Note The paragraph remains indented but loses its number The fourth character now has the number 3 This method also produces the desired result after saving in HTML format Formatting the paragraph 1 Select all paragraphs 1 to 4 and click on the Numbering on off icon 2 Place the cursor in the third paragraph 3 Click again on the Numbering on off icon This is how the unnumbered paragraph was produced in the example above However with HTML format the interruption creates two separately numbered lists Continuing numbering with a new starting value Number paragraphs and 2 with the Numbering on off icon Place the cursor in the fourth paragraph Choose Format gt Bullets and Numbering and go to the Options t
516. tteinte en RA o pe DN TR Mul 318 e cnn Texture ona GIRL n oo Tr 318 Using Mimina 53 NT D E 320 More 3d EFEC assis sie sc erepto Og UUR PE V URN a Verba WANN EOM ARR unm REQUE 320 SD TEA EOTUEHRUEI DRE cocos tiit Rt Rte esep tc t t eae owes Duae Har tr DI EU 320 2L re Ea Een as possono sexy aga ese DN An eq aar 321 SDE ee AIT UD CETT LECT OESTE 321 3D Effects WU a UB aoi tete die RR Ronda a EE RU eua Fon 322 3D Effects Textures and Material RERO TTE TODO TETTE 322 Desiemng 3D Objects Fr ni Font Gatos scssi na TER aa 323 FSE 6 ee eee R 323 Second e 324 EDNO SIE o oos mies DER taU EM MR E 325 Fourth SEP eesriie uein Rl ous EE xps EEEE E E E eE e 327 aE R e A E E E eee 328 Usine A Grid E rrsan ra aE Ea E aN Ga aaa ean aE 329 Mechanical or Construction Drawings sessesesseseeseseesessesetststtsestesttstsststssesessessesteseneesessesets 330 a Pa a CORO on PM osi oi btt Eta ba e a CY EE Eai 331 Using Snap LNS ETOILE 335 Usine Dimension Les cavet ni rs b n REN S bI AS aE aE Fo UM PAY E asi E 335 Working With Multiple a TIT COO T 336 Usinge tus colour per LIBE acisini nito ivi ple YR d bea Pt pp edu iate unas vo oi 336 Chapter 7 Databases apd Data SONEDOE rsss iesiti ii ee ee DA vee ee re mmi 337 Recistering a Data SOUEDE asia b ooa ee coma adis ba Lia ed RR AR Lu i QU Eu a RN ES 337 PE BELO ee me Re RO ame OPA ee ETEEN 339 Bacrtorns an Address BOOK ereitera senape iaaiaee aei aieiai 339 Using th
517. ture of the data can be selected and created from a spreadsheet 1 Open an existing spreadsheet or enter data in a new sheet with row and column headings 2 Select the data together with the headings 3 Long click the Insert Object icon found in the Main toolbar to display the floating toolbar Then click the Insert Chart icon and the cursor will change to a cross hair symbol with a small chart symbol 4 In the spreadsheet document open a selection rectangle defining the location and size of the chart Both can be modified subsequently 5 As soon as the mouse button is released a dialogue appears that makes further entries possible Simply clicking the Create button creates a chart with the default settings per Resident West Coast Cities San Francisco CA TS 10 5 Seattle WA 5 0 6 1 2 1 5 0 This example using Moviel sxc from the sample archive mentioned above shows the number of times people of different age groups in various cities go to the movie theatre annually If the age groups rather than the towns should appear on the horizontal axis tilt the chart As long as the chart remains selected the main toolbar contains a Data in Columns icon Click and rotate it with the mouse OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 210 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Other changes to the individual elements of the chart are also possible Either double click on the individual parts of the cha
518. u may only use this Documentation if you comply with the terms of this License A copy of the License is available at http www openoffice org licenses PDL rtf The Original Documentation is The Initial Writer of the Original Documentation is C All Rights Reserved Initial Writer contact s Insert hyperlink alias Contributor s Portions created by are Copyright C Insert year s All Rights Reserved Contributor contact s Insert hyperlink alias Note The text of this Appendix may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the files of the Original Documentation You should use the text of this Appendix rather than the text found in the Original Documentation for Your Modifications 433
519. uences to number each group of elements in a document that belong together For example notes warning messages quotations et cetera The following procedure shows how to do this 1 For example type Note Number in front of the first note 2 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Other 3 On the Variables tab page select the Number Range field 4 For the Name enter Note 5 Click Insert 6 Close the dialogue This Note number range enables users to automatically number all the notes in a document In the field Value select a new initial value for the entire number range This is useful when dealing with a document in a series of connected documents Number ranges and captions can be restarted with each chapter In the Caption and Fields dialogues users can choose the chapter level at which to begin renumbering OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 112 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 113 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Navigator LUI a c m o 9S m o 3 ct T 5 et wu Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Alphabetical Index Using Master Documents and Subdocuments A new empty master document is created by choosing File gt New gt Master Document or creating a master document from an existing document by choosing File gt Send gt Create Master Document Open a master document by choosing File gt New gt Master Doc
520. ule is used for graphical text effects in a similar manner to the WordArt function available with Microsoft Office If this functionality is needed here is the procedure to follow l 6 Open the Drawing Functions floating toolbar from the Main toolbar 2 Select the Text icon T 3 Draw a text frame on the page 4 5 Choose Format gt Object gt FontWork This opens the FontWork window from which to Enter the text for example FontWork select the desired effects FontWork mix Boos A Boe H E Click the upper left icon with the semicircle to display the text as a curve OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 94 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 7 Click Vertical in the Shadow options Specify 0 10 inches for the x axis shadow distance The text should now appear similar to the illustration Untitled OpenOffice org 1 1 1 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Window Help Scu A83 E 7 Re ale x Sew E ET zoo Amsa 7 amp coor Ese OCS BIG ESS ee eee iab AURR r3 a ae Imm HN ERES EE laze il BA xw Gx a EB 8 e 4 Page 1 1 Default 100 INSRT STD HYP 0 77 0 81 i8378x132 13 16 05 27 2004 8 Since the first and last letters may not be easy to see insert two blank spaces before and after the text double click the text edit it and then click outside the object 9 Selecting the FontWork object caus
521. ument and the new master document is opened as an empty text document Providing that the Navigator is not docked and collapsed the Navigator opens immediately in global mode OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 114 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer The Navigator provides the functions needed for navigating and editing a master document Paragraph Style Heading 1 X Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Background Borders Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation sHraracbers db line end Itu ct ct bh J 4 d bHatdebers dt line begin E H Maximo AG GT consecutive hyphens Options v Break Page C Column Before C After IV with Page Style Right Page Page number 0 Don t separate lines v Keep with next paragraph Orphan control H lines widow control H lines Cancel Help Reset Standard Double click a document in the Navigator to load it for editing Now the user can either enter text such as headings or insert subdocuments by clicking the Insert ME icon and choosing the desired entry Text or File A new document can also be inserted a by a long click on the icon to get the context list and selecting New document whereupon one first enters the name and path for the document and then continues on to write the new document and save it OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 115 Chapter 3 Managing T
522. urs with a change of Page Style On the Organizer tab page if a Next Style for a Page Style is entered this means that after a page break whether it is entered manually or occurs automatically the Next Style will be taken as the Page Style In the example described here for the Page Style Title page one can select the Next Style Table of Contents The Table of Contents Page Style is then always applied to the next page after the title page This saves a user from having to go through the procedure described below involving the Manual Break dialogue Note Always choose the Table of Contents Page Style as the Next Style to follow the Table of Contents since no one can be sure the number of pages that the Table of Contents will require 2 Now place the cursor at the beginning of the page where the Table of Contents should begin Go ahead and enter a manual page break with a change of Page Styles 3 Select Insert gt Manual Break The Insert Break dialogue appears C Line break Column break Cancel Page break Hel Style E Main Text OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 72 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 4 Select as Type the Page break option In the list box select the Table of Contents Page Style which will then begin at this point in the document 5 Click OK 6 Place the cursor at the beginning of the first line in the main text Insert Break X bis OK C Line break C Column bre
523. use button or drag and drop while pressing the Ctrl key Cells were filtered out by way of AutoFilters default All cells including the hidden ones are filters or special filters moved Move the visible cells for example by way of cut and paste via the clipboard or drag and drop without pressing an additional key Cells were hidden manually by way of the Hide All cells including the hidden ones are command in the context menu of the row or column copied or moved headers or through an outline Copy or move the visible cells Referencing a Cell in Another Document Cells can also be referenced in other spreadsheets 1 For the following example the source document is named C test test sxc and it contains a sheet named Sheet 1 2 Open a different or new spreadsheet document 3 Place the cursor in cell A1 and enter the following formula C test test sxc Sheet1 Al 4 Alternatively enter the file name as a URL designation file C test test sxc Sheet1 A1 Similarly access a file on the Internet by using http www sun com test test sxc Sheet1 Al 5 Drag the box in the lower right corner of the active cell to select a range of cells OpenOffice org automatically inserts the corresponding references in the adjacent cells As a result the sheet name is preceded with a sign to designate it as an absolute reference OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 206 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Using Refer
524. ust by moving their borders One can also easily merge ranges of cells into a single cell or split individual cells horizontally or vertically For this there are icons on the Table toolbar called Merge Cells and Split Cells which can be used or use the corresponding entries in the Table menu This gives great flexibility in formatting any table Table AutoFormat To quickly set up existing tables a number of predefined table styles are available via the Table gt AutoFormat dialogue Auto formatting cannot be applied however if the table has already had it s cell structure modified cells merged or split even if cells were merged and then restored to their original split state et cetera Table properties in general With the cursor in the table open the Table Format dialogue either with the menu command Table gt Properties or the Table command in the context menu To change the table background for example proceed as follows 1 Select the cells to which to assign a background colour 2 Now either choose Table gt Properties or click Table in the context menu of the selected cells 3 In the Table Format dialogue click the Background tab Notice the two list boxes at the top of the dialogue In the left box choose a colour or graphics as the background In the right box define whether to apply the background to the selected cells the whole row or the entire table Cell formatting takes priority over row formatting
525. utline to that level This will be reflected in Format gt Bullets and Numbering gt Options Outline Numbering Choose Tools gt Outline Numbering to number headings automatically By default the Paragraph Style Heading 1 is assigned to the highest level of Outline Numbering For custom paragraph styles that should be used apply these styles in this dialogue on each individual level Outline Numbering Numbering Position Level Numbering Paragraph Style Heading 1 Heading 1 M Heading 2 Number None Heading 3 Character Style None Heading 4 m Heading 5 Heading 6 Separator Heading 7 Before Heading 8 After Heading 9 Start at Heading 10 With respect to custom style s where there is currently a Paragraph Style Head1 that is used for headings at level 1 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 110 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer 1 In the Level list box select 1 2 In the Paragraph Style pull down list select Head1 3 Click OK Now all paragraphs to which Head 1 is applied will be listed in the Navigator under Headings Remember that chapters can be rearranged the in the Navigator see the section on the Navigator when changing their order or their placing in the hierarchy Using this feature also updates the numbering Click on one of the icons Promote Chapter Demote Chapter Promote Level and Demote Level or Move the chapter heading in
526. vigator As soon as a filter is set at the bottom of the Filter Navigator notice a blank filter level in which Or can be selected by clicking on it Once the blank filter level is selected enter other filter conditions in the form These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 357 Chapter 7 Databases and Data Sources The context menu can be called for every entry in the Filter Navigator Edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text In addition users can also select the filter conditions SQL Is Null or SQL Is not Null to check if a field has content or not It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu Filter conditions can also be moved within a form in the Filter Navigator by Drag amp Drop or copy them by holding down the Ct r1 Key While designing a form set the Filter proposal property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialogue These fields allow subsequent searches in the filter mode selections via a pull down list all the summarized information contained in such fields The field contents can also be easily selected using the AutoComplete function Please note however that this function requires a lot of memory space especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 358 Chapter 8 Customizing OpenOffice org
527. w the curve changes accordingly The change in form of the cursor indicates in each case the function that can be executed The object bar contains several icons with which can among other options change the type of the selected point A detailed explanation of the various options can be found in Help 3 To convert the type of data point select the point The object bar shows the type of point corner point smooth transition or symmetric transition 4 Click one of the icons to change the type of point Of course curves can also be edited in the conventional manner i e changing width colour and in the case of a filled curve the object fill The options for changing these attributes are found in the Object bar If the Edit points icon is not pressed use the context menu or the Format and Modify menus Also try out the other icons on the Curves floating toolbar When a filled curve is finished by double clicking it is automatically closed and all internal areas are filled OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 295 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Vectorizing Bitmaps With Draw or Impress transform pixel images so called bitmaps into vector drawings One of the advantages of vector graphics is that they look good in any scale when printed This is different when printing scaled bitmaps since unattractive effects may appear such as missing or zigzag lines et cetera 1 Select the bitmap to vectorize for e
528. will contain the current date and will not change later on That is the date of the invoice is determined only once OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 157 Chapter 3 Managing Text Documents With Writer Fields xi Document References Functions Doclnformation Variables Database Select Format Date 12 31 1999 Fri December 31 1999 Friday December 31 1999 Offset in days 0 e J oe On the other hand a variable date is updated every time the document is opened and printed A manual update of the fields i e with the F9 key sets the actual date in the field entered as Variable date If for example when inserting a date as a field in a form letter the user must decide if it is to be inserted as a fixed or as variable date Where the date should never change that is as if the date is typed in directly without a field select a fixed date format The advantage to using a fixed date field means that the form letter can be saved as a template Using this templates to a create a new form letter based on that template will have the date will automatically updated to today s date By selecting a variable date the date will be updated every time the document is opened or printed Apart from the date there are various other fields which can also be used in a form letter The most important fields are the ones which determine where the different elements of the recipient s addre
529. window Lock Click this button to lock a floating window Floating Click this button to change a locked window to a floating window Docking windows Some tools in OpenOffice org open in popups that are dockable such as the Styles and Formatting window the Navigator and the Gallery These floating windows may be docked at either the left or right edges of the main OpenOffice org window To dock one of these windows drag the title bar of the window to the edge until an outline appears This outline indicates the size and position of the pane that will contain the tool when the mouse button is released Another window may also be docked adjacent to one which is already docked Users can choose to have one on top of the other or side by side As a window is moved note that an outline displays showing where the window will dock and how big it will be To undock a tool and make it a floating window again point to the grey area of the tools toolbar and drag the tool away from the edge until the outline indicates that it is no longer attached Changing the Visibility of Buttons on Toolbars Tools and functions are initially grouped together on a default set of toolbars Not all buttons are visible by default To quickly make a button visible or not on its toolbar 1 Click on the small down arrow at the far right of the toolbar and select Visible Buttons 2 Toggle the checked status of the button Make sure to click the down arrow app
530. worded to avoid gender entirely The edited document comes back whereupon one can choose to incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers Plus you also e mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past asking for a few suggestions and the document is now returned by e mail with suggestions It is now a simple matter to produce a final version of the document from the results that are returned OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 373 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques Accepting or Rejecting Changes When bringing a document in which others have noted their changes back together again the user can accept or reject the changes individually or all together fone has put multiple copies of the document in circulation first of all merge these into one document see Merging Versions Open the document and choose Edit gt Changes gt Accept or Reject The Accept or Reject Changes dialogue appears Select a change on the List tab The change is selected and displayed in the document and now the users makes a decision with one of the dialogue buttons If one author has changed another author s change one will see the changes hierarchically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy Acceptor Reject Changes cci List Filter Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Insertion unknown 11 04 2004 11 20 Deletion unknown 11 04 2004 1
531. xample by clicking once on the object 2 Select Convert gt To Polygon from the Modify menu in Draw For Impress select from the context menu of the selected object The Convert to Polygon dialogue enables setting some parameters for the conversion and previewing the result Convert to Polygon X Settings Number of colors 8 Point reduction Fill holes NE size Source picture Progress 3 Clicking on OK and the selected bitmap is now a vector graphic OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 296 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw Converting Text Characters to Curves Sometimes one needs to fancy up some text say for a logo or sign such that the text is non linear The following procedure shows one way to accomplish this task 1 Use the Text icon T from the Text floating toolbar on the main toolbar and then type the text letters or special characters in a Draw document Remember to use a reasonable font size and font type to avoid unnecessary editing later 2 With the text object still selected choose the command Modify gt Convert to Curve The text is converted to a vector object that can be edited 3 Ifthe text consists of more than one character the characters will be displayed as a grouped object To edit a single character enter the group To do this use the Enter Group command in the context menu Ie of the group or press F3 Then click the character to be edited i Now click th
532. xe Fon dr eni eec m Gn daveb wn dta otis en nnd 112 Using Master Documents and Subdacirerits rius ee rere rrr ttr vare meer ER setas bua ebYSS 114 Importing Lists From Other Text PrOGEAMTIS eso reciente Ree viveneaistanvderssiasaahaetecstiaaasaoes 119 Changing N rsperins via the A segs RR ER PR EFIE EDAD UFU NOES 119 l terr ptiug abd Continuing NuinDermg eioe ceo eee rera cevariandacdeistanaiaceds EHE HR A dS 120 De MiB the automatice TST Leisten inorse Gr QR Ae raa aman RR S IERI 120 Fonnattne the a uode onis angel n toad cua euh gus iet eg Rut Hd 120 Continuing numbering with a new starting value ree etas ret eed RR nn pe x EHE ie 120 Numbe ng Les uio ien p pa UE REP ce i GG EEE E EE aa fa a EN AU d 121 Line Numbering for All Parasraplis ossis ee erar eesrd lupe ed enr ES do HavES RUF EP RE dU EE 121 Line N mbering Tor Particular Potapraplis uos assente eene eR RES IN ent ais 121 Tables a TERE renan reece ee ee een a E E e EH MUN ME 122 Dnsertie Tables enen Pec Ga p ord aia a Roda RN TEE FEN PV EARN RI 122 Inserting an empty table using the PROUBSC seen ien ore etie enr rs reta etre a Fora eer RIE n vERuS 122 Inserting an empty table via the Insert menu or floating toolbar 122 Inserting a single row table b Ir Eb RM act E o aq t RR RUD RR ERE 122 Inserting from OpenOffice org Calc with the clipboard eee 122 Inserting from OpenOffice org Calc using drag and drop
533. xt CSV as the file type when the input file uses a character to separate the fields tab in this example Importing into Calc v tH ti VH s Text Import ccpat txt pos arta et eaei aioe ENEMIES Cancel From row p o Came Separator options Help C Fixed width Separated by Iv Tab Comma Other Semicolon Space Merge delimiters Text delimiter Fields dsi 306 ERO II DNI IMS 9 1940 C P 5 ETANG ES 601506 1592100 LAPIERRE PATRICE 26 03 1940 C P 5 ETANG 3 601506 1000047 RENAUD ROLAND E 04 04 1941 1882 BOUL GUY 601506 1000054 GAUTREAU J MARIE 08 01 1945 6069 45E AV 601506 1000054 GAUTREAU J MARIE 08 01 1945 6069 45E 601506 1000054 GAUTREAU J MARIE 08 01 1943 6069 45E el we 601506 1000054 GAUTREAU J MARIE 08 01 1945 6069 45E AV v ey EOE R a TX OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 180 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Where the input file is in fixed width fields check the Fixed width box and set the column widths in the measurement bar as shown below Import Character set From row Separator options Fixed width C Separated by E mss Fields Column type Text Import CCPatient txt e Unicode UTF 8 E 1 Cancel Hep F LAPIERRE SIMONE F RENAUD ROLAND E J MARIE F BRIDEAU JACQUELI T 0n a p 1 z Exporting from Calc Usually one would simply use the Save as dialogue Other export option
534. xt menu or open the submenu of the Commands button 5 Choose Set as default template That is all that is needed The next time a new text document is opened the new document will correspond to the template defined as default in step 5 above Resetting Default Templates To reset the modified text template to the original default template proceed as follows 1 Select File gt Templates gt Organize 2 Open the context menu and choose Reset default template In the submenu select the document type to restore Thereafter when a user opens an empty text document it will again correspond to the OpenOffice org default template for text documents Using Custom Templates There are several ways to make work easier by using custom templates One of the most important is quick access to the templates Templates can be stored in different locations in OpenOffice org Opening a new document using a custom template will then differ accordingly OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 385 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques New templates saved using File gt Templates gt Save or by selecting the Template file type in the normal Save dialogue User templates are usually stored in the lt path_to gt openoffice org2 user template directory The template is made available anytime by selecting it in the New dialogue File gt New gt From Templates and Documents When the template is opened a new document will be created based on th
535. y Calc does this work automatically After inserting a new column A the formula SUM A1 B2 is updated to SUM B1 C2 Row numbers are also automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in Calc whenever the referenced area is moved But be careful when copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted but not any absolute references OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 202 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in the sheet For example if a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell the reference will also be moved down if the cell coordinates are not defined as absolute Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet Assume for example the formula SUM A1 A9 is entered in row 10 but the calculated sum must be in the adjacent column to the right In this case simply copy this formula to the cell to the right The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to SUM B1 B9 There are many methods to copy a formula one of which is 1 Select the cell containing the formula 2 Choose Edit gt Copy or press Ctr1 C to copy it 3 Select the cell into which the formula is to be copied
536. y been saved 1 If the samples from http www pathtech org OpenOffice org templates are installed choose File gt Open and open the Movie document from the spreadsheet samples 2 Change back to the new still almost empty spreadsheet Set the cursor in a free cell and enter an equals sign to begin a formula 3 Now switch to the document that has Moviel loaded Click cell C3 4 Switch back to the new spreadsheet In the calculation row notice that Calc has added the reference to the formula By way of example the following will now be located there In NIX file OpenOffice org share samples english spreadsheets Moviel sdc f movievisits C3 In Windows file C OpenOffice org share samples english spreadsheets Moviel sdc Smovievisits C3 5 Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark The reference to a cell of another document thus contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas then a hash then the name of the sheet in the other document followed by a point and the name of the cell there C3 OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 208 Chapter 4 Spreadsheets in Calc The name of the sheet automatically receives a leading dollar sign since the sheet has absolute addressing Examine the name of the other document in this formula and notice that it is written as a URL This means that a URL from the Internet can be entered too For example supposing there is an Internet page contain
537. y to place the graphic into the clipboard Bring the target document into focus Select the location for the graphic Right click to open the context menu and select Paste at the position where to insert a copy of the picture or use Ctrl V 9 If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted Copying Draw Objects into Other Documents In OpenOffice org it is possible to directly copy draw objects between text spreadsheets and presentation documents 1 Select the draw object or objects 2 Copy the draw object to the clipboard by using Ct r1 C or by right clicking to open the context menu and selecting Copy 3 Switch to the other document and place the cursor at which to insert the draw object OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 368 Chapter 9 Advanced Techniques 4 Insert the draw object at the target position by using Ct r1 V or use the Paste command from the context menu Inserting a Draw object in a text document E 5 E An inserted draw object is anchored in a text o E document at the current paragraph Anchors can be NI changes by selecting the object and clicking on the Change Anchor icon on the object bar This opens a popup menu that permits changing the possible types of anchor Page To Character As Character Tran Inserting a Draw object in a spreadsheet 7 An inserted draw object is anchored to a spreadsheet in the current cell Change the
538. y to the next in position orientation size and colour For example to create a stack of coins use the duplicate function First create the bottom coin by doing the following as shown in the graphic below 1 1 Draw an ellipse or circle at the bottom of the slide 2 2 Choose the Edit gt Duplicate command to open the Duplicate dialogue 3 3 Enter the following values Duplicate X Number of copies fi 3 Z d Placement Cancel X axis o 00cm Help Y axis 2 80cm z Default Angle o degrees Enlargement Width o 00cm E Height o 00cm A Colors a a Start 3 0 20 100 0 x s a End 3 0 0 56 0 x Follow these steps to create a stack of coins as shown on the right of the above graphic 1 Select 30 as the number of copies The x axis is the horizontal axis from left to right Entering positive values in the field for the x axis placement causes a shift to the right If the stack of coins should increase from the bottom up enter a negative value in the y direction vertical 2 To make the coins to become smaller the higher they get enter a negative value for the width and height OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 301 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings with Draw 3 Finally define a colour scheme from bottom to top Select for example a darker yellow for the beginning colour bottom and a lighter yellow colour for the end colour top 4 Click OK to create the duplicates ik e ia
539. your name or the name of your company et _ ___ What is the subject of your presentation 3 Specifies the topic of your 8 Enter additional text which that should appear in the presentation on page four OpenOffice org User Guide for 2 0 258 Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With Impress 9 Click Next The fifth and final page of the Wizard determines the number of the slides needed in the presentation A list of names of all the slides in the presentation is also presented If there are some slides to be removed from the presentation click the Page icon with the green check mark next to the name The check mark will disappear which indicates that that slide will not be included in the presentation To reverse this action click the page icon again wi AutoPilot Presentation New Product Intoduction Choose your pages A New Product Introduction Iv Ultimate Goal Iv Customer Needs Iv Fulfilling Customer Requirements Iv Cost Analysis M Pros and Cons M Next Steps of Action Iv Preview Create summary Hep Came Bak ite Eremel 10 Click the plus sign in front of a slide the headings from the first outline level will be shown 11 By checking the Create summary check box the Auto Pilot creates an additional last slide with a summary of all the titles of the previous slides in the presentation Normally this is not necessary since most templates already include su

OpenOffice.org User Guide - Department of Electrical Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents